GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.53

6F2S1890 (Rev. 0.
53)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Transformer Protection IED
GR200 series (GRT200)
GRT200---
S, G, and T positions
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
Notice: GRT200 manual is issued for ‘01A’, ‘01B’, or

‘01C’ software code, which you can identify at ’S, G,
and T positions’ on Software nameplate.
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read
and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
ii
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire (Short-bar)
Do not remove the short-wire/short-bar(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of cases.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire needs to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
iii
6F2S1890 (0.53)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When
disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems &
Solutions Corporation (Toshiba ESS, Japan).
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
Equipment installation and operation

•Equipment installation
Never remove cables at frame ground terminals (FGs) while the AC/DC power supplies.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
Protective conductor terminal
Caution, risk of electric shock
iv
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to make
technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2020.
All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
v
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1
Protection functions ...................................................................................................................... 4
Monitoring and metering functions ............................................................................................. 7
Hardware overview....................................................................................................................... 8
Symbols used in logical diagrams ................................................................................................ 9
Abbreviation................................................................................................................................ 13
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) .................................................. 15
2 Transformer replica functions ........................................................................................................... 17
Transformer replica function (REPLICA).................................................................................. 18
2.1.1 System configuration applicable ......................................................................................... 19
2.1.2 Protection of transformer classified in ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’ .............................................. 20
2.1.3 CTs connection in three-phase ............................................................................................ 20
2.1.4 CT connection in natural..................................................................................................... 22
2.1.5 Setting VCT secondary rating............................................................................................. 23
2.1.6 VT connection ...................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.7 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 26
2.1.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................ 27
Front-end processing function (FEP/FEP_COMMON) ............................................................. 28
3 Relay application ............................................................................................................................... 31
Current differential protection (DIF) ........................................................................................ 32
3.1.1 Relay characteristics ........................................................................................................... 34
3.1.2 CT ratio compensation ........................................................................................................ 37
3.1.3 Compensation of CT secondary currents ............................................................................ 40
3.1.4 Enhanced CT saturation countermeasure function (CTS) ................................................ 44
3.1.5 Decision for fault phases ..................................................................................................... 46
3.1.6 Differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV) ........................................................... 47
3.1.7 Settings and setting guidance ............................................................................................. 48
3.1.8 DIF scheme logic.................................................................................................................. 58
3.1.9 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 60
3.1.10 Data ID ................................................................................................................................ 61
Restricted earth fault protection (REF) ..................................................................................... 63
3.2.1 Element characteristics....................................................................................................... 64
3.2.2 Setting means ...................................................................................................................... 69
3.2.3 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................ 71
3.2.4 Settings list .......................................................................................................................... 74
3.2.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................ 76
Overcurrent protection (OC) ...................................................................................................... 78
3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC .................................................................................... 79
vi
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.2 Operate time characteristic ................................................................................................ 83

3.3.3 Reset time characteristics ................................................................................................... 85
3.3.4 Threshold value for activation ............................................................................................ 90
3.3.5 Reset Ratio ........................................................................................................................... 90
3.3.6 Miscellaneous functions ...................................................................................................... 91
3.3.7 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................ 92
3.3.8 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 94
3.3.9 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 102
Earth fault protection (EF) ...................................................................................................... 107
3.4.1 Non-directional and directional EF .................................................................................. 108
3.4.2 Operate time characteristic ...............................................................................................110
3.4.3 Reset time characteristics ..................................................................................................113
3.4.4 Threshold value for activation ...........................................................................................118
3.4.5 Reset Ratio ..........................................................................................................................118
3.4.6 Miscellaneous functions .....................................................................................................119
3.4.7 Scheme logic .......................................................................................................................119
3.4.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 122
3.4.9 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 132
Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn) ................................................................ 136
3.5.1 Operate time characteristic .............................................................................................. 137
3.5.2 Reset time characteristics ................................................................................................. 139
3.5.3 Threshold value for activation .......................................................................................... 144
3.5.4 Reset Ratio ......................................................................................................................... 144
3.5.5 Miscellaneous functions .................................................................................................... 145
3.5.6 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 145
3.5.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 148
3.5.8 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 152
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)................................................................... 154
3.6.1 Non-directional and directional OCN ............................................................................... 155
3.6.2 Threshold value ................................................................................................................. 158
3.6.3 Reset Ratio ......................................................................................................................... 158
3.6.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 159
3.6.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 160
3.6.7 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 169
Broken conductor protection (BCD) ......................................................................................... 171
3.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault ................................................................ 172
3.7.2 Characteristic and setting ................................................................................................. 173
vii
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.7.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 174

3.7.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 176
3.7.6 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 177
Thermal overload protection (THM) ........................................................................................ 179
3.8.1 Characteristic .................................................................................................................... 180
3.8.3 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 182
3.8.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 184
3.8.5 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 185
Inrush current detection function (ICD).................................................................................. 186
3.9.1 Inrush current ................................................................................................................... 187
3.9.2 Characteristic .................................................................................................................... 187
3.9.3 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 188
3.9.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 189
3.9.5 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 190
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) ................................................................................. 191
3.10.1 CBF features ...................................................................................................................... 192
3.10.2 Re-trip command ............................................................................................................... 192
3.10.3 Backup-trip command ....................................................................................................... 193
3.10.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 195
3.10.5 Combination of trip commands ......................................................................................... 196
3.10.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 197
3.10.1 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 200
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-ground (UV)................................................................. 206
3.11.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................. 207
3.11.2 Time characteristic ............................................................................................................ 207
3.11.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 210
3.11.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 212
3.11.6 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 215
UVS protection for GRT (UVS) ................................................................................................ 218
3.12.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................. 219
3.12.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 222
3.12.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 224
3.12.6 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 226
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV)................................................................... 229
3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic ................................................................................... 230
viii
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.13.2 Delay for the operation of OV element ............................................................................. 230

3.13.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 233
3.13.6 Setting list ......................................................................................................................... 235
3.13.7 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 238
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS) ................................................................... 241
3.14.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic ................................................................................... 242
3.14.2 Delay for the operation of the OVS element .................................................................... 242
3.14.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 246
3.14.6 Setting list ......................................................................................................................... 248
3.14.7 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 251
Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) ............................................................................... 254
3.15.1 Drop-off and pickup ........................................................................................................... 255
3.15.2 Definite time characteristic .............................................................................................. 255
3.15.3 Invers time delay (Dependent time characteristic).......................................................... 257
3.15.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 258
3.15.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 260
3.15.7 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 264
Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ) ......................................................................................... 266
3.16.1 FRQ features and characteristics ..................................................................................... 268
3.16.2 DFRQ features and characteristics .................................................................................. 271
3.16.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 273
3.16.4 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 279
Over-excitation protection (VPH)............................................................................................. 283
3.17.1 Characteristics................................................................................................................... 284
3.17.2 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 285
3.17.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 288
3.17.4 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 289
VT failure detection (VTF) ....................................................................................................... 290
3.18.1 Relay and decision ............................................................................................................. 291
3.18.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 291
3.18.3 Usage.................................................................................................................................. 292
3.18.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 294
3.18.5 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 295
Trip circuit (TRC)...................................................................................................................... 297
ix
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.19.1 Scheme switch ................................................................................................................... 298

3.19.2 Trip command scheme logic .............................................................................................. 298
3.19.3 General alarm scheme logic .............................................................................................. 301
3.19.4 Operated phase scheme logic ............................................................................................ 301
3.19.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 304
3.19.6 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 305
Mechanical trip protection (MECH) ........................................................................................ 307
3.20.1 Scheme switch ................................................................................................................... 308
3.20.2 Mechanical trip timer ........................................................................................................ 308
3.20.3 Mechanical trip command output ..................................................................................... 308
3.20.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 308
3.20.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 314
3.20.6 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 320
4 General control function .................................................................................................................. 326
Common controls (CMNCTRL) ................................................................................................ 327
4.1.1 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal ........................................................................................... 327
4.1.2 Provision of selected status ............................................................................................... 328
4.1.3 Miscellaneous settings ...................................................................................................... 328
4.1.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 330
4.1.5 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 331
Local, remote and PLC control................................................................................................. 333
4.2.1 Local control....................................................................................................................... 333
4.2.2 Remote control ................................................................................................................... 333
4.2.3 Programmable logic control (PLC) .................................................................................... 334
4.2.4 Signal for Local/Remote control ........................................................................................ 334
LED reset function (LEDR) ...................................................................................................... 335
4.3.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs .......................................................................................... 336
4.3.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode ................................................................................................. 338
4.3.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode ...................................................................................... 339
4.3.4 Settings in LED logics ....................................................................................................... 340
4.3.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication ............................................................................ 342
4.3.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 346
4.3.7 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 347
Mode control function (MDCTRL) ........................................................................................... 348
4.4.1 Function ............................................................................................................................. 348
4.4.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 353
4.4.4 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 354
Counter function for the general (GCNT)................................................................................ 356
x
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.1 Counter setting for a signal .............................................................................................. 357

4.5.2 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes ...................................................................................... 359
4.5.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode ................................................................................................ 363
4.5.4 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes..................................................................................... 365
4.5.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 373
4.5.7 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 374
5 Technical Description ...................................................................................................................... 377
IED case and module slot ......................................................................................................... 380
5.1.1 1/1 Case .............................................................................................................................. 380
5.1.2 3/4 case ............................................................................................................................... 382
5.1.3 1/2 case ............................................................................................................................... 383
5.1.4 1/3 case ............................................................................................................................... 384
Transformer module (VCT module) ......................................................................................... 388
5.2.1 VCT for GRT200 model 1 .................................................................................................. 388
5.2.2 VCT for GRT200 model 2 .................................................................................................. 389
5.2.3 VCT for GRT200 model 3 .................................................................................................. 390
5.2.4 VCT for GRT200 model 4 .................................................................................................. 391
5.2.5 VCT for GRT200 model 5 .................................................................................................. 392
5.2.6 Constitution of VCT........................................................................................................... 393
5.2.7 Setting VCT ratio .............................................................................................................. 395
5.2.8 Selection of rated current .................................................................................................. 397
Signal processing and communication modules (CPU)........................................................... 399
5.3.1 Communication modules ................................................................................................... 400
5.3.2 Location of communication modules ................................................................................. 401
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO) ...................................................................................... 403
5.4.1 Binary input feature.......................................................................................................... 404
5.4.2 Binary input circuit ........................................................................................................... 405
5.4.3 Binary output feature........................................................................................................ 414
5.4.4 Binary output circuit ......................................................................................................... 416
5.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module.......................................................................................... 422
5.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits ....................................................................................... 428
5.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits ........................................................................ 430
5.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits ..................................................................................... 433
5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits ...................................................................... 435
Power supply module (PWS) .................................................................................................... 437
Human Machine Interface (HMI) ............................................................................................ 440
5.6.1 Outlook ............................................................................................................................... 440
5.6.2 LED Indicators .................................................................................................................. 441
xi
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................. 446

5.6.4 Monitoring jacks ................................................................................................................ 451
5.6.5 Operation keys ................................................................................................................... 453
Clock function ........................................................................................................................... 454
5.7.1 Clock setting ...................................................................................................................... 454
5.7.2 Selection of date and time formats ................................................................................... 454
5.7.3 Time Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 455
5.7.4 Setting time zone ............................................................................................................... 459
5.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting).................................................................................. 460
5.7.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 462
Group setting for protection functions ..................................................................................... 463
6 Engineering tool ............................................................................................................................... 466
Overview of GR-TIEMS ............................................................................................................ 467
Connection ................................................................................................................................ 468
Common tools............................................................................................................................ 468
Monitoring tools ........................................................................................................................ 469
Record tools ............................................................................................................................... 469
Generic configuration tools ...................................................................................................... 469
IEC 61850 configuration tool ................................................................................................... 470
MIMIC configuration tool ......................................................................................................... 470
7 PLC function .................................................................................................................................... 471
Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................ 472
PLC data error .......................................................................................................................... 472
PLC driver................................................................................................................................. 473
8 Recording function ........................................................................................................................... 477
Fault recorder ........................................................................................................................... 478
8.1.1 Types of recording information ......................................................................................... 478
8.1.2 Screen information ............................................................................................................ 479
8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder ............................................................................................... 480
8.1.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 484
8.1.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 484
Event recorder .......................................................................................................................... 485
8.2.1 Trigger signals ................................................................................................................... 485
8.2.2 Trigger modes .................................................................................................................... 491
8.2.4 Setup for the event recorder ............................................................................................. 492
8.2.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 493
8.2.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 493
Disturbance recorder ................................................................................................................ 494
xii
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8.3.1 Recording time and amount .............................................................................................. 494

8.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder .................................................................................. 494
8.3.3 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena .............................................. 495
8.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder .................... 496
8.3.5 Trigger settings for PLC programming ............................................................................ 500
8.3.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 502
8.3.8 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 503
9 Monitoring function ......................................................................................................................... 504
Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 505
Metering data (Metering group) .............................................................................................. 505
9.2.1 Metering information on the screen ................................................................................. 507
9.2.2 Setting for measurements ................................................................................................. 507
9.2.3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero ............................................................... 508
Statistics data (Power value group) ......................................................................................... 509
9.3.1 Power information on the screen ...................................................................................... 509
9.3.2 Regulation of power values ............................................................................................... 509
Statistics data (Counter group)................................................................................................ 510
9.4.1 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature) ................................................................. 510
Statistics data (Accumulated time).......................................................................................... 510
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions....................................................................................511
Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 512
Data ID...................................................................................................................................... 513
10 Automatic supervision ................................................................................................................. 514
Outline of automatic supervision ............................................................................................. 515
Generic supervision tasks ........................................................................................................ 518
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error) ................................................... 519
10.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) ........................................................................................... 520
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) ..................................................................................... 521
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) .................................................................... 522
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) ........................................................................................ 523
10.2.6 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) ....................................................................... 524
10.2.7 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) ............................................................... 525
10.2.8 Supervision of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error) ...................................................... 526
10.2.9 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) .................................................................... 527
10.2.10 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error) ..................................................... 528
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) ................................................................... 529
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) ................................................................... 530
10.2.13 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) .......................................... 531
xiii
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) .............................................................. 532

10.2.15 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) ....................................................... 533
10.2.23 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) ................................................. 541
10.2.24 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)...................................................... 542
10.2.25 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)................................................. 543
10.2.26 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) .......................................................... 544
10.2.27 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error) ............................................... 545
10.2.28 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) ............................................. 546
10.2.29 Setting ............................................................................................................................ 547
10.2.30 Signal (Data ID) ............................................................................................................. 551
11 Communication protocol .............................................................................................................. 556
LAN communication ................................................................................................................. 557
11.1.1 Setup .................................................................................................................................. 557
11.1.2 Auto reset function ............................................................................................................ 565
11.1.3 Monitoring LAN communication ...................................................................................... 566
11.1.4 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 567
11.1.5 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 569
IEC 61850 communication ....................................................................................................... 571
11.2.1 About protocol .................................................................................................................... 573
11.2.2 Communication service ..................................................................................................... 575
11.2.3 How to manage engineering work .................................................................................... 578
11.2.4 Setting for IED .................................................................................................................. 594
11.2.5 How to supervise in 61850 communications .................................................................... 596
11.2.6 Quality signal in 61850 communication ........................................................................... 597
11.2.7 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication .......................................................... 598
11.2.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 600
11.2.9 Data ID .............................................................................................................................. 600
USB communication ................................................................................................................. 609
12 User interface ............................................................................................................................... 610
Outline .......................................................................................................................................611
HMI operation .......................................................................................................................... 615
Record sub-menu ...................................................................................................................... 618
xiv
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Monitoring sub-menu ............................................................................................................... 625

Setting sub-menu...................................................................................................................... 633
I/O setting sub-menu ................................................................................................................ 646
Time sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 653
Test sub-menu ........................................................................................................................... 661
Information sub-menu .............................................................................................................. 667
Security setting sub-menu .................................................................................................... 669
13 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 670
Caution for storage ................................................................................................................... 671
Handling precautions ............................................................................................................... 671
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software .................................................................. 672
PWS alarm threshold setting ................................................................................................... 676
Removing and installation of an inside module ...................................................................... 677
Rack mounting .......................................................................................................................... 683
Wiring work .............................................................................................................................. 687
Guide for optic cable work ........................................................................................................ 691
14 Commissioning and maintenance ............................................................................................... 693
Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 695
Preparations ............................................................................................................................. 695
Test operations .......................................................................................................................... 697
14.3.1 Test for relay application................................................................................................... 697
14.3.2 Test for BI and BO circuits................................................................................................ 698
14.3.3 Test for mode change (MDCTRL) ..................................................................................... 698
14.3.4 Signal monitor ................................................................................................................... 698
14.3.5 LED light test .................................................................................................................... 698
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function .................................................................................... 699
Appendix 2 Case outline .................................................................................................................... 707
Appendix 3 Typical external connection ........................................................................................... 716
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS ..................................................................... 724
Appendix 5 Ordering ......................................................................................................................... 778
Appendix 6 Technical data ................................................................................................................ 792
Appendix 7 Rack mounting ............................................................................................................... 804
Appendix 8 CT requirement ...............................................................................................................811
Appendix 9 PLC driver for relay application.................................................................................... 813
Appendix 10 Notes for the dielectric voltage test............................................................................... 817
xv
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1 Introduction
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 1 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The GRT200 (transformer protection relay) is based on the Toshiba GR-200 series IED platform. It
implements high-speed protection for both a transformer and a reactor, and has high dependability
and security for diverse faults such as single-phase faults, multi-phase faults, overload and over-
excitation. It is suitable to use as a main protection and backup protection of the following
transformers and reactors.
 Two-winding or three-winding power transformers
 Auto-transformers
 Generator-transformer unit
 Shunt reactor
The GRT200 is available for five models; the model is depends on inputting CT/VT construction as
showed in the Table 1.1-1
Table 1.1-1
Model Analog inputs Analog inputs Configuration
GRT200 Model
Ordering (VT/CT) symbol for table (example)
2 x three-phase CT 2CT/
Model 1 GRT200-1-*
1 x one-phase VT 1x1VT
3 x three-phase CT
3CT/
Model 2 GRT200-2-* 3 x zero-phase CT
1x1VT
1 x one-phase VT
3 x three-phase CT
3CT/
1x3VT
1 x three-phase VT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 2 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Model Analog inputs Analog inputs Configuration

GRT200 Model
Ordering (VT/CT) symbol for table (example)
4 x three-phase CT 4CT/ I1 I3
V
Model 4 GRT200-4-*
1 x one-phase VT 1x1VT
I2 I4
5 x three-phase CT
5CT/
2x3VT
2 x three-phase VT
The user can use mix of different current rating CTs, 1A/5A, for the GRT200 with appropriate setting.
The GRT200 could work even under the magnetizing inrush and over excitation current condition.
The GRT200 provides the following metering and recording functions.
 Metering
 Fault records
 Event records
 Disturbance records.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 3 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Protection functions
The GRT200 provides the following protection relay functions listed in the tables below.
Table 1.1-1 Protection Relay Functions
GRT200
Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

2CT/ 3CT/ 3CT/ 4CT/ 5CT/
1x 1VT 1x 1VT 1x 3VT 1x 1VT 2x 3VT
DIF DIF-S1-1/2/3
DIF-S2-1/2/3
√ √ √ √ √ Current differential protection
DIF-2f-1/2/3
DIF-5f-1/2/3
REF REF-P
Restricted earth fault
REF-S √ √ √
protection
REF-T
OC OC1-A/B/C
OC2-A/B/C
OC3-A/B/C
OC4-A/B/C
√ √ √ √ √ Overcurrent protection
OC5-A/B/C
OC6-A/B/C
OC7-A/B/C
OC8-A/B/C
EF EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
√ √ √ √ √ Earth fault protection
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
EFIn EFIn1
EFIn2 Earth fault protection with
√ √ √
EFIn3 neutral current
EFIn4
OCN OCN1
OCN2 Negative sequence
√ √ √ √ √
OCN3 overcurrent protection
OCN4
THM THM-A
√ √ √ √ √ Thermal overload protection
THM-T
BCD BCD-P √ √ √ √ √
BCD-S √ √ √ √ √ Broken conductor protection
BCD-T √ √ √ √
CBF OCCBF1-A/B/C √ √ √ √ √
OCCBF2-A/B/C √ √ √ √ √
Circuit breaker failure
OCCBF3-A/B/C √ √ √ √
protection
OCCBF4-A/B/C √ √
OCCBF5-A/B/C √
OV OV1-A/B/C
OV2-A/B/C Overvoltage protection for
√ √
OV3-A/B/C phase-to-neutral
OV4-A/B/C
OVG OVG1
OVG2 Earth fault overvoltage
√ √ √ √ √
OVG3 protection
OVG4
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 4 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 1.1-2 Protection Relay Functions

GRT200
Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

2CT/ 3CT/ 3CT/ 4CT/ 5CT/
1x 1VT 1x 1VT 1x 3VT 1x 1VT 2x 3VT
OVS OVS1-AB/BC/CA
OVS2-AB/BC/CA Overvoltage protection for
OVS3-AB/BC/CA √ √ phase-to-phase
OVS4-AB/BC/CA
UV UV1-A/B/C
UV2-A/B/C Undervoltage protection for
UV3-A/B/C √ √ phase-to-phase
UV4-A/B/C
UVS UVS1-AB/BC/CA
UVS2-AB/BC/CA √ √ Undervoltage protection for
UVS3-AB/BC/CA phase-earth
UVS4-AB/BC/CA
FRQ FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3 √ √ √ √ √ Frequency protection
FRQ4
FRQ5
FRQ6
VPH VPH-T
VPH-H √ √ √ √ √ Over-excitation protection
VPH-A
ICD ICD-P-A/B/C/OR √ √ √ √ √
Inrush current detection
ICD-S-A/B/C/OR √ √ √ √ √
function
ICD-T-A/B/C/OR √ √ √ √
VTF UVVTF-P-A/B/C
OVGVTF-P √ √
EFVTF-P
UVVTF-S-A/B/C
OVGVTF-S √ √ VT failure detection
EFVTF-S
UVVTF-T-A/B/C
OVGVTF-T √ √
EFVTF-T
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 5 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The DIF and the REF are the main protection functions of transformer. The DIF function
operates with DIF-S1, harmonic frequency protection for second (2F) and fifth (5F) and DIF-
S2. Figure 1.1-1 shows their protection coverage.
Operate time (t)
REF (Ie)
DIF-S1 with 2f-block
DIF-S2
0 Differential current (Id)

Large
Figure 1.1-1 Protection coverage of DIF, HOC and REF

REF: Protection for an earth fault at star-winding side
DIF-S1: Protection for all internal transformer faults
DIF-S2: Protection for all internal transformer faults, in particular heavy
internal faults requiring high-speed operations
1Note: The DIF-S1 can be blocked by 2F or 5F elements.
2Note: The DIF-S2 is not blocked by 2F or 5F elements.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 6 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Monitoring and metering functions

Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and
others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and
Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT and VT.
Fault record function:

Such function records the state of a fault when the trip command is issued. It also memorizes
the fault data. The user can see, with the IED screen, these data with additional information:
date & time, fault phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and
power system quantities.
Event record function:

The function provides recording feature that memorizes any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record function:

Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by
this function using GR-TIEMS.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 7 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Hardware overview
The IED has human machine interface (HMI), which is made of LCD screen, indication lights,
operation and function keys, monitoring jacks, and a USB connector. Voltage, current input
terminals, and binary input and output circuits are provided on the rear..
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for setting or viewing of stored data.
- LCD screen (7×21 characters), LED display, 7 function keys and operation keys
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
Module circuits and others:

- Binary input circuits and binary output circuits with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 8 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number
Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

A binary output (BO) circuit
A LED circuit
Like in the BO and LED circuits, it can also be connected or mapped to what follows:
A PLC connection point
The IEC 61850 logical node (LN) to send a signal for the SAS
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
Note that the user does not apply a PLC connection point straightforward when
functions (relays/control and monitoring) are operated on sub-CPU rather than main-
CPU. Thereby, an alternative connection point (PLC driver1/Input dummy2) is
provided in place of the PLC connection point. The user shall notice that the provision
of the alternative connection point is dependent upon the selection of the model.
1PLC driver is discussed in Chapter PLC function.
2Input dummy can be discussed in Appendix Input dummy for relay application.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Data ID and its name
Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS. The
reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 9 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 10 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 11 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 12 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LCP Local Panel for Controlling
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC Touchscreen operation configured by user’s program to operate control application
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation in the substation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RCC Remote Control Centre
SAS Substation Automation System
SC Station Computer
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 13 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
SyncSrc Synchronization Source
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
43 Selector device or selector switch
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 14 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID)

(i) Signal symbols
Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for protections,
controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits in
hexadecimal; each function ID represents each FB. Signal number (or Data ID) is the logical
address of the input and output data of the FB. The signal number (Data ID) consists of a
function ID and an element ID. The function ID is common within the FB; accordingly the
element ID will be shown to make description simple. The element ID is 10 hexadecimal and
it has the element ID name for easy to read. Figure 1.6-1 exemplifies the symbols, the function
ID, and the element ID. The table below shows the structure of the signal.
Function ID Element ID Note
Format (Hex) FFFFFF XXXXXXXXXX Content

Signal example 123456 80000xxxx0 XX relay in phase-A is operated.
Element ID
FB (Function ID=123456)
80000xxxx0 8000xxxxxx
A & ≥1 XX1_OPT
81000xxxx1
XX1 B &
82000xxxx2
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
8000011xxx0 XX_BLOCK 1
3. PLC connection point† 1. Relay element 2. Signal monitoring point

Figure 1.6-1 Example of symbols and others
†Note that a PLC connection point can be shown with the function ID (123456) plus
element ID (8000011xxx0) expressed in 16 delights in hexadecimal, in some scheme
logics. The ‘PLC connection point’ could be found to search the letter ‘E’ of element ID
(i.e., ‘8000011Exx0’).
(ii) Data length (bit length of Data ID)

The user can read data length of a Data ID by seeing the seventh and eighth number of the
Data ID. Table 1.6-1 shows examples of 1~32-bits data.
Table 1.6-1 How to identify a Data length by seeing Element ID
Data Example Example
Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
1-bit 400001 8000001B6F 8 (the beginning # of Element ID)
8-bits 400001 2000001B6F 20 (First and second # of Element ID)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 15 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Data Example Example

Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
32-bits 400001 4200001B6F 42 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 32
64-bits 400001 4300001B6F 43 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 64
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 16 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
2 Transformer replica functions
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 17 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Transformer replica function (REPLICA)

The replica function has parameters to adapt a transformer for the operation in various types
of power system configuration. It has settings for connections between a target transformer
and CTs/VTs on the VCT. Transformer capacity, winding configuration, and types of analog
input are also set in the common settings of the replica function. The replica function operates
to distribute the electrical data, which are commonly required in relay, recording, monitoring,
and supervision applications.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
– Main features ✓ ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 18 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
2.1.1 System configuration applicable

The below figures show examples of applicable system configurations connected with the two,
three, four, and five terminals in the transformer.
(A) P S (F) S
(D)
P
T
T
P S
(B) T
(G)
P S (E)
S
P S P
S
(C)
P
Two terminals Three terminals
Figure 2.1-1 Examples of system configurations with two and three terminals
(H) (J) (L)

S P S S
P P
(K)
(M)
(I) T S T
P
P S P S
Figure 2.1-2 Examples of system configurations with four and five windings
(i) Transformer rated capacity

The maximum three phase rated capacity [Tr-Capacity] should be selected form the rated
capacities of each transformer Primary/Secondary/Tertiary winding side.
Note: The compensation coefficients about CT ratio are calculated using the settings of
the DIF function (see Chapter Relay application: Current differential protection).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 19 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Transformer rated voltage

The rated phase-to-phase voltage of the transformer Primary/Secondary/Tertiary winding [Tr-
Vn_P], [Tr-Vn_S] and [Tr-Vn_T] should be selected respectively.
Note: The compensation coefficients about CT ratio are calculated using with the
settings of the DIF function.
2.1.2 Protection of transformer classified in ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’

The IEC60076-1(Power transformers-Part: General) standardizes the classifications by the use
of terms ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’1:
Model1 (for two winding transformer),
[VecGroupP-W] = Y or D
[VecGroupS-W] = Non or y or d
[VecGroupS-C] = either 0 to 11
Model22, Model3, Model4 and Model5 (For three winding transformer)

[VecGroupP-W] = Y or D: Primary winding vector group, default Y
[VecGroupS-W] = Non or y or d：Secondary winding vector group, default y
[VecGroupS-C] = either 0 to 11: Phase angle difference (clock position3) between the
Primary - Secondary winding, default 0
[VecGroupT-W] = Non or y or d：Tertiary winding vector group, default y
[VecGroupT-C] = either 0 to 11 : Phase angle difference (clock position3) between the
Primary – Tertiary windings, default 0
1Note: The ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’ depends on the choice of VCTs, which are categorized by
the ordering code at position ‘7’, which is illustrated in Appendix: Ordering.
2Note: ‘Model1’ & ‘Model2’ are not available in GRT200 series.
3Note: To specify phase angle difference (clock position), see Chapter Relay application:
Current differential protection (DIF): Setting phase matching. Use the settings
[VecGroupP/S/T-C].
2.1.3 CTs connection in three-phase

(i) Connections with target windings via VCT
Figure 2.1-3 illustrates the examples of CT connections with the target winding. The VCT
terminals named ‘1CT’ to ‘5CT’ should be connected using settings [Conn-1CT] and others; the
names are defined in as follows:
 1CT: First CTs in three-phase on the VCT
 2CT: Second CTs in three-phase on the VCT
 3CT: Third CTs in three-phase on the VCT
 4CT: Forth CTs in three-phase on the VCT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 20 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 5CT: Fifth CTs in three-phase on the VCT

VCT
1CT
T 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-2CT] = Secondary
3CT [Conn-3CT] = Secondary
P S [Conn-5CT] = No Use
4CT
5CT
VCT
1CT
P S 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-3CT] = Tertiary
3CT
[Conn-4CT] = Primary
T [Conn-5CT] = Secondary
4CT
5CT
Figure 2.1-3 Setting example for CT connection in three-phase
‘Zero ampere control’ feature is provided for the settings [Conn-1CT] to [Conn-5CT]; in
the following example, the VCT currents inputs on the 5CT are set zero (0) unconditionally so
as they are not used in the relay calculation.
VCT
1CT

4CT
5CT
Figure 2.1-4 Example of ‘Zero ampere control’ being applied at 5CT

Note: For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 21 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Types of current input

The user can select the type for entering currents into the VCT using setting [InType-CT];
either three-phase currents (3P) or two-phase currents (2P) can be chosen. Note that the
currents in phase-A and phase-C are allowed to connect with the VCT when 2P is selected; the
current in phase-B is not permitted for the connection. Additionally, when 2P is set, the vector
group for the winding transformer are only possible in Yy0, Dd0, Yy6, Dd6 in terms of phase
angle compensation.
(iii) CT polarity inversion

The inversion function of CT polarity is provided in 1CT and others using settings [Pol-1CT]
to [Pol-5CT]; therefore, the user need not change the wiring connected with the windings
physically. Positive should be set for the [Pol-1CT] when the currents are taken at 1CT in
positive direction. On the other hand, Negative should be set when the currents are taken in
negative direction.
VCT
1CT
I1 I4
[Pol-1CT] = Positive
2CT
P
3CT [Pol-3CT] = Negative
I3
[Pol-4CT] = Negative
S T 4CT
5CT
I2 I5
Figure 2.1-5 Example for setting CT polarity
2.1.4 CT connection in natural

(i) Connection with Target system
For the connection with neutral CTs, either Use or No use should be set for the [Conn-1NCT]
to [Conn-3NCT].
VCT
S
[Conn-1NCT] = Use
P T [Conn-2NCT] = Use
1NCT [Conn-3NCT] = Use
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.1-6 Example for setting neutral CT connections
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 22 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 2.1-6 illustrates that ‘1NCT’ to ‘3NCT’ are named for the definition:
 1NCT: Neutral CT at the primary side
 2NCT: Neutral CT at the secondary side
 3NCT: Neutral CT at the tertiary side
As for the operation using settings [Conn-1NCT] to [Conn-3NCT], ‘Zero ampere control’
feature is performed. For example in Figure 2.1-8, the VCT measures entering currents at
1NCT and 3NCT are set ‘zero(0)’ so that the measured values are removed in the relay
protection.
VCT
P S [Conn-1NCT] = No Use
[Conn-2NCT] = Use
1NCT [Conn-3NCT] = No Use
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.1-7 Example of zero ampere control being applied at 2NCT
(ii) CT polarity inverting

CT polarity in each neutral CT can be inverted using using settings [Pol-1NCT] to [Pol-3NCT].
Positive should be set when a neutral current enters to VCT in positive direction. Negative
should be set when the neutral current enters in negative direction.
VCT
P
[Pol-1NCT] = Positive
[Pol-2NCT] = Negative
S T
[Pol-3NCT] = Positive
1NCT
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.1-8 Example for setting neutral CT polarity
2.1.5 Setting VCT secondary rating

The VCT can have the combination between 1A and 5A ratings; the one can change the rating
combination in the procedures described in Chapter Technical description: Transformer
module for AC analog input.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 23 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
2.1.6 VT connection
(i) Connections with target transformer via VCT
The settings [Conn-1VT] and others are provided for the connection of VT(s) on the target
transformer.
VCT VCT
S
P VT VT VT
1VT
VT
P S
2VT
Model 5 (two sets of three-phase voltage)

Model 1† (one set of representative voltage) [Conn-1VT] = Primary
[Conn-VT] = Secondary [Conn-2VT] = Secondary
Figure 2.1-9 Example for setting VT connections

†Note: Model 1 is not available in GRT200 series.
(ii) Types of applying voltage

Applying voltages are classified as follows:
 Representative voltage model
[InType-VT]=
1PN: Single phase-to-earth voltage
1PP: Single phase-to-phase voltage
1N: Residual voltage
VCT
VT
P S Model 1†/2/4
[InType-VT] = 1PP
1 Ø VT
Figure 2.1-10 Setting example for representative voltage

†Note: Model 1 is not available in GRT200 series.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 24 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 Single three-phase voltage model

[InType-1VT]=
3PN: Three phase-to-earth voltage
3PP: Three phase-to-phase voltage
AB C
P S
VCT
Model 3
[InType-1VT] = 1N
1VT
Figure 2.1-11 Setting example for single three-phase voltage
 Double three-phase voltage model

[InType-1VT] and [InType-2VT]=
3PN: Three phase-to-earth voltage
3PP: Three phase-to-phase voltage
AB C VCT
Model 5 (two sets of three-phase voltage)

1VT
AB C [InType-1VT] = 3PN
S P [InType-2VT] = 1PN
3 Ø VT
2VT
1 Ø VT
Figure 2.1-12 Setting example for double three-phase voltage

Note: In three-phase voltage models, in case of 1PN/1PP/1N connection, it is necessary to
connect at phase-A VT, as shown in Figure 2.1-11 and Figure 2.1-12.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 25 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
2.1.7 Setting
Setting of REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)
Range Unit Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Setting device Contents
1A rating 5A rating s 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
VecGroupP-W Y/D - Transformer vector group (Primary) Y Y Y Y Y
VecGroupS-W Non / y / d - Transformer vector group (Secondary) y y y y y
VecGroupS-C 0 - 11 - 0 0 0 0 0
VecGroupT-W Non / y / d - Transformer vector group (Tertiary) (Non) y y y y
Tr parameters
VecGroupT-C 0 - 11 - (0) 0 0 0 0
Largest 3-phase transformer capacity
MV
Tr-Capacity 0.10 - 5000.00 within the rated capacity 1732.05 1732.05 1732.05 1732.05 1732.05
A
of each transformer winding
Transformer rated phase-to-phase
Tr-Vn-P 0.1 - 1000.0 kV 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0
voltage (Primary)
Tr-Vn-S 0.1 - 1000.0 kV 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0
voltage (Secondary)
Tr-Vn-T 0.1 - 1000.0 kV (500.0) 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0
voltage (Tertiary)
No use / Primary / Transformer winding equipped with
Conn-1CT - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Secondary / Tertiary the CT connected to the Relay 1CT
Conn-2CT - Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary
Conn-3CT - (No use) Tertiary Tertiary Tertiary Tertiary
Conn-4CT - (No use) (No use) (No use) Primary Primary
Conn-5CT - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) Secondary
InType-CT 2P / 3P - Type of current input for Relay CTs 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P
Pol-1CT Negative / Positive - 1CT Polarity Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive
CT
Pol-2CT Negative / Positive - 2CT Polarity Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive
Pol-3CT Negative / Positive - 3CT Polarity (Positive) Positive Positive Positive Positive
Pol-4CT Negative / Positive - 4CT Polarity (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) Positive Positive
Pol-5CT Negative / Positive - 5CT Polarity (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) Positive
Conn-1NCT No use / Use - Connection with Relay neutral 1CT (No use) Use Use (No use) Use
Pol-1NCT Negative / Positive - Neutral 1CT Polarity (Positive) Positive Positive (Positive) Positive
Range Unit Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)

1A rating 5A rating s 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
No use / Primary / Transformer winding equipped with the
Conn-VT - Primary Primary (Non) Primary (No use)
Secondary / Tertiary VT connected to the Relay VT
Conn-1VT - (No use) (No use) Primary (No use) Primary
Secondary / Tertiary VT connected to the Relay 1VT
VT Conn-2VT - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) Secondary
Secondary / Tertiary VT connected to the Relay 2VT
InType-VT 1PN / 1PP / 1N - Type of voltage input for Relay VT 1PP 1PP (1PP) 1PP (1PP)
1PN / 1PP / 1N /
InType-1VT - Type of Voltage input for Relay 1VT (3PN) (3PN) 3PN (3PN) 3PN
3PN / 3PP
1PN / 1PP / 1N /
InType-2VT - Type of Voltage input for Relay 2VT (3PN) (3PN) 3PN (3PN) 3PN
3PN / 3PP
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 26 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
2.1.8 Data ID
 Signal monitoring point
REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001B60 VEC_GROUP_P_Y Transformer vector group is Y (primary)
8100001B61 VEC_GROUP_P_D Transformer vector group is D (primary)
8000001B62 VEC_GROUP_S_N Transformer vector group no use (secondary)
8100001B63 VEC_GROUP_S_Y Transformer vector group is Y (secondary)
8200001B64 VEC_GROUP_S_D Transformer vector group is D (secondary)
8000001B65 VEC_GROUP_T_N Transformer vector group no use (tertiary)
8100001B66 VEC_GROUP_T_Y Transformer vector group is Y (tertiary)
8200001B67 VEC_GROUP_T_D Transformer vector group is D (tertiary)
8000101B60 CONN_1CT_N Transformer winding connected to Relay 1CT no use
8100101B61 CONN_1CT_P Transformer primary winding connected to Relay 1CT
8200101B62 CONN_1CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 1CT
8300101B63 CONN_1CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 1CT
8200101B6A CONN_3CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 3CT
8300101B6B CONN_3CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 3CT
8000101B6C CONN_4CT_N Transformer winding connected to Relay 4CT no use
8100101B6D CONN_4CT_P Transformer primary winding connected to Relay 4CT
8200101B6E CONN_4CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 4CT
8300101B6F CONN_4CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 4CT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 27 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Front-end processing function (FEP/FEP_COMMON)

The front end processing (FEP) function collects electrical quantities data measured on the
VCT. After the data collection in FEP function, the FEP_COMMON function generates
electrical quantity data in accordance with the instruction of the replica function; the data are
distributed for respective applications such as protection, monitoring, recording and
supervision application. Figure 2.2-1 shows the mutual operations between the FEP and
FEP_COMMON functions.
FEP operation (FEP1) for the TP_FEP_COMMON
VCT located at VC1 slot. Calculation of Sum CT, CT Polarity，Delta,
P/N/Z Phase Currnt for EA.CT and V/I of EA.
Tr winding
Setting Output Setting Output

EA. AI_ch; EA. AI_ch; 1W-IY_1,2,3
･CT Ratio Electrical data 1W-IΔ_1,2,3,

1W-I1
･ CT secondary -for Input
1W-I2
rating measurement VCT#1_CH3 …ia1
1W-I0
-for Protect VCT#1_CH4 …ib1
1W-VY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH5 …ic1
-for log 1W-VΔ_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH6 …ia2
-Full scale 1W-V1
VCT#1_CH7 …ib2
Input 1W-V2
-CT secondary VCT#1_CH8 …ic2
VCT#1_CH9 …ia3 1W-V0
rating
VCT#1_CH10 …ib3 2W-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH11 …ic3 2W-IΔ_1,2,3

VCT#2_CH9 …ia4 2W-I1
VCT#2_CH10 …ib4 2W-I2
VCT#2_CH11 …ic4 2W-I0
VCT#2_CH12 …ia5 2W-VY_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH13 …ib5 2W-VΔ_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH14 …ic5
2W-V1
VCT#1_CH12 …in1
2W-V2
VCT#1_CH13 …in2
FEP operation (FEP2) for the 2W-V0
VCT#1_CH14 …in3
VCT located at VC2 slot. 3W-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH1 …v
3W-IΔ_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH1 …va1
3W-I1
VCT#2_CH2 …vb1
VCT#2_CH3 …vc1 3W-I2
VCT#2_CH5 …va2 3W-I0

Setting Output VCT#2_CH6 …vb2 3W-VY_1,2,3
EA. AI_ch; EA. AI_ch; VCT#2_CH7 …vc2 3W-VΔ_1,2,3
(VCT#1;Type44, 3W-V1
･CT Ratio Electrical data
VCT#2; Type47 or 48)
3W-V2
･ CT secondary -for
Below case; re-connect by 3W-V0
rating measurement
config file Type-VT_P，S，T
-for Protect -Model 4 (4CT+rep.V)
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N)
VCT#1_CH12 …ia4
-for log 1CT-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH13 …ib4
-Full scale 1CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
VCT#1_CH14 …ic4
Input 1CT-I1
-CT secondary -Model 1 (2CT+rep.V)
VCT#1;Type46 1CT-I2
rating
VCT#1_CH1 …v 1CT-I0
VCT#1_CH4 …ia1 2CT-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH5 …ib1 2CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
VCT#1_CH6 …ic1 2CT-I1
VCT#1_CH7 …ia2 2CT-I2
VCT#1_CH8 …ib2
2CT-I0
VCT#1_CH9 …ic2
3CT-IY_1,2,3
Conn-1CT (Non/Primary/ 3CT-IΔ_1,2,3,

Secondary / Tertiary) 3CT-I1
Conn-2CT (N/P/S/T) 3CT-I2
Conn-3CT (N/P/S/T)
3CT-I0
Conn-4CT (N/P/S/T)
Conn-5CT (N/P/S/T) 4CT-IY_1,2,3
Pol-1CT(Negative/Positive) 4CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
Pol-2CT(Negative/Positive) 4CT-I1
Pol-5CT(Negative/Positive) 5CT-IY_1,2,3
Conn-0VT (Non/Primary/
5CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
Secondary / Tertiary)
5CT-I1
Conn-1VT (N/P/S/T)
5CT-I2
Conn-2VT (N/P/S/T)
5CT-I0
InType-0VT
(1PN/1PP/1N) 1CTn
InType-1VT 2CTn
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N) 3CTn
InType-2VT
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N)
Figure 2.2-1 Example function configuration
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 28 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(i) Inputs to the replica function

 Analog inputs measured using each relay VT/CT
 CT ratios for each CT/VT
 Relay CT ratings (1A or 5A) for each CT/VT
 Replica settings
(ii) Outputs from the replica function

 Data of each transformer winding (after vector summation at
Primary/Secondary/Tertiary side and CT polarity compensation)
Primary (similar outputs for Secondary and Tertiary)
o Analog inputs (Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P, Iab-P, Ibc-P, Ica-P, I1-P, I2-P, I0-P, Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-
P, V2-P, V0-P)
 Data of each CT (after CT polarity compensation)
1CT (similar outputs for 2CT, 3CT, 4CT, 5CT, 1NCT, 2NCT and 3NCT)
o Analog inputs (Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT, Iab-1CT, Ibc-1CT, Ica-1CT, I1-1CT, I2-
1CT, I0-1CT)
 CT ratios
 Relay CT ratings (1A or 5A)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 29 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
VCT
1CT

4CT
5CT
VCT
1CT
P S 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-3CT] = Tertiary
3CT
[Conn-4CT] = Primary
T [Conn-5CT] = Secondary
4CT
5CT
𝑰𝒂 − 𝑷 = 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟏𝑪𝑻 + 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟒𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒃 − 𝑷 = 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟏𝑪𝑻 + 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟒𝑪𝑻
1CT
𝑰𝒄 − 𝑷 = 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟏𝑪𝑻 + 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟒𝑪𝑻
P S
2CT 𝑰𝒂 − 𝑺 = 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟐𝑪𝑻
4CT T
𝑰𝒃 − 𝑺 = 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟐𝑪𝑻
3CT 𝑰𝒄 − 𝑺 = 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟐𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒂 − 𝑻 = 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟑𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒃 − 𝑻 = 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟑𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒄 − 𝑻 = 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟑𝑪𝑻
Figure 2.2-2 Example for relationship between data of each transformer winding and each CT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 30 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3 Relay application
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 31 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Current differential protection (DIF)

Current differential protection (DIF) provides fast and selective main protection for two-
winding and three-winding power transformers, auto-transformers and generator-transformer
units. This protection requires no interposing CTs and provides stability against magnetizing
inrush, overexcitation and CT saturation. Up to five phase current inputs whose ratings are a
combination of 1A / 5A can also be connected. The DIF calculates differential currents per
phase and has the capability to detect internal phase-to-phase faults, phase-to-earth faults
and turn-to-turn faults occurring in a power transformer.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 32 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The DIF calculation is based on Kirchhoff ’s law, that is, the vector summation of all
currents flowing into a protected zone must be zero. Figure 3.1-1 illustrates the DIF protection
principle. Differential current (id) is the vector summation of all currents measured at the
relevant CTs. Since current values at the transformer primary side (i1) equal current values
at the transformer secondary side (−i2) under normal or external fault conditions, the
differential currents (id=i1+i2) are zero. On the other hand, in the event of the occurrence of
an internal fault, the differential currents (id) are not zero since current values at the
transformer primary side (i1) are not equal to current values at the transformer secondary side
(−i2), and DIF will operate accordingly.
Primary Secondary
I1 I2
Transformer
i1 i2
id=i1+i2
Differential
current detection DIF
Figure 3.1-1 DIF protection principle
The DIF comprises protection relay elements that operate for differential currents per
phase such as a segregated-phase-current differential relay element (S1), a second-harmonic
detection element (2F), a fifth-harmonic detection element (5F), an enhanced CT saturation
countermeasure element (CTS) and a high-set overcurrent differential relay element (S2).
Consequently, the DIF can initiate a trip signal based upon the operation decision of these
elements.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 33 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.1 Relay characteristics

This section describes the characteristics for S1, 2F, 5F and S2 respectively. The settings for
these relay elements are described in detail later. (See 3.1.7)
(i) S1 characteristic
The S1 is used to detect all internal faults within a protection zone for a transformer. As
illustrated in Figure 3.1-2, S1 is a percentage-restraining element and it has dual slope
characteristics: the first slope is a weak restraint characteristic (DIF-S1-I1) in small
percentage-of-error current region, the second one is a strong restraint characteristic (DIF-S1-
I2) in large percentage-of-error current region.
Figure 3.1-2 illustrates the DIF_S1-I1 and the DIF-S1-I2 together with a differential
current (Id) and a restraining current (Ir): The Id is a vector summation of all of the phase
currents measured at the relevant CTs; the Ir is the scalar summation of all of the phase
currents.
Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
Id
[DIF-S1-I1]
[DIF-S1-I1] [DIF-S1-I2] Ir
Figure 3.1-2 DIF characteristic
Assuming that an external fault occurs outside the DIF protection zone, high through-
fault currents might cause incorrect operation of the S1 due to CT tolerance. Hence, the DIF-
S1-I2 provides the margin to potential incorrect operations in the large current region and the
S1 has the stability against external faults generating a high-through fault current. Although
high fault currents flow in the event of the occurrence of an internal fault, the highset element
(S2) can clear the fault promptly. Incidentally, CT saturation might occur in the event of the
occurrence of a heavy external fault. In addition to DIF-S1-I2, the DIF also provides CTS as
the countermeasure. (See 3.1.4)
As illustrated in the Figure 3.1-2, the DIF-S1-I1 has a weak restraint characteristic and
hence ensures sensitivity to low-current level faults; the DIF-S1-I1 is expressed using the
following equation:
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 34 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
𝐼𝑑 > [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒1] ∙ 𝐼𝑟 + (1 − [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒1])

(3.1-1)
∙ [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝐼1 ]
where,
DIF-S1-Slope1: Small current slope
DIF-S1-I1: Minimum operating current
The Id and Ir are expressed using the following equations:

𝐼𝑑 = |𝑘𝑐𝑡1 ∙ 𝐼1 + 𝑘𝑐𝑡2 ∙ 𝐼2 + 𝑘𝑐𝑡3 ∙ 𝐼3 + 𝑘𝑐𝑡4 ∙ 𝐼4 + 𝑘𝑐𝑡5 ∙ 𝐼5 | (3.1-2)
𝐼𝑟 = 𝑘𝑐𝑡1 ∙ |𝐼1 | + 𝑘𝑐𝑡2 ∙ |𝐼2 | + 𝑘𝑐𝑡3 ∙ |𝐼3 | + 𝑘𝑐𝑡4 ∙ |𝐼4 | + 𝑘𝑐𝑡5 ∙ |𝐼5 | (3.1-3)
where,
kct1: Coefficient1 for CT ratio compensation on Group 1 phase current inputs;
I1: Phase compensated current2 derived from CT for Group 1;
I5: Phase compensated current2 derived from CT for Group 5.
1Note: The details with regard to CT ratio compensation are described in 3.1.2
and 3.1.2(ii).
2Note: The details with regard to vector group compensation are described in
3.1.2 and 3.1.2(ii).
The DIF-S1-I2 characteristic has a strong restraint characteristic and hence, has less
probability for a possible incorrect operation in the DIF when high fault currents saturate
relevant CTs during an external fault. The DIF-S1-I2 characteristic is expressed using the
following equation:
𝐼𝑑 > [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒2] ∙ 𝐼𝑟 + ([𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒1] − [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒2])

(3.1-4)
∙ [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝐼2 ] + (1 − [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒1]) ∙ [𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆1 − 𝐼1 ]
where,
DIF-S1-Slope2: Large current slope
DIF-S1-I2: Knee point located between the area ‘Slope1’ and the area ‘Slope2’
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 35 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) 2F and 5F characteristic

Inrush currents include several harmonic components and appear in the events like, (1)
energizing the transformer after a previous period of de-energization, (2) the voltage returns
to normal after a fault clearance and (3) a nearby transformer is energized. Although the
inrush currents might cause the incorrect operation in the S1, this can be prevented with the
detection of the harmonic components included in inrush currents. The 2F capable of
determining the occurrence of the second-harmonic component in accordance with the
sensitivity setting is used to detect inrush currents.
Magnetizing currents appear in the event when a power transformer is overexcited and
which might cause the incorrect operation of S1. The 5F capable of determining the occurrence
of the fifth-harmonic component in accordance with the sensitivity setting is used to detect
overexcitation. The fifth-harmonic component can be used for the detection rather than third-
harmonic component because a power transformer with delta-windings eliminates the third
harmonic component.
(iii) High-set characteristic (S2)

The S2 is a high-set overcurrent differential relay element, which has the capability to protect
a transformer against the damage, possibly caused by a heavy internal fault. It provides high-
speed protection in the event of the occurrence of a heavy internal fault. The S2 is expressed
using the following equation:
𝐼𝑑 > 𝐷𝐼𝐹 − 𝑆2 − 𝐼 (3.1-5)

where,
DIF-S2-I: Sensitivity for S2.
The S2 element is unrestrained and is not affected by 2F and 5F harmonic block.
Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
Id
[DIF-S2-I]
[DIF-S1-I1]
Figure 3.1-3 Highset characteristic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 36 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.2 CT ratio compensation

(i) Equations and settings
Differential current Id is determined using Equation (3.1-2) and Id becomes zero in theory
except in the event of the occurrence of an internal fault. In order to achieve it, all the phase
compensated currents must be compensated with CT ratio, taking into account rated secondary
currents and secondary base currents for Group 1 to 5. The coefficients for CT ratio
compensation are automatically calculated in GRT200 using the following equations:
𝐼𝑛1
kct1 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-6)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒1
𝐼𝑛2
kct2 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-7)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒2
𝐼𝑛3
kct3 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-8)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒3
𝐼𝑛4
kct4 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-9)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒4
𝐼𝑛5
kct5 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-10)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒5
where,
In1 to In5: Rated secondary current settings for Group 1 to 5 (1A or 5A);
Ibase1 to Ibase5: Secondary base currents for Group 1 to 5.
Ibase1 to Ibase5 are determined using the following equations with the settings for the
transformer capacity, the rated voltage and phase-CT ratios i.e. [1CT Ratio] to [5CT Ratio]1:
T𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 (𝑀𝑉𝐴)
𝐼𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒1 =
√3 × R𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 (𝑘𝑉) × [1CT Ratio]
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 37 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1Note: The user can set the [1CT Ratio] to [5CT Ratio] using settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio].
For more information for the settings VCT ratio using the [ AI*_Ch*_Ratio], see
Chapter Technical description: Transformer module: Setting VCT ratio
(ii) CT ratio compensation example

When taking the transformer shown in Figure 3.1-4, as an example, the CT ratio compensation
settings, kct1, kct2, and kct3 can be calculated as follows. For transformer capacity, take the
maximum one from the rated capacity of the three windings.
Primary Secondary
1CT 40MVA 40MVA 2CT
300/5 154kV 66kV 600/5
A B
3CT
1200/5
Tertiary
12MVA
11kV
kct1 kct3 kct2

IED
Figure 3.1-4 Example of CT ratio compensation
Calculation steps, for example, are discussed in Table 3.1-2, but the calculation is made
automatically in the DIF. Thus, the setting values at step 1, 2, 3, and 6 in Table 3.1-2 are
required in the CT ratio compensation.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 38 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.1-2 Setting terms and points for CT ratio compensation

Primary / 1CT Secondary / 2CT Tertiary / 3CT
Step Calculation steps Unit Equation
[Setting point] [Setting point] [Setting point]
Transformer 40.00
1 MVA —
capacity (a) [Tr-Capacity]
154.0 66.0 11.0
2 Voltage (b) kV —
[Tr-Vn-P] [Tr-Vn-S] [Tr-Vn-T]
Rated line current
3 A a ∕ (b×√3) 150 350 2100
(c)
60.000 120.000 240.000
4 CT ratio (d) — —
Settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio]1
Secondary rated
5 A c∕d 2.50 2.92 8.75
line current (e)
CT secondary 5 5 5
6 A —
rating (f) Settings [AI*_Ch*_Rating]2
7 kct3 — f∕e kct1=2.00 kct2=1.71 kct3=0.57
1Note: Settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio] regarding the 1CT/2CT/3CT are discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module: Setting VCT ratio.
2Note: Settings [AI*_Ch*_Rating] regarding the 1CT/2CT/3CTare discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module: Selection of rated current.
3Note: The user should ensure that the difference between CT rating and the nominal
current rating of the protected windings is not large (kct should be <8).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 39 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.3 Compensation of CT secondary currents

GRT200 provides a built-in function on compensation of CT secondary currents so that DIF
can be calculated correctly. The compensation of CT secondary currents consists of CT polarity
compensation, phase compensation / zero-sequence current elimination and CT ratio
compensation per current input group as illustrated in Figure 3.1-5.
I1 I4
CT ratio: N1 CT ratio: N4
(*1) (*4)
(*3)
CT ratio: N3
(*2) (*5)
I3
CT ratio: N2 CT ratio: N5
I2 I5
(*1) (*2) (*3) (*4) (*5)

I1/N1 I2/N2 I3/N3 I4/N4 I5/N5
=i1 =i2 =i3 =i4 =i5
GRT200
CT polarity compensation … CT polarity compensation
Phase compensation /
Zero-sequence current … Phase compensation /
Zero-sequence current
elimination elimination
…
…
CT ratio compensation CT ratio compensation
kct1i1 kct5i5
DIF calculation
Figure 3.1-5 Compensation of CT secondary currents
(i) CT polarity compensation

CT polarity compensation is done in the FEP-common function block (For details, Refer FEP-
common function block in Replica setting).
(ii) Phase compensation

GRT200 integrates a phase compensation function for all groups of phase currents in
accordance with a target transformer configuration. Phase currents, fed from corresponding
CTs connected to a star-winding side and a delta-winding side, are compensated respectively
as follows:
-Star-winding side: each compensated current is calculated by means of taking away the
zero-sequence current from each phase current. This means that phase angle compensation is
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 40 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
not performed at the star-winding side.
-Delta-winding side: each phase-to-phase current is calculated using two phase currents
respectively. Phase angle compensation is performed on the delta winding side.
An example of vector diagram for phase compensation in a Yd11 transformer is

illustrated in Figure 3.1-6. The phase compensation formulas for both star-winding side and
delta-winding side are shown in (3.1-11) to (3.1-13). The description on the transformer
configuration settings is explained in 3.1.7(vi).
IYa Ia
IY1 I1 Ib
IYc IYb Ic
Figure 3.1-6 Example of vector diagram for phase compensation in Yd11
̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑏
2𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑐
̇ ̇ − 𝐼∆𝑐
𝐼∆𝑎 ̇
̇ =
𝐼𝑌1 , ̇ =
𝐼Δ1 (3.1-11)
3 √3
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑐
2𝐼Y𝑏 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
̇ ̇ − 𝐼∆𝑎
𝐼∆𝑏 ̇
̇ =
𝐼𝑌2 , ̇ =
𝐼Δ2 (3.1-12)
3 √3
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
2𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑏
̇ ̇ − 𝐼∆𝑏
𝐼∆𝑐 ̇
̇ =
𝐼Y3 , ̇ =
𝐼Δ3 (3.1-13)
3 √3
where,
IY1, IY2, IY3: Phase compensated currents at star-winding side
IYa, IYb, IYc: Phase currents connected to star-winding side
IΔ1, IΔ2, IΔ3: Phase compensated currents at delta-winding side
IΔa, IΔb, IΔc: Phase currents connected to delta-winding side
Further, for the calculation of the differential current, zero-sequence current is

eliminated from the input current (IY) using equations (3.1-14) to (3.1-16):
̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑏
2𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑐
̇ ̇ − (𝐼𝑌𝑏
3𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ + 𝐼𝑌𝑐
̇ + 𝐼𝑌𝑎
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝑌1 = ̇ − 𝐼𝑌0
= 𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ (3.1-14)
3 3
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑐
2𝐼Y𝑏 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
̇ ̇ − (𝐼Y𝑐
3𝐼Y𝑏 ̇ + 𝐼Y𝑎
̇ +𝐼Y𝑏
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝑌2 = ̇ − 𝐼𝑌0
= 𝐼𝑌𝑏 ̇ (3.1-15)
3 3
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 41 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
2𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑏
̇ ̇ − (𝐼Y𝑎
3𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ + 𝐼Y𝑏
̇ + 𝐼Y𝑐
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼Y3 = ̇ − 𝐼Y0
= 𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ (3.1-16)
3 3
(iii) Zero-sequence current elimination

In order to prevent incorrect operations of DIF against an external earth fault, zero-sequence
current at star-winding side of a transformer needs to be eliminated in the process of the
compensation of CT secondary currents as described in the following Case 1.
Case 1: Zero-sequence current flows at the star-winding side of a transformer in the event
that an external fault occurs at the start-winding side as illustrated in Figure 3.1-7.
On the other hand, zero-sequence current circulates within the delta-winding and is
not measured at the delta-winding side CTs. As a result, the zero-sequence current at
star-winding side appears as a differential current.
I0 Transformer Ia
I0
I0
I0 Ib
II0
I0
Ic
3I
0
DIF
Figure 3.1-7 External earth fault at start-winding side
Zero-sequence current also needs to be eliminated at delta-winding side assuming the

following Case 2.
Case 2: Figure 3.1-8 illustrates that the delta-winding side of a transformer is earthed with
an in-zone earthing transformer. In the event that an external earth fault occurs at
the delta-winding side, the zero-sequence current is only measured at the delta-
winding side CTs, and it appears as a differential current.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 42 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Ia
I0
Ib
I0
Ic
I0
Earthing
Transformer
3I 0
DIF
Figure 3.1-8 External earth fault at delta-winding side with in-zone earthing transformer
Zero-sequence currents at both star-winding and delta-winding of a target transformer

is eliminated in the process of the aforementioned phase compensation shown in the preceding
equations (3.1-14) and (3.1-16). Thus, GRT200 has no risk of DIF incorrect operations for both
cases.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 43 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.4 Enhanced CT saturation countermeasure function (CTS)

As described earlier, S1 has the strong restraint characteristic DIF-S1-I2 which has stability
against CT tolerance. Furthermore, the S1 also provides another enhanced CT saturation
countermeasure element (CTS). The CTS can operate securely for a high through-fault current
during a heavy external fault and has the capability to detect CT saturation.
A CT saturated current waveform has two distinguishable periods within a cycle: a non-
saturated period and a saturated period. The CTS uses these periods to detect CT saturation
correctly.
DIF Logic
Differential operation
&
Starting
Element (SE) 0 t
&
& & 1
Waveform Discriminating
Element (WDE)
[DIF-CTSat] On
＋
Trigger activated
Evolving fault detection

0 t 1
element (EVD)
Off-delayTimer：
1 cycle CT Saturation detection function (CTS)
Figure 3.1-9 CTS block diagram
Figure 3.1-9 shows the CTS block diagram consisting of a waveform discriminating
element (WDE), a starting element (SE) and the evolving fault detection element (EVD).
The WDE operates if instantaneous differential current changes to less than a specified
percentage of instantaneous restraining current; the WDE operates during the CT being in
non-saturation. The differential current is zero theoretically during the non-saturation period
within a heavy through-fault current waveform.
The SE discriminates between healthy conditions and unhealthy conditions in a power

system; the SE blocks the WDE output when the power system is under healthy conditions.
The CTS algorithm is given using the following equations:

ΔId < 0.15 × (ΔIp + ΔIn) (3.1-6)
ΔId = |𝐼𝑑(𝑚) − 𝐼𝑑(𝑚−1) | + |𝐼𝑑(𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝑑(𝑚−2) | (3.1-7)
ΔIp + ΔIn = |𝐼𝑝(𝑚) − 𝐼𝑝(𝑚−1) | + |𝐼𝑝(𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝑝(𝑚−2) |
(3.1-8)
+ |𝐼𝑛(𝑚) − 𝐼𝑛(𝑚−1) | + |𝐼𝑛(𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝑛(𝑚−2) |
where,
ΔId: Change in the differential current Id
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 44 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
ΔIp + ΔIn: Change in the restraining current in positive and negative cycles
Id: Differential current
Ip: Sum of positive input currents
In: Sum of negative input currents
m, m-1, m-2: Sampling timing.
Figure 3.1-10 shows CT-secondary-current waveforms with the CT saturation in the

event of the occurrence of a heavy external fault: (a) current measured at the incoming
terminal, (b) current measured at the outgoing terminal and (c) differential current (Id)
subtracted (b) from (a).
a. Incoming current
b. Outgoing current
c. Differential current
No change period
Figure 3.1-10 CT Secondary Current Waveforms and Differential Current for a heavy external
Fault with CT Saturation
As long as the CT keeps unsaturation, both Id and ΔId are zero. However, when the
change determined by the Equation (3.1-8) becomes a large positive value sufficiently, the
Equation (3.1-6) holds and the WDE operates accordingly. The SE operates instantly in the
event that the SE detects the Id. As a result, the SE and the WDE make an AND output.
In contrast, in the event of the occurrence of a heavy internal fault, CT saturation makes
the ΔId small. WDE does not operate, because the change in restraining current is also small
during this period. As a result, the DIF operation is correctly unblocked during a heavy
internal fault.
The EVD operates when an external fault progresses into an internal fault. The EVD
unblocks the blocking by WDE and SE elements, thus ensuring correct operation for external
faults progressing into internal fault.
The CTS includes a scheme switch [DIF-CTSat] to enable or disable the CTS.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 45 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.5 Decision for fault phases

Decision for fault phases function is a useful feature of GRT200, which provides information
for testing. The feature helps the operator in assessing the severity of the fault and the
associated phase. The decision for faulted phase is based on the threshold settings for the
maximum differential current (Id) and maximum winding currents (Ip, Is, It).
The fault phase function is enabled with scheme switch [Phase Mode] to ‘Fault phases’.
Figure 3.1-11 shows the scheme logic of fault phase function.
8C00001B7C
DIF-OPT-1 ≥1 DIF-OPT-A
&
8D00001B7D
DIF-OPT-2 & ≥1 DIF-OPT-B
8E 00001B7E
DIF-OPT-3 & t DIF-OPT-C
≥1
& Decision for
& fault phases
Phase Mode
Operating phases & t
Fault phases
8000801C23
1
Max. Id 8100801C27
2
phases 8200801C2B
3 C
Y
8000901C23 VecGroupP-W
D
A
Max. Ip 8100901C27
B
phases 8200901C2B Y
C VecGroupS-W
D
8000A01C23
A
Max. Is 8100A01C27 Y
B VecGroupT-W
phases 8200A01C2B D
C C
8000B01C23
A
Max. It 8100B01C27
B
phases 8200B01C2B
C
Figure 3.1-11 Decision for fault phases
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 46 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.6 Differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV)

(i) Equation and setting
The differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV) is provided to supervise the health of
the CT circuit. The DIF-SV detects the erroneous differential current that appears in the case
of a CT circuit failure. The DIF-SV is expressed using the following equation;
𝐼𝑑 > 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [DIF-Slope1] ∙ 𝐼𝑟 + (1 − 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [DIF-Slope1]) ∙ 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [DIF-IDSV]) (3.1-9)
he DIF-SV has a non-restraint current characteristic as shown below.

Id Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
IDSV operate
[DIF-S1-I1]
[DIF-IDSV]
Figure 3.1-12 DIF-SV characteristic
(ii) DIF-SV scheme logic

If the DIF-SV detects an erroneous differential current, the output signal DIF-IDSV can be
connected to DIF_TP_BLOCK (Refer Figure 3.1-15using PLC logic based on the application
requirement. The differential current monitoring function is operated when On is set for the
scheme switch [DIF-IDSV-EN].
8000501C23 TDIF-IDSV
8000501B60
1 & DIF-IDSV-1
8100501C27 8100501B61
DIF-SV 2 & DIF-IDSV-2
8200501C2B 8200501B62
3 C & t DIF-IDSV-3
0-300s
820000EBB1 DIF-SV_BLOCK 1 & 8300501B63

≥1
DIF-IDSV
AMF-ON
DIF-IDSV-E N On
Figure 3.1-13 DIF-SV scheme logic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 47 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.7 Settings and setting guidance

(i) DIF-S1-I1 setting
The minimum operation sensitivity of the DIF is subject to the setting [DIF-S1-I1], which
regulates the maximum erroneous differential current under normal condition. The setting
[DIF-S1-I1], thus, is placed as a ratio of the CT secondary rated current.
(ii) DIF-S1-Slope1, DIF-S1-Slope2 and DIF-S1-I2 settings

DIF-S1-Slope1: As for the small current area in the DIF, the DIF-S1-Slope1 is a restraining
coefficient that determines the S1 restraining characteristic and is reflected in percentage. The
value is summed by the following four error values:
1. CT accuracy error (considered as 5%, generally)
2. Tap error: the tap error proves the latitude of a power-transformer-tap value and
the power-transformer-tap includes maximum tap value and minimum tap
value. The value of the tap error is taken at middle position of the tap changer,
as a reference.
3. Matching error: the setting can neglect this error value because CT mismatch
may be small, as a rule. CT mismatch is taken care by GRT200 by the ratio
compensation kct1-kct5. (Refer 3.1.2). The user must ensure that the difference
between CT rating and the nominal current rating of the protected windings is
not large (kct should be <8).
4. Relay calculation error, and others (5%)
The value recommended for the DIF-S1-Slope1 setting is 1.5 times the sum of the four
error values. (The “1.5” reflects a margin.)
DIF-S1-Slope2: The DIF-S1-Slope2 is a restraining coefficient for the large current area
in the DIF; its setting is determined from a maximum erroneous differential current, that
appears when a through-fault current flows largely.
DIF-S1-I2: The DIF has dual slope characteristics and hence the break point is placed
with the DIF-S1-I2. The DIF-S1-I2 is set as the multiplier of rated current of CT secondary; it
includes CT ratio correction. The setting value of the DIF-S1-I2 to be greater than the
maximum operating current level, that is reflected as a ratio to the CT secondary rated current;
the DIF-S1-I2 to be between the maximum forced-cooled rated current and the maximum
emergency overload current.
While on the subject, percentage-restraining coefficient is reflected in % slope and its

equation is described as follow:
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 48 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Persentage restraining factor (% slope)

𝐷𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
=
𝑇ℎ𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑔ℎ 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
(3.1-17)
𝐷𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
=
(𝐼𝑛𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡 + 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑔𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡)
(iii) 2f setting
The inrush current includes a second harmonic content (2nd harmonic) on energizing a
transformer. For the detection of the 2nd harmonic, the DIF provides a setting and the setting
value is placed for setting [DIF-2f]. (A setting of 15% is suggested if there is no minimum data
on the 2nd harmonic.)
(iv) 5f setting
When a transformer is in over-excitation condition, a fifth harmonic content (5th harmonic) is
appeared. The 5th harmonic affects protection operations in the IED and hence it is required
to detect the 5th harmonic. Thus, the DIF provides a setting and the setting value is placed for
setting [DIF-5f]. (A setting of 30% is suggested if there is no minimum data on the 5th
harmonic.)
(v) S2 setting
As cited in section 3.1.3(i), the DIF includes the high-set and the setting is determined with
setting [DIF-S2-I]. The setting value should be greater than a maximum inrush current
estimated. Hence, a recommended setting value is greater than the maximum inrush current
multiplied by the kct. (Greater than, “Maximum peak value of Inrush current” ×kct.)
Incidentally, setting [DIF-S2-I] is prescribed with Per-unit (pu). The DIF-S2-I is set as the
multiplier of rated current of secondary CT; it includes CT ratio correction.
(vi) Setting phase matching

The phase angle difference between line currents on either side of the power transformer are
corrected by setting according to the hands of a clock and the transformer connections
described in IEC60076-1.
Determination of setting
As for transformer windings, there are winding settings and the primary winding setting is
determined with scheme switches [VecGroupP-W]. Likewise, the secondary and the tertiary
windings are determined with scheme switch [VecGroupS-W], and [VecGroupT-W]. When a
transformer unit is Star-winding, a set of 1 is placed for the scheme switch; whereas a set of 2
is placed when another transformer unit is delta-winding.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 49 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
On the other hand, for phase angle difference, settings are determined with scheme
switches [VecGroupS-C] and [VecGroupT-C]; the scheme switch [VecGroupS-C] is used to set
the phase angle difference between primary and secondary; the scheme switch [VecGroupT-C]
is used to set the phase angle difference between primary and tertiary. The difference is
determined by a lagging angle from the primary winding, and is expressed with a number that
is reflected with 0–11 in time unit. The number corresponds to a lagging degree: e.g., an hour
o’clock corresponds to lagging 30°.
The phase angle matching, that is setting for transformer connection and being complied
with IEC60076-1 is summarized in Table 3.1-5 and Table 3.1-6.
As for a three-winding Star-Star-Delta transformer, e.g., settings are determined with

scheme switches [VecGroupP-W], [VecGroupS-W], [VecGroupT-W], [VecGroupS-C], and
[VecGroupT-C] in accordance with Table 3.1-6. Table 3.1-3 shows “Yy0d11” transformer
connection, for example.
Table 3.1-3 Scheme switch for Star-Star-Delta transformer (an example from Table 3.1-6)
Transformer
Connection settings
(IEC60076-1) VecGroupP- VecGroupS- VecGroupS- VecGroupT- VecGroupT-
W W C W C
Y y 0 d 11 Y y 0 d 11
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
a: A set of Y is placed because the primary winding is Star.

b: A set of y is placed because the secondary winding is Star.
c: A set of 0 is placed because the secondary winding is in phase with the primary.
d: A set of d is placed because the tertiary winding is Delta.
e: A set of 11 is placed because the tertiary vector lags the primary winding by 11 hours
o’clock (330°).
Primary Secondary Tertiary

transformer (P) Transformer (S) Transformer (T)
Figure 3.1-14 Yy0d11 vectors in three-winding (See Table 3.1-6)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 50 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.1-4 Phase angle matching calculation1

Clock Calculation Remarks
position
0 Ia’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ib  Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3 Setting value
0
1 Ia’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 11 1
2 Ia’ = (Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  2Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic 2Ia  Ib)/ 3 10 2
3 Ia’ = ( Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (– Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( Ia  Ib)/ 3 9 3
4 Ia’ = ( Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = ( Ib  Ic  2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( Ic  Ia  2Ib)/ 3
8 4
5 Ia’ = (– Ia  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (– Ib  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (– Ic  Ib)/ 3
7 5
6 6
Ia’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = ( 2Ib  Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( 2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3
7 Ia’ = ( Ia  Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = ( Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (– Ic  Ia)/ 3
8 Ia’ = ( Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = ( Ib  2Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( Ic  2Ia  Ib)/ 3
9 Ia’ = (Ib – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3
10 Ia’ = (Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ic 2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic  Ia  2Ib)/ 3
11 Ia’ = (Ia – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic  Ib)/ 3
1Note: For phase angle correction, the DIF determines its calculation formula with clock
position.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 51 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.1-5 Setting for phase angle matching of α-method in 2 windings transformers
Transformer connection*1 Settings for phase angle correction Remark
Primary, Secondary Primary Secondary Phase angle diff. Phase angle
(P) (S) [VecGroupP-W] [VecGroupS-W] [VecGroupS-C] matching calc. 2
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0 Y y 0
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd0 D d 0
S: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd1 Y d 1
S: 1 O’clock
P: 11 O’clock
Dy1 D y 1
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd2 D d 2
S: 3 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd4 D d 4
S: 5 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd5 Y d 5
S: 5 O’clock
P: 7 O’clock
Dy5 D y 5
S: 0 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy6 Y y 6
S: 6 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd6 D d 6
S: 7 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd7 Y d 7
S: 7 O’clock
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 52 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Primary, Secondary Primary Secondary Phase angle diff. Phase angle
(P) (S) [VecGroupP-W] [VecGroupS-W] [VecGroupS-C] matching calc. 2
P: 5 O’clock
Dy7 D y 7
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd8 D d 8
S: 9 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd10 D d 10
S: 11 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd11 Y d 11
S: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dy11 D y 11
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dz10 D d 10
S: 11 O’clock
*1Note: Reference phase is drawn in a dash line and complied with IEC60076-1.
*2Note: Phase angle calculation is discussed in Table 3.1-4.
Transformer connection is complied with IEC60076-1; Table 3.1-6 shows that the DIF,
which protects a two-winding transformer, can cover a three-winding transformer with a
stabilizing-winding circuit.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 53 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.1-6 Setting for phase angle matching of α-method in 3 windings transformers
Phase angle diff.
Phase angle diff.

[VecGroupS-C]
[VecGroupT-C]
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary Phase angle
[VecGroup
[VecGroup
[VecGroup
Secondary
Primary
Tertiary
P-W]
S-W]
T-W]
(P) (S) (T) matching calc.*2
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d1 Y y 0 d 1 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d11 Y y 0 d 11 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd1d1 Y d 1 d 1 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd11d11 Y d 11 d 11 S: 11 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dy11d0 D y 11 d 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 11 O’clock
Dy1d0 D y 1 d 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd0d0 D d 0 d 0 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0y0 Y y 0 y 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 0 O’clock
*1Note: Reference phase is drawn in a dash line and complied with IEC60076-1.
*2Note: Phase angle calculation is discussed in Table 3.1-4.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 54 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Practical setting and a point to note

1. Reference phase for phase angle matching
A reference phase be selected from the phase of a Star-connected side and hence the phase
of primary winding is applied for the reference phase in the case of a Star-delta
transformer. The followings shows tips for each transformer connection:
 Star-delta transformer (Yd): the reference phase is chosen from primary winding
phase.
 Delta-Star transformer (Dy): the reference phase is chosen from secondary
winding phase.
 Star-Star transformer (Yy): the reference phase is chosen from primary winding
phase.
 Delta-delta transformer (Dd): the reference phase leads the A-phase of primary
winding by 30°.
2. Phase rotation
The phase relationship between each terminal current, which depends on the transformer
connection and the connection between the transformer and the power system, must be
checked. The phase displacement of a delta-connected side may not be determined only by
the transformer connection described in Table 3.1-5 and Table 3.1-6. Table 3.1-7 shows an
example illustrating the connection between a transformer and power system. The Table
3.1-7 also shows their current vectors when an Yd1 transformer is connected to the power
system with both clockwise and anticlockwise phase rotation. Care should be taken that
the setting for phase angle correction is not corresponding to Table 3.1-6.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 55 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.1-7 Transformer connection and current vector

Delta-side connected with 30° lagging Delta-side connected with 30°
leading
Connection between Transformer Transformer

Primary Yd1 Secondary Primary Yd1 Secondary
Yd1 Transformer and a U u a a U u a
b V v b b V v b
Power system
c W w c c W w c
Transformer u Transformer u
Each winding a U a a U a
I1a I2a I2a’=I2aI2c I1a I1c I2c I2a’=I2aI2b
connection and b V v b b V v b
I1b I2b I2b’=I2bI2a I1b I1b I2b I2b’=I2bI2c
Incoming/Outgoing c W w c c W w c
I1c I2c I2c’=I2cI2b I1c I1a I2a I2c’=I2cI2a
current
I1a I2b’=I2bI2a I1a I2c’=I2cI2a
Incoming current I2c I2b
I2b I2c
vector and Outgoing I2b’=I2bI2c
30 I2c’=I2cI2b 30
I1c I1b I1c I1b
current vector I2a’=I2aI2c
I2a I2aI2a’=I2aI2b
Incoming Outgoing Incoming Outgoing
Current Current Current Current
Setting VecGroupP-W =Y, VecGroupP-W =Y,
VecGroupS-W =d, VecGroupS-W =d,
VecGroupS-C =1 (Same as Yd1) VecGroupS-C =11 (Same as Yd11)
3. Auto-transformer (with internal delta-winding)

For setting as the auto-transformer, see “Yy0” in Table 3.1-5.
4. Zigzag connected transformer

Place a set of D,d for the scheme switches [VecGroupP-W], [VecGroupS-W] and
[VecGroupS-C] for zigzag connected side. Zero-sequence current is canceled.
5. When three-winding applied to a two-winding transformer

Keep the scheme switches [VecGroupT-W] and [VecGroupT-C] to the default setting
values.
6. One and a half breaker system

Table 3.1-8 shows settings when one-and-a-half breaker system (1.5CB) is applied. The
settings are required for the DIF.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 56 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.1-8 Example of DIF setting

Type Settings
Yd11
P S
[VecGroupP-W]=Y
1CT 2CT [VecGroupS-W]=d
1NCT
[VecGroupS-C]=11
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-2CT]= Secondary
[Conn-3CT]= No use
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= No use
1.5CB system [VecGroupP-W]=Y
1CT Yy0d11 [VecGroupS-W]=d

P S 2CT [VecGroupS-C]=0
3CT
[VecGroupT-W]= Non
1NCT
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-3CT]= Primary
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= No use
Yy0d11
1CT
3CT [VecGroupP-W]=Y
P
T [VecGroupS-W]=y
1NCT
2CT
[VecGroupS-C]=0
S
2NCT
[VecGroupT-W]=d
[VecGroupT-C]=11
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-3CT]= Tertiary
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= Use
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 57 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.8 DIF scheme logic

Figure 3.1-15 and Figure 3.1-16 show the scheme logic of DIF function.
8000101C23
1 & & S2-1-OP
8100101C27
S2 2 & & S2-2-OP
8200101C2B
3 C & & S2-3-OP
DIF 8000201C23 t t
1 & & S1-1-OP
8100201C27 &
S1 2
8200201C2B
& & & S1-2-OP
3 C
& t
& & S1-3-OP
DIF-S2-E N On
DIF-S1-E N On
8100001BB0 1
810000EBB0 DIF-TP_BLOCK ≥1
8F00001BB2
8F0000EBB2 DIF_BLOCK 8000001B60
8000301C23 ≥1 1
1 & &
8100301C27
2f 2 &
8200301C2B & 8100001B61
DIF
3 C
& ≥1 1
8000401C23 t &
1
8100401C27 & &
5f 2
& 8200001B62
3 8200401C2B
C & 1
& ≥1
t &
DIF-2f-E N On
DIF-5f-E N On 8F00301B60
≥1
&
Block-Per 8F00401B60
DIF-BlockMod-2f Block-3P
P
≥1
Block-Per &
DIF-BlockMod-5f Block-3P
P
8000001BB4
800000EBB4 DIF-1_BLOCK
8100001BB5
8200001BB6
Figure 3.1-15 DIF scheme logic (1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 58 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
DIF output signals can be blocked when 2F, or 5F or CTS operates. The 2F and 5F
elements become active when ‘On’ is set for the scheme switches [DIF-2F-EN] and [DIF-5F-EN].
The CTS element becomes active when ‘Block is set for the scheme switch [DIF-CTSat]. The
following two operation modes can be selected using the scheme switch [DIF-BlockMode]:
Block-PerP: In case of a fault except for three-phase fault, an element in any phase of
2F 5F operates, then a DIF signal, which is connected to the element
operated is blocked.
Block-3P: When any phase operates, all the three-phase DIF signals are blocked. The
setting Block-3P is recommended for a large-size transformer because the
second harmonic component of the transformer may be low.
8000001B64
≥1 DIF-OPT-1
8100001B65
8000001BB3 ≥1 DIF-OPT-2
800000EBB3 DIF_INST_OP 8200001B66
≥1 DIF-OPT-3
TDIF-S2 8000101B60
S2-OPT-1 8200101B63 8000001B63
S2-1-OP ≥1 ≥1 S2-OPT ≥1 DIF-OPT
8100101B61
S2-2-OP S2-OPT-2
≥1
8200101B62
S2-3-OP S2-OPT-3
≥1
0-100s
&
&
& t
TDIF-S1 8000201B60
S1-OPT-1 8100201B63
S1-1-OP ≥1 ≥1 S1-OPT
8100201B61
S1-2-OP ≥1 S1-OPT-2
8200201B62
S1-3-OP S1-OPT-3
≥1
0-100s
&
&
To TRC
& t
DIF-TP1 8000001B70
On & DIF-TRIP1
DIF-TP2 On 8100001B71
& DIF-TRIP2
DIF-TP3 8200001B72
On & DIF-TRIP3
DIF-TP4 On 8300001B73
& DIF-TRIP4
DIF-TP5 8400001B74
On & DIF-TRIP5
DIF-TP6 On 8500001B75
& DIF-TRIP6
Figure 3.1-16 DIF scheme logic (2)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 59 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.9 Setting
Setting of TP-DIF (Function ID: 413001)
U Model5
Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4
n (Full)
Setting device i Contents
1A 5A
rating rating
t 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
s
DIF-CTSat DIF block triggered by CT saturation
Non / Block - Non Non Non Non Non
detection
TDIF-CTS Off-delay timer for No-change period
24 - 96 - 72 72 72 72 72
decision
DIF-CTS-KSE 0.10 - 10.00 pu Sensitivity for starting element 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DIF-CTS-KEVD 0.30 - 0.95 - Coefficient for evolving fault detection 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
DIF-TP1 DIF trip command output from TP1 BO
Off / On - On On On On On
contact
contact
contact
Common
contact
contact
contact
Phase mode Operating Phase indication for Fault record
phases / Fault - Fault phases Fault phases Fault phases Fault phases Fault phases
phases
DIF-S1-EN Off / On - DIF S1 protection enable On On On On On
DIF-S1-I1 0.10 - 1.00 pu Minimum operating value 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
DIF-S1-I2 Knee point between small and large
1.00 - 40.00 pu 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
current regions
DIF-S1
DIF-S1-Slope1 Small current region percentage slope

10 - 50 % 50 50 50 50 50
of Id-Ir characteristic
DIF-S1-Slope2 Large current region percentage slope
10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
of Id-Ir characteristic
TDIF-S1 0.00 - 100.00 s DIF-S1 timer 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
DIF-S2-EN Off / On - DIF S2 protection enable On On On On On
DIF-S2
DIF-S2-I 2.00 - 20.00 pu DIF S2 operating value 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
TDIF-S2 0.00 - 100.00 s DIF-S2 timer 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
DIF-2f-EN Off / On - 2f component detection enable On On On On On
DIF-f2
DIF-2f 10 - 50 % 2f component sensitivity 15 15 15 15 15

DIF-BlockMode- Non / Block-3P / DIF block mode using 2f components
- Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P
2f Block-PerP
DIF-5f-EN Off / On - 5f component detection enable Off Off Off Off Off
DIF-f5
DIF-5f 10 - 100 % 5f component sensitivity 30 30 30 30 30

DIF-BlockMode- Non / Block-3P / DIF block mode using 5f components
- Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P
5f Block-PerP
DIF-FLT-KId 0.70 - 1.00 pu Threshold for maximum Id phases 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
Fault phs.
DIF-FLT-KIp 0.70 - 1.00 pu Threshold for maximum Ip phases 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
DIF-FLT-KIs 0.70 - 1.00 pu Threshold for maximum Is phases 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
DIF-FLT-KIt 0.70 - 1.00 pu Threshold for maximum It phases 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
DIF-IdSV-EN Off / On - Id supervision enable Off Off Off Off Off
IdSV
DIF-IdSV 0.05 - 1.00 pu Id supervision sensitivity 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24
TDIF-IdSV 0 - 300 s Id supervision timer 10 10 10 10 10
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 60 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.1.10 Data ID
TP-DIF (Function ID: 413001)
8000101C23 DIF-S2-1 DIF-S2 relay element operated (phase-1)
8200101C2B DIF-S2-3 DIF-S2 relay element operated (phase-3)
8200201C2B DIF-S1-3 DIF-S1 relay element operated (phase-3)
8000301C23 DIF-2f-1 DIF-2f relay element operated (phase-1)
8200301C2B DIF-2f-3 DIF-2f relay element operated (phase-3)
8200401C2B DIF-5f-3 DIF-5f relay element operated (phase-3)
8000501C23 DIF-SV-1 DIF-SV relay element operated (phase-1)
8100501C27 DIF-SV-2 DIF-SV relay element operated (phase-2)
8200501C2B DIF-SV-3 DIF-SV relay element operated (phase-3)
8000801C23 Max.Id phase-1 Maximum intensity of current (phase-1)
8100801C27 Max.Id phase-2 Maximum intensity of current (phase-2)
8200801C2B Max.Id phase-3 Maximum intensity of current (phase-3)
8000901C23 Max.Ip phase-A Maximum intensity primary of current (phase-A)
8100901C27 Max.Ip phase-B Maximum intensity primary of current (phase-B)
8200901C2B Max.Ip phase-C Maximum intensity primary of current (phase-C)
8000A01C23 Max.Is phase-A Maximum intensity secondary of current (phase-A)
8100A01C27 Max.Is phase-B Maximum intensity secondary of current (phase-B)
8200A01C2B Max.Is phase-C Maximum intensity secondary of current (phase-C)
8000B01C23 Max.It phase-A Maximum intensity tertiary of current (phase-A)
8100B01C27 Max.It phase-B Maximum intensity tertiary of current (phase-B)
8200B01C2B Max.It phase-C Maximum intensity tertiary of current (phase-C)
8F00301B60 DIF-2f-OR DIF-2f protection operated
8F00401B60 DIF-5f-OR DIF-5f protection operated
8000001B60 DIF-1_BLK DIF-1 block command
8000101B60 S2-OPT-1 DIF-S2 protection operated (phase-1)
8000001B63 DIF-OPT DIF protection operated
8100201B63 S1-OPT DIF-S1 protection operated
8200101B63 S2-OPT DIF-S2 protection operated
8000001B64 DIF-OPT-1 DIF operation phase or fault phase (phase-1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 61 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

TP-DIF (Function ID: 413001)
8000001B70 DIF-TRIP1 DIF trip command output from TP1 B0
8C00001B7C DIF-OPT-A DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-A)
8D00001B7D DIF-OPT-B DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-B)
8E00001B7E DIF-OPT-C DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-C)
8000501B60 DIF-IDSV-1 DIF-IDSV protection operated (phase-1)
8300501B63 DIF-IDSV DIF-IDSV protection operated
8100001BB0 DIF_TP_BLOCK DIF-TP block command
8200001BB1 DIF_SV_BLOCK DIF-SV block command
8F00001BB2 DIF_BLOCK DIF block command
8000001BB3 DIF_INST_OP DIF instant operation command
8000001BB4 DIF-1_BLOCK DIF-1 block command
 Connection point in PLC logic

DIF (Function ID: 413001)
810000EBB0 DIF_TP_BLOCK DIF TP block command
820000EBB1 DIF_SV_BLOCK DIF SV block command
8F0000EBB2 DIF_BLOCK DIF block command
800000EBB3 DIF_INST_OP DIF instant operation command
800000EBB4 DIF-1_BLOCK DIF-1 block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 62 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Restricted earth fault protection (REF)

Restricted earth fault protection (REF) is applied to a star-connected transformer with a
neutral point, which is earthed directly or is earthed through a low impedance resistor. The
REF includes a differential scheme for a zero phase sequence current and hence can provide
highly sensitive protection for an internal earth fault.
Ia+Ib+Ic
REF
In
Figure 3.2-1 REF protection principle

The differential scheme is designed for low impedance current. As shown in Figure 3.2-1,
the zero-sequence current (3I0) is derived from measured phase currents (Ia, Ib, and Ic). On
the other hand, the neutral conductor, feeds neutral current (In). The REF, therefore, can detect
the differential current in case of internal earth fault.
GRT200
P S
1CT REF-P
2CT
3CT REF-S
T
4CT
5CT
1NCT REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 3.2-2 Application example
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 63 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.2.1 Element characteristics

The IED has three elements namely REF-P, REF-S and REF-T. The REF characteristic and
settings are identical for all the three elements.
Figure 3.2-3 shows the REF block diagram that consists of REF-DIF and REF-DEF
elements. REF-DIF is a biased differential current element, whereas REF-DEF is a directional
earth fault element. The REF-DEF element complements the REF-DIF element operation in
the small differential current region, thereby providing security against mal operation
especially when the REF-DIF element has a very high sensitivity (low pick up) setting. For
through fault high current, when phase CTs saturate the operation of REF is blocked by REF-
DEF element. This is achieved due to the maximum limit of the directional characteristics.
REF-□
REF-DIF-□ &
REF-DEF-□
& ≧1
On
REF-□-DEF-EN Off
○
+
Figure 3.2-3 REF block diagram
The operation of the REF protection is described below:

(1) Scheme switch [REF-□-DEF-EN] is On
Figure 3.2-4 shows the REF protection with [REF- □ -DEF-EN]=On. The REF
protection operates in the small current region only. For large differential current due
to internal earth fault, the DIF (three-phase differential current) protection will
operate. However, the zero sequence currents are eliminated in the DIF scheme. The
DIF will operate for large earth fault current due to the presence of positive and
negative sequence currents.
DIF
S1 S2
REF
Earth fault only
Level of differential current
2.0 x Max_KCT_REF Threshold: Maximum value of the

in-rush current
Figure 3.2-4 REF protection with [REF-□-DEF-EN]=On
(2) Scheme switch [REF-□-DEF-EN] is Off

Figure 3.2-5 shows the operation of REF protection with [REF-□-DEF-EN]=Off. The
REF protection operates for small and large differential currents. The DIF protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 64 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
will also operate in the large differential current region.

DIF
S1 S2
REF
Earth fault only
Level of differential current
Threshold: Maximum value of the in-rush current
Figure 3.2-5 REF protection with [REF-□-DEF-EN]=Off
(i) REF-DIF characteristic

As shown in the Figure 3.2-6, the REF-DIF element has a dual slope characteristic: the first
slope is a weak restraint characteristic (S1) in the small current region, the second slope is a
strong restraint characteristic (S2) in the large current region.
In Figure 3.2-6, a differential current (Id0) and restraining current (Ir0) determines the
dual slope characteristic. The Id0 is a vector summation of phase current of all windings; the
Ir0 is the larger of the residual current or the neutral current.
3I0
IN
Id0 = Ir0 (One-end infeed) Operating zone

Id0
S2 REF--SLOPE2
50-100%
S1
[REF--I1]×Max_KCT_REF REF--SLOPE1=10%
Ir0
[REF--I2]×Max_KCT_REF
[REF--I1]×Max_KCT_REF
Iod : Residual differential current (|3I0 + IN|)

Ires : Restraining current (Max(|IA|, |IB|, |IC|, |IN|))
REF--I1: Minimum operating value in pu
REF--I2: Knee point (: P, S, T)
Figure 3.2-6 REF-DIF characteristic
The weaker restraint of the S1 ensures sensitivity to low-level faults; the S1

characteristic is expressed using the following equation:
Id0 −  > 0.1 × Ir0 −  + (1 − 0.1) × Max_KCT_REF −  × [REF-□-I1] (3.2-1)
where,
: P or S or T
Max_KCT_REF-: Selection of the largest value among KCT1_REF-, KCT2_REF-,
KCT3_REF-, KCT4_REF-, and KCT5_REF-
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 65 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Zero phase differential current Id0- is expressed using the following equation:
Id0 -=|KCT1_REF-∙I01 +KCT2_REF-∙I02 +KCT3_REF-∙I03 +KCT4_REF-∙I04 +KCT5_REF-.I05 +IN |

(3.2-2)
where,
KCT1_REF-  to KCT5_REF- : CT ratio matching coefficient of 1CT - 5CT
The KCT is calculated automatically as Phase CT ratio / Neutral CT ratio. The neutral CT rating is used
as the base value.
The restraint current is expressed using the following equation:
Ir0- ＝Max (KCT1_REF-･|Ia1|, KCT1_REF-･|Ib1|, KCT1_REF-･|Ic1|,

KCT2_REF-･|Ia2|, KCT2_REF-･|Ib2|, KCT2_REF-･|Ic2|, (3.2-3
KCT3_REF-･|Ia3|, KCT3_REF-･|Ib3|, KCT3_REF-･|Ic3|,
KCT4_REF-･|Ia4|, KCT4_REF-･|Ib4|, KCT4_REF-･|Ic4|, )
KCT5_REF-･|Ia5|, KCT5_REF-･|Ib5|, KCT5_REF-□･|Ic5|, |IN|)
I01, I02, I03, I04, I05: Residual current of 1CT – 5CT

I*a, I*b, I*c: phase current of 1CT – 5CT
IN: Neutral current
Note that all currents are CT secondary currents.
The strong restraint characteristic of the S2 lies on the large current region for a high-
through fault; it is expressed using the following equation:
Ido −  > [REF −  − slope2] × Ir0 −  + (0.1 − [REF −  − Slope2]) × [REF −  − I2 ] × Max −
(3.2-4)
KCT_REF −  + ((1 − 0.1) × [REF −  − I1 ] × Max − KCT_REF − )
where,
: P or S or T
Max_KCT_REF-: Max (KCT1_REF-, KCT2_REF-, KCT3_REF-, KCT4_REF-,
KCT5_REF-)
Zero ampere control

In the following example, the 4CT and 5CT current is forced to zero as it is not used.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 66 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
VCT
I01 x KCT1_REF-P I0d operation

1CT I02 x KCT2_REF-P
I03 x KCT3_REF-P
I04 x KCT4_REF-P(＝0)
P 2CT I05 x KCT5_REF-P(＝0)
Operation
3CT TP_REPLICA REF-P
TP_REF
S 4CT
5CT
In
1NCT
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 3.2-7 Example of Zero ampere control
(ii) REF-DEF characteristic

The REF-DEF logic is as shown below.
REF-DEF-□
Directional element &
(a) ≥1
Non-directional 1
element (b)
Figure 3.2-8 REF-DEF logic
The REF-DEF characteristic consists of a directional characteristic and a non-directional

characteristic, as shown in Figure 3.2-9.
Figure 3.2-9 REF-DEF characteristic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 67 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Example of KCT calculation and relationship to REF-DEF operation
Primary Secondary
CT ratio: 2400/1 CT ratio: 3600/1
KCT1_REF_P=2 KCT2_REF_P=3
I01 I01
CT ratio:
1200/1
REF
IN
Figure 3.2-10 KCT*_REF_□ calculation
Figure 3.2-10 shows an example of KCT*_REF_ calculation done automatically in the

function. The KCT2_REF_P is larger than KCT1_REF_P; hence, the Max_KCT_REF takes the
value three (KCT2_REF_P=3). With reference to Figure 3.2-9 , 2.0 × Max_KCT_REF = 2.0 x 3
= 6 A. In Figure 3.2-10, the rated current of neutral CT is 1200A. The REF_DEF is blocked
when the maximum phase current exceeds 2×Max_KCT_REF×(rated current of neutral CT).
In other words, if a phase current on the primary side or on the secondary side exceeds 7200A,
the REF is blocked.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 68 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.2.2 Setting means

(i) Setting tips for REF-P to REF-T
Table 3.2-2 shows the examples of REF setting.
Table 3.2-2 Setting examples of REF element

System configuration Setting example
REF-P-EN = On REF-S-EN = On REF-T-EN = On
VCT
P S REF-P-1CT = Use REF-S-1CT = REF-T-1CT =
1CT REF-P REF-P-2CT = No No use No use
use REF-S-2CT = REF-T-2CT =
2CT
REF-P-3CT = No Use No use
3CT use REF-S-3CT = REF-T-3CT =
T REF-S
REF-P-4CT = No No use Use
REF-P-5CT = No No use No use
1NCT REF-T No use No use
2NCT
3NCT
REF-P-EN = On REF-S-EN = On REF-T-EN =

Off
VCT
REF-P-1CT = Use REF-S-1CT =
1CT REF-P REF-P-2CT = No No use
S P use REF-S-2CT =
2CT REF-P-3CT = No Use
use REF-S-3CT =
3CT REF-S REF-P-4CT = No Use
T use REF-S-4CT =
4CT REF-P-5CT = No No use
use REF-S-5CT =
5CT No use
1NCT REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
REF-P-EN = On REF-S-EN = Off REF-T-EN =

Off
VCT REF-P-1CT = Use
REF-P-2CT = Use
1CT REF-P
REF-P-3CT = Use
P REF-P-4CT = No
2CT
use
REF-P-5CT = No
3CT REF-S use
S 4CT
5CT
1NCT REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
REF-P-EN = On REF-S-EN = Off REF-T-EN =

Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 69 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
System configuration Setting example

REF-P-1CT = Use
VCT REF-P-2CT = Use
1CT REF-P REF-P-3CT = Use
REF-P-4CT = Use
P 2CT REF-P-5CT = No
use
3CT REF-S
S 4CT
5CT
1NCT REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 70 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.2.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.2-11 to Figure 3.2-13 show the scheme logic including three REFs. Every REF can
signal an instantaneous trip or a time-delayed trip; every REF element can send a trip signal
simultaneously to trip circuit (TRC) by setting On for each scheme switch [REF-P-TP1] and
others.
No Use
REF-P-1CT
Use
No Use
REF-P-2CT
Use
No Use 8000101C23 TREF-P
REF-P-3CT REF-P t
Use & 0 8000101B60
&
No Use ≥1 REF-P-OPT
REF-P-4CT 0.00-100.00s
Use
No Use
REF-P-5CT &
Use
REF-P-EN On
REF-P-BLOCK On
1
REF-P-INST_OP
On
To TRC
REF-P-TP1 8000101B61
On REF-P-TRIP1
&
REF-P-TP2 On 8100101B62 REF-P-TRIP2
&
REF-P-TP3 8200101B63
REF-P-TRIP3
On
&
REF-P-TP4 8300101B64
On REF-P-TRIP4
&
REF-P-TP5 8400101B65
On REF-P-TRIP5
&
REF-P-TP6 On 8500101B66
REF-P-TRIP6
&
REF-P-ALM On 8B00101B6
& C
REF-P-ALARM
Figure 3.2-11 REF scheme logic (P)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 71 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
No Use
REF-S-1CT
Use
No Use
REF-S-2CT
Use
No Use
REF-S-3CT
8100201C23 TREF-S
Use REF-S
& t 0
8100201B60
&
No Use ≥1 REF-S-OPT
REF-S-4CT Use 0.00-100.00s
No Use
REFS-5CT &
Use
REF-S-EN On
REF-S-BLOCK On
1
REF-S-INST_OP On
To TRC
REF-S-TP1 8000201B61
On & REF-S-TRIP1
REF-S-TP2 8100201B62
On & REF-S-TRIP2
REF-S-TP3 8200201B63
On & REF-S-TRIP3
REF-S-TP4 8300201B64
On & REF-S-TRIP4
REF-S-TP5 8400201B65
On
& REF-S-TRIP5
REF-S-TP6 On 8500201B66
REF-S-TRIP6
&
REF-S-AL On 8B00201B6C
REF-S-ALARM
M
&
Figure 3.2-12 REF scheme logic (S)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 72 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
No Use
REF-T-[1CT
Use
No Use
REF-T-2CT
Use
No Use
REF-T-3CT
8200301C23 TREF-T
Use REF-TT 0
& t
8200301B60
&
No Use ≥1 REF-T-OPT
REF-T-4CT Use 0.00-100.00s
No Use
REF-T-5CT &
Use
REF-T-EN On
REF-T-BLOCK
On
1
REF-T-INST_OP On
To TRC
REF-T-TP1 8000301B61
On & REF-T-TRIP1
REF-T-TP2 8100301B62
On & REF-T-TRIP2
REF-T-TP3 8200301B63
REF-T-TRIP3
On
&
REF-T-TP4 8300301B64
On REF-T-TRIP4
&
REF-T-TP5 8400301B65
On REF-T-TRIP5
&
REF-T-TP6 8500301B66
On
& REF-T-TRIP6
REF-T-ALM 8B00301B6C
On REF-T-ALARM
&
Figure 3.2-13 REF scheme logic (T)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 73 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.2.4 Settings list

Setting of REF(Function ID: 414001)
Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Un
1A 5A its 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
1CT's residual current used for

REF-P-1CT No use / Use - (Use) Use Use (Use) Use
REF-P calculation
Replica

REF-P-2CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-3CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-4CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-5CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-EN Off / On - REF-P protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
REF-P-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value (0.50) 0.50 0.50 (0.50) 0.50
Knee point between small and
REF-P-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
large current regions
Small current region percentage
REF-P
REF-P-Slope1 10 (fixed) % (10) 10 10 (10) 10

slope of I0d-I0r characteristic
Large current region percentage
REF-P-Slope2 50 - 100 % (100) 100 100 (100) 100
CT saturation countermeasure
REF-P-DEF-EN Off / On - (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
enable
TREF-P 0.00 - 100.00 s REF-P Timer (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
REF-P trip command output
REF-P-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 BO contact
from TP2 BO contact
from TP3 BO contact
from TP4 BO contact
from TP5 BO contact
from TP6 BO contact
REF-P-ALM Off / On - REF-P alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off

REF-S-1CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
Replica

REF-S-2CT No use / Use - (Use) Use Use (Use) Use
REF-S calculation
3CT's residual current used for No use
REF-S-3CT No use / Use - (No use) No use (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
REF-S-4CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
REF-S-5CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
REF-S-EN Off / On - REF-S protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
REF-S-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value (0.50) 0.50 0.50 (0.50) 0.50
REF-S-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
Small current region percentage
REF-S
REF-S-Slope1 10 (fixed) % (10) 10 10 (10) 10

Large current region percentage
REF-S-Slope2 50 - 100 % (100)
slope of I0d-I0r characteristic 100 100 100 100
REF-S-DEF-EN Off / On - (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
enable
TREF-S 0.00 - 100.00 s REF-S Timer (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
REF-S trip command output
REF-S-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 BO contact
from TP2 BO contact
from TP3 BO contact
from TP4 BO contact
from TP5 BO contact
from TP6 BO contact
REF-S-ALM Off / On - REF-S alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 74 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting of REF(Function ID: 414001)

Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Un
1A 5A its 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A

REF-T-1CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
Replica

REF-T-2CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
REF-T-3CT No use / Use - (Use) Use Use (Use) Use
REF-T calculation
REF-T-4CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
REF-T-5CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
REF-T-EN Off / On - REF-T protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
REF-T-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value (0.50) 0.50 0.50 (0.50) 0.5
REF-T-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
REF-T
Small current region percent

REF-T-Slope1 10 (fixed) % (10) 10 10 (10) 10
Large current region percent
REF-T-Slope2 50 - 100 % (100) 100 100 (100) 100
REF-T-DEF-EN Off / On - (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
enable
TREF-T 0.00 - 100.00 s REF-T Timer (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
REF-T trip command output
REF-T-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 BO contact
from TP2 BO contact
from TP3 BO contact
from TP4 BO contact
REF-T-TP5 Off / On - (On)
from TP5 BO contact (On) (On) (On) (On)
from TP6 BO contact
REF-T-ALM Off / On - REF-T alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
Note:
1) Model 1 and 4 does not provide REF protection.
2) Model 2, 3 and 5 provide REF protection. Model 2 and 3 provide 3 sets of 3-phase
current inputs. Model 5 provides 5 sets of 3-phase current inputs. Three (3) sets
of neutral current input are provided in model 2, 3 and 5.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 75 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.2.5 Data ID
REF(Function ID: 414001)
8000101C23 REF-P REF primary relay element operated
8100201C23 REF-S REF secondary relay element operated
8200301C23 REF-T REF tertiary relay element operated
8000101B60 REF-P-OPT REF primary operated
8100201B60 REF-S-OPT REF secondary operated
8200301B60 REF-T-OPT REF tertiary operated
8000101B61 REF-P-TRIP1 REF primary trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00101B6C REF-P-ALARM REF primary alarm enable
8000201B61 REF-S-TRIP1 REF secondary trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00201B6C REF-S-ALARM REF secondary alarm enable
8000301B61 REF-T-TRIP1 REF tertiary trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00301B6C REF-T-ALARM REF tertiary alarm enable
8000001B61 REF-TRIP1 REF trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6C REF-ALARM REF alarm enable
8000101BB0 REF-P_BLOCK REF primary block command
8100201BB0 REF-S_BLOCK REF secondary block command
8200301BB0 REF-T_BLOCK REF tertiary block command
8000101BB1 REF-P_INST_OP REF primary instant operation command
8100201BB1 REF-S_INST_OP REF secondary instant operation command
8200301BB1 REF-T_INST_OP REF tertiary instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 76 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 Connection point on PLC logic

REF (Function ID: 414001)
800010EBB0 REF-P_BLOCK REF primary block command
810020EBB0 REF-S_BLOCK REF secondary block command
820030EBB0 REF-T_BLOCK REF tertiary block command
800010EBB1 REF-P_INST_OP REF primary instant operation command
810020EBB1 REF-S_INST_OP REF secondary instant operation command
820030EBB1 REF-T_INST_OP REF tertiary instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 77 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overcurrent protection (OC)

The overcurrent protection function (OC) detects overcurrent conditions and operates
accordingly. The OC function has both directional elements and time characteristic; it has eight
operation stages (OC1 to OC8) independently, which can be selected using scheme switches.
The OC1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the OC2 to OC8 stages are applicable. The
OC1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [OC1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected
is selected using scheme switch [OC1-TarWind]. The entering currents and applied voltages
for the OC function are obtained in the FEP_COMMON function (refer Chapter Transformer
replica functions: FEP_COMMON function).
TP_REPLICA TP_OC TP_TRC
OC1 to OC8
OC
OC relay OC logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[OC*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OC*-TarWind](P/S/T)
IY, IΔ, I1, I2, I0, In, CT ratio, VY, VΔ, V1, V2, V0, Type-VT (3PN/3PP/1PN/1N)
Figure 3.3-1 Block diagram

Note: FEP_COMMON calculates vector sum CT, CT polarity, Delta, phase/neutral/zero
phase current at each CT and V/I at each transformer winding
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
– Directional DT/IDMT NA NA NA
– Operation blocked by VTF NA NA NA
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 78 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC

The user can set the OC as either a non-directional OC or a directional OC for each stage (OC1
to OC8). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional OC as either forward type OC or
reverse type OC.
(i) Characteristic of the non-directional OC

The characteristic of the non-directional type OC element is a circle that has a center at the
origin, as shown in Figure 3.3-2. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the non-directional
OC element and the hatched area shows the operation area of the non-directional OC element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure the non-directional OC; that is, the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OC at stage 1 with setting [OC1-
DT/IDMT]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir].
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 3.3-2 Characteristic of non-directional OC1-DT/IDMT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 79 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Characteristic of the directional OC in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.3-3, the characteristic of the directional OC in the forward direction is
drawn as a semi-circle and a zero torque line; the hatched area shows the operation region of
the directional-OC.
Non-operation (No trip) zone
Reference voltage or
 θ
Polarizing voltage (Vpol)
Operation (Trip) zone
Figure 3.3-3 Characteristic of the directional-OC in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle with the directional-OC. The half plane
represents an operation zone that borders one side of the zero torque line.
Note: For the polarizing voltage (Vpol), greater than 1.0 voltage should be applied for
sensing.
A reference signal, that is, polarization signal is required for the directional OC, and the
reference signal is derived from a phase-to-phase voltage: for example, the directional OC for
phase-A (OC-A) takes a 90° lead w.r.t to phase-B-to-phase-C voltage (VBC90°), the reference
signal is illustrated in Figure 3.3-4. The direction of phase-A current (IA) is determined from
the measured angle of IA against the VBC90°. The purpose of 90° leading is a reason that the
reference voltage (VBC90°) takes the same direction of phase-A voltage (VA) that is not same
in a fault condition. As a result, when a fault occurs, IA flows and lags from the VBC90°.
Similarly for a reference voltage (VCA90°) and a current (IB) of the directional OC for phase-
B (OC-B) is similar to the OC-A and same for OC-C. Table 3.3-2 shows the relationship between
a current and a reference voltage.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 80 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
VBC90°
Leading 90°
VA
VBC
VBC
Figure 3.3-4 Object current (IA) and reference voltage (VBC90°)
Table 3.3-2 Directional polarizing signal

Directional Object current Reference voltage
element
OC-A IA VBC90
OC-B IB VCA90
OC-C IC VAB90
For the fault that is close to a three-phase fault, three reference voltages VBC90°, VCB90°
and VAB90° falls below a minimum threshold voltage of the OC. In case of reduction in these
reference voltages, the function of voltage memory provides polarizing signals temporarily. The
temporary polarizing signals are provided during the three-phase fault and the OC determines
the direction of the fault. In addition, the directional element function determines the output
based on the loss of voltage memory and is effective while the fault current flows in accordance
with Figure 3.3-5.
Phase difference calculation

|V||I|cos() 0 &
1 Output of
directional element
Amplitude calculation F/F &
1 1
|l| OC pickup current
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol| Set voltage (OV-Vpol)
Figure 3.3-5 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 81 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The setting of overcurrent threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the
settings for directional OC: for example, user can set the threshold value of the OC at stage 1
using setting [OC1-DT/IDMT] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir]. The sensing
angle (θ) is set using the setting [OC1-Angle] with the θ value set in the range of 0–180°.
Figure 3.3-6 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic set by the θ.
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol
Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 3.3-6 Examples of sensing angle (θ)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting of
overcurrent threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the settings for
directional OC. Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC
on stage 1 is considered.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 82 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.2 Operate time characteristic

The OC element monitors the currents, and when one of the currents over the threshold set in
the replica setting, the OC element will operate after the operation time delay defined by the
time characteristic feature.
The user can choose the OC operate time delay characteristics, either (i) independent (definite)
time characteristic delay or (ii) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The operate time
of the independent (definite) time characteristic delay is a constant, and the operate time in
the dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay depends upon the level of the energizing
current.
The OC element reset time delay characteristic will be either the independent time reset or
the dependent time reset. This will be discussed in the reset time characteristic section.
(i) Independent time characteristic (definite time delay)

The operate time of the independent time characteristic OC element will be a constant time
and is not affected by the level of current. The reset time is also set to a constant time.
The user can set the OC1 scheme switch [OC1-Type] to “DT” for the independent time
characteristic. For each OC independent operate time; the value of the required operate time
is set using the setting TOC1 in the range 0.00–300.00s. Likewise, [OC2-Type] – [OC8-Type]
and TOC2 – TOC8 correspond for each the OC2 to the OC8 independently.
The user can set instantaneous operation by setting the operate time to 0.00.
(ii) Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic OC element is inversely proportional to
the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time delay from a preset
curve. Ten (10) characteristic curves are available; i.e. nine (9) pre-installed curves covering
IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard characteristic curves and one (1) original (user
programmable) characteristic curve for which the user can set the equation parameters.
The operate time of the dependent time characteristics is defined by equation (3.3-1).
(Refer IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (3.3-1)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
Where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 83 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),

Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, c = constants (seconds).
α = constant
The nine (9) pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.3-3. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage (OC1 to OC8). Figure 3.3-7 illustrates these characteristic curves. The User
should set the scheme switch [OC1-Type] for OC1 stage and similarly for other stages. The
scheme switches, “IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse,
“IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI” for IEEE
Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse,
“US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse and “Original” for
user-programmable characteristic.
A time multiplier (TMS) is the coefficient for the operate time delay. The user can set the
TMS for each OC stage and each standard characteristic curve including user-programmable
of each OC stage; e.g. the TMS for the IEC standard characteristic curve of OC1 stage will be
set in the scheme switch [OC1-TMS-IEC]. The other TMSs for the OC1 stage are also set in the
scheme switches [OC1-TMS-UK] for UK standard, [OC1-TMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard, [OC1-
TMS-US] for US standard, and [OC1-TMS-ORG] for the user programmable. Each default TMS
value is 1.0.
Table 3.3-3 Constants for dependent operate time characteristics

Curve type Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Note: For original curve (user programmable), user can specify the curve coefficients k, α
and c; for example, original curve for OC1 can be specified with scheme switches
[OC1-k], [OC1-a] and [OC1-c].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 84 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 3.3-7 IDMT Characteristics
3.3.3 Reset time characteristics

The OC will be reset after energize (fault) current is back to the normal condition. The reset
time will have the delay time characteristic in order to correspond to the intermittent fault
condition and/or to coordinate with other relay. The reset time characteristics will be either
the instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on reset), the definite time resetting or the
dependent time resetting.
The instantaneous reset and the definite time resetting will be applicable for all OC operate
condition. The dependent time resetting is applicable for the dependent time operation of the
IEEE standard, the US standard and the original (user-programmable) operate.
(i) Instantaneous reset

The instantaneous reset is no intentional delay on reset. For example, the user can set OC1
stage as instantaneous reset by setting scheme switches [OC1-Rtype] to “DEF” and [TOC1R]
to “0.00”. Other stage should set the delay time value to 0.00.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 85 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Definite time resetting

The user can set OC1 stage as the definite resetting by setting scheme switches [OC1-Rtype]
to “DEF” and [TOC1R] to intentional delay of reset time. The user can set [TOC1R] for the
range of “0.00 – 300.00” in seconds. Figure 3.3-8 illustrates the definite time resetting
operation characteristic.
Figure 3.3-8 Definite time reset and instantaneous reset characteristic
(iii) Dependent time resetting

The reset time of the dependent time resetting characteristic is proportional to the level of the
energize current. The user can determine the reset time delay from a preset characteristic
curve. Six (6) characteristic curves are available; i.e. five (5) pre-installed curves covering IEEE
and US standard and one (1) original (user programmable).
The following equation defines the dependent time resetting time (Refer IEC 60255-151):
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (3.3-2)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠
where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 86 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
The user can set OC1 stage as the dependent time resetting by setting scheme switches [OC1-
Rtype] to “DEP”. The user can set RTMS for the IEEE standard, US standard or user-
programmable characteristic as [OC1-RTMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard characteristic curve,
[OC1-RTMS-US] for US standard and [OC1-RTMS-ORG] for an original (user-programmable).
Table 3.3-4 indicates the values of kr and β for the IEEE and US standard characteristic curve.
The user original dependent time resetting coefficient value of kr and β can be specified in the
scheme switches [OC1-kr] and [OC1-b] respectively.
Figure 3.3-9. Illustrate the standard characteristic curve.)
Table 3.3-4 Constants for dependent reset time characteristics

Curve Type Curve Description kr β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 87 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 3.3-9 Dependent reset time characteristics curves
Figure 3.3-9 illustrates the effect of dependent time resetting on the internal time delay
counter. An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (Is) provides an energizing
quantity for the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the operation
of the function. If the operating quantity falls below the Is setting, the function will return to
its reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (3.3-2).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 88 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Start time Disengaging time

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal time

delay counter
(integrator)
tr reset time setting

(with I=0, TMS=1)
Reset time
Figure 3.3-10 Dependent reset time characteristics
(iv) Summary of OC operation

Table 3.3-5 shows the summary of OC operation.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 89 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 3.3-5 Operation type and standard board (A tick shows a selectable function)
IEC IEEE US
Setting DT UK-LTI Original
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8
DT (Definite time) ✓
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
Characteristics for operation
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DT (Definite time) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Characteristics for resetting
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
3.3.4 Threshold value for activation

The threshold current for the activation of OC is configured by settings; for example, setting
[OC1-DT/-IDMT] is provided for the OC on stage 1. The other settings also are provided: setting
[OC2-DT/-IDMT], [OC3-DT/-IDMT], [OC4-DT/-IDMT], [OC5-DT/-IDMT], [OC6-DT/-IDMT], [OC7-
DT/-IDMT] and [OC8-DT/-IDMT].
Note that the sets of threshold have distinct values among OC1, OC2, OC3 OC5, OC6,
OC7 and OC8 should consider an input rating that is chosen between 1A rating and 5A rating.
The input rating is discussed separately. (Refer FEP)
3.3.5 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for activation to reset is set by a setting; for example, the
ratio of the OC1 is set for the setting [OC1-DPR]. The other ratios for the OC2, OC3 OC5, OC6,
OC7 and OC8 are also provided with settings: [OC2-DPR], [OC3-DPR], [OC4-DPR], [OC5-DPR],
[OC6-DPR], [OC7-DPR] and [OC8-DPR].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 90 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.6 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Harmonic detection
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection
(ICD) function. Each OC can negate the operation of the OC by using a scheme switch, as
a relay detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon
as the transformer is energized. For example, for OC1, the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] is
provided, and Block-3P is set when the nullification of the OC1 in the three-phase is
required when harmonic occurs. On the other hand, Block-PerP is set as the negation at
single phase is required. Non is set for the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Block operation of VTF for OC

The operation of the OC can be blocked by the function of a voltage transformer failure
(VTF) with a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [OC1-
VTFBlk] as the operation of the OC1 is blocked during the VTF. Non is set for the scheme
switch [OC1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of OC trip

Up to six (6) BO contacts can be selected to signal trip command; for example, scheme
switch [OC1-TP1] is set to On to select TP1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using
the scheme switch [OC1-ALM] set to On.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 91 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.7 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OC1 illustrates in Figure
3.3-11 and Figure 3.3-12. Each element of the OC1 provides the result of judgment whether a
pickup current exceeds a setting, and then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is
discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
8000101B60
≥1 OC1-OR
8000101B61
≥1 OC1PU-OR
8000101C20 TOC1
& & t 0 8000101B62
A 8100101C21
≥1 OC1-OPT-A
OC1 B 8200101C22 t 0
& & 8100101B63
C ≥1 OC1-OPT-B
t 0
& & 8200101B64
≥1 OC1-OPT-C
0.00–300s
8000101C24
≥1
& & &
OC1 A 8100101C25
B 8200101C26 ≥1
PU & & &
C
& ≥1 &
&
OC1_TYPE DT
OC1-ICD-A IEC-NI
OIC1-ICD-B IEC-VI
OC1-ICD-C
IEC-EI
OC1-TARWIND
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI
OC1-EN On
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
ORIGINAL
OC1-VTF_DETECT
OC1-VTFBlk &
Block
≥1
OC1_BLOCK
OC1_INST_OP
Figure 3.3-11 Scheme logic for the OC1 (1)

Note: OC1 PU is OC1 operation on pick up.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 92 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101B65
OC1-OPT-A 8000101B66
OC1-OPT-B ≥1
& OC1-TRIP1
OC1-OPT-C
OC1-TP1 On
8100101B67
& OC1-TRIP2
OC1-TP2 8200101B68
On
& OC1-TRIP3
OC1-TP3
On 8300101B69
& OC1-TRIP4
OC1-TP4 On 8400101B6A
& OC1-TRIP5
OC1-TP5 8500101B6B
On
& OC1-TRIP6
OC1-TP6 8B00101B6C
On
& OC1-ALARM
OC1-ALM
On
Figure 3.3-12 Scheme logic for the OC1 (2)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 93 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.8 Setting
Setting of OC (Function ID: 45A001)
Range Uni Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Setting device 1A 5A Contents
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating
OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
OC1- Primary / Secondary Target transformer winding for OC1
- Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
TarWind / Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
OC1-Dir - OC1 directional characteristic (NonDir) (NonDir) NonDir (NonDir) NonDir
Reverse
OC1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC1 directional characteristic angle (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
OC1-Type - OC1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
OC1-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
OC1-IDMT 0.02 - 0.10 - A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
5.00 25.00
OC1-DPR 10 - 100 % OC1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 100 100 100 100
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of IEC inverse
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of UK inverse
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of US inverse
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of Original inverse
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
O OC1-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
C TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 OC1-
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
IEEE
OC1- OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
RTMS-US US inverse curve
OC1-
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Original inverse curve
ORG
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
Non / Block-3P /
OC1-2fBlk - OC1 operation block by 2f-detection Non Non Non Non Non
Block-PerP
OC1-
Non / Block - OC1 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk
OC1 trip command output from TP1
OC1-TP1 Off / On - On On On On On
B0 contact
B0 contact
B0 contact
B0 contact
B0 contact
B0 contact
OC1-ALM Off / On - OC1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 94 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
OC2- Primary / Secondary Target transformer winding for
TarWind / Tertiary OC2 protection
NonDir / Forward /
OC2-Dir - OC2 directional characteristic NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir
Reverse
OC2 directional characteristic
OC2-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) (45)
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
OC2 operating delay time (in
TOC2 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
OC2-TMS- OC2 time multiplier of IEC
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
OC2-TMS- OC2 time multiplier of UK
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
OC2-TMS- OC2 time multiplier of IEEE
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OC2-TMS- OC2 time multiplier of US
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
OC2-TMS- OC2 time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG Original inverse curve
OC2-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC2 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
O TOC2R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC2 definite time reset delay 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
C
2 OC2- OC2 dependent reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE curve
OC2- OC2 dependent reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
RTMS-US multiplier of US inverse curve
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of Original inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC2 user original curve
OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
Non / Block-3P / OC2 operation block by 2f-
OC2-2fBlk - Non Non Non Non Non
Block-PerP detection
OC2- Non / Block - OC2 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk
OC2 trip command output
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 95 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
OC3-Dir - OC3 directional characteristic NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir
Reverse
OC3-Angle 0 - 180 deg 45 45 45 45 45
angle
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC3-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
OC3-Type OC3 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original-
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
OC3-DPR 10 – 100 % OC3 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 100 100 100 100
TOC3 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
O 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C OC3-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC3 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
3
TOC3R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC3 definite time reset delay 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
IEEE curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3- Non / Block - OC3 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 96 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC4-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC4 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C
IEEE curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 97 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC5-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC5 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C
IEEE curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC5-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 98 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC6-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC6 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C
IEEE curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC6-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 99 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC7-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC7 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C
IEEE curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC7-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 100 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC8-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-
VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC8 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C
IEEE curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG curve
OC8-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 101 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.3.9 Data ID
OC (Function ID : 45A001)
8000101C20 OC1-A OC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OC1-B OC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OC1-C OC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OC3-C OC3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OC4-A OC4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OC4-B OC4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OC4-C OC4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00701C22 OC7-C OC7 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00801C20 OC8-A OC8 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C21 OC8-B OC8 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C22 OC8-C OC8 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 OC1PU-A OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 OC1PU-B OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 OC1PU-C OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 OC3PU-C OC3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 OC4PU-A OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 OC4PU-B OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 OC4PU-C OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 102 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8A00701C26 OC7PU-C OC7 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00801C24 OC8PU-A OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00801C25 OC8PU-B OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00801C26 OC8PU-C OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 OC1-OR OC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OC1PU-OR OC1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OC1-OPT-A OC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 OC1-OPT-B OC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 OC1-OPT-C OC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 OC3-OPT-C OC3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 OC4-OPT-A OC4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 OC4-OPT-B OC4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00401B64 OC4-OPT-C OC4 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00701B64 OC7-OPT-C OC7 protection operated (phase-C)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 103 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8C00801B62 OC8-OPT-A OC8 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00801B63 OC8-OPT-B OC8 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00801B64 OC8-OPT-C OC8 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 OC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8000101B66 OC1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OC1 protection operation
8400101B6A OC1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OC1 protection operation
8500101B6B OC1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OC1 protection operation
8B00101B6C OC1-ALARM Alarm signal by OC1 protection operation
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 104 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000001B60 OC-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OC protection operation
8B00001B6B OC-ALARM Alarm signal by OC protection operation
8C00001B6C OC-OPT-A OC protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B6D OC-OPT-B OC protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B6E OC-OPT-C OC protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
8000101BB1 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 105 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

800010100D OC1_SECONDARY_RATING OC1 secondary rating
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 106 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Earth fault protection (EF)

The earth fault protection relay function for GRT200 (hereafter referred as EF) detects earth
fault conditions and operates accordingly. The EF has both directional and non-directional
elements. The EF protection has eight (8) stages EF1 to EF8, which operate independently can
be selected using scheme switches. To simplify, only EF1 is discussed but it is applicable to all
other stages (EF2 to EF8).
The EF1 is enabled using the scheme switch [EF1-EN] and the transformer winding to be
protected is set using the scheme switch [EF1-TarWind]. The input currents and voltages for
the EF function are obtained from FEP-Common function (refer section FEP…).
TP_REPLICA TP_EF TP_TRC

Va, Vb, Vc, I0
EF relay EF logic (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_ Type-VT EF-OPERATION
(3PN/3PP/1P EF1 to EF8
COMMON N/1PP/1N) element sequence
CT
secondary
CT polarity rating
compensated Full scale

ICD Output
Dir, Type,
TarWind-P/S/T
Figure 3.4-1 EF Function block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 107 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.4.1 Non-directional and directional EF

The user can set the EF as either a non-directional EF or a directional EF for each stage (EF1
to EF8). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional EF as either forward type EF or
reverse type EF.
(i) Characteristic of the non-directional EF

The characteristic of the non-directional type EF element is a circle that has a center at the
origin, as shown in Figure 3.4-2. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the non-directional
EF element and the hatched area shows the operation area of the non-directional EF element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure the non-directional EF that is, the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional EF at stage 1 using the setting [EF1-
DT/IDMT]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
3I0
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 3.4-2 Characteristic of non-directional EF1-DT/IDMT
(ii) Characteristic of the directional EF in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.4-3, the characteristic of the directional EF in the forward direction is
the directional EF.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 108 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 θ
Polarizing voltage (-3V0)
Figure 3.4-3 Characteristic of the directional EF in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle with the directional EF. The half plane
A reference signal, that is, polarization signal is required for the directional EF. The reference
signal (-3V0) is derived from the measured three phase voltages or directly obtained from the
broken delta voltage depending on the voltage measurement model used (refer Replica
function).
The operation of the EF is based on the following equations:

3𝐼0 ≥ 𝐼𝐸𝐹 (3.4-1)
3𝐼0 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (3.4-2)
3𝑉0 ≥ 𝐸𝐹_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (3.4-3)
Where,
3I0 = residual current
3V0 = residual voltage
−3V0 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
φ= lagging angle
θ = EF setting angle
IEF = Setting value of the EF (EF1 to EF8)
EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 109 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the zero-
sequence impedance of the system and in the directly-earthed system this value
ranges approximately from 50° to 90°. θ of the EF can be set from 0° to 180°. The
minimum voltage necessary to maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 100.0
V.
The setting of earth fault threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the
settings for directional EF: for example, user can set the threshold value of the EF at stage 1
using setting [EF1-DT/IDMT] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir]. The sensing
angle (θ) is set using the setting [EF1-Angle]. Figure 3.4-4 shows examples of (characteristic
angle) sensing angle.
Reverse
-3V0 -3V0 -3V0
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
-3V0
-3V0
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
(iii) Characteristic of directional EF in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting of
overcurrent threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the settings for
directional EF. Reverse is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir] when the direction of the EF on
stage 1 is considered.

The EF element monitors the currents, and when one of the currents is over the threshold, the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 110 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
EF element will operate after the operation time delay defined by the time characteristic
feature.
The user can choose the EF operate time delay characteristics, either (i) independent (definite)
time characteristic delay or (ii) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The operate time
of the independent (definite) time characteristic delay is a constant, and the operate time in
the dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay depends upon the level of the energizing
current.
The EF element reset time delay characteristic will be either the independent time reset or
the dependent time reset. This will be discussed in the reset time characteristic section.

The operate time of the independent time characteristic EF element will be a constant time
The user can set the EF1 scheme switch [EF1-Type] to “DT” for the independent time
characteristic. For each EF independent operate time; the value of the required operate time
is set using the setting TEF1 in the range 0.00–300.00s. Likewise, [EF2-Type] – [EF8-Type]
and TEF2 – TEF8 correspond for each of the EF2 to the EF8 independently.

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic EF element is inversely proportional to
the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time delay from a preset
The operate time of the dependent time characteristics is defined by equation (3.4-4)).
(Refer IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (3.4-4)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
Where:
Is = earth fault setting (amperes),
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 111 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

α = constant
The nine (9) pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.4-2. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each EF stage (EF1 to EF8). Figure 3.4-5 illustrates these characteristic curves. The User
should set the scheme switch [EF1-Type] for EF1 stage and similarly for other stages. The
scheme switches, “IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse,
“IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI” for IEEE
Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse,
“US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse and “Original” for
user-programmable characteristic.
TMS for each EF stage and each standard characteristic curve including user-programmable
of each EF stage; for example, the TMS for the IEC standard characteristic curve of EF1 stage
will be set using the scheme switch [EF1-TMS-IEC]. The other TMSs for the EF1 stage are also
set in the scheme switches [EF1-TMS-UK] for UK standard, [EF1-TMS-IEEE] for IEEE
standard, [EF1-TMS-US] for US standard, and [EF1-TMS-ORG] for the user programmable.
Each default TMS value is 1.0.

(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
and c; for example, original curve for EF1 can be specified with scheme switches
[EF1-k], [EF1-a] and [EF1-c].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 112 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The EF will be reset after the energizing (fault) current is back to the normal condition. The
reset time will have the delay time characteristic in order to correspond to the intermittent
fault condition and/or to coordinate with other relay. The reset time characteristics will be
either the instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on reset), the definite time resetting or the
dependent time resetting.
The instantaneous reset and the definite time resetting will be applicable for all EF
operate condition. The dependent time resetting is applicable for the dependent time operation
of the IEEE standard, the US standard and the original (user-programmable) operate.

The instantaneous reset is with no intentional delay on reset. For example, the user can set
EF1 stage as instantaneous reset by setting scheme switches [EF1-Rtype] to “DEF” and
[TEF1R] to “0.00”. Other stage should set the delay time value to 0.00.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 113 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The user can set EF1 stage as the definite resetting by setting scheme switches [EF1-Rtype]
to “DEF” and [TEF1R] to intentional delay of reset time. The user can set [TEF1R] in the range
of “0.00 – 300.00” in seconds.
Figure 3.4-6 illustrates the definite time resetting operation characteristic.
Intermittent
Fault
Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Definite time
reset Delayed
Reset
TRIP
Instantaneous reset

energizing current. The user can determine the reset time delay from a preset characteristic
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (3.4-5)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 114 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Where,
zero (seconds),
The user can set EF1 stage as the dependent time resetting by setting scheme switches [EF1-
Rtype] to “DEP”. The user can set RTMS for the IEEE standard, US standard or user-
programmable characteristic as [EF1-RTMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard characteristic curve,
[EF1-RTMS-US] for US standard and [EF1-RTMS-ORG] for an original (user-programmable).
Table 3.4-3 indicates the values of kr and β for the IEEE and US standard characteristic curve.
The user original dependent time resetting coefficient value of kr and β can be set using the
scheme switches [EF1-kr] and [EF1-b] respectively. Figure 3.4-7 illustrate the standard
characteristic curve.

IEC 60255-151 sec
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 115 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
its reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (3.4-5)
Figure 3.4-8 illustrates the dependent time characteristics,
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 116 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator

delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
Reset time
(iv) Summary of EF operation

Table 3.4-4 shows the summary of EF operation.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 117 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IEC IEEE US
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DT (Definite time) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓

The threshold current for the activation of EF is configured by settings; for example, setting
[EF1-DT/IDMT] is provided for the EF on stage 1. The other settings also are provided: setting
[EF2-DT/IDMT] to [EF8-DT/IDMT].
Note that the sets of threshold have distinct values among EF1, EF2, EF3, EF4, EF5,
EF6, EF7 and EF8 and should consider an input rating that is chosen between 1A rating and
5A rating. The input rating is discussed separately. (Refer FEP)
3.4.5 Reset Ratio

ratio of the EF1 is set for the setting [EF1-DPR]. The other ratios for the EF2, EF3 EF5, EF6,
EF7 and EF8 are also provided with settings: [EF2-DPR] to [EF8-DPR].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 118 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

(i) Harmonic detection
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection
(ICD) function. Each EF can negate the operation of the EF by using a scheme switch, as
a relay detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon
as the transformer is energized. For example, for EF1, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is
provided which can be set to block if blocking of EF1 is required when harmonic occurs.
Non is set for the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Block operation of VTF for EF

The operation of the EF can be blocked by the function of a voltage transformer failure
(VTF) with a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-VTFBlk]
as the operation of the EF1 is blocked during the VTF. Non is set for the scheme switch
[EF1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of EF trip

switch [EF1-TP1] is set to On to select TP1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using
the scheme switch [EF1-ALM] set to On.
3.4.7 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional EF1 illustrates in Figure 3.4-9
and Figure 3.4-10. Each element of the EF1 provides the result of judgment whether a pickup
current exceeds a setting, and then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is discussed
separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit function)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 119 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C23
TEF1
EF1
& & t 0 8000101B60
≥1 EF1-OPT
8000101C27 0.00–300s
EF1 PU
& ≥1 &
&
EF1-ICD-OR
EF1-TARWIND
EF1-EN On
EF1-VTF_DETECT
EF1-VTFBlk &
Block
≥1
EF1_BLOCK 800010EBB0
EF1_INST_OP
DT DT IDMT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI ≥1
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
EF1_TYPE ORIGINAL
Figure 3.4-9 Scheme logic for EF1 (1)

Note: EF1 PU is EF1 operation on pick up.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 120 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101B61
EF1-OPT
& EF1-TRIP1
EF1-TP1 On 8100101B62
& EF1-TRIP2
EF1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& EF1-TRIP3
EF1-TP3
On 8300101B64
& EF1-TRIP4
EF1-TP4 On 8400101B65
& EF1-TRIP5
EF1-TP5 8500101B66
On
& EF1-TRIP6
EF1-TP6 8B00101B6C
On
& EF1-ALARM
EF1-ALM
On
Figure 3.4-10 Scheme logic for EF1 (2)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 121 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.4.8 Setting
Setting of EF(Function ID: 45A401)
Un
Setting device 1A 5A Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ratin ratin its rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
g g
EF- The polarising voltage level of

Common 0.5 - 100.0 V (3.0) (3.0) 3.0 (3.0) 3.0
Vpol EF directional characteristic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 122 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Range
Un
Setting device Contents Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer
EF1-TarWind - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Tertiary winding for EF1 protection
EF1 directional
EF1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - (NonDir) (NonDir) NonDir (NonDir) NonDir
characteristic
de EF1 directional
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
g characteristic angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-
EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
EF1-Type - EF1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / US-CO2
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF1 threshold (in DT
EF1-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
0.02 – 25.00 EF1 threshold (in IDMT
EF1-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % EF1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 100 100 100 100
EF1 operating delay time
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF1 time multiplier of IEC
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF1 time multiplier of UK
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF1-TMS- EF1 time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE IEEE inverse curve
EF1 time multiplier of US
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF1-Rtype DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
EF1 definite time reset
TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF1 dependent reset time
EF1-RTMS-
F 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE
1 curve
EF1 dependent reset time
EF1-RTMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US
curve
EF1-RTMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of Original 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG
inverse curve
EF1 user original curve 0.0000
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1 operation block by 2f-
EF1-2fBlk Non / Block - Non Non Non Non Non
detection
EF1 operation block by
EF1-VTFBlk Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTF
EF1 trip command output
EF1-TP1 Off / On - On On On On On
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
EF1-ALM Off / On - EF1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 123 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 124 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF2 directional
characteristic
de EF2 directional
EF2-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF2-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF2-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF2 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF2R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF2 dependent reset time
EF2-RTMS-
F 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE
2 curve
EF2-RTMS-
US
curve
EF2-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 125 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF3 directional
characteristic
de EF3 directional
EF3-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF3-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF3-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF3 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF3-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF3R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E
F EF3-RTMS-
3 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE
curve
EF3-RTMS-
US
curve
EF3-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 126 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF4 directional
characteristic
de EF4 directional
EF4-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF4-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF4-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF4 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF4-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
E TEF4R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
F
4 EF4 dependent reset time
EF4-RTMS-
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE
curve
EF4-RTMS-
US
curve
EF4-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 127 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

from TP6 B0 contact
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF5 directional
characteristic
de EF5 directional
EF5-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF5-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF5-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF5 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF5-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF5-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF5-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
E
F TEF5R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 delay
EF5-RTMS-
IEEE
curve
EF5-RTMS-
US
curve
EF5-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF5-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 128 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF6 directional
characteristic
de EF6 directional
EF6-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF6-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF6-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF6 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF6-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF6-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF6-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
E
F
6 EF6 definite time reset
TEF6R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
EF6-RTMS-
IEEE
curve
EF6-RTMS-
US
curve
EF6-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF6-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 129 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF7 directional
characteristic
de EF7 directional
EF7-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF7-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF7-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF7 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF7-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF7-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF7-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
E 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
F
7 EF7-Rtype DEF / DEP - EF7 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
TEF7R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
EF7-RTMS-
IEEE
curve
EF7-RTMS-
US
curve
EF7-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF7-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 130 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF8 directional
characteristic
de EF8 directional
EF8-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EF8-DT 0.10 - A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 mode)
250.00
EF8-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF8 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF8-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF8-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF8-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
E EF8-TMS- EF8 time multiplier of
F 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
8
TEF8R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
EF8-RTMS-
IEEE
curve
EF8-RTMS-
US
curve
EF8-RTMS-
ORG
inverse curve
EF8-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 131 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
3.4.9 Data ID
EF (Function ID : 45A401)
8000101C23 EF1 EF1 relay element operated
8000101C27 EF1PU EF1 relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 EF1-OPT EF1 protection operated
8000101B61 EF1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EF1 protection
8B00101B6C EF1-ALARM Alarm signal by EF1 protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 132 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 133 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000001B60 EF-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EF protection operation
8B00001B6B EF-ALARM Alarm signal by EF protection operation
8000101BB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
8000101BB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
800010100D EF1_SECONDARY_RATING EF1 secondary rating

EF (Function ID: 45A401)
800010EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 134 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

EF (Function ID: 45A401)
800010EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 135 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn)

The earth fault protection using neutral current (EFIn) is able to detect earth fault conditions
and issue a trip command accordingly. The EFIn function has four non-directional stages
(EFIn1 to EFIn4) operating independently; the operation can be switched using scheme
switches. The EFIn1 stage is discussed for simplify, but the other stages (EFIn2 to EFIn4) are
also applicable. The EFIn1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [EFIn1-EN]; the transformer
winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [EFIn1-TarWind]. The entering neutral
currents for the EFIn function are obtained in the FEP_COMMON function Chapter
Transformer replica functions: FEP_COMMON function).
TP_REPLICA TP_EFIn TP_TRC
EFIn1 to EFIn4
EFIn
EFIn relay EFIn logic trip signal
FEP_COMMON
element sequence (TRIP CIRCUIT)
CT polarity
compensated
[EFIn*-Type] (Off / On)

[EFIn*-TarWind] (P/S/T)
In (1CTn, 2CTn, 3CTn), CT secondary rating, Full scale
Figure 3.5-1 EFIn block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 136 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The EFIn element monitors the neutral currents, and when one of the currents over the
threshold set in the replica setting, the EFIn element will operate after the operation time
delay defined by the time characteristic feature.
The user can choose the EFIn operate time delay characteristics, either (i) independent
(definite) time characteristic delay or (ii) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The
operate time of the independent (definite) time characteristic delay is a constant, and the
operate time in the dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay depends upon the level of the
energizing current.
The EFIn element reset time delay characteristic will be either the independent time
reset or the dependent time reset. This will be discussed in the reset time characteristic section.

The operate time of the independent time characteristic EFIn element will be a constant time
The user can set the EFIn1 scheme switch [EFIn1-Type] to “DT” for the independent time
characteristic. For each EFIn independent operate time; the value of the required operate time
is set using the setting TEFIn1 in the range 0.00–300.00s. Likewise, [EFIn2-Type] – [EFIn4-
Type] and TEFIn2 – TEFIn4 correspond for each of the EFIn2 to the EFIn4 independently.

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic EFIn element is inversely proportional
to the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time delay from a preset
The operate time of the dependent time characteristics is defined by equation (3.5-1)).
(Refer IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (3.5-1)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
Where:
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 137 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

α = constant
The nine (9) pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.5-2.
In addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen
for each EFIn stage (EFIn1 to EFIn4). Figure 3.5-2 illustrates these characteristic curves. The
user should set the scheme switch [EFIn1-Type] for EFIn1 stage and similarly for other stages.
The scheme switches, “IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very
inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI”
for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE
Extremely Inverse, “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse
and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
TMS for each EFIn stage and each standard characteristic curve including user-programmable
of each EFIn stage; for example, the TMS for the IEC standard characteristic curve of EFIn1
stage will be set using the scheme switch [EFIn1-TMS-IEC]. The other TMSs for the EFIn1
stage are also set in the scheme switches [EFIn1-TMS-UK] for UK standard, [EFIn1-TMS-IEEE]
for IEEE standard, [EFIn1-TMS-US] for US standard, and [EFIn1-TMS-ORG] for the user
programmable. Each default TMS value is 1.0.

(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
and c. For example, original curve for EFIn1 can be specified with scheme
switches [EFIn1-k], [EFIn1-a] and [EFIn1-c].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 138 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The EFIn will be reset after the energizing (fault) current is back to the normal condition. The
reset time will have the delay time characteristic in order to correspond to the intermittent
fault condition and/or to coordinate with other relay. The reset time characteristics will be the
instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on reset), the definite time resetting or the dependent
time resetting.
The instantaneous reset and the definite time resetting will be applicable for all EFIn
operate condition. The dependent time resetting is applicable for the dependent time operation
of the IEEE standard, the US standard and the original (user-programmable) operate
characteristics.

The instantaneous reset has no intentional delay on reset. For example, the user can set
EFIn1 stage as instantaneous reset by setting scheme switches [EFIn1-Rtype] to “DEF” and
[TEFIn1R] to “0.00”. Other stages should set the delay time value to 0.00.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 139 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The user can set EFIn1 stage as the definite resetting by setting scheme switches [EFIn1-
Rtype] to “DEF” and [TEFIn1R] to intentional delay of reset time. The user can set [TEFIn1R]
in the range of “0.00 – 300.00” in seconds.
Figure 3.5-3 illustrates the definite time resetting operation characteristic.
Intermittent
Fault
Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Definite time
reset Delayed
Reset
TRIP
Instantaneous reset

energize current. The user can determine the reset time delay from a preset characteristic
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (3.5-2)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 140 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Where,
zero (seconds),
The user can set EFIn1 stage as the dependent time resetting by setting scheme switches
[EFIn1-Rtype] to “DEP”. The user can set RTMS for the IEEE standard, US standard or user-
programmable characteristic as [EFIn1-RTMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard characteristic curve,
[EFIn1-RTMS-US] for US standard and [EFIn1-RTMS-ORG] for an original (user-
programmable). Table 3.5-3 indicates the values of kr and β for the IEEE and US standard
characteristic curve. The user original dependent time resetting coefficient value of kr and β
can be set using the scheme switches [EFIn1-kr] and [EFIn1-b] respectively.
Figure 3.5-4. illustrates the standard characteristic curve.

IEC 60255-151 sec
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 141 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
its reset state after the time t (I). The time t (I) is calculated using Equation (3.5-2).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 142 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator

delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
Reset time
(iv) Summary of EFIn operation

Table 3.5-4 shows the summary of EFIn operation.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 143 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IEC IEEE US
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DT (Definite time) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓

The threshold current for the activation of EFIn is configured by settings; for example, setting
[EFIn1-IDMT/DT] is provided for the EFIn on stage 1. The other settings also are provided:
setting [EFIn2-IDMT/DT], [EFIn3-IDMT/DT] and [EFIn4-IDMT/DT].
Note that the sets of threshold have distinct values among EFIn1, EFIn2, EFIn3 and
EFIn4 and should consider an input rating that is chosen between 1A rating and 5A rating.
The input rating is discussed separately. (Refer FEP)
3.5.4 Reset Ratio

ratio of the EFIn1 is set for the setting [EFIn1-DPR]. The other ratios for the EFIn2, EFIn3
and EFIn4 are also provided with settings: [EFIn2-DPR], [EFIn3-DPR], and [EFIn4-DPR].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 144 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

(i) Signal of EFIn trip
switch [EFIn1-TP1] is set to On to select TP1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using
the scheme switch [EFIn1-ALM] set to On.
3.5.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of EFIn1 is illustrated in Figure 3.5-6 and Figure 3.5-7. Each stage of the
EFIn provides the result of judgment whether a pickup current exceeds a setting, and then
trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay
application: Trip circuit function)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 145 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C23
TEFIN1
EFIn1
& & t 0 8000101B60
≥1 EFIn1-OPT
8000101C27 0.00–300s
EFIn1 PU
& ≥1 & &
Primary
EFIn1-TARWIND Secondary
Tertiary
EFIn1-EN On
EFIn1_BLOCK 800010EBB0 1
EFIn1_INST_OP
DT IDMT
DT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI ≥1
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
EFIn1_TYPE ORIGINAL
Figure 3.5-6 Scheme logic for EFIn1 (1)

Note: EFIn1 PU is EFIn1 operation on pick up.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 146 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101B61
EFIn1-OPT
& EFIn1-TRIP1
EFIn1-TP1 On
8100101B62
& EFIn1-TRIP2
EFIn1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& EFIn1-TRIP3
EFIn1-TP3
On 8300101B64
& EFIn1-TRIP4
EFIn1-TP4 On 8400101B65
& EFIn1-TRIP5
8500101B66
EFIn1-TP5
On
& EFIn1-TRIP6
EFIn1-TP6 8B00101B67
On
& EFIn1-ALARM
EFIn1-ALM
On
Figure 3.5-7 Scheme logic for EFIn1 (2)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 147 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.5.7 Setting
Setting of EFIn (Function ID: 45A801)
Range U Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Setting device 1A 5A I
Contents
rat rat rat rat rati rati rati rati rati rati
rating rating T ing ing ing ing ng ng ng ng ng ng
EFIn1-EN Off / On - EFIn1 protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
EFIn1- Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding
- (Primary) Primary Primary (Primary) Primary
TarWind Tertiary for EFIn1 protection
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
EFIn1-Type - EFIn1 delay type (DT) DT DT (DT) DT
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn1 threshold (in DT
EFIn1-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
EFIn1- EFIn1 threshold (in IDMT
IDMT
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
EFIn1-DPR 10 - 100 % EFIn1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) 100 100 (100) 100
EFIn1 operating delay time
TEFIn1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
EFIn1- EFIn1 time multiplier of IEC
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS-IEC inverse curve
EFIn1- EFIn1 time multiplier of UK
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS-UK inverse curve
EFIn1- EFIn1 time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS-IEEE IEEE inverse curve
EFIn1- EFIn1 time multiplier of US
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS-US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS-ORG Original inverse curve
EFIn1-
DEF / DEP - EFIn1 reset delay type (DEF) DEF DEF (DEF) DEF
Rtype
E
F EFIn1 definite time reset
TEFIn1R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
n EFIn1- EFIn1 dependent reset time
1 RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
IEEE curve
EFIn1 dependent reset time
EFIn1-
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US inverse (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
RTMS-US
curve
EFIn1-
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of Original inverse (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
RTMS-ORG
curve
EFIn1 user original curve
EFIn1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1 trip command output
EFIn1-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
EFIn1-ALM Off / On - EFIn1 alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 148 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Contents
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn2-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
IDMT
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
TEFIn2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
EFIn2-
Rtype
E
TEFIn2R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
IEEE curve
EFIn2-
RTMS-US
curve
EFIn2-
RTMS-ORG
curve
EFIn2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 149 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Contents
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn3-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
IDMT
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
TEFIn3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
EFIn3-
Rtype
E
TEFIn3R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
IEEE curve
EFIn3-
RTMS-US
curve
EFIn3-
RTMS-ORG
curve
EFIn3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 150 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Contents
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn4-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
IDMT
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
TEFIn4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
EFIn4-
Rtype
E
TEFIn4R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
IEEE curve
EFIn4-
RTMS-US
curve
EFIn4-
RTMS-ORG
curve
EFIn4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 151 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.5.8 Data ID
EFIn (Function ID : 45A801)
8000101C23 EFIn1 EFIn1 relay element operated
8000101C27 EFIn1PU EFIn1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 EFIn1-OPT EFIn1 protection operated
8000101B61 EFIn1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EFIn1 protection
8B00101B67 EFIn1-ALARM Alarm signal by EFIn1 protection
8000001B70 EFIn-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EFIn protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 152 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

EFIn (Function ID : 45A801)
8B00001B7B EFIn-ALARM Alarm signal by EFIn protection
8000101BB0 EFIn1_BLOCK EFIn1 protection block command
8000101BB1 EFIn1_INST_OP EFIn1 protection instant operation command
800010100D EFIn1_SCNDRY_RATING EFIn1 secondary rating

EFIn (Function ID: 45A801)
800010EBB0 EFIn1_BLOCK EFIn1 protection block command
800010EBB1 EFIn1_INST_OP EFIn1 protection instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 153 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)

The overcurrent function in negative-sequence (OCN) detects overcurrent in negative-
sequence. The OCN can have both directional and non-directional elements; it has four stages
(OCN1 to OCN4), which operate independently. To simplify, only the OCN1 element is
discussed but the others are also applicable.
TP_REPLICA TP_OCN TP_TRC

OCN1 to OCN4 OCN trip
signal
OCN relay OCN logic (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[OCN*-TarWind](P/S/T)
IY, IΔ, I1, I2, I0, In, CT secondary rating, Full scale, ICD output
Figure 3.6-1 OCN block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
– Main features NA ✓ ✓
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 154 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.6.1 Non-directional and directional OCN

The user can set the OCN as either a non-directional OCN or a directional OCN for each stage
(OCN1 to OCN4). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional OCN as either forward type
OCN or reverse type OCN.
(i) Characteristic of the non-directional OCN

The characteristic of the non-directional type OCN is a circle that has a center at the origin,
as shown in Figure 3.6-2. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the non-directional OCN
element and the hatched area shows the operation area of the non-directional OCN element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure the non-directional EF that is, the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OCN at stage 1 using the setting [OCN1-
DT/IDMT]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir].
I2
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 3.6-2 Characteristic of non-directional OCN1-DT/IDMT
(ii) Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.6-3, the characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction is
the directional OCN.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 155 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Φ θ Polarizing voltage (-V2)
I2
Figure 3.6-3 Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle of the directional OCN. The half plane
A setting, a scheme switch, and the non-directional OCN, provide the settings for the
directional OCN: for example, the threshold value (IOCN) at stage 1 is set using the setting
[OCN1] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir]. The sensing angle (θ) is set using
the setting [OCN1-Angle], and the θ is set in the range 0–180°. A reference signal (or polarizing
signal –V2) that is derived internally is shown in Figure 3.6-4. Figure 3.6-5 shows an example
of an angle and a characteristic set by the θ.
The operation of the OCN is based on the following equations:
𝐼2 ≥ 𝐼𝑂𝐶𝑁 (3.6-1)
𝐼2 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (3.6-2)
𝑉2 ≥ 𝑂𝐶𝑁_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (3.6-3)
Where,
I2 = Negative phase sequence current
V2 = Negative phase sequence voltage
−V2 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
Φ = lagging angle
θ = OCN setting angle
IOCN = Setting value of OCN ([OCN1-DT/IDMT] to [OCN4-DT/IDMT])
OCN_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([OCN-Vpol])
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 156 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the zero-
sequence impedance of the system; this value ranges approximately from 50° to
90°. θ of OCN can be set from 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to
maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 25 V.
−V2
VA
V2
Figure 3.6-4 Relationship between negative sequence current and reference voltage
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 157 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Characteristic of the directional OCN in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. Reverse is set for
the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir] to set the directional OCN in the reverse direction.
3.6.2 Threshold value

The threshold current for the activation of OCN is configured using settings. [OCN1-DT/IDMT]
is provided for stage 1 of OCN, similarly settings [OCN2-DT/IDMT], [OCN3-DT/IDMT] and
[OCN4-DT/IDMT] are also provided for other stages.
It should be noted that the settings of threshold are different among OCN1 to OCN4 and
is dependent on the input ratio of a transformer module that is chosen between 1A rating and
5A rating. The transformer module is discussed separately (See chapter Technical description)
3.6.3 Reset Ratio

The reset ratio of the threshold current for activation is set using a setting; for example, the
ratio of OCN1 is set using the setting [OCN1-DPR]. The other ratios for OCN2, OCN3 and
OCN4 are set using the settings [OCN2-DPR], [OCN3-DPR] and [OCN4-DPR].

(i) Harmonic detection function
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection (ICD)
function. Each OCN can block the operation of OCN by using a scheme switch, when the relay
detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when the
transformer is energized. For OCN1, scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] is provided; Non is set for
the scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Blocking OCN by VTF

The operation of OCN can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF) function using
the scheme switch. Block is set for scheme the switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] to block the OCN1
operation during VTF. Non is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of OCN trip

Up to six (6) BO contacts can be selected to signal trip command; for example, scheme switch
[OCN1-EN] is set to On to select OCN1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using the scheme
switch [OCN1-ALM] set to On.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 158 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.6.5 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OCN1 is shown in Figure 3.6-6.
According to Figure 3.6-6, OCN1 provides the result of decision whether a current of negative
sequence exceeds a setting, and then operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are
discussed separately. (See chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
8000101C23
TOCN1
OCN1 t 0 8000101B60
& &
≥1 OCN1-OPT
8000101C27 0.00-300.00s
OCN1 PU
&
≥1 &
&
OCN1-ICD-OR OCN1_TYPE DT IDMT
OCN1-TARWIND IEC-NI
IEC-VI
OCN1-EN ON
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
OCN1-VTF_DETECT IEEE-MI
&
OCN1-VTFBLK IEEE-VI
BLOCK
IEEE-EI
≥1
US-C02
800010EBBO OCN1_BLOCK
US-C08
ORIGINAL
800010EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP
OCN1-OPT 8000101B61
OCN1-TP1 On & OCN1-TRIP1
8100101B62
8200101B63
8300101B64
OCN1-TP4 On
& OCN1-TRIP4
8400101B65
8500101B66
OCN1-TP6 On
& OCN1-TRIP6
8B00101B67
OCN1-ALM On
& OCN1-ALARM
Figure 3.6-6 Scheme logic for OCN1
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 159 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.6.6 Setting
Setting of OCN(Function ID: 45B401)
Setting
ni Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
device 1A rating 5A rating ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
ts g g g g g g g g g g
The polarizing
C
OCN- voltage level of
o 0.5 - 25.0 V (3.0) (3.0) 3.0 (3.0) 3.0
Vpol OCN directional
m
characteristic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 160 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
OCN1- OCN1 protection
Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
EN enable
OCN1- Primary / Target transformer
TarWin Secondary / - winding for OCN1 Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
d Tertiary protection
OCN1- NonDir / Forward OCN1 directional
- (NonDir) (NonDir) NonDir (NonDir) NonDir
Dir / Reverse characteristic
d OCN1 directional
OCN1-
0 - 180 e characteristic (45) (45) 45 45 45
Angle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-
OCN1-
MI / IEEE-VI / - OCN1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
Type
IEEE-EI / US-
CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
0.02–250.00
OCN1- OCN1 threshold
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
DT (in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
IDMT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN1- OCN1 drop-
10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
DPR out/pick-up ratio
OCN1 operating
TOCN1 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN1- OCN1 time
TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEC 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
OCN1- OCN1 time
TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of UK 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
O
C OCN1- OCN1 time
N TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1 IEEE inverse curve
OCN1- OCN1 time
TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
OCN1 time
OCN1-
multiplier of
TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Original inverse
ORG
curve
OCN1- OCN1 reset delay
DEF / DEP - DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
Rtype type
TOCN1 OCN1 definite
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
R time reset delay
OCN1 dependent
OCN1-
reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
multiplier of IEEE
IEEE
inverse curve
OCN1 dependent
OCN1-
reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
multiplier of US
US
inverse curve
OCN1 dependent
OCN1- reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG Original inverse
curve
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-k - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
500.00000
coefficient
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-a - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
10.00000
coefficient
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-c - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
10.00000
coefficient
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 161 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
OCN1 user
OCN1- 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
kr 500.00000
coefficient
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-b - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
10.00000
coefficient
OCN1 operation
OCN1-
Non / Block - block by 2f- Non Non Non Non Non
2fBlk
detection
OCN1- OCN1 operation
Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk block by VTF
OCN1 trip
OCN1- command output
TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN1- OCN1 alarm
ALM enable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 162 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
EN enable
d OCN2 directional
OCN2-
Angle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-
OCN2-
Type
IEEE-EI / US-
CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
0.02–250.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
DT (in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
IDMT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN2- OCN2 drop-
10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
OCN2 operating
TOCN2 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN2- OCN2 time
IEC inverse curve
OCN2- OCN2 time
UK inverse curve
O
C OCN2- OCN2 time
OCN2- OCN2 time
US inverse curve
OCN2 time
OCN2-
multiplier of
TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Original inverse
ORG
curve
Rtype type
TOCN2 OCN2 definite
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
R time reset delay
OCN2 dependent
OCN2-
reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
multiplier of IEEE
IEEE
inverse curve
OCN2 dependent
OCN2-
reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
multiplier of US
US
inverse curve
OCN2 dependent
OCN2- reset time
curve
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 163 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
OCN2 user
OCN2- 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
kr 500.00000
coefficient
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN2 operation
OCN2-
2fBlk
detection
VTFBlk block by VTF
OCN2 trip
TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN2- OCN2 alarm
ALM enable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 164 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
OCN3 OCN3 protection
-EN enable
OCN3
Primary / Target transformer
-
Secondary / - winding for OCN3 Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
TarWi
Tertiary protection
nd
OCN3 NonDir / Forward OCN3 directional
-Dir / Reverse characteristic
OCN3 d OCN3 directional
- 0 - 180 e characteristic (45) (45) 45 45 45
Angle g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-
OCN3
-Type
IEEE-EI / US-
CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
0.02–250.00
OCN3 OCN3 threshold
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
-DT (in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
OCN3 0.02–25.00
OCN3 threshold
- 0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
(in IDMT mode)
IDMT 5.00 25.00
OCN3 OCN3 drop-
10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
-DPR out/pick-up ratio
TOCN OCN3 operating
0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
3 delay time
OCN3 OCN3 time
-TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEC 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEC inverse curve
OCN3 OCN3 time
O -TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of UK 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
C UK inverse curve
N OCN3 OCN3 time
3 -TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
OCN3 OCN3 time
-TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
OCN3 time
OCN3
multiplier of
-TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Original inverse
ORG
curve
OCN3
OCN3 reset delay
- DEF / DEP - DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
type
Rtype
TOCN OCN3 definite
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
3R time reset delay
OCN3 OCN3 dependent
- reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
RTMS multiplier of IEEE
-IEEE inverse curve
OCN3 OCN3 dependent
- reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
RTMS multiplier of US
-US inverse curve
OCN3 dependent
OCN3
reset time
-
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
RTMS
Original inverse
-ORG
curve
OCN3 user
OCN3 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-k 500.00000
coefficient
OCN3 user
OCN3 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-a 10.00000
coefficient
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 165 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
OCN3 user
OCN3 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-c 10.00000
coefficient
OCN3 user
OCN3 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-kr 500.00000
coefficient
OCN3 user
OCN3 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-b 10.00000
coefficient
OCN3 operation
OCN3
-2fBlk
detection
OCN3
- OCN3 operation
VTFB block by VTF
lk
OCN3 trip
OCN3 command output
-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
OCN3 command output
-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
OCN3 command output
-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
OCN3 command output
-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
OCN3 command output
-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
OCN3 command output
-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN3 OCN3 alarm
-ALM enable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 166 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
EN enable
d OCN4 directional
OCN4-
Angle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-
OCN4-
Type
IEEE-EI / US-
CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
0.02–250.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
DT (in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
IDMT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN4- OCN4 drop-
10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
OCN4 operating
TOCN4 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN4- OCN4 time
IEC inverse curve
OCN4- OCN4 time
UK inverse curve
O
C OCN4- OCN4 time
OCN4- OCN4 time
US inverse curve
OCN4 time
OCN4-
multiplier of
TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Original inverse
ORG
curve
Rtype type
TOCN4 OCN4 definite
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
R time reset delay
OCN4 dependent
OCN4-
reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
multiplier of IEEE
IEEE
inverse curve
OCN4 dependent
OCN4-
reset time
RTMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
multiplier of US
US
inverse curve
OCN4 dependent
OCN4- reset time
curve
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 167 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
OCN4 user
OCN4- 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
kr 500.00000
coefficient
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN4 operation
OCN4-
2fBlk
detection
VTFBlk block by VTF
OCN4 trip
TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN4- OCN4 alarm
ALM enable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 168 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.6.7 Data ID
OCN(Function ID: 45AC01)
8000101C23 OCN1 OCN1 relay element operated
8000101C27 OCN1PU OCN1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 OCN1-OPT OCN1 protection operated
8000101B61 OCN1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OCN1 protection
8B00101B67 OCN1-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN1 protection
8000001B60 OCN-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OCN protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 169 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8B00001B6B OCN-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN protection
8000101BB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
8000101BB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command

800010EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
800010EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 170 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Broken conductor protection (BCD)

A series fault or an open circuit fault that results in neither a phase-fault nor an earth-fault is
caused by breaker contact failure, blown fuses, and false operation of single-phase switchgear.
The IEC defines a series fault as a fault for which the impedances of each of the three-phases
are not equal that is caused by the interruption of one or two phases.
Three broken conductor protections (BCD-P, BCD-S, BCD-T) are designed to determine
unbalance conditions in each transformer winding caused by an open circuited conductor. For
simplicity, the BCD-P function is only discussed here, but the others are also applicable.
TP_REPLICA TP_BCD TP_TRC

BCD-P, BCD-S, BCD-T
BCD
BCD relay BCD logic trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
IY, I∆, I1, I2 I0, In, CT secondary rating, Full scale, ICD Output
Figure 3.7-1 BCD block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
– Main features NA NA NA
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 171 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault

Figure 3.7-2 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when series fault occurs
in single-phase. Series fault comprises positive sequence, negative sequence and zero sequence
impedances, which are divided into left and right. The ratio of left to right is determined by
the fault location such as k1:1-k1, k2:1-k2, and k0:1-k0.
E1A Series or open circuit fault E1B
k1 1– k1
I1F I1F
k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
E1A
E
Positive sequence 1
k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
B
Negative sequence k0Z0 I0F I0F

(1-k0)Z0
Zero sequence
I1F
k1Z1 k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
E1A Z0 E1B
Figure 3.7-2 Equivalent circuit for a single-phase fault
Series fault results in positive sequence current (I1F), negative sequence current (I2F) and
zero phase sequence current (I0F) in single-phase. These are defined by the following equations:
𝐼1𝐹 + 𝐼2𝐹 + 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (3.7-1)
𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 ∙ 𝑍0𝐹 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (3.7-2)
𝐸1𝐴 ∙ 𝐸1𝐵 = 𝑍1𝐹 𝐼1𝐹 ∙ 𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 (3.7-3)
Where,
E1A ,E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive-sequence impedance
Z2: negative-sequence impedance
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 172 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Z0: zero-sequence impedance
From Equation (3.7-1), (3.7-2), and (3.7-3), the following equations are derived:
𝑍2 + 𝑍0
𝐼1𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (3.7-4)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍0
𝐼2𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (3.7-5)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍2
𝐼0𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (3.7-6)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
The magnitude of the fault current depends on impedance across the system, difference
in phase angle, and magnitude between the power source voltages from both the ends.
As described earlier, BCD-P element detects the fault by measuring the ratio of negative-
sequence current to positive-sequence current (I2F/I1F). The ratio can also be defined with
negative-sequence impedance (Z2) and zero-sequence impedance (Z0); hence, the equation of
the ratio is expressed as follows:
𝐼2𝐹 |𝐼2𝐹 | 𝑍0
= = (3.7-7)
𝐼1𝐹 |𝐼1𝐹 | 𝑍2 + 𝑍0
The ratio value is 0.5 or higher when the zero-sequence impedance is larger than the
negative-sequence impedance. The ratio, thus, is close to 1.0 if the system is high-impedance
earthed or a one-end earthed system.
3.7.2 Characteristic and setting

Figure 3.7-3 shows that BCD-P characteristic (hatched region); BCD-P operates when positive
sequence current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, negative sequence current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In,
and value |I2/I1| is higher than the settings [BCD-P].
I2
|𝐼2 |
൘|𝐼 | ≥ [BCD-P]-𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
1
|𝐼1 | ≥ 0.04 × 𝐼𝑛 & BCD-P trip

command
|𝐼2 | ≥ 0.01 × 𝐼𝑛
0.01×In
0 I1
0.04×In
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 173 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 3.7-3 Characteristic of BCD-P

(i) Harmonic detection function
The operation of BCD-P is blocked when IED detects a harmonic, which is caused by a
magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when the transformer is energized. Block is set for
the scheme switches [BCD-P-2fBlk] to block the operation of BCD function during the
occurrence of the harmonic.
(ii) Signal of BCD trip

The BCD-P element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue
a trip command by the reception of the trip signal. For example, when the user set On for
scheme switch [BCD-P-TP1], ‘BCD-P-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the
BDC-P1 element operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it
drives the binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit
breaker. The BCD-P element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [BCD-
P-TP2] to [BCD-P-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also
generated when On is set for scheme switch [BCD-P-ALM].
Note: The TRC function is discussed separately. See Chapter Relay application: Trip
circuit.
3.7.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.7-4 shows the BCD-P scheme logic. It issues a trip command through a delayed pick-
up timer value, which is set using the setting [TBCD-P]. Off is set for the scheme switch [BCD-
P-EN] to disable the BCD-P operation.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 174 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C23 8000101B60
BCD-P TBCD-P
& t 0
& BCD-P-OPT
0.00 to 300.00s
ICD-P-OR
On
BCD-P-EN
8000001BB0
800010EBB0 BCD-P-BLOCK 1
To TRC
On 8000101B61
BCD-P-TP1 &
≥1 8000001B61
BCD-TRIP1
On 8100101B62
BCD-P-TP2 &
8200101B63
BCD-P-TP3 On &
8300101B64 ≥1 8100001B62
On BCD-TRIP2
BCD-P-TP4 &
8400101B65
BCD-P-TP5 On &
8500101B66 ≥1 8200001B63
BCD-TRIP3
BCD-P-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B64
On BCD-TRIP4
BCD-P -ALM &
≥1 8400001B65
BCD-TRIP5
≥1 8500001B66
BCD-TRIP6
≥1 8B00001B6C
BCD-ALARM
BCD-S-TRIP1
BCD-S Function logics
BCD-S-TRIP6
BCD-S -ALARM
BCD-T-TRIP1
BCD-T Function logics
BCD-T-TRIP6
BCD-T-ALARM
Figure 3.7-4 Scheme logic for BCD-P
Negative-sequence currents in the system normally affect the setting values in the [BCD-
P]. The BCD-P function determines the ratio (I2F/I1F) continuously. The user can check the
present ratio along with the maximum value (I21 max), measured 15 minutes earlier. It is
recommended that the user should distinguish the present ratio against the value during
commissioning stage; the user should set a value for [BCD-P] from 130% to 150% of the ratio
that was checked.
Note: The ratio (I2F/ I1F) is displayed only when the current in positive-sequence (or load
current) on the secondary circuit is larger than 2% of the rated current on
secondary circuit.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 175 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.7.5 Setting
Setting of BCD(Function ID: 45B001))
Un
ratin ratin its ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
g g g g g g g g g g g g
BCD-P-
Off / On - BCD-Primary protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
BCD-Primary relay operating
BCD-P 0.10 - 1.00 - 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
value (I2/I1)
TBCD- 0.00 - BCD-Primary operating delay
s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
P 300.00 time
BCD-P- BCD-Primary operation block by
2fBlk ICD
BCD-P- BCD-Primary command output
TP1 from TP1 B0 contact
BC BCD-P- BCD-Primary command output
D-P TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
BCD-P-
Off / On - BCD-Primary alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM
BCD-S-
Off / On - BCD-Secondary protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
BCD-Secondary relay operating
BCD-S 0.10 - 1.00 - 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
value (I2/I1)
TBCD- 0.00 - BCD-Secondary operating delay
s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
S 300.00 time
BCD-S- BCD-Primary operation block by
2fBlk ICD
BCD-S- BCD-Secondary command output
BC BCD-S- BCD-Secondary command output
D-S TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
BCD-S-
Off / On - BCD-Secondary alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM
BCD-T-
Off / On - BCD-Tertiary protection enable (Off) Off Off Off Off
EN
BCD-Tertiary relay operating
BCD-T 0.10 - 1.00 - (0.20) 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
value (I2/I1)
TBCD- 0.00 - BCD-Tertiary operating delay
s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
T 300.00 time
BCD-T- BCD-Primary operation block by
Non / Block - (Non) Non Non Non Non
2fBlk ICD
BCD-T- BCD-Tertiary command output
Off / On - (On) On On On On
BC BCD-T- BCD-Tertiary command output
D-T TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
BCD-T-
Off / On - BCD-Tertiary alarm enable (Off) Off Off Off Off
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 176 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.7.6 Data ID
BCD(Function ID: 45B001)
8000101C23 BCD-P BCD-P relay element operated
8100201C23 BCD-S BCD-S relay element operated
8200301C23 BCD-T BCD-T relay element operated
8000101B60 BCD-P-OPT BCD-P operated
8100201B60 BCD-S-OPT BCD-S operated
8200301B60 BCD-T-OPT BCD-T operated
8000101B61 BCD-P-TRIP1 BCD-P trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00101B6C BCD-P-ALARM BCD-P alarm enable
8000201B61 BCD-S-TRIP1 BCD-S trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00201B6C BCD-S-ALARM BCD-S alarm enable
8000301B61 BCD-T-TRIP1 BCD-T trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00301B6C BCD-T-ALARM BCD-T alarm enable
8000001B61 BCD-TRIP1 BCD trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6C BCD-ALARM BCD alarm enable
8000101BB0 BCD-P_BLOCK BCD-P block command
8100201BB0 BCD-S_BLOCK BCD-S block command
8200301BB0 BCD-T_BLOCK BCD-T block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 177 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

BCD(Function ID: 45B001)
800010EBB0 BCD-P_BLOCK BCD-P block command
810020EBB0 BCD-S_BLOCK BCD-S block command
820030EBB0 BCD-T_BLOCK BCD-T block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 178 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Thermal overload protection (THM)

Transformers can get overheated when overloaded beyond the design limits. The thermal
overload function (THM) determines temperature rise by monitoring the current and detects
the thermal overload of a device. The THM has exponential characteristics according to the
IEC 60255-149 standard. The THM function also determines pre-load condition and generates
a trip signal when an overload condition arises. The THM provides an alarm and a trip signal.
The alarm is set lower than 100% (trip value) so that a corrective action can be taken before
the trip occurs. The THM function is enabled using scheme switch [THMT-EN]; the transformer
winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [THM-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_THM TP_TRC

THM and THMA
THM
THM relay THM logic Tri signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[THMT-EN](ON/OFF )
[THM-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-IY_1,2,3; 1W-I1; 1W-I2; 2W-IY_1,2,3; 2W-I1; 2W-I2; 3W-IY_1,2,3; 3W-I1; 3W-I2
Figure 3.8-1 THM Function block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 179 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.8.1 Characteristic
(i) Thermal state determination
The THM function simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm; THM can detect
an overload condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined using the following equation:
𝐼2 −𝑡⁄
θ= 2 (1 − 𝑒 τ) × 100 (%) (3.8-1)
𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
where I is the load current applied; IAOL is the allowable overload current;  is the thermal time
constant. The user should select the value of  in accordance with the heating and cooling
characteristics for the generator stator that is to be protected. Therefore, with regard to the
thermal time constant for heating, a value of  should be set using setting [TTHM]. Conversely,
with regard to cooling, set the value of  for setting [TTHM-rad].
Thermal state 0% is the cold state, whereas 100% reflects the thermal limit—which is
the point at which no further temperature rise can be tolerated safely and the system should
be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is subject to setting [THM], which
determines the value of overload current. The THM function signals a trip when the value of
θ is at 100%.
THM determines I using the positive-sequence current (I1) and negative-sequence

current (I2) using Equation (3.8-2); it operates in accordance with the characteristics defined
in IEC 60255-149† when the user sets scheme switch [THM-Itype] to Equivalent.
𝐼 = √𝐼12 + 𝑞 × 𝐼22 (3.8-2)
where,
q: Unbalance factor in the generator, setting [THM-q]; the unbalance factor is used
for motor/generator protection; the user can obtain the information with regard to
‘q’ from the motor/generator manufacturer.
†Note:If the user prefers to use the form for THM given in IEC 60255-8, set Max phase
for scheme switch [THM-Itype]. In this case, THM determines the largest of the
three individual phase currents.
The period of time for a trip to occur depends not only on the degree of overload, but also
on the degree of load current prior to reaching the overload state. The period of the trip, that
is, depends on whether the overload is applied from ‘cold’ or ‘hot’. THM has thresholds for
alarm and trip; hence, the two thresholds exist independently.
(ii) Thermal characteristic

The THM characteristics are determined by the following two equations. Equation (3.8-3) is
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 180 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
used to define the cold state. Equation (3.8-4) is used to define the hot state:
𝐼2
t = τ ∙ Ln [ 2 ] (3.8-3)
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝑃2
t = τ ∙ Ln [ 2 ] (3.8-4)
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
where t is the time to trip in minutes for a constant overload current of I, I is the overload
current (largest phase current in amperes), IAOL is the permitted overload current (amperes),
Ip is the pre-load current (amperes), τ is the thermal time constant (minutes), and Ln is the
natural logarithm.
In Equation (3.8-3), cold curves are special versions of the hot curves where Ip is zero,
catering for the situation where a cold system is switched onto an immediate overload.
Figure 3.8-2(left) shows the cold state for the condition where an overload has been
switched onto a previously un-loaded system. Figure 3.8-2(right) shows the hot state for the
condition where an overload is switched onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90%
of its capacity. Both figures are in accordance with the IEC 60255-149 standard curves, and
are drawn for a range of settings for time constant ().
Thermal Curves Thermal Curves

(Cold Curve - no prior load) (Hot Curve - 90% prior load)
1000 1000
100
100
Operate Time (minutes)
Operate Time (minutes)
10
10
1

1 100 
50
0.1 100
20 50
10
20
0.1 10
5
0.01 5
2
2
1
1
0.01 0.001
1 10 1 10
Overload Current Overload Current
(Multiple of IAOL) (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 3.8-2 Thermal curves (cold curve –no prior load)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 181 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The THM function is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
trip command by the reception of the trip signal. For example, when the user set On for scheme
switch [THM-TP1], ‘THM-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the THM element
operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it drives the binary
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The THM
element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [THM-TP2] to [THM-TP6]
are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated when On is set
for scheme switch [THM-ALM].
circuit.
3.8.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.8-3 shows the scheme logic for the THM. The THM has two thresholds; that is, “A”
threshold is used for alarming, whereas “T” threshold is used for tripping.
The threshold is set using the setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the tripping
threshold. The alarm signal is not generated when Off is set for the scheme switch [THMA-EN].
The trip signal is not generated when Off is set for the scheme switch [THMT-EN]. PLC signals
THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to block the operation of the THM.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 182 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C23
8000101B60
& &
A
THM-OPT-ALARM
THM 8100201C23
T 8100201B60
& &
THM-OPT-TRIP
Primary
THM-TARWIN Secondary
D Tertiary
THM-ITYPE Max phase

Equivalent
THMA-EN
ON
THMT-EN
ON
1
800010EBB0 THMA_BLOCK
810020EBB0 THMT_BLOCK
1
8000001B60 To TRC
& & THM-TRIP1
THM-TP1 On
8100001B61
& & THM-TRIP2
THM-TP2 On
8200001B62
& & THM-TRIP3
THM-TP3 On
8300001B63
& & THM-TRIP4
THM-TP4 On 8400001B64
& & THM-TRIP5
THM-TP5 8500001B65
On
& & THM-TRIP6
THM-TP6
On &
8B00001B6B
≥1
& & THM-ALARM
THM-ALM On
Figure 3.8-3 Scheme logic for Thermal overload protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 183 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.8.4 Setting
Setting of TP THM (Function ID: 451401)
Range U Model1 Model2 Molde3 Model4 Model5(Full)
n
Setting device i Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
t rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
s
T Target
THM- Primary /
H transformer
TarWi Secondary / - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
M winding for THM
nd Tertiary
protection
0.40–10.00
Thermal overload
THM 0.40 - 2.00 - A 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
current
2.00 10.00
m
Heating thermal
TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 i 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
time constant
n
Co
m
m TTHM Cooling thermal
0.5 - 500.0 i 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
mo -rad time constant
n
n
Calculation using
maximum phase
THM- Max phase /
- current or Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent
Itype Equivalent
equivalent
heating current
Unbalance factor
relating to the
THM-q 0 - 10 - 0 0 0 0 0
additional heat
produced by I2
THMT Thermal
-EN protection enable
THM trip
THM- command output
TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
THM trip
THM- command output
TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
THM trip
THM- command output
T TP3 from TP3 B0
H contact
M THM trip
T THM- command output
TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
THM trip
THM- command output
TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
THM trip
THM- command output
TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
THM- THM alarm
ALM enable
THMA- Thermal alarm

T EN enable
H Thermal alarm
M THM- level multiplier
50 - 100 % 80 80 80 80 80
A Alarm (Percentage of
[THM] setting)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 184 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.8.5 Data ID
TP THM(Function ID: 451401)
8000101C23 THM-A THM alarm relay element operated
8100201C23 THM-T THM trip relay element operated
8000101B60 THM-OPT-ALARM THM alarm instant operation command
8100201B60 THM-OPT-TRIP THM trip instant operation command
8000001B60 THM-TRIP1 THM trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00001B6B THM-ALARM THM alarm signal
8000101BB0 THMA_BLOCK THM alarm block command
8100201BB0 THMT_BLOCK THM trip block command

TP THM(Function ID: 451401)
800010EBB0 THMA_BLOCK THM-A block command
810020EBB0 THMT_BLOCK THM-T block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 185 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Inrush current detection function (ICD)

The Inrush current detection function (ICD) is used to detect inrush current during
transformer energization; it stops incorrect operations in the overcurrent (OC), earth fault (EF),
negative phase sequence overcurrent (OCN) and broken conductor detection (BCD) functions.
TP_REPLICA TP_ICD TP_OC
ICD-P, ICD-S, ICD-T
ICD TP_EF
ICD relay ICD logic Trip signal TP_OCN
FEP_COMMON
element sequence TP_BCD
CT polarity
compensated
[ICD-2f](ON/OFF )
[ICD-TarWind](P/S/T)
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT; Ia-2CT, Ib-2CT, Ic-2CT; Ia-3CT, Ib-3CT, Ic-3CT; Ia-4CT, Ib-4CT, Ic-4CT;
Ia-5CT, Ib-5CT, Ic-5CT; CT secondary rating, Full scale
Figure 3.9-1 ICD block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 186 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.9.1 Inrush current

Energizing a transformer is characterised by an inrush current which is typically about 8 to
12 times the transformer winding rated current. The inrush current has a predominant second
harmonic, third harmonic, fifth harmonic content; it varies the degree of higher harmonics. As
the third harmonic is present during a fault condition and the fifth harmonic is present during
overexcitation of transformer, they are not reliable for the detection of the inrush current. The
second harmonic is present only during energizing transformer; hence the inrush current can
be detected surely.
3.9.2 Characteristic
The ICD function examines the ratio of second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental
current (I1f) for each phase. If the ratio|I2f |⁄|I1f | is larger than a setting value (ICD-2f), the
ICD function will identify the presence of inrush current. Figure 3.9-2 shows the characteristic
and the hatched area shows the operation region. In this figure, the threshold is represented
with setting [ICD-OC].
I2f
ICD-2f(%) = tanθ×100
|I2f|/|I1f|ICD-2f(%) ICD
&
|I1f|ICD–OC
0 I1f
ICD–OC
Figure 3.9-2 ICD element and characteristic
As shown in Figure 3.9-2, settings [ICD-2F] and [ICD-OC] should be used when the
detection of 2nd harmonic inrush current is required. The user should set On for the scheme
switch [ICD-EN] to enable the ICD function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 187 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.9.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.9-3 shows the scheme logic for ICD function. When second harmonic inrush current
is detected, the ICD signals are sent to block other protection functional elements like OC, EF,
OCN and BCD.
To OC, EF, OCN, BCD
A 8000041C24 8000011C24
& ICD-P-A
ICD
B 8100041C25 8100011C25
& ICD-P-B
C 8200041C26 8200011C26
& ICD-P-C
8300041C23 8300011C23
≥ & ICD-P-OR
ICD-OR
8000021C24
& ICD-S-A
& 8100021C25
ICD-S-B
8200021C26
& ICD-S-C
8300021C23 ICD-A
& ICD-S-OR
ICD-B
8000031C24
& ICD-T-A ICD-C
8100031C25
& ICD-T-B
8200031C26
& ICD-T-C
8300031C23
& ICD-T-OR
Primary
Secondary
ICD-TarWind
Tertiary
Figure 3.9-3 Scheme logic for ICD
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 188 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.9.4 Setting
Setting of ICD (Function ID: 480A01)
Setting Uni
1A 5A Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
device ts
ICD-
Off / On - ICD function enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
ICD- Primary / Target transformer
TarWi Secondary / - winding for ICD Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
nd Tertiary calculation
ICD
Sensitivity for 2f
ICD-2f 10 - 50 % 15 15 15 15 15
component detection
0.10–25.00
ICD- Threshold of
0.10 - 0.50 - A 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
OC fundamental current
5.00 25.00
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 189 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.9.5 Data ID
ICD (Function ID : 480A01)
8000011C24 ICD-P-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Primary
8100011C25 ICD-P-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Primary
8200011C26 ICD-P-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Primary
8300011C23 ICD-P-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Primary
8400021C24 ICD-S-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Secondary
8500021C25 ICD-S-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Secondary
8600021C26 ICD-S-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Secondary
8700021C23 ICD-S-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Secondary
8800031C24 ICD-T-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Tertiary
8900031C25 ICD-T-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Tertiary
8A00031C26 ICD-T-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Tertiary
8B00031C23 ICD-T-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Tertiary

8B00041C24 ICD-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8B00041C25 ICD-B ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8B00041C26 ICD-C ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8B00041C23 ICD-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 190 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF)

When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to clear a fault due to CB failure, then the circuit breaker
failure protection (CBF) function clears the fault by sending a trip signal to another back-up
CB. For example, we can find the CBF operation during the following steps:
1st step when the transformer protection operates and issues a trip command to the
transformer CB;
2nd step if the transformer CB fails to open and clear the fault;
3rd step then the CBF protection detects the CB failure and issues a trip command to
the back-up CB, which may be at the remote end or could be at the incomer to
the sub-station.
The user can also program the CBF protection to try to trip the faulted CB again before the
CBF function starts to generate a trip signal to the back-up CB. The CBF function has a several
protection elements. For simplicity, the CBF1 function is only discussed, but the CBF2 to CBF5
functions are also applicable. The CBF1 function operates with the [CBF1-EN]=On.
TP_REPLICA TP_CBF TP_TRC

CBF1 to CBF5
CBF
CBF CBF logic Trip signals (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[CBF*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OCCBF*-EN](ON/OFF)
1CT-IY_1,2,3; 2CT-IY_1,2,3; 3CT-IY_1,2,3; 4CT-IY_1,2,3; 5CT-IY_1,2,3
Figure 3.10-1 CBF Function block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 191 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.10.1 CBF features

The CBF1 operation is initiated by the over current element (OCCBF1). The CBF1 operation
also can be triggered by other elements such as transformer differential protection (DIF),
overexcitation protection (VPH) etc., when the user programs other protection functions to
issue a trigger signals for the CBF1 function using the PLC connection points:
GEN.CBF1_START, EXT.CBF1_START_A, EXT.CBF1_START_B, EXT.CBF1_START_C AND
EXT.CBF1_START. The threshold for OCCBF1 element can be set using setting [OCCBF1];
the user can enabled or disabled the element using the scheme switch [OCCBF1-EN]. Note that
the CBF1 operation is based only on the operation of other protection functions, if the OCCBF1
element dose not operate.
3.10.2 Re-trip command

If a primary CB does not trip due to the failure, the CBF1 function should issue a back-up trip
to another CB near the primary CB or an adjacent CB located upstream. However, the CBF1
function can issue a trip command (‘re-trip’) again for the primary CB before the generation of
a back-up trip command. If the CB failure persists after the generation of the ‘re-trip’ command,
the back-up trip command is issued to the adjacent CB. The time diagram with regard to ‘re-
trip’ and ‘back-up trip’ are discussed later. (See Figure 3.10-2)
For issuing the ‘re-trip’ command, the user should set On for the scheme switch [CBF1-
Retrip]. Two operation modes are provided for the ‘re-trip’ command: (i) internal mode and (ii)
external mode. The user can choice a mode using scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip].
(i) Internal mode: If On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], the CBF1
function is ready for issuing a ‘re-trip’ command. In the CBF1 function, the OCCBF1
element generates a ‘re-trip’ signal when other protection functions operate.
(ii) External mode: When On-T is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], the CBF1
function generates a ‘re-trip’ command based on the operation of other protection
functions. The external mode overrides the operation of OCCBF1 relay; this can be
used in case of transfer trip command coming from remote end CB protection.
The user should set On for the scheme switch [OCCBF1] for the re-trip command. When
a time delay is needed for ‘re-trip’ operation, set a delay time for the setting [TCBF1-RE]. The
user should coordinate the time delay with the CB response time. The coordination time is
described later (See Section 3.10.5(ii)). ‘Re-trip’ command has an advantage since it can avoid
unnecessary tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly required
during maintenance and testing of the system.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 192 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.10.3 Backup-trip command

As described above, another trip command can be issued by the ‘re-trip’ feature for the primary
CB so that CB is being tripped securely. If the ‘re-trip’ command cannot trip the primary CB
in technically sound, the CBF1 feature will issue a ‘back-up trip’ command. The back-up trip
is used as a last resort to clear the fault. For issuing the ‘back-up trip’ command, the user is
required to set On or ON-AftRe for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip]:
 If On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip], then “back-up trip” is issued without
waiting for “re-trip”.
 If On-AftRe is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip], then “back-up trip” is issued only
after “re-trip”.
Appearance of fault Start of CBF1 Back-trip for an adjacent CB
Adjacent CB Close
Open
On
Trip signal from other function
Off Trip of primary Trip of primary CB Off
CB (ordinary (Re-trip)
trip)
State of the primary CB Close
Tcb Tcb
Run
OCCBF1 stage Stop Toc Toc Stop
On
TCBF1-RE
Timer#1 (TCBF1-RE) Off Off
On
Operation of Re-trip Off Off
On
TCBF1-TP
Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) Off Off
On
CBF1 trip signal Off Off
Tcb : primary CB operating time Toc : OCCBF1 reset time
Figure 3.10-2 Time chart of re-trip and backup trip during CBF1 operation
Figure 3.10-2 shows the sequence diagram of CBF1 operation; it shows that the primary
CB is unable to trip whereas the adjacent CB can be tripped. The CBF1 function operates by
the reception of signals from other protection functions.
Suppose that the fault is cleared if the primary CB is tripped normally. After that, the
OCCBF1 relay drops-off before Timer#1 (TCBF1-RE) times out. Accordingly, the CBF1
function will be stopped.
If the OCCBF1 function continues to operate after the CB being tripped with an normal
trip command and Timer #1 (TCBF1-RE) times out, the ‘re-trip’ command is required to trip
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 193 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
the primary CB. If the primary CB is tripped by the ‘re-trip’ command, the OCCBF1 relay will
drop off before Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) times out; accordingly, the CBF1 function will stop.
If the primary CB fails to be tripped by the ‘re-trip’ command; if the OCCBF1 relay
continues to operate and Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) times out, the CBF1 function shall issue a back-
up trip command for the adjacent CB to clear the fault, as a last resort.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 194 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.10.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.10-3 shows the CBF1 logic; trip commands are issued to the trip circuit (TRC) function
when each logic operates. The phase current is used as an input to the OCCBF1. On should be
set for the scheme switch [OCBF1-EN] to enable the OCBF1 trip operation.
8000101C20
TCBF1-RE 8000101B60
A & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-A
8100101C21
&
≥1 ≥1 8100101B61
OCCBF1 B & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-B
8200101C22 &
≥1 ≥1
C 8200101B62
& & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-C
≥1 ≥1
On 0.00 to 300.00s
OCCBF1-EN
800010EBB0 GEN.CBF1_START ≥1 & &
≥1 & &
≥1 & &
CBF1-START-A
800010EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A
CBF1-START-B
810010EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B
CBF1-START-C
820010EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C
8000101B63
To TRC
800010EBB4 EXT.CBF1_START ≥1 8000101B64
& CBF1-RETRIP1
8100101B65
800010EBB6 CBFI-RE_INST
& CBF1-RETRIP2
8200101B66
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK & &
8300101B67
CBF1 -RETRIP3
OFF &
8400101B68
CBF1 -RETRIP4
ON &
& CBF1 -RETRIP5
8500101B69
CBF1-Retrip ON-T &
& CBF1 -RETRIP6
CBF1-EN ON
CBF1-EN=ON
On
CBF1-RETP1 CBF1-RE_RET
On
CBF1-RETP2
On
CBF1-RETP3
On
CB1F-RETP4
On
CBF1-RETP5
On
CBF1-RETP6
Figure 3.10-3 re-trip logic in CBF1

TCBF1-TP
CBF1-START-A & t 0 CBF1-TRIP-A
≥1 ≥1
CBF1-START-B & t 0 8000101B70
CBF1-TRIP-B
≥1 ≥1
CBF1-START-C & t 0 CBF1-TRIP-C 8100101B71
≥1 ≥1
0.00 to 300.00s 8200101B72
CBF1-RETRIP-A 8000101B73
& &
CBF1- RETRIP-B ≥1
& &
CBF1- RETRIP-C & &
CBF1-TRIP
OFF
ON &
CBF1-Trip ON-AftRe
&
CBF1-EN ON
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK &
800010EBB7 CBF1-TP_INST
To TRC
8000101B74
CBF1-TP1 On & CBF1-TRIP1
8100101B75
CBF1-TP2 On & CBF1-TRIP2
8200101B76
CBF1-TP3 On & CBF1 -TRIP3
8300101B77
CB1F-TP4 On
& CBF1 -TRIP4
8400101B78
CBF1-TP5 On & CBF1 -TRIP5
8500101B79
CBF1-TP6 On CBF1 -TRIP6
&
Figure 3.10-4 back-up trip in CBF1
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 195 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.10.5 Combination of trip commands

(i) Direct of trip commands
As shown in Figure 3.10-3 and Figure 3.10-4, the CBF1 function can generate six trip
commands for the trip circuit (TRC‡) function; the user can assign trip commands for the TRC
function by setting On or Off for the scheme switches [OCBF-TP1] and others.
‡Note: TRC function is discussed separately. For more information see Relay application:
Trip circuit function.
(ii) Operation timing

The time settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP] are determined based on the opening time of
the primary CB and the reset time of OCCBF1 relay (see Tcb and Toc in Figure 3.10-2). The
following example shows the calculation for setting, when “re-trip” command is considered:
Setting [TCBF1-RE] =Breaker opening time + OCCBF1 reset time + Margin

=40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=70ms
Setting [TCBF1-TP] = Output relay operating time on Re-Trip + Breaker opening time +
OCCBF1 reset time + Margin
=10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=80ms
If “re-trip” command is not used, the user should set the same value for the settings [TCBF1-
TP] and [TCBF1-RE].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 196 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.10.6 Settings
Setting of CBF(Function ID: 45B401)
Range Un Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
1A rating 5A rating its 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
CBF1 protection
CBF1-EN Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
CBF1 current flow
OCCBF1-EN Off / On - decision enable using On On On On On
OC relay element
0.02 - 25.00 OCCBF1 relay
OCCBF1 A operate level (Current 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00
flow detection)
CBF1-Retrip Off / On / On-T - Retrip operating mode On On On On On
TCBF1-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s Retrip timer 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150
Command output at
CBF1-RETP1 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
TP1 B0 contact
Command output at
TP2 B0 contact
Command output at
Re- CBF1-RETP3 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
trip TP3 B0 contact
C Command output at
B TP4 B0 contact
F
Command output at
1 CBF1-RETP5 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
TP5 B0 contact
Command output at
TP6 B0 contact
CBF1-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - Trip operating mode On On On On On
TCBF1-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s Trip timer 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
Trip command output
CBF1-TP1 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
from TP1 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP2 B0 contact
Trip command output
Trip CBF1-TP3 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
from TP3 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP4 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP5 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP6 B0 contact
CBF2 protection
enable
CBF2 current flow
OC relay element
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00
flow detection)
C Command output at
B TP1 B0 contact
F Command output at
TP2 B0 contact
Command output at
trip TP3 B0 contact
Command output at
TP4 B0 contact
Command output at
TP5 B0 contact
Command output at
TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 197 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Trip command output
from TP1 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP2 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP3 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP4 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP5 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP6 B0 contact
CBF3 protection
enable
CBF3 current flow
OC relay element
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00
flow detection)
Command output at
TP1 B0 contact
Command output at
TP2 B0 contact
Command output at
trip TP3 B0 contact
C Command output at
B TP4 B0 contact
F
Command output at
TP5 B0 contact
Command output at
TP6 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP1 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP2 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP3 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP4 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP5 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP6 B0 contact
CBF4 protection
enable
CBF4 current flow
C OC relay element
B 0.02 - 25.00 OCCBF4 relay
F OCCBF4 A operate level (Current 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00
4 flow detection)
Re- TCBF4-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s Retrip timer 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150
trip Command output at
TP1 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 198 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Command output at
TP2 B0 contact
Command output at
TP3 B0 contact
Command output at
TP4 B0 contact
Command output at
TP5 B0 contact
Command output at
TP6 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP1 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP2 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP3 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP4 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP5 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP6 B0 contact
CBF5 protection
enable
CBF5 current flow
OC relay element
0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00
flow detection)
Command output at
TP1 B0 contact
Command output at
TP2 B0 contact
Command output at
trip TP3 B0 contact
C Command output at
B TP4 B0 contact
F
Command output at
TP5 B0 contact
Command output at
TP6 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP1 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP2 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP3 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP4 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP5 B0 contact
Trip command output
from TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 199 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.10.1 Data ID
CBF(Function ID: 45B401)
8000101C20 OCCBF1-A OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OCCBF1-B OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OCCBF1-C OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OCCBF3-C OCCBF3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OCCBF4-A OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OCCBF4-B OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OCCBF4-C OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101B60 CBF1-RETRIP-A CBF1 retrip operated (phase-A)
8100101B61 CBF1-RETRIP-B CBF1 retrip operated (phase-B)
8200101B62 CBF1-RETRIP-C CBF1 retrip operated (phase-C)
8A00301B62 CBF3-RETRIP-C CBF3 retrip operated (phase-C)
8C00401B60 CBF4-RETRIP-A CBF4 retrip operated (phase-A)
8D00401B61 CBF4-RETRIP-B CBF4 retrip operated (phase-B)
8E00401B62 CBF4-RETRIP-C CBF4 retrip operated (phase-C)
8000101B63 CBF1-RETRIP CBF1 retrip operated
8000101B70 CBF1-TRIP-A CBF1 trip operated (phase-A)
8100101B71 CBF1-TRIP-B CBF1 trip operated (phase-B)
8200101B72 CBF1-TRIP-C CBF1 trip operated (phase-C)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 200 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8A00301B72 CBF3-TRIP-C CBF3 trip operated (phase-C)
8C00401B70 CBF4-TRIP-A CBF4 trip operated (phase-A)
8D00401B71 CBF4-TRIP-B CBF4 trip operated (phase-B)
8E00401B72 CBF4-TRIP-C CBF4 trip operated (phase-C)
8000101B73 CBF1-TRIP CBF1 trip operated
8000101B64 CBF1-RETRIP1 CBF1 retrip output command output from TP1 B0
8000101B74 CBF1-TRIP1 CBF1 trip output command output from TP1 B0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 201 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000001B60 CBF-RETRIP1 CBF retrip output command output from TP1 B0
8000001B70 CBF-TRIP1 CBF trip output command output from TP1 B0
8000001B66 CBF-RETRIP-A CBF retrip operated (phase-A)
8100001B67 CBF-RETRIP-B CBF retrip operated (phase-B)
8200001B68 CBF-RETRIP-C CBF retrip operated (phase-C)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 202 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000001B76 CBF-TRIP-A CBF trip operated (phase-A)
8100001B77 CBF-TRIP-B CBF trip operated (phase-B)
8200001B78 CBF-TRIP-C CBF trip operated (phase-C)
8000001B80 CBF-1 CBF1 operated
8C00001B86 CBF-OPT-A CBF operated (phase-A)
8D00001B87 CBF-OPT-B CBF operated (phase-B)
8E00001B88 CBF-OPT-C CBF operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 GEN.CBF1_START GEN.CBF1 start command output
8000101BB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-A)
8100101BB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-B)
8200101BB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-C)
8A00301BB3 EXT.CBF3_START-C EXT.CBF3 start command output (phase-C)
8C00401BB1 EXT.CBF4_START-A EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-A)
8D00401BB2 EXT.CBF4_START-B EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-B)
8E00401BB3 EXT.CBF4_START-C EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-C)
8000101BB4 EXT.CBF1_START EXT.CBF1 start command output
8000101BB5 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 block command output
8000101BB6 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 retrip instant operation command output
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 203 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000101BB7 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 trip instant operation command output
800010100D CBF1_SCND_RATING CBF1 secondary rating

800010EBB0 GEN.CBF1_START GEN.CBF1 start command
800010EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-A)
810010EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-B)
820010EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-C)
8A0030EBB3 EXT.CBF3_START-C EXT.CBF3 start command (phase-C)
8C0040EBB1 EXT.CBF4_START-A EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-A)
8D0040EBB2 EXT.CBF4_START-B EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-B)
8E0040EBB3 EXT.CBF4_START-C EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-C)
800010EBB4 EXT.CBF1_START EXT.CBF1 start command
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 204 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

800010EBB6 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 retrip instant operation command
800010EBB7 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 trip instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 205 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-ground (UV)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-ground (UV) is of four elements
independently: UV1, UV2, UV3 and UV4. The user can select a time characteristic among
definite time (DT), inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), and original time using UV
settings; the settings also enables or disenables the UV operation. The user can also set a
threshold and the ratio of drop-out voltage (DO) to pick-up voltage (PU). The UV function has
delay timers for issuing trip signals. The UV1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the
UV2 to UV4 stages are applicable. The UV1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [UV1-EN];
the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [UV1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_UV TP_TRC
UV1 to UV4
UV
UV relay UV logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[UV*-EN](ON/OFF )
[UV*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1,2,3; 2W-VY_1,2,3; 3W-VY_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,S,T(3PN/1PN)
Figure 3.11-1 UV block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 206 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.11.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 3.11-2 shows the UV characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick-up
threshold voltage (PU) is represented by the second outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO)
is represented by the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UV1 element is set using the setting
[UV1]. The DO voltage of the UV1 element is set using the setting [UV1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UV function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVBLK].
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 3.11-2 Characteristic of UV element

.
3.11.2 Time characteristic
The UV element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode as either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic
delay or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic
delay, the operation time is constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation
time depends upon the level of the voltage.
(i) Definite time characteristic (DT)

To operate the definite (independent) time delay mode, set DT for the scheme switch
[UV1-Type]; the user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.11-3 shows the examples of
pick-up and the drop-off points, based on the fault occurrences and the operation time. The
value of the time counter in the UV1 element is incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault the time counter does not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the UV1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting [TUV1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increases corresponding to the duration of
series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UV1 element issues a trip
command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip command, if the series of fault stops
completely, the operation of the UV1 element is stopped after the reset time [TUV1R].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 207 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
When the user requires the resetting of UV1 element operation immediately, set zero for
the settings [TUV1R]. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the reset threshold, the
operation of the UV1 element is reset.
Condition fault occurrence

Interm ittent fault A series fault
T3
Fault observation by the relay
Issue of trip comm and
Relay operation reset

Incrim ination of time counter
corresponding to the fault
duration. Trip level
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increm ent process in time Reset of tim e counter
T1: Resetting time set by the user counter
T2: Actual resetting tim e in the relay operation Value m aintenance of tim e counter
T3: Tim e gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 3.11-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), set IDMT for the scheme switch [UV1-
Type].
Pick-up characteristic
The invers time delay (IDMT) characteristic is applied when the operation of the UV1 element
is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. Figure 3.11-4 illustrates the
characteristic curves for each time multiplier setting [UV1-TMS] using the equation (3.11-1),
to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127.
𝑘
t(V) = TMS × {[ 𝑎] + 𝑐} (3.11-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 208 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
V = energizing voltage (voltage),

Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, c, a = constants
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable
(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.11-2, are set, and when Original is set for the scheme
switch [UV1-Type]. The constants are set using the settings [UV1-k], [UV1-a], and [UV1-c].
Table 3.11-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User-programmable 0.00000 – 500.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000
(Original) by 0.00001 step by 0.0001 step by 0.00001 step
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 3.11-4 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS
Drop-off characteristic
The reset characteristic in the IDMT is similar to the reset characteristic in the DT. Refer to
section 3.11.2(i) for the reset setting and others.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 209 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

(i) Blocking UV operation
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the UV operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk]. However,
if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk].
(iii) Disabling UV operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [UV1-EN] to disable the UV1 operation. On is set for the scheme
switch to enable UV1 operation.
3.11.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.11-5 shows the UV1 elements and logics in the UV function; trip commands and an
alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each UV element is operated. On is set
for the scheme switch [UV1-EN] to enable the UV1 trip operation. Setting [TUV1] is provided
to delay the generation of trip command.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 210 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C20 TUV1
8000101B62
A & & t 0 UV1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
UV1 B t 0
8200101C22 & & & UV1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200101B64
& & t 0 UV1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
UV1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
A
8100101C25 &
UV1
B
PU 8200101C26
C
≥1 8000101B61
UV1PU-OR
UV1-EN
On
UV1-TARWIND
8000001C20
A TUVBLK TUVBLK1
8100001C21 8000001B60
t 0 0 t UVBLK
UVBLK B &
8200001C22
C 0.00 - 300.00s 0.05s NON UVBLK
1 ≥1
UV1-EN
On
UV-Test
On
UV1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
UV-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
UV-Type ≥1
Original
UV1-OPT-A
8000101B65 UV1-OPT
≥1
UV1-OPT-B
UV1-OPT-C TO TRC
8000101B66
UV1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On UV-TRIP1
UV1-TP2 &
8200101B68
UV1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
On UV-TRIP2
UV1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
UV1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 UV-TRIP3
UV1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On UV-TRIP4
UV1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
UV-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
UV-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
UV-ALARM
UV4-TRIP1
UV4 function logics
UV4-TRIP6
UV4-ALARM
Figure 3.11-5 Scheme logic for UV function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 211 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.11.5 Setting
Setting of UV(Function ID: 473001)
Un
Setting device Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
1A
5A 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating its ratin rati ratin ratin rati rati
rating
ratin rati rati
g ng g g ng ng g ng ng
C UVBL
Off / On - UV block function enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
o K-EN
m UVBL
5.0 - 20.0 V UV block threshold (10.0) (10.0) 10.0 (10.0) 10.0
m K
o TUVB
0.00 - 300.00 s UV block delay time (10.00) (10.00) 10.00 (10.00) 10.00
n LK
UV1-
Off / On - UV1 protection enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
EN
UV1- Primary / Target transformer
TarWin Secondary / - winding for UV1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
UV1- DT / IDMT /
- UV1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
Type Original
UV1 5.0 - 130.0 V UV1 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
UV1- UV1 drop-out/pick-up
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
UV1 operating delay time
TUV1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
UV1- UV1 time multiplier (in
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
UV1 definite time reset
TUV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
0.00000 - UV1 user original curve
UV1-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
500.00000 coefficient
UV1-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
U UV1-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V UV1-
1 UV1 operation block by
VTFBl Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTF
k
UV1 trip command
UV1-
Off / On - output from TP1 B0 (On) (On) On (On) On
TP1
contact
UV1 trip command
UV1-
U TP2
contact
V
UV1 trip command
UV1-
TP3
contact
UV1 trip command
UV1-
TP4
contact
UV1 trip command
UV1-
TP5
contact
UV1 trip command
UV1-
TP6
contact
UV1-
Off / On - UV1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
ALM
UV2-
EN
TarWin Secondary / - winding for UV2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
UV2- DT / IDMT /
Type Original
UV2 5.0 - 130.0 V UV2 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
U
V UV2 operating delay time
TUV2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
2 (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
UV2 definite time reset
TUV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
UV2-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV2-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV2-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 212 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Un
1A
5A 1A 5A
rating
ratin rati rati
UV2-
UV2 operation block by
VTF
k
UV2 trip command
UV2-
TP1
contact
UV2 trip command
UV2-
TP2
contact
UV2 trip command
UV2-
TP3
contact
UV2 trip command
UV2-
TP4
contact
UV2 trip command
UV2-
TP5
contact
UV2 trip command
UV2-
TP6
contact
UV2-
ALM
UV3-
EN
(Primary Secondar
TarWi Secondary / - winding for UV3 (Primary) Primary (Primary)
) y
nd Tertiary protection
UV3- DT / IDMT /
Type Original
UV3 5.0 - 130.0 V UV3 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
TUV3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TUV3 UV3 definite time reset
0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
R delay
UV3-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
U 0.00000 - UV3 user original curve
UV3-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V3 10.00000 coefficient
UV3-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV3-
VTF
k
UV3- UV3 trip command output
Off / On - (On) (On) On (On) On
UV3-
ALM
UV4-
EN
(Primary Secondar
TarWi Secondary / - winding for UV4 (Primary) Primary (Primary)
) y
nd Tertiary protection
UV4- DT / IDMT /
U Type Original
V4 UV4 5.0 - 130.0 V UV4 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
TUV4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 213 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Un
1A
5A 1A 5A
rating
ratin rati rati
TUV4 UV4 definite time reset
0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
R delay
UV4-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV4-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV4-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV4-
VTF
k
UV4-
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 214 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.11.6 Data ID
UV(Function ID: 473001)
8000101C20 UV1-A UV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 UV1-B UV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 UV1-C UV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600201C22 UV2-C UV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 UV3-C UV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 UV4-A UV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 UV4-B UV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 UV4-C UV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 UV1PU-A UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 UV1PU-B UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 UV1PU-C UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600201C26 UV2PU-C UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 UV3PU-C UV3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 UV4PU-A UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 UV4PU-B UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 UV4PU-C UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 UV1-OR UV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 UV1PU-OR UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 UV1-OPT-A UV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 UV1-OPT-B UV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 UV1-OPT-C UV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8600201B64 UV2-OPT-C UV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 UV3-OPT-C UV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 UV4-OPT-A UV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 UV4-OPT-B UV4 protection operated (phase-B)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 215 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8E00401B64 UV4-OPT-C UV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 UV1-OPT UV1 protection operated
8000101B66 UV1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UV1 protection
8400101B6A UV1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by UV1 protection
8500101B6B UV1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by UV1 protection
8B00101B6C UV1-ALARM Alarm signal by UV1 protection
8000001C20 UVBLK-A UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100001C21 UVBLK-B UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200001C22 UVBLK-C UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000001B60 UVBLK UV protection block command by UVBLK
8000001B70 UV-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UV protection
8B00001B7B UV-ALARM Alarm signal by UV protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 216 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8C00001B7C UV-OPT-A UV protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B7D UV-OPT-B UV protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B7E UV-OPT-C UV protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command

800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 217 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
UVS protection for GRT (UVS)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (UVS) is of four elements
independently: UVS1, UVS2, UVS3 and UVS4. The user can select a time characteristic among
definite time (DT), inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), and original time using UV
settings; the settings also enables or disenables the UVS operation. The user can also set a
threshold and the ratio of drop-out voltage (DO) to pick-up voltage (PU). The UVS function has
delay timers for issuing trip signals. The UVS1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the
UVS2 to UVS4 stages are applicable. The UVS1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [UVS1-
EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [UVS1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_UVS TP_TRC

UVS1 to UVS4
UVS
UVS relay UVS logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[UVS*-EN](ON/OFF )
[UVS*-TarWind](P/S/T
)
1W-VΔ_1,2,3; 2W-VΔ_1,2,3; 3W-VΔ_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,S,T(3PN/3PP/1PP)
Figure 3.12-1 UVS block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 218 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.12.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 3.11-2 shows the UVS characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick-
up threshold voltage (PU) is represented by the second outer circle; the drop-off voltage point
(DO) is represented by the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UVS1 element is set using the
setting [UVS1]. The DO voltage of the UVS1 element is set using the setting [UVS1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UVS function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVSBLK].
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 3.12-2 UVS element characteristic

The UV element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
delay or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay.

To operate the definite (independent) time delay mode, set DT for the scheme switch
[UVS1-Type]; the user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.11-3 shows the examples of
pick-up and the drop-off points, based on the fault occurrences and the operation time. The
value of the time counter in the UVS1 element is incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault the time counter does not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the UVS1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting [TUVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration of series
faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UVS1 element issues a trip
command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip command, if the series of fault stops
completely, the operation of the UVS1 element is stopped after the reset time [TUVS1R].
When the user requires the resetting of UVS1 element operation immediately, set zero
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 219 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
for the settings [TUVS1R]. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the reset threshold,
the operation of the UVS1 element is reset.

Interm ittent fault A series fault
T3
Issue of trip comm and

Incrim ination of time counter
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increm ent process in time Reset of tim e counter
T2: Actual resetting tim e in the relay operation Value m aintenance of tim e counter
T3: Tim e gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 3.12-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), set IDMT for the scheme switch [UVS1-
Type].
The invers time delay (IDMT) characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1
element is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT
characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 3.11-4 illustrates the characteristic curves for each
time multiplier setting [UVS1-TMS] using the equation (3.11-1), to be in conformity to IEC
60255-127.
𝑘
t(V) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.12-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 220 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
TMS = time multiplier setting,

k, a, c = Constants
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable
(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.11-2, are set, and when Original is set for the scheme
switch [UVS1-Type]. The constants are set using the settings [UVS1-k], [UVS1-a], and [UVS1-
c].
Table 3.12-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 3.12-4 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS
Drop-off characteristic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 221 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

(i) Blocking UVS operation
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the UVS operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk].
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk].
(iii) Disabling UVS operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [UVS1-EN] to disable the UVS1 operation. On is set for the
scheme switch to enable UVS1 operation.
3.12.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.11-5 shows the UVS1 elements and logics in the UVS function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OV element is operated. On is set
for the scheme switch [UVS1-EN] to enable the OV1 trip operation. Setting [TUVS1] is provided
to delay the generation of trip command.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 222 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C20 TUVS1
8000101B62
AB & & t 0 UVS1-OPT-AB
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
UVS1 BC t 0
8200101C22 & & & UVS1-OPT-BC
≥1
CA 8200101B64
& & t 0 UVS1-OPT-CA
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
UVS1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
AB
8100101C25 &
UVS1
BC
PU 8200101C26
CA
≥1 8000101B61
UVS1PU-OR
UVS1-EN
On
UVS1-TARWIND
8000001C20
AB TUVSBLK TUVSBLK1
8100001C21 8000001B60
t 0 0 t UVSBLK
UVSBLK BC &
8200001C22
CA 0.00 - 300.00s 0.05s NON UVSBLK
1 ≥1
UVSBLK-EN
On
UVS-Test
On
UVS1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
UVS1-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
UVS1-Type ≥1
Original
UVS1-OPT-A
8000101B65 UVS1-OPT
≥1
UVS1-OPT-B
UVS1-OPT-C 8000101B66 To TRC

UVS1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On UVS-TRIP1
UVS1-TP2 &
8200101B68
UVS1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 ≥1 8100001B71
On UVS-TRIP2
UVS1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
UVS1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 UVS-TRIP3
UVS1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C 8300001B73
≥1
On UVS-TRIP4
UVS1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
UVS-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
UVS-TRIP6
≥1 8B00001B7B
UVS-ALARM
UVS4-TRIP1
UVS4 function logics
UVS4-TRIP6
UVS4-ALARM
Figure 3.12-5 Scheme logic for UVS function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 223 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.12.5 Setting
Setting of UVS(Function ID: 473401)
n
Setting device 1A 5A i Contents 5
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A
rating rating t A
s
C UVSBLK-
Off / On - UVS block function enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
o EN
m UVSBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UVS block threshold (10.0) (10.0) 10.0 (10.0) 10.0
m
o TUVSBLK 0.00 - 300.00 s UVS block delay time (10.00) (10.00) 10.00 (10.00) 10.00
n
UVS1-EN Off / On - UVS1 protection enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
Primary /
UVS1- Target transformer winding for (Primary Primar
Secondary / - (Primary) (Primary) Primary
TarWind UVS1 protection ) y
Tertiary
DT / IDMT /
UVS1-Type - UVS1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
Original
UVS1 5.0 - 130.0 V UVS1 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
UVS1-DPR 100 - 120 % UVS1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
UVS1 operating delay time (in
TUVS1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
DT mode)
UVS1- UVS1 time multiplier (in IDMT
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS mode)
TUVS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UVS1 definite time reset delay (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
0.00000 - UVS1 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS1-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
500.00000 coefficient ) 0
U 0.00000 - UVS1 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS1-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
V 10.00000 coefficient ) 0
S 0.00000 - UVS1 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS1-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
1 10.00000 coefficient ) 0
UVS1-
Non / Block - UVS1 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk
UVS1 trip command output
UVS1-TP1 Off / On - (On) (On) On (On) On
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
U UVS1-TP4 Off / On - (On) (On) On (On) On
from TP4 B0 contact
V
S UVS1-TP5 Off / On - (On) (On) On (On) On
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
UVS1-
Off / On - UVS1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
ALM
Primary /
UVS2- Target transformer winding for (Primary Primar
TarWind UVS2 protection ) y
Tertiary
DT / IDMT /
Original
TUVS2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS mode)
U TUVS2R 0.0 - 300.0 s UVS2 definite time reset delay (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
V 0.00000 - UVS2 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS2-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
S 500.00000 coefficient ) 0
2 0.00000 - UVS2 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS2-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS2-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS2-
VTFBlk
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 224 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

n
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A
rating rating t A
s
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
UVS2-
ALM
Primary /
UVS3- Target transformer winding for (Primary Second
TarWind UVS3 protection ) ary
Tertiary
DT / IDMT /
Original
TUVS3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS mode)
UVS3-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
U 0.00000 - UVS3 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS3-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
V 10.00000 coefficient ) 0
S 0.00000 - UVS3 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS3-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
3 10.00000 coefficient ) 0
UVS3-
VTFBlk
UVS3 trip command output from
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
UVS3-
ALM
Primary /
UVS4- Target transformer winding for (Primary Second
TarWind UVS4 protection ) ary
Tertiary
DT / IDMT /
Original
TUVS4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS mode)
UVS4-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
U 500.00000 coefficient ) 0
V 0.00000 - UVS4 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS4-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
S 10.00000 coefficient ) 0
4 0.00000 - UVS4 user original curve (0.00000 0.0000
UVS4-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS4-
VTFBlk
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 225 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

n
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A
rating rating t A
s
UVS4-
ALM
3.12.6 Data ID
UVS(Function ID: 473401)
8000101C20 UVS1-AB UVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C21 UVS1-BC UVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C22 UVS1-CA UVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600201C22 UVS2-CA UVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00301C22 UVS3-CA UVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8C00401C20 UVS4-AB UVS4 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C21 UVS4-BC UVS4 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C22 UVS4-CA UVS4 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101C24 UVS1PU-AB UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100101C25 UVS1PU-BC UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200101C26 UVS1PU-CA UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600201C26 UVS2PU-CA UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00301C26 UVS3PU-CA UVS3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00401C24 UVS4PU-AB UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 UVS4PU-BC UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 UVS4PU-CA UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000101B60 UVS1-OR UVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 UVS1PU-OR UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 UVS1-OPT-AB UVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100101B63 UVS1-OPT-BC UVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200101B64 UVS1-OPT-CA UVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 226 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8600201B64 UVS2-OPT-CA UVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8A00301B64 UVS3-OPT-CA UVS3 protection operated (phase-CA)
8C00401B62 UVS4-OPT-AB UVS4 protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00401B63 UVS4-OPT-BC UVS4 protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00401B64 UVS4-OPT-CA UVS4 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101B65 UVS1-OPT UVS1 protection operated
8000101B66 UVS1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UVS1 protection
8400101B6A UVS1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by UVS1 protection
8500101B6B UVS1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by UVS1 protection
8B00101B6C UVS1-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS1 protection
8000001C20 UVSBLK-AB UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100001C21 UVSBLK-BC UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200001C22 UVSBLK-CA UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000001B60 UVSBLK UVS protection block command by UVSBLK
8000001B70 UVS-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UVS protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 227 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8B00001B7B UVS-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS protection
8C00001B7C UVS-OPT-A UVS protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00001B7D UVS-OPT-B UVS protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00001B7E UVS-OPT-C UVS protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101BB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command

800010EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 228 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-neutral (OV) detects an over voltage condition
where phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting. The OV function has four stages (OV1,
OV2, OV3 and OV4) that operate independently. The OV element has a time delay
characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time characteristic delay
or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OV1 stage is only discussed for
simplicity, but the OV2 to OV4 stages are applicable. The OV1 stage is enabled using scheme
switch [OV1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch
[OV1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_OV TP_TRC
OV1 to OV4
OV
OV relay OV logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[OV*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OV*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1,2,3; 2W-VY_1,2,3; 3W-VY_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,ST (3PN/1PN)
Figure 3.13-1 OV block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 229 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic

Figure 3.13-2 shows the characteristic for the OV element. The outer circle shows the pick-up
threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The
hatched area shows the operation area of OV.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.13-2 Characteristic of OV element
For OV1 element, value of pickup voltage is set using the setting [OV1]. On the other
hand, the drop-off element is configured with a ratio of PU to DO using the setting [OV1-DPR].
3.13.2 Delay for the operation of OV element

The OV element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OV1 element, the user can set a
time delay using the setting [TOV1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OV function logic.
(See section 3.13.5)

The OV element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
delay or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic
delay, the operation time is constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation
time depends upon the level of the voltage.

To operate the definite (independent) time delay mode, set DT for the scheme switch [OV1-
Type]; the user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.13-3 shows the examples of pick-up
and the drop-off points, based on the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of
the time counter in the OV1 element is incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault, the time counter will not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the OV1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting [TOV1R].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 230 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly and if the value of the time counter reaches the trip
level, the OV1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip
command, if the series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip command, the value
of the time counter will reset after the reset time [TOV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OV1 element immediately, set zero
for the setting [TOV1R]. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
operation of the OV1 element is reset.

Intermittent fault Series faults
T3
Issue of trip command

Incrimination of time counter
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation Value maintenance of time counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 3.13-3 Fault occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (inverse) time delay, IDMT is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Type].
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the
level of the voltage. Figure 3.13-4 illustrates the characteristic curves of each time multiplier
setting [OV1-TMS] and the characteristic curve is defined using the equation (3.13-1) to be in
conformity to IEC 60255-127:
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 231 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
𝒌
𝐭(𝐕) = 𝐓𝐌𝐒 × {[ 𝒂 ] + 𝒄} (3.13-1)
(𝑽⁄𝑽 ) − 𝟏
𝒔
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
k, a, c = Constants
If the user requires a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time

characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 3.13-2. For
example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OV1 element will be acquired when
Original is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Type], and when values of respective constants are
set for [OV1-k], [OV1-a], and [OV1-c].
Table 3.13-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 232 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.13-4 Inverse time characteristic of OV element
Reset feature

(i) Block operation of VTF for OV
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the OV operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk].
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk].
(ii) Disabling OV operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [OV1-EN] to disable the OV1 operation. On is set for the scheme
switch to enable OV1 operation.
3.13.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.13-5 shows the OV1 elements and logics in the OV function; trip commands and an
alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OV element is operated. Each phase
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 233 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
of the OV1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting, and then
operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are discussed separately. (See chapter Relay
application: Trip circuit)
8000101C20 TOV1
8000101B62
A & & t 0 OV1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
OV1 B t 0
8200101C22 & & & OV1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200101B64
& & t 0 OV1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
OV1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
A
8100101C25 &
OV1
B
PU 8200101C26
C
≥1 8000101B61
OV1PU-OR
OV1-EN
On
OV1-TARWIND
OV1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OV1-VTFBlk
On
800010EBB0 OV1_BLOCK
DT DT
IDMT IDMT
OV1-Type ≥1
Original
OV1-OPT-A
8000101B65 OV1-OPT
≥1
OV1-OPT-B
OV1-OPT-C TO TRC
8000101B66
OV1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On OV-TRIP1
OV1-TP2 &
8200101B68
OV1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
On OV-TRIP2
OV1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
OV1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 OV-TRIP3
OV1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On OV-TRIP4
OV1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
OV-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
OV-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
OV-ALARM
OV4-TRIP1
OV4 function logics
OV4-TRIP6
OV4-ALARM
Figure 3.13-5 Scheme logic for OV function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 234 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.13.6 Setting list

Setting of OV(Function ID: 465001)
U
Setting 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
1A 5A ni Contents
device rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati
rating rating ts
ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng
OV1- OV1 protection
Off / On - (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
EN enable
OV1- Primary / Target transformer
TarWin Secondary / - winding for OV1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
OV1- DT / IDMT /
- OV1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
Type Original
OV1 1.0 - 220.0 V OV1 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
OV1- OV1 drop-out/pick-
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR up ratio
OV1 operating
TOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
mode)
OV1 time
OV1-
0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in IDMT (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS
mode)
OV1 definite time
TOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
0.00000 - OV1 user original
OV1-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
500.00000 curve coefficient
OV1 user original
OV1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
O
OV1 user original
V OV1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
1
OV1- OV1 operation
VTFBlk block by VTF
OV1 trip command
OV1-
Off / On - output from TP1 B0 (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
TP1
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-
TP2
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-
TP3
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-
TP4
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-
TP5
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-
TP6
contact
OV1-
Off / On - OV1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
ALM
OV2- OV2 protection

EN enable
TarWin Secondary / - winding for OV2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
OV2- DT / IDMT /
Type Original
O OV2 1.0 - 220.0 V OV2 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
V OV2- OV2 drop-out/pick-
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
2 DPR up ratio
OV2 operating
mode)
OV2 time
OV2-
TMS
mode)
TOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV2 definite time (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 235 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
1A 5A ni Contents
rating rating ts
reset delay
OV2-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
OV2 user original
OV2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
OV2 user original
OV2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
OV2- OV2 operation
VTFBlk block by VTF
OV2 trip command
OV2-
TP1
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-
TP2
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-
TP3
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-
TP4
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-
TP5
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-
TP6
contact
OV2-
ALM
OV3- OV3 protection
EN enable
TarWin Secondary / - winding for OV3 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
OV3- DT / IDMT /
Type Original
OV3 1.0 - 220.0 V OV3 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR up ratio
OV3 operating
mode)
OV3 time
OV3-
TMS
mode)
OV3 definite time
TOV3R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
O
V OV3-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
3
OV3 user original
OV3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
OV3 user original
OV3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
OV3- OV3 operation
VTFBlk block by VTF
OV3 trip command
OV3-
TP1
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-
TP2
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-
TP3
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-
TP4
contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 236 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
1A 5A ni Contents
rating rating ts
OV3 trip command
OV3-
TP5
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-
TP6
contact
OV3-
ALM
OV4- OV4 protection

EN enable
TarWin Secondary / - winding for OV4 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
OV4- DT / IDMT /
Type Original
OV4 1.0 - 220.0 V OV4 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR up ratio
OV4 operating
mode)
OV4 time
OV4-
TMS
mode)
OV4 definite time
TOV4R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
OV4-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
OV4 user original
OV4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
O
OV4 user original
V OV4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
4
OV4- OV4 operation
VTFBlk block by VTF
OV4 trip command
OV4-
TP1
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-
TP2
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-
TP3
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-
TP4
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-
TP5
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-
TP6
contact
OV4-
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 237 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.13.7 Data ID
OV(Function ID: 465001)
8000101C20 OV1-A OV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OV1-B OV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OV1-C OV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600201C22 OV2-C OV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OV3-C OV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OV4-A OV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OV4-B OV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OV4-C OV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 OV1PU-A OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 OV1PU-B OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 OV1PU-C OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600201C26 OV2PU-C OV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 OV3PU-C OV3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 OV4PU-A OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 OV4PU-B OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 OV4PU-C OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 OV1-OR OV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OV1PU-OR OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OV1-OPT-A OV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 OV1-OPT-B OV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 OV1-OPT-C OV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8600201B64 OV2-OPT-C OV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 OV3-OPT-C OV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 OV4-OPT-A OV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 OV4-OPT-B OV4 protection operated (phase-B)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 238 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8E00401B64 OV4-OPT-C OV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 OV1-OPT OV1 protection operated
8000101B66 OV1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OV1 protection
8400101B6A OV1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OV1 protection
8500101B6B OV1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OV1 protection
8B00101B6C OV1-ALARM Alarm signal by OV1 protection
8000001B70 OV-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OV protection
8B00001B7B OV-ALARM Alarm signal by OV protection
8C00001B7C OV-OPT-A OV protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B7D OV-OPT-B OV protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B7E OV-OPT-C OV protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 239 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)


800010EBB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 240 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (OVS) detects an over voltage condition
where phase-to-phase voltage is larger than a setting. The OVS function has four stages (OVS1,
OVS2, OVS3 and OV4S) that operate independently. The OVS element has a time delay
characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time characteristic delay
or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OVS1 stage is only discussed for
simplicity, but the OVS2 to OVS4 stages are applicable. The OVS1 stage is enabled using
scheme switch [OVS1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme
switch [OVS1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_OVS TP_TRC
OVS1 to OVS4
OVS
OVS relay OVS logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[OVS*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OVS*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VΔ_1,2,3; 2W-VΔ_1,2,3; 3W-VΔ_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,ST (3PN/3PP/1PP)
Figure 3.14-1 Function block diagram for OVS
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 241 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.14.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic

Figure 3.14-2 shows the characteristic of the OVS1 element. The outer circle shows the
threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off
voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVS1.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.14-2 Characteristic of OVS1 element
For example, with regard to the OVS1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OVS1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OVS1-DPR],
which configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
3.14.2 Delay for the operation of the OVS element

The OVS element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OVS1 element, the user can set
a delay time using setting [TOVS1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OVS1 logic. (See
section 3.14.5)

The OVS1 element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic delay
or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic delay,
the operation time is a constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation time
depends upon the level of the voltage condition.

To operate the definite (independent) time delay, set scheme switch [OVS1-Timer] DT.
Resetting the OVS element is performed when a voltage falls below the drop-off voltage.
(ii) Invers time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (invers) time delay, set scheme switch [OVS1-Timer] IDMT.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 242 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the
level of the voltage condition. Figure 3.14-3 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVS
element when a multiplier setting [OVS1-TMS] is used. The OVS element uses Equation
(3.14-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.14-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 3.14-2. For
example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVS1 element will be acquired when
Original is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-Timer], and when values of respective constants
are set for [OVS1-k], [OVS1-a], and [OVS1-C].
Table 3.14-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Set item k a C
IDMT 1 1 0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 243 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
Operating Time (secs) 100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.14-3 IDMT characteristic
Reset feature
The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.14-4 shows that examples of the pick-up
and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of the
time counter furnished in the OVS1 element is incremented if faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVS1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OVS1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip
signal, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVS1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TOVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 244 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OVS1 element is reset promptly.

Intermittent fault Series faults
T3
Issue of trip command

Incrimination of time counter
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation Value maintenance of time counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 3.14-4 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied

(i) Blocking OVS operation by VTF
Blocking the OVS function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is
set for scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk] in order that the OVS function is not blocked by the
failure.
Note: The VTF function is discussed separately. See Chapter Relay application: VT
failure supervision.
(ii) Execution of OVS function

Set On for scheme switch [OVS1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OVS1-EN] if
the OVS1 element is not required to operate.
(iii) Signal for TRC function

The OVS1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
trip command by the reception of the trip signal. For example, when the user set On for scheme
switch [OVS1-TP1], ‘OVS-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the OVS1
element operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it drives the
binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 245 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
OVS1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [OVS1-TP2] to
[OVS1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated
when On is set for scheme switch [OVS1-ALM].
circuit.
3.14.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.14-5 shows the OVS1 elements and logics in the OVS function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OVS element is operated. Each
phase of the OVS1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting,
and then operation signals are issued to the TRC function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 246 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C20 TOVS1
8000101B62
AB & & t 0 OVS1-OPT-AB
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
OVS1 BC t 0
8200101C22 & & & OVS1-OPT-BC
≥1
CA 8200101B64
& & t 0 OVS1-OPT-CA
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
OVS1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
AB
8100101C25 &
OVS1
BC
PU 8200101C26
CA
≥1 8000101B61
OVS1PU-OR
OVS1-EN
On
OVS1-TARWIND
OVS1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OVS1-VTFBlk
On
800010EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK
DT DT
IDMT IDMT
OVS1-Timer ≥1
Original
OVS1-OPT-AB
8000101B65 OVS1-OPT
≥1
OVS1-OPT-BC
To TRC
OVS1-OPT-CA 8000101B66
OVS1-TP1 On & 8000001B60
8100101B67 ≥1
On OVS-TRIP1
OVS1-TP2 &
8200101B68
OVS1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B61
≥1
On OVS-TRIP2
OVS1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
OVS1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B62
≥1 OVS-TRIP3
OVS1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B63
On OVS-TRIP4
OVS1-ALM &
8400001B64
≥1
OVS-TRIP5
8500001B65
≥1
OVS-TRIP6
8B00001B6B
≥1
OVS-ALARM
OVS4-TRIP1
OVS4 function logics
OVS4-TRIP6
OVS4-ALARM
Figure 3.14-5 Scheme logic for OVS function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 247 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.14.6 Setting list

Setting of OVS(Function ID: 465801)
U
nit Contents
device 1A rating 5A rating ratin rati ratin rati rati rati ratin rati ratin rati
s
g ng g ng ng ng g ng g ng
OVS1-
Off / On - OVS1 protection enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
EN
Target transformer
OVS1- Primary / Secondary /
- winding for OVS1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
TarWind Tertiary
protection
OVS1-
DT / IDMT / Original - OVS1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
Type
OVS1 1.0 - 220.0 V OVS1 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
OVS1- OVS1 drop-out/pick-up
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
OVS1 operating delay
TOVS1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
OVS1- OVS1 time multiplier (in
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
OVS1 definite time reset
TOVS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS1 user original curve
OVS1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS1-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
O OVS1 user original curve
V OVS1-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
S OVS1- OVS1 operation block by
1 Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk VTF
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-
TP1
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-
TP2
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-
TP3
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-
TP4
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-
TP5
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-
TP6
contact
OVS1-
Off / On - OVS1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
ALM
OVS2-
EN
Target transformer
- winding for OVS2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
TarWind Tertiary
protection
OVS2-
Type
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
TOVS2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOVS2R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS2-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V coefficient
S OVS2 user original curve
2 OVS2-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS2- OVS2 operation block by
VTFBlk VTF
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-
TP1
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-
TP2
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-
TP3
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-
TP4
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-
TP5
contact
OVS2- Off / On - OVS2 trip command (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 248 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
nit Contents
s
TP6 output from TP6 B0
contact
OVS2-
ALM
OVS3-
EN
Target transformer
- winding for OVS3 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
TarWind Tertiary
protection
OVS3-
Type
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
TOVS3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOVS3R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS3-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
V OVS3-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
S OVS3- OVS3 operation block by
3 Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTFBlk VTF
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-
TP1
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-
TP2
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-
TP3
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-
TP4
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-
TP5
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-
TP6
contact
OVS3-
ALM
OVS4-
EN
Target transformer
- winding for OVS4 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
TarWind Tertiary
protection
OVS4-
Type
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
DPR ratio
TOVS4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOVS4R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS4-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V coefficient
S OVS4 user original curve
4 OVS4-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS4- OVS4 operation block by
VTFBlk VTF
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-
TP1
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-
TP2
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-
TP3
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-
TP4
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-
TP5
contact
OVS4- Off / On - OVS4 trip command (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 249 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
nit Contents
s
TP6 output from TP6 B0
contact
OVS4-
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 250 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.14.7 Data ID
OVS(Function ID: 465801)
8000101C20 OVS1-AB OVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C21 OVS1-BC OVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C22 OVS1-CA OVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600201C22 OVS2-CA OVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00301C22 OVS3-CA OVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8C00401C20 OVS4-AB OVS4 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C21 OVS4-BC OVS4 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C22 OVS4-CA OVS4 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101C24 OVS1PU-AB OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100101C25 OVS1PU-BC OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200101C26 OVS1PU-CA OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600201C26 OVS2PU-CA OVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00301C26 OVS3PU-CA OVS3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00401C24 OVS4PU-AB OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 OVS4PU-BC OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 OVS4PU-CA OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000101B60 OVS1-OR OVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OVS1PU-OR OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OVS1-OPT-AB OVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100101B63 OVS1-OPT-BC OVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200101B64 OVS1-OPT-CA OVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8600201B64 OVS2-OPT-CA OVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8A00301B64 OVS3-OPT-CA OVS3 protection operated (phase-CA)
8C00401B62 OVS4-OPT-AB OVS4 protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00401B63 OVS4-OPT-BC OVS4 protection operated (phase-BC)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 251 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8E00401B64 OVS4-OPT-CA OVS4 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101B65 OVS1-OPT OVS1 protection operated
8000101B66 OVS1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVS1 protection
8400101B6A OVS1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OVS1 protection
8500101B6B OVS1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OVS1 protection
8B00101B6C OVS1-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS1 protection
8000001B60 OVS-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVS protection
8B00001B6B OVS-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS protection
8C00001B6C OVS-OPT-A OVS protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00001B6D OVS-OPT-B OVS protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00001B6E OVS-OPT-C OVS protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101BB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 252 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)


800010EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 253 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-ground (OVG) is to detect earth fault on
unearthed, resistance-earthed system or transformers. The OVG function has four stages
(OVG1, OVG2, OVG3 and OVG4) that operate independently. The OVG element has a time
delay characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time characteristic
delay or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OVG1 stage is only discussed
for simplicity, but the OVG2 to OVG4 stages are applicable. The OVG1 stage is enabled using
scheme switch [OVG1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme
switch [OVG1-TarWind]. When a low threshold vale is set for setting [OVG1], it is susceptible
to superimpose any third harmonic component on an entering signal. Therefore, the OVG
function incorporates the filter to suppress the third harmonic component.
TP_REPLICA TP_OVG TP_TRC
OVG1 to OVG4
OVG
OVG relay OVG logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[OVG*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OVG*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1,2,3; 2W-VY_1,2,3; 3W-VY_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,ST (3PN/1PN)
Figure 3.15-1 OVG block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 254 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.15.1 Drop-off and pickup

Hatched area with concentric circles shows the characteristic of OVG in Figure 3.15-2. The
outer circle shows pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off
voltage point (DO).
For stage 1 PU element, value of pickup voltage is set using the setting [OVG1]. On the
other hand, the drop-off element is configured with a ratio of PU to DO using the setting
[OVG1-DPR].
Similarly, for other stages, settings [OVG2], [OVG3], [OVG4] and [OVG2-DPR] [OVG3-
DPR], [OVG4-DPR] are provided.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.15-2 Setting points for OVG
3.15.2 Definite time characteristic

For time characteristics in the OVG, there is a relationship between input quantity (input
voltage) and startup time; thus, the operation is divided into two modes: that is, independent
time characteristic (definite time delay DT) and dependent time characteristic (inverse time
delay IDMT).
(i) Setting of definite time delay

The definite time delay (DT) is used when the OVG operation is required with a constant
delay time. That is, for example, the OVG1 is operated when fed voltage exceeds the setting
[OVG1] and the OVG1 generates a trip command with a delay time that is set using the
setting [TOVG1]. Make sure that DT is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-Type] prior to the
operation.
(ii) Consideration of reset characteristic

If the definite time delay (DT) is used, make sure that the reset characteristic of the OVG
should be considered, because there are repetitive intermittent faults and a series of faults
in rapid succession. Therefore, note that the reset operation of the OVG is required for each
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 255 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
fault case.
Figure 3.15-3 shows a number of fault occurrences, fault observation in the OVG, and
integrated value that is calculated in the OVG. With regard to the repetitive intermittent
fault, if the integrated value of the OVG produced fails to reach the trip operation threshold,
the OVG will not signal a trip command; hence, the OVG operation is blocked within the
reset time.
If series faults are observed repeatedly and if the integrated value reaches the
threshold of trip operation, the OVG will signal a trip command. If a series of fault, after the
output of the trip command, stops completely, the integrated value will clear up within the
reset time.
Fault occurrence and condition

Intermittent fault A series of fault
T3
Faults observed
Trip command signal
Operation reset
Integrated value is calculated
with the duration of fault
occurrence. Threshold of trip operation
Output of a trip
command
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process of the Reset of the integrated value
T1: Resetting time placed by an operator integrated value
T2: Actual resetting time in this function Maintenance of the integrated value
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and function start
Figure 3.15-3 Occurrence of faults and reset operation when definite time reset is applied
(iii) Definite time resetting

Suppose that the definite time delay is applied for the OVG, reset time is set using the setting
[TOVG1R].
(iv) Instantaneous resetting

In case, that the OVG1 requires instantaneous resetting, zero is set for the setting [TOVG1R].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 256 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Consequently, the OVG1 operation clears up when a voltage falls below the reset threshold.
3.15.3 Invers time delay (Dependent time characteristic)

If OVG startup operation is needed set the IDMT according to the quantity of input voltage,
hence, the startup time will be inversely proportion to the voltage quantity. Figure 3.15-4
illustrates the characteristic curves of each time multiplier setting and the characteristic curve
is defined using the equation (3.15-1) in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.15-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
Where,
TMS = time multiplier setting.
In case IDMT is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-Type] and time multiplier value is set for the
setting [OVG1-TMS], then the OVG1 operates based on the inverse time delay. The purpose of
the time multiplier is to adjust the characteristic curve.
If the IDMT requires a curve arbitrarily, the arbitrary curve should be provided with
constants k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.15-2. For the arbitrary curve of the OVG1, set Original
for the scheme switch [OVG1-Type]. Constant values are set using the settings [OVG1-k],
[OVG1-a] and [OVG1-C].
Table 3.15-2 Constant value for each setting of IDMT curve in OVG
Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 257 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overvoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.15-4 Inverse time characteristic of OVG

(i) Block operation of VTF for OVG
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the OVG operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-VTFBlk].
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-VTFBlk].
(iii) Disabling OVG operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-EN] to disable the OVG1 operation. On is set for
the scheme switch to enable OVG1 operation.
3.15.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.15-5 shows the OVG1 elements and logics in the OVG function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OVG element is operated. Each
phase of the OVG1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting,
and then operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are discussed separately. (See
chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 258 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C23
TOVG1
8000101B60
t 0
& & & OVG1-OPT
OVG1 ≥1
0.0 – 300.0s
8000101C27
&
OVG1 PU
OVG1-TARWIND
OVG1-EN
On
OVG1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OVG1-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 OVG1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
OVG1-Type ≥1
Original
8000101B61
OVG1-TP1 On & 8000001B60
8100101B62 ≥1
On OVG-TRIP1
OVG1-TP2 &
8200101B63
OVG1-TP3 On &
8300101B64 8100001B61
≥1
On OVG -TRIP2
OVG1-TP4 &
8400101B65
OVG1-TP5 On & 8500101B66 8200001B62
≥1 OVG -TRIP3
OVG1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6B ≥1 8300001B63
On OVG -TRIP4
OVG1-ALM &
8400001B64
≥1
OVG -TRIP5
8500001B65
≥1
OVG -TRIP6
8B00001B6B
≥1
OVG -ALARM
OVG4-TRIP1
OVG4 function logics
OVG4-TRIP6
OVG4-ALARM
Figure 3.15-5 Scheme logic for OVG function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 259 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.15.6 Setting
Setting of OVG(Function ID: 465401)
Setting
1A 5A ni Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
device
rating rating ts rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
OVG OVG1 protection

1-EN enable
OVG Target
Primary /
1- transformer
Secondary / - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
TarW winding for OVG1
Tertiary
ind protection
OVG
DT / IDMT /
1- - OVG1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
Original
Type
OVG
1.0 - 220.0 V OVG1 threshold 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
1
OVG
OVG1 drop-
1- 10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
out/pick-up ratio
DPR
OVG1 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G1
mode)
OVG OVG1 time
1- 0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOV OVG1 definite
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
G1R time reset delay
OVG1 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
1-k 500.00000
coefficient
OVG1 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
1-a 10.00000
coefficient
OVG1 user
O OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
V 1-c 10.00000
coefficient
G OVG
1 1- OVG1 operation
VTFB block by VTF
lk
OVG1 trip
OVG command output
1-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG command output
1-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG command output
1-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG command output
1-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG command output
1-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG command output
1-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG
OVG1 alarm
1- Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
ALM
O OVG Off / On - OVG2 protection Off Off Off Off Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 260 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
device
V 2-EN enable
G OVG Target
2 Primary /
2- transformer
Secondary / - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Tertiary
ind protection
OVG
DT / IDMT /
Original
Type
OVG
1.0 - 220.0 V OVG2 threshold 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
2
OVG
OVG2 drop-
2- 10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
out/pick-up ratio
DPR
OVG2 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G2
mode)
OVG OVG2 time
2- 0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOV OVG2 definite
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
OVG2 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
2-k 500.00000
coefficient
OVG2 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
2-a 10.00000
coefficient
OVG2 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
2-c 10.00000
coefficient
OVG
2- OVG2 operation
VTFB block by VTF
lk
OVG2 trip
OVG command output
2-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG command output
2-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG command output
2-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG command output
2-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG command output
2-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG command output
2-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG
OVG2 alarm
enable
ALM
OVG OVG3 protection

O Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
3-EN enable
V
OVG Primary / Target
G
3- Secondary / - transformer Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary
3
TarW Tertiary winding for OVG3
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 261 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
device
ind protection
OVG
DT / IDMT /
Original
Type
OVG
1.0 - 220.0 V OVG3 threshold 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
3
OVG
OVG3 drop-
3- 10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
out/pick-up ratio
DPR
OVG3 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G3
mode)
OVG OVG3 time
3- 0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOV OVG3 definite
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
OVG3 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
3-k 500.00000
coefficient
OVG3 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
3-a 10.00000
coefficient
OVG3 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
3-c 10.00000
coefficient
OVG
3- OVG3 operation
VTFB block by VTF
lk
OVG3 trip
OVG command output
3-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG command output
3-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG command output
3-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG command output
3-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG command output
3-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG command output
3-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG
OVG3 alarm
enable
ALM
OVG OVG4 protection

4-EN enable
OVG Target
O Primary /
4- transformer
V Secondary / - Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary
G Tertiary
ind protection
4
OVG
DT / IDMT /
Original
Type
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 262 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Setting
device
OVG
1.0 - 220.0 V OVG4 threshold 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
4
OVG
OVG4 drop-
4- 10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
out/pick-up ratio
DPR
OVG4 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G4
mode)
OVG OVG4 time
4- 0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TMS IDMT mode)
TOV OVG4 definite
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
OVG4 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
4-k 500.00000
coefficient
OVG4 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
4-a 10.00000
coefficient
OVG4 user
OVG 0.00000 -
- original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
4-c 10.00000
coefficient
OVG
4- OVG4 operation
VTFB block by VTF
lk
OVG4 trip
OVG command output
4-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG command output
4-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG command output
4-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG command output
4-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG command output
4-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG command output
4-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG
OVG4 alarm
enable
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 263 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.15.7 Data ID
OVG(Function ID: 465401)
8000101C23 OVG1 OVG1 relay element operated
8000101C27 OVG1PU OVG1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 OVG1-OPT OVG1 protection operated
8000101B61 OVG1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVG1 protection
8B00101B6B OVG1-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG1 protection
8000001B60 OVG-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVG protection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 264 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8B00001B6B OVG-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG protection
8000101BB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command

800010EBB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 265 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ)

The frequency protection (FRQ and DFRQ) functions have six frequency stages to detect
frequency-deviations and rate of frequency-change (∆f/∆t) respectively. If the deviations or
changes occur, the function can issue a trip and alarm signals in response to the degree of the
frequency-deviation and the rate of frequency-change respectively.
Either an under-frequency stage (UF) or an over-frequency stage (OF) is used to monitor

the frequency-deviation. The UF stage is used to initiate load shedding to maintain load and
generation balance and retain power system stability. The user can set the degree of frequency
deviation for each stage. The OF stage is used to protect synchronous machines (connected
through Generator Transformer) from possible damage due to over-frequency conditions.
For monitoring the rate of frequency-change, either a frequency-rise monitoring (RISE)

or a frequency-down monitoring (DOWN) is used. The user should select either RISE or DOWN
setting to monitor the frequency-change.
The DFRQ is used to isolate two interconnected systems when the rate of frequency-
change is very rapid and to retain the power system stability.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 266 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
To simplify, stage 1 is discussed only, but the other stages (stage 2 to stage 6) are
applicable. The FRQ/DFRQ1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the FRQ/DFRQ2 to
FRQ/DFRQ8 stages are applicable. The FRQ1/DFRQ1 stages operates using switch [FRQ1-
EN], [DFRQ1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using [FRQ-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_FRQ/TP_DFRQ TP_TRC

FRQ1 to FRQ6
FRQ
FRQ relay FRQ logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
element sequence
FEP_COMMON
CT polarity
[FRQ*-EN](ON/OFF)
compensated
DFRQ1 to DFRQ6
DFRQ
FRQ/DFRQ DFRQ logic Trip signal
relay sequence
element
[DFRQ*-EN](ON/OFF)
[FRQ-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W -VY_ 1, 1W -VΔ_ 1, 1W -V1, 2W -VY_ 1, 2W -VΔ_ 1, 2W -V1, 3W -VY_ 1, 3W -VΔ_ 1, 3W -V1, Type-VT_ P,S,T(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP)
Figure 3.16-1 FRQ/DFRQ block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
– Main features NA NA ✓
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 267 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.16.1 FRQ features and characteristics

(i) UF/OF characteristic
The UF and OF stages check the frequency every 5ms; they determine whether the frequency
is in under-frequency or over-frequency. Figure 3.16-2(a) shows the UF characteristic; Figure
3.16-2(b) shows the OF characteristic; hatched area shows the operation zone of the UF and
the OF stages.
The user can select stage 1 to detect either over-frequency state or under-frequency state
using the scheme switch [FRQ1-Chara]. For example, if UnderFrq is set for the scheme switch
[FRQ1-Chara], the stage 1 determines the under-frequency state when an under frequency is
observed (Figure 3.16-2(a)). The user can set the threshold value in [FRQ1]. Conversely, if
OverFrq is set for the scheme switch, the stage 1 determines the over-frequency state when an
over frequency is observed (Figure 3.16-2(b)).
The UF or OF element can output a trip signal; the output decisions of UF and OF
tripping are properly carried out in every interval. To delay the generation of trip command,
the user can use a delay timer to postpone the trip command using the setting [TFRQ1].
Hz Hz
OF stage 1
operation zone
frequency
Pickup
frequency
Pickup
UF stage 1
operation zone
o o
V V
Pickup voltage (FRQBLK) Pickup voltage (FRQBLK)
a. Under frequency element at Stage 1 b. Over frequency element at Stage 1
Figure 3.16-2 Characteristics of UF and OF elements (e.g. Stage 1 of FRQ)
For the operation of the UF and OF stages, the user should set the voltage level for
frequency protection blocking. When the measured voltage is under the threshold value, which
is set using the setting [FRQBLK], the protection is blocked. The under voltage block is
necessary to prevent unnecessary operation due to VT failure or to allow other feeder
protection relays to clear fault conditions.
(ii) Enabling FRQ function

The user should set On for the scheme switch [FRQ1-EN] to enable the FRQ function and
should set Off to disable the FRQ function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 268 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) FRQ trip command

The FRQ can generate six (6) trip commands to the trip circuit (TRC†) function. The user can
assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On or Off for the scheme switches [FRQ-
TP*].
†Note: TRC function is discussed separately. For more information see Relay application:
(iv) Generating alarm signals

On is set for the scheme switch [FRQ1-ALM], to enable the alarm signal.
(v) UF/OF scheme logic

Figure 3.16-3 shows the scheme logic for the UF and OF stages. Each stage operates
independently. PLC connection point “FRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block the stage1 when
blocking is required using an external signal. The user can connect the PLC connection point
with an external signal using PLC function. (For more information of PLC function, see
Chapter PLC function)
The under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is used to block the FRQ operation, as
described earlier (section 3.16.1(i)).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 269 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8700001C23 To DFRQ
FRQBLK
(UVBLK) 1 NON FRQBLK
8000101BB1
8000101C23 TFRQ1 8000101B60
t 0
OF & & 800010EBB1 FRQ1-OPT
FRQ1 1 & ≥1 8000101B61
0.00 - 300.00s To TRC
On & 8000001B60
FRQ1 -TP1 8100101B62
UF ≥1 FRQ-TRIP1
& FRQ1 -TP2 On &
8200101B63
On 8100001B61
FRQ1 -TP3 &
Primary 8300101B64 FRQ-TRIP2
FRQ-TarWind On ≥1
Secondary FRQ1 -TP4 &
8400101B65
Tertiary On &
FRQ1-TarWind FRQ1 -TP5
8500101B66
OverFrq On
FRQ1 -TP6 &
UnderFrq
FRQ1-Chara
8100201C23 TFRQ2 8100201B60
8B00101B6C
t 0
OF & & On &
FRQ2 & ≥1 FRQ1 -ALM
1
0.00 - 300.00s
8100201BB1
UF 8500001B65
& 810020EBB1 FRQ2-OPT FRQ-TRIP6
≥1
8000201B61
FRQ-TarWind FRQ2 -TP1 On &

8100201B62
OverFrq On
FRQ2 -TP2 &
UnderFrq 8200201B63
FRQ2-Chara
FRQ2 -TP3 On &
8300201B64
FRQ2 -TP4 On &
8400201B65
FRQ2 -TP5 On &
8500201B66
8500601C23 TFRQ6 8500601B60 FRQ2 -TP6 On &
t 0
OF & &
FRQ6 1 & ≥1
0.00 - 300.00s 8B00201B6C
FRQ2 -ALM On &

UF
&
FRQ-TarWind
OverFrq
UnderFrq
FRQ6-Chara
On
FRQ1-EN
On 8500601BB1
FRQ2-EN
850060EBB1 FRQ6-OPT
8000601B61
FRQ6 -TP1 On &

On 8100601B62
FRQ6-EN
FRQ6 -TP2 On &
8200601B63
FRQ6 -TP3 On &
8300601B64
FRQ6-TP4 On &
8400601B65
FRQ6 -TP5 On &
800010EBB0 FRQ1-BLOCK 1
8500601B66
FRQ6 -TP6 On &
8B00001B66
≥1
8B00601B6C FRQ-ALARM
FRQ6 -ALM On &
Figure 3.16-3 Scheme logic for FRQ function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 270 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.16.2 DFRQ features and characteristics

(i) RISE/DOWN characteristic
The RISE or DOWN characteristics calculate the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) every
5ms. Figure 3.16-4 shows how to calculate the gradient using Δf and Δt: the change of
frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt =5ms). Six stages are provided for the DFRQ function;
each stage can operate independently. The DFRQ function issues a trip command if Δf
exceeds the set value for 50 consecutive times.
The user can set state 1 to detect whether a frequency is rising or descending using the
scheme switch [DFRQ1-Chara]. For example, when Rise is set for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-
Chara], the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) is up. Conversely, when
Down is set for the scheme switch, the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency-change
(Δf/Δt) is down. Setting [DFRQ1] is used to configure an operation threshold; the operation
threshold is configured with Hertz per second.
The operation of the DFRQ stage is blocked when the FRQBLK operates. That is, if a
measured voltage is below the setting [FRQBLK], any operation of the DFRQ stage is blocked.
The FRQBLK element is discussed in section 3.16.1(i).
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 3.16-4 Gradient of frequency rate-of-change
(ii) Enabling DFRQ function

The user should set On for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-EN] to enable the DFRQ function and
should set Off to disable the DFRQ function.
(iii) DFRQ trip command

The DFRQ can generate six (6) trip commands to the trip circuit (TRC†) function. The user can
assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On or Off for the scheme switches
[DFRQ-TP*].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 271 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iv) Generating alarm signals

On is set for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-ALM], to enable the alarm signal.
(v) DFRQ scheme logic

Figure 3.16-5 shows the scheme logic for the DFRQ function. Each stage operates
independently. PLC connection point “DFRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block stage1; when
blocking is required using an external signal. The user can connect the PLC connection point
using an external signal using PLC function. (For more information of PLC function, see
Chapter PLC function)
The signal for the under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is provided from the FRQ logic.
From FRQ
NON FRQBLK
FRQ-TARWIND
8000111BB1
8000111C23 8000111B60
& ≥1 & &
OF 800011EBB1 DFRQ1-OPT TO TRC
DFRQ1 1 8000111B61
On & 8000001B68
DFRQ1 -TP1 8100111B62
UF ≥1 DFRQ-TRIP1
& DFRQ1 -TP2 On &
OverFrq 8200111B63
On 8100001B69
UnderFrq DFRQ1 -TP3 &
DFRQ1-Chara 8300111B64 DFRQ-TRIP2
On ≥1
FRQ-TARWIND DFRQ1 -TP4 &
8100211C23 8100211B60 8400111B65
On &
& ≥1 & &
DFRQ1 -TP5
OF 8500111B66
DFRQ2 1 On
DFRQ1 -TP6 &
UF
& 8B00111B6C
OverFrq On &
DFRQ1 -ALM
UnderFrq
DFRQ2-Chara
8100211BB1
8500001B6D
810021EBB1 DFRQ2-OPT DFRQ-TRIP6
≥1
8000211B61
DFRQ2 -TP1 On &

8100211B62
DFRQ2 -TP2 On &

8200211B63
DFRQ2 -TP3 On &
8300211B64
DFRQ2 -TP4 On &
8400211B65
FRQ-TARWIND DFRQ2 -TP5 On &
8500211B66
8500611C23 8500611B60 DFRQ2 -TP6 On &
OF & ≥1 & &
DFRQ6 1
8B00211B6C
UF DFRQ2 -ALM On &

&
OverFrq
UnderFrq
DFRQ6-Chara
On
DFRQ1-EN
On 8500611BB1
DFRQ2-EN
850061EBB1 DFRQ6-OPT
8000611B61
DFRQ6 -TP1 On &

On 8100611B62
DFRQ6-EN
DFRQ6 -TP2 On &
8200611B63
DFRQ6 -TP3 On &
8300611B64
DFRQ6-TP4 On &
8400611B65
DFRQ6 -TP5 On &
800011EBB0 DFRQ1-BLOCK 1
8500611B66
DFRQ6 -TP6 On &
810021EBB0 DFRQ2-BLOCK 1 8B00001B6E
≥1
8B00611B6C DFRQ-ALARM
DFRQ6 -ALM On &
850061EBB0 DFRQ6-BLOCK 1
Figure 3.16-5 Scheme logic for DFRQ function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 272 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.16.3 Setting
Setting of FRQ(Function ID: 475A01))
U
Setting 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ni Contents
device rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati
ts
ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng
C FRQ- Primary / Target transformer
o TarWin Secondary - winding for FRQ Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
m d / Tertiary protection
m FRQBL 40.0 - Voltage level of FRQ
V 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
o K 100.0 protection blocking
n
FRQ1- FRQ1 protection
EN enable
The selection of
FRQ1- OverFrq / FRQ1 characteristic
- UnderFrq UnderFrq UnderFrq UnderFrq UnderFrq
Chara UnderFrq Over-Frequency or
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
FRQ1 FRQ1 threshold -1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -1.00
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ1 s FRQ1 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-
Off / On - output from TP1 B0 On On On On On
TP1
contact
F FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-
R Off / On - output from TP2 B0 On On On On On
TP2
Q contact
1 FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-
TP3
contact
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-
TP4
contact
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-
TP5
contact
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-
TP6
contact
FRQ1-
Off / On - FRQ1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM
EN enable
The selection of
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ2 s FRQ2 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
F FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-
R Off / On - output from TP1 B0 On On On On On
TP1
Q contact
2 FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-
F Off / On - output from TP2 B0 On On On On On
TP2
R contact
Q FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-
3 Off / On - output from TP3 B0 On On On On On
TP3
contact
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-
TP4
contact
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-
TP5
contact
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-
TP6
contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 273 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
ni Contents
ts
FRQ2-
ALM
EN enable
The selection of
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ3 s FRQ3 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-
TP1
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-
TP2
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-
TP3
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-
TP4
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-
TP5
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-
TP6
contact
FRQ3-
ALM
EN enable
The selection of
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ4 s FRQ4 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-
TP1
contact
FRQ4 trip command
F FRQ4-
R TP2
contact
Q FRQ4 trip command
4 FRQ4-
TP3
contact
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-
TP4
contact
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-
TP5
contact
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-
TP6
contact
FRQ4-
ALM

EN enable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 274 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
ni Contents
ts
The selection of
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ5 s FRQ5 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-
TP1
contact
FRQ5 trip command
F FRQ5-
R TP2
contact
Q FRQ5 trip command
5 FRQ5-
TP3
contact
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-
TP4
contact
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-
TP5
contact
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-
TP6
contact
FRQ5-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ6 s FRQ6 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-
TP1
contact
FRQ6 trip command
F FRQ6-
R TP2
contact
Q
FRQ6 trip command
6 FRQ6-
TP3
contact
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-
TP4
contact
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-
TP5
contact
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-
TP6
contact
FRQ6-
ALM
DFRQ1- DFRQ1 protection

D EN enable
F The selection of
R DFRQ1- Rise / DFRQ1
- Down Down Down Down Down
Q Chara Down characteristic
1 Rise or Down
DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 H DFRQ1 threshold 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 275 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
ni Contents
ts
z/
s
DFRQ1 trip
DFRQ1-
Off / On - command output On On On On On
TP1
from TP1 B0 contact
DFRQ1 trip
DFRQ1-
TP2
from TP2 B0 contact
DFRQ1 trip
DFRQ1-
TP3
from TP3 B0 contact
DFRQ1 trip
DFRQ1-
TP4
from TP4 B0 contact
DFRQ1 trip
DFRQ1-
TP5
from TP5 B0 contact
DFRQ1 trip
DFRQ1-
TP6
from TP6 B0 contact
DFRQ1-
Off / On - DFRQ1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ2- Rise / DFRQ2
Chara Down characteristic
Rise or Down
H
DFRQ2 0.1 - 15.0 z/ DFRQ2 threshold 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
s
DFRQ2 trip
DFRQ2-
TP1
from TP1 B0 contact
DFRQ2 trip
D DFRQ2-
F TP2
from TP2 B0 contact
R
DFRQ2 trip
Q DFRQ2-
2 TP3
from TP3 B0 contact
DFRQ2 trip
DFRQ2-
TP4
from TP4 B0 contact
DFRQ2 trip
DFRQ2-
TP5
from TP5 B0 contact
DFRQ2 trip
DFRQ2-
TP6
from TP6 B0 contact
DFRQ2-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ3- Rise / DFRQ3
D
Rise or Down
F
H
R
Q
s
3
DFRQ3 trip
DFRQ3-
TP1
from TP1 B0 contact
DFRQ3- DFRQ3 trip
TP2 command output
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 276 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
ni Contents
ts
from TP2 B0 contact
DFRQ3 trip
DFRQ3-
TP3
from TP3 B0 contact
DFRQ3 trip
DFRQ3-
TP4
from TP4 B0 contact
DFRQ3 trip
DFRQ3-
TP5
from TP5 B0 contact
DFRQ3 trip
DFRQ3-
TP6
from TP6 B0 contact
DFRQ3-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ4- Rise / DFRQ4
Rise or Down
H
s
DFRQ4 trip
DFRQ4- Off / On
command output On On On On On
TP1 -
from TP1 B0 contact
DFRQ4 trip
D DFRQ4-
F TP2
from TP2 B0 contact
R
DFRQ4 trip
Q DFRQ4-
4 TP3
from TP3 B0 contact
DFRQ4 trip
DFRQ4-
TP4
from TP4 B0 contact
DFRQ4 trip
DFRQ4-
TP5
from TP5 B0 contact
DFRQ4 trip
DFRQ4-
TP6
from TP6 B0 contact
DFRQ4-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ5- Rise / DFRQ5
Rise or Down
H
D s
F DFRQ5 trip
DFRQ5-
R Off / On - command output On On On On On
TP1
Q from TP1 B0 contact
5 DFRQ5 trip
DFRQ5-
TP2
from TP2 B0 contact
DFRQ5 trip
DFRQ5-
TP3
from TP3 B0 contact
DFRQ5 trip
DFRQ5-
TP4
from TP4 B0 contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 277 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

U
ni Contents
ts
DFRQ5 trip
DFRQ5-
TP5
from TP5 B0 contact
DFRQ5 trip
DFRQ5-
TP6
from TP6 B0 contact
DFRQ5-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ6- Rise / DFRQ6
Rise or Down
H
s
DFRQ6 trip
DFRQ6-
TP1
from TP1 B0 contact
D DFRQ6 trip
DFRQ6-
F Off / On - command output On On On On On
TP2
R from TP2 B0 contact
Q DFRQ6 trip
DFRQ6-
6 Off / On - command output On On On On On
TP3
from TP3 B0 contact
DFRQ6 trip
DFRQ6-
TP4
from TP4 B0 contact
DFRQ6 trip
DFRQ6-
TP5
from TP5 B0 contact
DFRQ6 trip
DFRQ6-
TP6
from TP6 B0 contact
DFRQ6-
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 278 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.16.4 Data ID
FRQ(Function ID: 475A01)
8000101C23 FRQ1 FRQ relay element operated(phase-1)
8700001C23 FRQBLK FRQ block element operated
8000111C23 DFRQ1 DFRQ relay element operated(phase-1)
8000101B60 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000111B60 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000101B61 FRQ1-TRIP1 FRQ trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8B00101B6C FRQ1-ALARM FRQ alarm enable(phase-1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 279 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000111B61 DFRQ1-TRIP1 DFRQ trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8B00111B6C DFRQ1-ALARM DFRQ alarm enable(phase-1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 280 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000001B60 FRQ-TRIP1 FRQ trip command output from TP1
8B00001B66 FRQ-ALARM FRQ alarm enable
8000001B68 DFRQ-TRIP1 DFRQ trip command output from TP1
8100001B69 DFRQ-TRIP2 DFRQ trip command output from TP2
8200001B6A DFRQ-TRIP3 DFRQ trip command output from TP3
8300001B6B DFRQ-TRIP4 DFRQ trip command output from TP4
8400001B6C DFRQ-TRIP5 DFRQ trip command output from TP5
8500001B6D DFRQ-TRIP6 DFRQ trip command output from TP6
8B00001B6E DFRQ-ALARM DFRQ alarm enable
8000101BB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ block command(phase-1)
8000111BB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ block command(phase-1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 281 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000101BB1 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000111BB1 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)

800010EBB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ block command(phase-1)
800011EBB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ block command(phase-1)
800010EBB1 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
800011EBB1 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 282 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Over-excitation protection (VPH)

Over-excitation protection function (VPH) is used to detect over-excitation; the VPH protects
the transformer measuring the ratio of voltage to frequency (V/F ratio). The VPH function is
able to operate for a wide range of frequency, that is from 0.2×f0 to 1.2×f0 (f0 is rated frequency).
The VPH function comprises of a high setting (H) element, a minimum operating value (L)
element, an inverse time (T) element, and an alarm (A) element.
TP_REPLICA TP_VPH TP_TRC

VPH-T, VPH-A
VPH
VPH relay VPH logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[VPHT-EN](ON/OFF)
[VPH*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1, 1W-VΔ_1, 1W-V1, 2W-VY_1, 2W-VΔ_1, 2W-V1, 3W-VY_1, 3W-VΔ_1, 3W-V1, Type-VT_P,S,T(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP)
Figure 3.17-1 VPH block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 283 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.17.1 Characteristics
As shown in Figure 3.17-2, the user can configure VPH feature using the H element, the L
element, the T element, and the A element.
V/F
HT
VPH-H T
A
LT
VPH-L
VPH-A
VPH-LT
VPH-HT
TVPH-A
TVPH-H
log t
Figure 3.17-2 Characteristic of VPH function configured by H, L, T and A elements
The VPH value expressed in pu is converted by the following Equation (3.17-2):
𝑰𝒏𝒑𝒖𝒕 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 (𝑽)

|𝑽⁄𝑭| = (𝑷𝑼)
𝑰𝒏𝒑𝒖𝒕 𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒚 (𝑯𝒛) (3.17-1)
𝑹𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒅 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 (𝑽) ×
𝑹𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒅 𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒚 (𝑯𝒛)
Where, Rated voltage is the rated voltage of the transformer winding referred to the secondary
side of the VT.
(i) H element
The characteristic of the H element is represented by equation (3.17-2):
|𝑽⁄𝑭| ≥ 𝑯 (3.17-2)
where,
H: maximum operation value of the H element
The user can set the value of the maximum operation using the setting [VPH-H] in pu.
(ii) L element
The characteristic of the L element is represented by equation (3.17-3):
|𝑽⁄𝑭| ≥ 𝑳 (3.17-3)
where,
L: Minimum operating value in the L element
The user can set the value of the minimum operation using the setting [VPH-L] in pu.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 284 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) T element
The characteristic of the T element is represented by equations (3.17-4) and (3.17-5):
∑(|𝑽⁄𝑭| − 𝒂) ≥ 𝒃 (3.17-4)
(𝑳𝑻 × 𝑳) − (𝑻𝑻 × 𝑯) 𝑳𝑻 × 𝑻𝑻 × (𝑯 − 𝑳)
𝒂= 𝒃= (3.17-5)
(𝑳𝑻 − 𝑻𝑻) (𝑳𝑻 − 𝑻𝑻)
where,
TT: A representative time required to determine the minimum operation time in
the T element
LT: Corresponded time to determine the maximum operation time in the T element
The user can set the values of TT and LT using the settings [VPH-HT] and [VPH-LT].
(iv) A element
The characteristic of the A element is represented by equation (3.17-6):
𝑽 ⁄𝑭 ≥ 𝑨 (3.17-6)
where,
A: threshold to signal the alarm
The user can set the A element using the setting [VPH-A] in percentage.
3.17.2 Scheme logic

(i) Relay operation switch
Figure 3.17-3 shows the elements and logics in the VPH function; trip commands and an alarm
are issued to trip circuit (TRC†) function when the element H or T is operated. On is set for
the scheme switch [VPHT-EN] to enable the VPH trip operation. The VPH element has timer
[TVPHH] for the H element and [TVPHA] for the A element.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 285 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000201B60
8000201C23
VPH-T-OPT
T 8300201B62
& TVPHH
8100201C27 8100201B61 ≥1 VPH-OPT
t 0
VPH-H-OPT
VPH H &
8200101C23 0.00 to 1000.00s
TVPHA 8200101B60
A & VPH-A-OPT
t 0
0.00 to 1000.00s
VPH-Test On
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
VPH-TarWind
On
VPHT-EN
&
1
810020EBB0 VPHT_BLOCK
On
VPHA-EN
&
820010EBB0 VPHA_BLOCK 1 To TRC
8000001B60
VPH-TP1 On & VPH-TRIP1

8100001B61

8200001B62

8300001B63
VPH-TP4 On VPH-TRIP4
& 8400001B64
8500001B65
VPH-TP6 On VPH-TRIP6
&
VPH-ALM On & 8B00001B6B

≥1 VPH-ALARM
Figure 3.17-3 Scheme logic for VPH function
(ii) Combination of trip commands

As shown in Figure 3.17-3, the VPH function can generate six trip commands to the trip circuit
(TRC†) function; the user can assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On or Off
for the scheme switches [VPH-TP*].
(iii) Generating alarm signals
On is set for the scheme switch [VPHA-EN], to enable the operation of A element. The A element
has a pick-up timer, which is set using the setting [TVPH-A].
(iv) Introduction of blocking VPH operation using PLC signal

When blocking of VPH operation is required, the user can block the VPH operation using the
external signal supplied via PLC connection points “VPHT_BLOCK” and “VPHA_BLOCK”.
The signal connections are made by PLC function, which is discussed separately. (See Chapter
PLC function)
(v) Over-excitation test (VPH-Test)

For the normal VPH operation, the VPH collect the time of over-excitation state and its state
will be integrated with inverse time characteristic. If the user wishes to have a VPH test from
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 286 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
an early stage, On should be set for the setting [VPH-Test] so that the integral state will be
initialized.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 287 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.17.3 Setting
Setting of VPH (Function ID: 476A01)
U
Setting
nit Contents
device 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ratin ratin s ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
g g g g g g g g g g g g
Primary /
VPH- Secondar
Target transformer winding for V/f
Common
TarWi y/ - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary

protection
nd Tertiary
VPH- 100.0 -
V Rated secondary voltage 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
V 120.0
VPHT
Off / On - VPH protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
-EN
VPH- 1.05 - Low level i.e. pick up level for V/f
pu 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05
L 1.30 protection
VPH- 1.10 - High level (definite time level) for
pu 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
H 1.40 V/f protection
VPH- 1.00 - Operate time at low level of Inverse
s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
LT 600.00 time curve for V/f protection
Operate time at high level of
VPH- 1.00 -
s Inverse time curve for V/f 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00
HT 600.00
protection
VPH- 60.00 - Reset time after removing
s 250.00 250.00 250.00 250.00 250.00
RT 3600.00 overexcitation condition
TVPH 0.00 - Definite time delay at high level
s 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
H 1000.00 setting
VPHT
VPH- VPH trip command output from

TP1 TP1 B0 contact
TP2 TP2 B0 contact
TP3 TP3 B0 contact
TP4 TP4 B0 contact
TP5 TP5 B0 contact
TP6 TP6 B0 contact
VPH-
Off / On - VPH alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM
VPH
Off / On - VPH alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
A-EN
VPH- 1.03 -
VPHA
- Alarm level for V/f protection 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03
A 1.30
TVPH 0.00 -
s Definite time delay for Alarm 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
A 1000.00
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 288 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.17.4 Data ID
VPH(Function ID: 476A01)
8000201C23 VPH-T VPH-T relay element operated
8100201C27 VPH-H VPH-H relay element operated
8200101C23 VPH-A VPH-A relay element operated
8000201B60 VPH-T-OPT VPH-T instant operation command
8100201B61 VPH-H-OPT VPH-H instant operation command
8200101B60 VPH-A-OPT VPH-A instant operation command
8300201B62 VPH-OPT VPH instant operation command
8000001B60 VPH-TRIP1 VPH trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6B VPH-ALARM VPH alarm enable
8100201BB0 VPHT_BLOCK VPH-T block command
8200101BB0 VPHA_BLOCK VPH-A block command

VPH(Function ID: 476A01)
810020EBB0 VPHT_BLOCK VPHT block command
820010EBB0 VPHA_BLOCK VPHA block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 289 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
VT failure detection (VTF)

If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the voltage transformer (VT), the relay elements
measuring voltages operates incorrectly. The VT failure supervision (VTF) is designed to cancel
the operation of the relay elements during the failure. If the VTF function detects the failure
of VT circuit, the VTF function generates an alarm for blocking their operations1.
Suppose the VTF function detects the failure in the VT circuit. If the failure is cleared,
the VTF function can see that the VT secondary circuit in three-phases are in healthy condition.
Accordingly, the VTF function can abandon to stop the operation of the relay elements. That
is, the relay elements that have been blocked will be allowed to operate again. This makes the
alarms screened are be reset automatically.
TP_REPLICA TP_VTF TP_OC

TP_EF
FEP_
1W-VY_1,2,3 VTF VTF logic TP_UV
VTF1_P,～ VTF-OPERATION TP_UVS
COMMON
relay sequence
2W-VY_1,2,3 TP_OV
VTF2_T
element TP_OVS
3W-VY_1,2,3 TP_OVG
CT polarity
Type-VT_P,ST TP_OCN
compensated
(3PN)
VTF1_EN(Off/On)
VTF2_EN(Off/On
Figure 3.18-1 VTF Function block diagram

1Note: Several protection functions are blocked by the VTF function. To know this
blocking, refer sections of the respective protection functions.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 290 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.18.1 Relay and decision

The VTF has three relay elements, one each for the primary, secondary and tertiary winding.
The VTF has two criterions (VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T) to detect the failure of the
VT.
The following description pertains to VTF detection for primary winding of transformer.
The VTF detection for secondary and tertiary winding is similar.
(i) Phase-to-earth under-voltage element (UVVTF)

The under-voltage element (UVVTF-P) provides the under voltage level for the VTF1 detection.
The UVVTF-P element is configured using the setting [UVVTF-P].
(ii) Residual phase overcurrent element (EFVTF)

The residual phase overcurrent element (EFVTF) provides the zero-sequence overcurrent level
for the VTF2 detection. The EFVTF element is configured using the setting [EFVTF2-P].
(iii) Residual overvoltage element (OVGVTF)

The residual overvoltage element (OVGVTF) provides the zero-sequence over voltage level for
the VTF2 detection. The OVGVTF element is configured using the setting [OVGVTF2-P].
(iv) Detection criterion 1 (VTF1-P_DET_T)

When the UVVTF1-P operates and the OCD-P* does not operate (i.e. there is no fault condition
and hence no over current), then the criterion (VTF1-P_DET_T) is used for the VTF detection.
(v) Detection criterion 2 (VTF2-P_DET_T)

When the EFVTF-P and the OCD-P* both does not operate and the OVGVTF-P operates, then
the criterion (VTF2-P_DET_T) is used for the VTF detection.
3.18.2 Logic
Figure 3.18-2 shows the logics of VTF. As described earlier, the failure of the VT is divided
into VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T.
Considering VTF1-P_DET_T is one of the detection criterions of the VT failure. Upper

logic of Figure 3.18-2 shows that the VTF1-P_DET_T signal is generated when the UVVTF-P
is active and the OCD1 is not active.
Similarly, considering VTF2-P_DET_T is another detection criterion of the VT failure.

Lower logic of Figure 3.18-2 shows that the VTF2-P_DET_T is generated when the OVGVTF-
P is active but the OCD and EFVTF-P is not active.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 291 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1Note: OCD element is common for both VTF1 detection and VTF2 detection. The OCD
output signal is generated based on OCD-AT, OCD-BT, and OCD-CT. For more
information, see Chapter Relay application: Protection common.
It is possible to select the VTF detection criterion using the scheme switch [VTF1-P-EN]
or [VTF2-P-EN].
3.18.3 Usage
Suppose On is set for both the scheme switches [VTF1-P-EN] and [VTF2-P-EN], if the VTF
detects the failure of the VT, then the VTF1-P_DET_T is not reset even if the blocking element
(OCD) operates subsequent to VTF detection. The VTF2-P_DET_T is also not reset even if the
blocking elements (OCD and EFVTF) operate subsequent to VTF detection. The VTF1-P_DET
_T and VTF2-P_DET_T are reset when the operation of the UVVTF-P and the OVGVTF-P are
reset.
When OPT-On is set for both the scheme switches [VTF1-P_EN] and [VTF2-P_EN], VTF
detection is reset when the blocking element becomes active subsequent to VTF detection.
If the VTF receives PLC signal (VTF-P_BLOCK), the operation of the VTF is blocked.
VTF-P_ALARM, VTF1-P_ALARM and VTF2-P_ALARM signals are issued if VTF1-

P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T lasts for 10s.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 292 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8000101C20
A 8100101B61
8100101C21 ≥1
UVVTF-P B &
≥1 VTF1-P_DET
8200101C22
C 1 1 KC_VTTP_P1
t 0 S
OCD-P-A S VTF1-P_DET_T
& 0.015s
OCD-P-B
T ≥1 t 0 R
≥1 1 ≥1
OCD-P-C
T R
0.1s
T
VTF1-P_DET_T & 1
t 0
1 &
10s
On
VTF1-P-EN
≥1
OPT-On
8800101C27 8200101B62
OVGVTF-P &
≥1 VTF2-P_DET
1
8400101C23 1 KC_VTTP_P2
EFVTF-P
t 0 S
S ≥1 VTF2-P_DET_T
≥1 & 0.015s
t 0 R
1 ≥1
R
0.1s
VTF2-P_DET_T & 1
&
On
VTF2-P-EN
≥1
OPT-On
CB-P_CLOSE 1 1
0.2s
1
800010EBB0 VTF-P_BLOCK ≥1
AMF-OFF 8000101B63
≥1 VTF-P_ALARM
8100101B64
t 0
VTF1-P_DET_T VTF1-P_ALARM
10s
8200101B65
VTF2-P_DET_T t 0 VTF2-P_ALARM
10s 8000101B66
≥1 VTF-P_DETECT
EXTERNAL-P_VTF
Figure 3.18-2 Scheme logic for VTF function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 293 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.18.4 Setting
Setting of VTF (Function ID: 492001)
Setting device 5A ni Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A
5A
1A rating ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
g ts g g g g g g g g g
rating
VTF VTF1- Off / On / Primary winding VTF1

- (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
1-P P-EN OPT-On enable
UVVT Under voltage level for
1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
F1-P primary winding VTF1
VTF VTF2- Off / On / Primary winding VTF2

2-P P-EN OPT-On enable
Zero sequence over
OVGV
1.0 - 220.0 V voltage level for Primary (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
TF2-P
winding VTF2
0.5
Zero sequence over
EFVT 0.10 - 0- (0. (1. (0. (1. 0.2 1.0 (0. (1. 0.2
A current level for Primary 1.00
F2-P 50.00 250 20) 00) 20) 00) 0 0 20) 00) 0
winding VTF2 blocking
.00
VTF VTF1- Off / On / Secondary winding VTF1

1-S S-EN OPT-On enable
1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
F1-S secondary winding VTF1
VTF VTF2- Off / On / Secondary winding VTF2

2-S S-EN OPT-On enable
Zero sequence over
OVGV
1.0 - 220.0 V voltage level for (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
TF2-S
secondary winding VTF2
0.5 Zero sequence over
EFVT 0.10 - 0- current level for (0. (1. (0. (1. 0.2 1.0 (0. (1. 0.2
A 1.00
F2-S 50.00 250 secondary winding VTF2 20) 00) 20) 00) 0 0 20) 00) 0
.00 blocking
VTF VTF1- Off / On / Tertiary winding VTF1

1-T T-EN OPT-On enable
1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
F1-T tertiary winding VTF1
VTF VTF2- Off / On / Tertiary winding VTF2

2-T T-EN OPT-On enable
Zero sequence over
OVGV
1.0 - 220.0 V voltage level for tertiary (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
TF2-T
winding VTF2
0.5
Zero sequence over
EFVT 0.10 - 0- (0. (1. (0. (1. 0.2 1.0 (0. (1. 0.2
A current level for tertiary 1.00
F2-T 50.00 250 20) 00) 20) 00) 0 0 20) 00) 0
winding VTF2 blocking
.00
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 294 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.18.5 Data ID
VTF(Function ID: 492001)
8000101C20 UVVTF-P-A UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100101C21 UVVTF-P-B UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200101C22 UVVTF-P-C UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400101C23 EFVTF-P EFVTF-P relay element operated
8800101C27 OVGVTF-P OVGVTF-P relay element operated
8000201C20 UVVTF-S-A UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100201C21 UVVTF-S-B UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200201C22 UVVTF-S-C UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400201C23 EFVTF-S EFVTF-S relay element operated
8800201C27 OVGVTF-S OVGVTF-S relay element operated
8000301C20 UVVTF-T-A UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100301C21 UVVTF-T-B UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200301C22 UVVTF-T-C UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400301C23 EFVTF-T EFVTF-T relay element operated
8800301C27 OVGVTF-T OVGVTF-T relay element operated
8100001B60 CB_ALLPH_OPEN CB all phase open
8100101B60 UVVTF-P-OR UVVTF-P relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8500201B60 UVVTF-S-OR UVVTF-S relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8900301B60 UVVTF-T-OR UVVTF-T relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8100101B61 VTF1-P_DET VTF1-P detected
8200101B62 VTF2-P_DET VTF2-P detected
8500201B61 VTF1-S_DET VTF1-S detected
8600201B62 VTF2-S_DET VTF2-S detected
8900301B61 VTF1-T_DET VTF1-T detected
8A00301B62 VTF2-T_DET VTF2-T detected
8000101B63 VTF-P_ALARM VTF-P alarm (VTF1-P ALARM/VTF2-P ALARM OR)
8100101B64 VTF1-P_ALARM VTF1-P alarm (10s timer)
8200101B65 VTF2-P_ALARM VTF2-P alarm (10s timer)
8400201B63 VTF-S_ALARM VTF-S alarm (VTF1-S ALARM/VTF2-S ALARM OR)
8500201B64 VTF1-S_ALARM VTF1-S alarm (10s timer)
8600201B65 VTF2-S_ALARM VTF2-S alarm (10s timer)
8800301B63 VTF-T_ALARM VTF-T alarm (VTF1-T ALARM/VTF2-T ALARM OR)
8900301B64 VTF1-T_ALARM VTF1-T alarm (10s timer)
8A00301B65 VTF2-T_ALARM VTF2-T alarm (10s timer)
8000101B66 VTF-P_DETECT VTF-P detected (VTF1-P DET/VTF2-P DET OR)
8100201B66 VTF-S_DETECT VTF-S detected (VTF1-S DET/VTF2-S DET OR)
8200301B66 VTF-T_DETECT VTF-T detected (VTF1-T DET/VTF2-T DET OR)
8000101BB0 VTF-P_BLOCK VTF-P block signal
8100201BB0 VTF-S_BLOCK VTF-S block signal
8200301BB0 VTF-T_BLOCK VTF-T block signal
8000101BB1 EXTERNAL-P_VTF External VTF-P receive
8100201BB1 EXTERNAL-S_VTF External VTF-S receive
8200301BB1 EXTERNAL-T_VTF External VTF-T receive
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 295 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

VTF(Function ID: 492001)
800010EBB0 VTF-P_BLOCK VTF-P block signal
810020EBB0 VTF-S_BLOCK VTF-S block signal
820030EBB0 VTF-T_BLOCK VTF-T block signal
800010EBB1 EXTERNAL-P_VTF External VTF-P receive
810020EBB1 EXTERNAL-S_VTF External VTF-S receive
820030EBB1 EXTERNAL-T_VTF External VTF-T receive
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 296 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Trip circuit (TRC)

Trip circuit function (TRC) generates the trip output signal to the circuit breaker (CB) based
on trip commands received from each protection function. As shown in Figure 3.19-1, the TRC
has three parts: (1) Trip command collection, (2) Trip signal production, and (3) CB trip signal
production. The trip signal production generates an output signal for the CB.
DIF
Operating phases
REF
OC TRC
OV General alarm
FB
EF
OVS
EFIn
CB trip signal
OVG production
OCN
UV
Command
collection Output signal for Binary output circuit
BCD
UVS CB1
THM
FRQ Fault recording function
Trip signal Output signal for
CBF
DFRQ production CB2
VPH
MECH
Output signal for
CB6
PLC signals
General trip
Figure 3.19-1 TRC outline
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 297 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.19.1 Scheme switch

There is only one setting for TRC function, which is set using the scheme switch [Lockout].
The scheme switch can be set to either Off or On, the default is Off. When the scheme switch
is set to On, the trip command remains latched. The trip command can be reset by the
LOCKOUT_RESET signal from PLC.
3.19.2 Trip command scheme logic

(i) Command collection part
The operation commands provided by each protection function are gathered and converted into
trip operation commands “FC_TRIP1, FC_TRIP2, FC_TRIP3, FC_TRIP4, FC_TRIP5, and
FC_TRIP6”, as shown in Figure 3.19-2 to Figure 3.19-7.
FunctionFC01 trip command, TRIP1 8000001B60

FC-TRIP1
FunctionFC02 trip command, TRIP1
. ≥1
800000EBB0 TRIP1_ADD
Figure 3.19-2 Trip1 commands generated by protection functions

FC-TRIP2
.
≥1
.

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 298 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

FC-TRIP3
.
≥1
.


FC-TRIP4
.
≥1
.


FC-TRIP5
.
≥1
.

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 299 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

FC-TRIP6
.
≥1
.

(ii) Trip signal production block

Figure 3.19-8 shows the scheme logic for Trip signal production.
8000001B67
FC-TRIP1
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND1
& S
R1
8100001B68
FC-TRIP2
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND2
& S
R1
8200001B69
FC-TRIP3
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND3
& S
R1
8300001B6A
FC-TRIP4
I=0 ≥1 TRIP-COMMAND4
& S
R1
8400001B6B
FC-TRIP5
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND5
& S
R1
8500001B6C
FC-TRIP6
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND6
& S
R1
On
Lockout Off 8000001B6D
800000EBBB LOCKOUT_RESET
≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 300 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 3.19-8 Scheme logic for Trip signal production
3.19.3 General alarm scheme logic

Figure 3.19-9 shows the scheme logic for General alarm.
FC01_ALARM
FC02_ALARM
FC03_ALARM
FC04_ALARM 8B00001B66
≥1
FC05_ALARM
GEN.ALARM
FC06_ALARM ≥1
FC07_ALARM
FC08_ALARM
FC09_ALARM
FC10_ALARM
FC11_ALARM
FC12_ALARM
≥1
FC13_ALARM
FC14_ALARM
FC15_ALARM
FC16_ALARM
FC17_ALARM
FC18_ALARM
FC19_ALARM
FC20_ALARM
≥1
FC21_ALARM
FC22_ALARM
FC23_ALARM
FC24_ALARM
FC25_ALARM
FC26_ALARM
FC27_ALARM
FC28_ALARM
≥1
FC29_ALARM
FC30_ALARM
FC31_ALARM
FC32_ALARM
8B0000EBB6 ALARM_ADD
Figure 3.19-9 Scheme logic for General alarm
3.19.4 Operated phase scheme logic

(i) Command collection
Figure 3.19-10 shows the scheme logic for command collection of the operated phase (phase-A).
The scheme logics for phase-B and phase-C are similar to that of phase-A.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 301 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
FC01_OPT-AR
FC02_ OPT-AR
FC03_ OPT-AR
FC04_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC05_ OPT-AR
OPT-AR
FC06_ OPT-AR ≥1
FC07_ OPT-AR
FC08_ OPT-AR
FC09_ OPT-AR
FC10_ OPT-AR
FC11_ OPT-AR
FC12_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC13_ OPT-AR
FC14_ OPT-AR
FC15_ OPT-AR
FC16_ OPT-AR
FC17_ OPT-AR
FC18_ OPT-AR
FC19_ OPT-AR
FC20_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC21_ OPT-AR
FC22_ OPT-AR
FC23_ OPT-AR
FC24_ OPT-AR
FC25_ OPT-AR
FC26_ OPT-AR
FC27_ OPT-AR
FC28_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC29_ OPT-AR
FC30_ OPT-AR
FC31_ OPT-AR
FC32_ OPT-AR
8C0000EBB7 OPT.P-A_ADD
Figure 3.19-10 Scheme logic for command collection (phase-A)
(ii) Operated phase

Figure 3.19-11 shows the scheme logic for operated phases.
3100001B81
OPT.PHASE
8000001B71
OPT-AR OPT.PHASE-A
8100001B72
OPT-BR OPT.PHASE-B
8200001B73
OPT-CR OPT.PHASE-C
800000EBBA OPT-NR
8300001B74
8000001B70 & OPT.PHASE-N
≥1
OPT-ABCR
Figure 3.19-11 Scheme logic for operated phases
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 302 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
By default, signal is not assigned for OPT-NR in the PLC setting hence; phase-N is not
displayed. In order to display the fault phase-N, REF or EF activation signal should be
assigned based on the user configuration.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 303 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.19.5 Setting
Setting of TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
Range Uni Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating
Lockout Off / On - Trip signal lockout enable Off Off Off Off Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 304 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.19.6 Data ID
TRC (Function ID : 4A3001)
8000001B60 FC-TRIP1 FC trip command output (phase-1)
8B00001B66 GEN.ALARM GEN alarm command output
8000001B67 TRIP-COMMAND1 trip command output (phase-1)
8300001B6A TRIP-COMMAND4 trip command output (phase-4)
8400001B6B TRIP-COMMAND5 trip command output (phase-5)
8500001B6C TRIP-COMMAND6 trip command output (phase-6)
8000001B6D GEN.TRIP GEN trip command output
8000001B70 OPT-ABCR operated 3phase-OR
8000001B71 OPT.PHASE-A operated phase-A
8100001B72 OPT.PHASE-B operated phase-B
8200001B73 OPT.PHASE-C operated phase-C
8300001B74 OPT.PHASE-N operated phase-N
8000001BB0 TRIP1_ADD add trip (phase-1)
8B00001BB6 ALARM_ADD add alarm
8C00001BB7 OPT.P-A_ADD add operated phase-A
8D00001BB8 OPT.P-B_ADD add operated phase-B
8E00001BB9 OPT.P-C_ADD add operated phase-C
8000001BBA OPT_NR NR operated
8000001BBB LOCKOUT_RESET lockout reset

TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
800000EBB0 TRIP1_ADD add TRIP (phase-1)
8B0000EBB6 ALARM_ADD add alarm
8C0000EBB7 OPT.P-A_ADD add operated phase-A
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 305 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
8D0000EBB8 OPT.P-B_ADD add operated phase-B
8E0000EBB9 OPT.P-C_ADD add operated phase-C
800000EBBA OPT_NR NR operated
800000EBBB LOCKOUT_RESET lockout reset
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 306 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Mechanical trip protection (MECH)

Mechanical trip function provides an interface with the protection devices mounted on the
transformer. GRT200 provides sixteen (16) interface points as shown in the table below.
Table 3.20-1 Interface points
Main transformer Tap changer Auxiliary/earthing transformer
Buchholz Buchholz Buchholz
Oil temperature Oil temperature Oil temperature
Winding 1 temperature Oil flow Winding temperature
Winding 2 temperature Pressure relief Pressure relief
Winding 3 temperature Sudden pressure increase
Pressure relief
Sudden pressure increase
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Sec. Feature
1A 1B 1C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 307 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.20.1 Scheme switch

The mechanical trip function can be enabled using the scheme switch [MECH*-EN], where * is
1 to 16. The scheme switch can be set to either On or Off, the default setting is Off. The
mechanical trip can be blocked by a PLC signal [MECH*_BLOCK].
3.20.2 Mechanical trip timer

A mechanical trip timer is provided for each trip input. The timer can be bypassed by an
instantaneous override from PLC signal [MECH*_INST_OP].
3.20.3 Mechanical trip command output

The mechanical trip command output can be assigned to TP1 BO to TP6 BO contacts by setting
the scheme switches [MECH*-TP1] to [MECH*-TP6] to On, the default setting is On. Mechanical
trip alarm can be enabled by setting the scheme switch [MECH*-ALM] to On, the default setting
is Off.
3.20.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.9-3shows the scheme logic for Mechanical trip1. Scheme logics for Mechanical trip2
to Mechanical trip 16 are similar to Mechanical trip 1.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 308 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
TMECH1 8000101B60
MECH1_TP & & t 0 MECH1-OPT
≥
0 – 300s
MECH1_EN &
On
800010EBB1 MECH1-BLOCK 1
800010EBB2 MECH1-INST-OP
8000101B61
MECH1-OPT
& MECH1-TRIP1
MECH1-TP1
On 8100101B62
& MECH1-TRIP2
MECH1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& MECH1-TRIP3
MECH1-TP3 8300101B64
On
& MECH1-TRIP4
MECH1-TP4 8400101B65
On
& MECH1-TRIP5
8500101B66
MECH1-TP5
On
& MECH1-TRIP6
MECH1-TP6
On
8B00101B6C
& MECH1-ALARM
MECH1-ALM
On
Figure 3.20-1 Scheme logic for Mechanical trip1
(i) Collection of Mechanical trip signals

Figure 3.19-9 to Figure 3.20-4 show the scheme logics for collection of Mechanical trip signals.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 309 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
MECH1-TRIP1
MECH2-TRIP1
MECH3-TRIP1
MECH4-TRIP1
MECH5-TRIP1
MECH6-TRIP1 8000001B61
MECH7-TRIP1
MECH8-TRIP1 ≥1 MECH-TRIP1
MECH9-TRIP1
MECH10-TRIP1
MECH11-TRIP1
MECH12-TRIP1
MECH13-TRIP1
MECH14-TRIP1
MECH15-TRIP1
MECH16-TRIP1
MECH1-TRIP2
MECH2-TRIP2
MECH3-TRIP2
MECH4-TRIP2
MECH5-TRIP2
MECH6-TRIP2
8100001B62
MECH7-TRIP2
MECH9-TRIP2
MECH10-TRIP2
MECH11-TRIP2
MECH12-TRIP2
MECH13-TRIP2
MECH14-TRIP2
MECH15-TRIP2
MECH16-TRIP2
Figure 3.20-2 Scheme logic for signal collection (1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 310 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
MECH1-TRIP3
MECH2-TRIP3
MECH3-TRIP3
MECH4-TRIP3
MECH5-TRIP3
MECH7-TRIP3
MECH9-TRIP3
MECH10-TRIP3
MECH11-TRIP3
MECH12-TRIP3
MECH13-TRIP3
MECH14-TRIP3
MECH15-TRIP3
MECH16-TRIP3
MECH1-TRIP4
MECH2-TRIP4
MECH3-TRIP4
MECH4-TRIP4
MECH5-TRIP4
MECH6-TRIP4
8300001B64
MECH7-TRIP4
MECH9-TRIP4
MECH10-TRIP4
MECH11-TRIP4
MECH12-TRIP4
MECH13-TRIP4
MECH14-TRIP4
MECH15-TRIP4
MECH16-TRIP4
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 311 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
MECH1-TRIP5
MECH2-TRIP5
MECH3-TRIP5
MECH4-TRIP5
MECH5-TRIP5
MECH7-TRIP5
MECH9-TRIP5
MECH10-TRIP5
MECH11-TRIP5
MECH12-TRIP5
MECH13-TRIP5
MECH14-TRIP5
MECH15-TRIP5
MECH16-TRIP5
MECH1-TRIP6
MECH2-TRIP6
MECH3-TRIP6
MECH4-TRIP6
MECH5-TRIP6
MECH6-TRIP6
8500001B66
MECH7-TRIP6
MECH9-TRIP6
MECH10-TRIP6
MECH11-TRIP6
MECH12-TRIP6
MECH13-TRIP6
MECH14-TRIP6
MECH15-TRIP6
MECH16-TRIP6
(ii) Collection of Mechanical alarm signals

Figure 3.19-11 shows the scheme logic for collection of Mechanical alarm signals and
generation of MECH-ALARM output.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 312 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
MECH1-ALARM
MECH2- ALARM
MECH3- ALARM
MECH4- ALARM
MECH5- ALARM
MECH6- ALARM 8B00001B6C
MECH7- ALARM
MECH8- ALARM ≥1 MECH-ALARM
MECH9- ALARM
MECH10- ALARM
MECH11- ALARM
MECH12- ALARM
MECH13- ALARM
MECH14- ALARM
MECH15- ALARM
MECH16- ALARM
Figure 3.20-5 Scheme logic for alarm signals
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 313 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.20.5 Setting
Setting of MECH (Function ID: 487001)
Range Unit Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
rating rating
s rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
MEC
Mechanical trip1
H1- Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
EN
TME Mechanical trip1
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH1 timer
MEC Mechanical trip1
H1- Off / On - command output On On On On On
MECH H1- Off / On - command output On On On On On
1 TP3 from TP3 B0 contact
MEC
Mechanical trip1
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip2
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH2 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip2
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip3
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH3 timer
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 314 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

rating rating
MEC
Mechanical trip3
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip4
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH4 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip4
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip5
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH5 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip5
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip6
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH6 timer
MECH
6
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 315 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

rating rating
MEC
Mechanical trip6
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip7
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH7 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip7
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip8
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH8 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip8
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip9
enable
EN
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH9 timer
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 316 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

rating rating
MEC
Mechanical trip9
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip10
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip10
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
0
MECH
10
MEC
Mechanical trip10
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip11
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip11
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
1
MECH
11
MEC
Mechanical trip11
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip12
enable
EN
TME
MECH Mechanical trip12
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
12 timer
2
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 317 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

rating rating
MEC
Mechanical trip12
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip13
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip13
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
3
MECH
13
MEC
Mechanical trip13
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip14
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip14
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
4
MECH
14
MEC
Mechanical trip14
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
MECH Mechanical trip15
15 enable
EN
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 318 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

rating rating
TME
Mechanical trip15
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
5
MEC
Mechanical trip15
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip16
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip16
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
6
MECH
16
MEC
Mechanical trip16
alarm enable
ALM
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 319 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3.20.6 Data ID
MECH (Function ID : 487001)
8000101B60 MECH1-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8900A01B60 MECH10-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8A00B01B60 MECH11-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8B00C01B60 MECH12-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8C00D01B60 MECH13-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8D00E01B60 MECH14-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8E00F01B60 MECH15-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8F01001B60 MECH16-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8000101B61 MECH1-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8B00101B6C MECH1-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-1)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 320 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000A01B61 MECH10-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-10)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 321 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8B00A01B6C MECH10-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-10)
8000B01B61 MECH11-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-11)
8B00B01B6C MECH11-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-11)
8000C01B61 MECH12-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-12)
8B00C01B6C MECH12-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-12)
8000D01B61 MECH13-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-13)
8B00D01B6C MECH13-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-13)
8000E01B61 MECH14-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-14)
8B00E01B6C MECH14-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-14)
8000F01B61 MECH15-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-15)
8B00F01B6C MECH15-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-15)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 322 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8000001B61 MECH-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6C MECH-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable
8000101BB0 MECH1_TP Mechanical trip1 command
8900A01BB0 MECH10_TP Mechanical trip10 command
8A00B01BB0 MECH11_TP Mechanical trip11 command
8B00C01BB0 MECH12_TP Mechanical trip12 command
8C00D01BB0 MECH13_TP Mechanical trip13 command
8D00E01BB0 MECH14_TP Mechanical trip14 command
8E00F01BB0 MECH15_TP Mechanical trip15 command
8F01001BB0 MECH16_TP Mechanical trip16 command
8000101BB1 MECH1_BLOCK Mechanical trip1 block command
8900A01BB1 MECH10_BLOCK Mechanical trip10 block command
8A00B01BB1 MECH11_BLOCK Mechanical trip11 block command
8B00C01BB1 MECH12_BLOCK Mechanical trip12 block command
8C00D01BB1 MECH13_BLOCK Mechanical trip13 block command
8D00E01BB1 MECH14_BLOCK Mechanical trip14 block command
8E00F01BB1 MECH15_BLOCK Mechanical trip15 block command
8F01001BB1 MECH16_BLOCK Mechanical trip16 block command
8000101BB2 MECH1_INST_OP Mechanical trip1 instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 323 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8900A01BB2 MECH10_INST_OP Mechanical trip10 instant operation command
8A00B01BB2 MECH11_INST_OP Mechanical trip11 instant operation command
8B00C01BB2 MECH12_INST_OP Mechanical trip12 instant operation command
8C00D01BB2 MECH13_INST_OP Mechanical trip13 instant operation command
8D00E01BB2 MECH14_INST_OP Mechanical trip14 instant operation command
8E00F01BB2 MECH15_INST_OP Mechanical trip15 instant operation command
8F01001BB2 MECH16_INST_OP Mechanical trip16 instant operation command

MECH (Function ID: 487001)
800010EBB0 MECH1_TP Mechanical trip1 command
8900A0EBB0 MECH10_TP Mechanical trip10 command
8A00B0EBB0 MECH11_TP Mechanical trip11 command
8B00C0EBB0 MECH12_TP Mechanical trip12 command
8C00D0EBB0 MECH13_TP Mechanical trip13 command
8D00E0EBB0 MECH14_TP Mechanical trip14 command
8E00F0EBB0 MECH15_TP Mechanical trip15 command
8F0100EBB0 MECH16_TP Mechanical trip16 command
800010EBB1 MECH1_BLOCK Mechanical trip1 block command
8900A0EBB1 MECH10_BLOCK Mechanical trip10 block command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 324 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

MECH (Function ID: 487001)
8A00B0EBB1 MECH11_BLOCK Mechanical trip11 block command
8B00C0EBB1 MECH12_BLOCK Mechanical trip12 block command
8C00D0EBB1 MECH13_BLOCK Mechanical trip13 block command
8D00E0EBB1 MECH14_BLOCK Mechanical trip14 block command
8E00F0EBB1 MECH15_BLOCK Mechanical trip15 block command
8F0100EBB1 MECH16_BLOCK Mechanical trip16 block command
800010EBB2 MECH1_INST_OP Mechanical trip1 instant operation command
8900A0EBB2 MECH10_INST_OP Mechanical trip10 instant operation command
8A00B0EBB2 MECH11_INST_OP Mechanical trip11 instant operation command
8B00C0EBB2 MECH12_INST_OP Mechanical trip12 instant operation command
8C00D0EBB2 MECH13_INST_OP Mechanical trip13 instant operation command
8D00E0EBB2 MECH14_INST_OP Mechanical trip14 instant operation command
8E00F0EBB2 MECH15_INST_OP Mechanical trip15 instant operation command
8F0100EBB2 MECH16_INST_OP Mechanical trip16 instant operation command
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 325 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4 General control function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 326 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Common controls (CMNCTRL)

The CMNCTRL function is designed to act as a mediator to provide a bridge between the
control functions.
4.1.1 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal

The control and monitoring functions are mutually interconnected within the IED; hence,
cascading features are provided to transfer information between them so that the user does
not need to check the interconnections. Approximately 1500 signals are included to facilitate
the internal connection of the control and monitoring functions; their signals are distributed
into BIT, UNIT, BOOLEAN types. Amongst these signals†, approximately 130 are available to
the user and can be applied to program an event operation or another function‡. Figure 4.1-1
exemplifies the “PLC_BIT_0201” signal, which can be used for recording events and other
purposes.
CMNCTRL2
function
PLC_O_BIT_0201 For
・Event record function
5A0101 800200EF40 PLC_BIT_0201 (5A0101 8002001F40)
・Communication (required mapping)
Information ・LEDs
cascaded§ ・IED screen display
・Binary output module
etc…
Figure 4.1-1 Cascading information using signal “PLC_BIT_0201”

†Note:The PLC connection points and monitoring points are listed later.
‡Note:Although 130 signals are available for user programming, nonetheless, the PLC
function also provides the user with other signals for the same purpose. It is
recommended that the user selects the PLC signals provided (i.e., PLC drivers; see
chapter PLC function for more information).
§Note:The CMNCTRL2 function is used to cascade information between signal
processing modules. For more details on the processing module, see chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
Figure 4.1-2 shows the input-points and the output-points. During manufacture, several
CMNCTRL2 output-points are connected to the respective control functions. Hence, the user
will find that some control functions use the PLC_BIT to import external signals, as shown in
Figure 4.1-2.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 327 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Control function1
CMNCTRL2 Reception of “PLC but signal
function
PLC_O_BIT_1264 Internally Result output
connected
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 (5A0101 8012631F40)
Control function2
BIT type PLC_O_BIT_1265
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 (5A0101 8012641F40) Control function3
PLC monitoring points for

PLC connection points nominal event recording and others
Control function10
Figure 4.1-2 Mutual connections between CMNCTRL2 and control functions
4.1.2 Provision of selected status

Let us assume that a select-command is sent for an IED to control a target-device by the
substation automation system (SAS†), but the target-device is not ready to be controlled. The
unready condition might be due to the target-device already being in operation (e.g., CB
tripping) or a failure of the device may have occurred; thus, the IED has to drop the select-
command. If this occurs, the IED is required to send a message stating the reason to the SAS†.
Table 4.1-1 lists the messages generated in the CMNCTRL1 function describing the failure.
Table 4.1-1 Reason messages due to the release of the select-command

Signal Number Signal Name Description
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
5A0001 2008001008 SCS_ORCAT
5A0001 2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Reason codes for the SAS†
5A0001 6A08001009 SCS_ORIDENT
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
†Note:The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for
operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba.
4.1.3 Miscellaneous settings

The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings:
1. Control direction: Scheme switch [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the
SPOS, DPOS and TPOS functions. If required these functions can
be in the same control direction, set On for the scheme switch
[SDCEN].
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in case
of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set by
[CNTRV].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 328 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time
limit, the selection is canceled. The time limit can be set using
[TSC]; the setting range is between 30 and 300 seconds having a 1
second step.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300 seconds in
1 second steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 329 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.1.4 Setting
CMNCTRL setting list (FunctionID:5A0001)
Default setting
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
value
CMNCTRL SDCEN Off/On - Setting of control to the same direction Off
CNTRV Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX]

0-1 - 0
level
TSC 30-300 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
EXEWAIT Waiting execute operation time-out

30-300 s 30
timer
CNTVALMAX 9-2147483647 - Upper limit level of the counter 999999
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 330 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.1.5 Signal
 Connection points in bit type
CMNCTRL2 (Function ID: 5A0101)
320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal1
320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal2
320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal3
320003EF43 CHK_PROGRAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal4
320004EF43 CHK_RAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal5
320005EF43 CHK_ECC_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal6
320006EF43 CHK_SAMPLING_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal7
320007EF43 CHK_ACC1_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal8
320010EF43 CHK_GOOSERCV_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal11
320011EF43 CHK_PING1_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal12
320012EF43 CHK_PING2_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal13
320013EF43 CHK_CMLV_DAT_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal14
800000EF40 PLC_BIT_0001 PLC event bit information 1
…. ….. …..
 PLC monitoring points in unit type

310008EF41 PLC_UNIT_9 Free connection point for the user (reserved in 16-bit unsigned integer)
 PLC monitoring points in boolean type

000004EF42 PLC_BOOL_5 Free connection point for the user (reserved in boolean)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 331 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 PLC monitoring points in boolean type

 PLC monitoring point in 32 bit unsigned type

320014EF43 PLC_UNIT32_15 Free connection point for the user (reserved in 32bit unsigned)
 Monitoring points in PLC logic in bit type

8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1
………….. ……….. ……………..
 Monitoring points in PLC logic

0000001F42 PLC_O_BOOL_1 PLC event boolean output 1
………….. ……….. ……………..
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 332 -
S
L/R CHANGE & 1≥ “True” means Local,
R
“False” means Remote
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Local to remote
&
53000 13109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST
Local, remote and PLC control 1≥
The user can select either local

If there is no operation for a period of 35 minutes
the selection/control process expires.
or remote& control by pressing the L│R key on the front
panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided
Disable default logic
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264
by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC
connection
5A0101 801264EF40 points. Generally, the LOCRMT function is applied within all IEDs. Figure 4.2-1
PLC_BIT_1265
shows the LOCRMT logic. Note that the LOCRMT function changes for the remote control
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
unconditionally if the operation/function keys on the front panel are not touched within 35
minutes in the local control.
From KEYINPUT function LOCRMT function (Function ID: 530001)
L/R CHG LRSW01_LR_ST
(240001 31000A1735) (530001 3109001001)
Remote to local S
LRSW01_CH_LR_LCD
& 1≥
R “True” means Local,
“False” means Remote
Local to remote
&
If the user does not touch the
1≥
operation/function keys on the front panel &
&
within 35 min. in the local control, the IED
will be changed for the remote control
unconditionally. &
5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01

Disable default logic
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
Figure 4.2-1 LOCRMT logic
4.2.1 Local control

Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the
SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
4.2.2 Remote control

Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server.
Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the
user. Note that the parameters used in the control commands are defined in international
standards†. The parameter details are provided in the communication profiles. (See Chapter
Communication protocol and Appendices)
†Note:As a rule, the control commands have parameters. For example, the “Off to On”
and “On to Off” control directions that are used in commands are pre-configured
as parameters in the communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary
depending upon the respective protocol used, such as IEC61850, Modbus and
others. For IEC61850, Table 4.2-1 shows the parameters defined: the rule for
control direction can be found in “ctlVal”, the command publisher is recognized
using the parameter “origin”. For more information about the parameters, see
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 333 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix IEC61850 MICS and PICS.

Table 4.2-1 Defined command parameters in IEC61850-7-2
Parameter Types Descriptions
ctlVal Control direction (On or Off)
origin Indicates the command publisher
ctlNum Sequential Number
T Time that the command is sent
Test Test information (Test/On)
Check Interlock synchronizing
4.2.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)

The programmable logic control, (PLC) function can be used to provide user-preferred control
schemes. Several control functions have connection points to enable connections to be made to
the PLC function; they can be used to create user-preferred control schemes. It is necessary for
the user to program the PLC logic that will be used for the particular connection.
Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in
the DIR mode.
4.2.4 Signal for Local/Remote control

Note: The meaning of the following references are used in the column “M/O” in Table
4.2-2 and Table 4.2-3:
“O” means the signal is optional.
“M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user
may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” means that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.2-2 PLC connection point (Input point for LOCRMT)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
240001 31000A1735 L/R CHANGE [L/R] key “push” N/A

5A0101 801263EF40 PLC_BIT_1264 Disable condition by PLC O
5A0101 801264EF40 PLC_BIT_1265 User configurable condition by PLC O
Table 4.2-3 Mapping points for LOCRMT

530001 3009011008 LRSW01_LR_ORCAT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A

530001 6A09011009 LRSW01_LR_ORIDENT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
Table 4.2-4 PLC monitoring point (LOCRMT)

530001 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST Local(T) / Remote(F) status (single bit expression)

530001 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT Local(0x40) / Remote(0x80) status (double bit expression)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 334 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
LED reset function (LEDR)

A number of LEDs are lined on the IED front panel. For example, “TRIP” LED is lit when a
tripping command is issued for the CB. “TRIP” LED is being illuminated until the user can
confirm the tripped CB; hence, the user can reliably determine that tripping CB has been
initiated by inspection. The following operations are possible to resetting the LED by the LED
reset (LEDR) function, which is furnished in the IED:
1 Pushing “CLEAR” key1
2 Operation by GR-TIEMS2
3 Operation by the SAS
1Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Outline. Note that pressing the
“CLEAR” key causes the Reset of the LEDs.
2Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 335 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.3.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs

The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 4.3-1
shows selection logic in the LEDR function.
Wait for a command
Wait for a next command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting LED by remote-SAS Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Signal reception Select
Selection logic Signal output
IEC61850 decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.3-1 Outline of selection command for resetting LEDs
(i) Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.3-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command (reset)” signal is applied to the
LEDR function. The logic has an input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception;
the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850 communication. The function will fail to operate
if mapping is not performed correctly. We will discuss how to map the input points for the
IEC61850 communication in section 4.3.5.
Input Selection logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001)

LEDR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (528001 8007011F42)
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Selection
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operation
command &
LEDR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(528001 8307011F41)
0 t
528001 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) 0.2s
In DIR operate
Select condition‡
0 t
Failed
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE))
0.3s
Figure 4.3-2 Selection logic for resetting LEDs

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.3-8.
*Note:The LEDR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
“ctlmodel” signal when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The LEDR function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“LEDR01_NSD_CSF”, when the LEDR function determines that the input signal “Select
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 336 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
command (reset)” is true. If the LEDR function determines that the “LEDR01_NSD_CSF” is
not true, the LEDR function returns to the “Wait for a next command” stage.
(iii) Select condition

Figure 4.3-3 shows the select condition logic in the LEDR function.
To selection logic
1≥ & Select condition
Double Command Blocking detected*1
DCB RCV OR
Other devices traveling detected*2

Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *3
Logic '1' signal (Always high (TRUE))

&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 4.3-3 Select condition logic in LEDR*4

*1Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy in the
common control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation.
The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted
as “DCB RCV_OR in Table 4.3-1. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Common controls.
*2Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.3-1.
*3Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
*4Note: To identify the input point of the LEDR function, see Table 4.3-1.
Table 4.3-1 Input signals for condition logic

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking(DCB) is in progress. N/A

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 4.3-2 Setting of LEDR

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
LEDDR1_EN Activate LED reset control On Off / On
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 337 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.3.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode

In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are
satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 4.3-4 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

Cancel logic Do nothing
remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.3-4 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
(ii) Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.3-6 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same the
same as that for the signal as shown in Figure 4.3-2.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in LEDR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 4.3-5 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 338 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.3.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs.
Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
LED resetting by the remote-end

LED resetting from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
LED resetting by the local-end

Success
Operation
Pushing “CLEAR” key Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 4.3-6 Outline of operation command for resetting LEDs

†Note: For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline.
(i) Mapping required Input signal

Figure 4.3-7 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command (reset)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Operation command (reset)” signal. Pressing “CLEAR” key or the operation
on GR-TIEMS will reset LEDs.
Input Select logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001) To LED3–LED26†

Command “Operating reset”
Operation
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ 528001 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
command & ≥
Operate condition‡
From KEYINPUT
240001 31000E1730
LEDR_KEY_CLEAR
CLEAR
From TOOL_COM (GR-TIMES) 1≥

201501 3101001001
LEDR_TOOL_CLEAR
LED_RESET_TOOL
Figure 4.3-7 Operation logic for resetting LEDs
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The operation logic issues a “LED_RST_COM” signal to clear the LEDs†. The signal
“LED_RST_COM” is also transferred to the remote-end, when signal mapping is executed in
IEC61850 communication. (See section 4.3.5)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 339 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
†Note:Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs,

by the manufacturer, user can also connect the signal with the LEDs. See section
4.3.4 for how to connect.
(iii) Operate condition

Figure 4.3-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to determine
a reset-condition for the operation.
To operate logic
1≥ & Operate condition
DCB RCV OR


&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 4.3-8 Operate condition logic in LEDR

*1Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy in the
common control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation.
The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted
as “DCB RCV_OR in Table 4.3-1. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Common controls.
*2Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.3-1.
*3Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
4.3.4 Settings in LED logics

The user can program the status and the signal of the LED, so that the LEDs are possible to
switch off upon occurrence of the reset. As shown in the logic relating to the LED†, each logic
has a timer and a setting; accordingly, setting Latch should be set for the operation of the
LEDR function. Additionally, the user should connect the signal LED_RST_CMD with the LED
logic.
†Note:For more information on LED logics, see Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface: LED indicators.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 340 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(i) Settings using GR-TIEMS

Figure 4.3-9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED-03 logic. The
user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation.
The user should also select Latch for the behavior from the pull-down menu.
Set [Behavior] to Latch

Choose the signal
LED_RST_CMD for the
LED-03 logic
Figure 4.3-9 Settings for LED-03 circuit provided by “Setting I/O menu” of GR-TIEMS
(ii) Settings using IED screen

The operation from the IED screen can also be set. See Chapter User interface: I/O setting sub-
menu.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 341 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.3.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication

The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850
standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed
below:
Step1: Editing Logical Node
Step2: Mapping output data
Step3: Mapping input data
(i) Editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the LEDR function. Figure 4.3-10
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “logical node zero (LLN0)” is chosen for the LERD
function. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode should be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.3-10 Defining “LEDRs” object in LLN0 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.3-11 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as “LLN0”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items in the “LLN0$LEDRs” using GR-TIEMS:
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 342 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Figure 4.3-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.3-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0. In the DIR mode, the following
three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 4.3-12 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)
(ii) Mapping output data

The user should group the LEDR signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 4.3-13 illustrates how to
map a signal for IEC61850 communication; it indicates that the signals for the LEDR function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 343 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication

Table 4.3-3 Mapping signals for SPC object
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory ST 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN ST 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5280010007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Figure 4.3-13 orCat attribute mapped for LEDRs object of LLN0
(iii) Mapping input data

The LEDR function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
4.3-4 shows the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having
attributes CO and CF†. Figure 4.3-14 shows how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 344 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 4.3-4 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check CO 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Figure 4.3-14 Input-point mapped for LLN0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 345 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.3.6 Setting
Setting of LEDR (Function ID: 528001)
Unit Default setting
s value
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 346 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.3.7 Signal
 Signal monitoring points
LRST(Function ID: 528001)
5280018007011D53 LEDR01_SC LEDR01 select command
5280018007011D57 LEDR01_EC LEDR01 execute command
5280018007011D51 LEDR01_SC_OWS LEDR01 select command by OWS(HMI)
5280018007011D52 LEDR01_SC_RCC LEDR01 select command by RCC
5280018007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS LEDR01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
5280018007011D56 LEDR01_EC_RCC LEDR01 execute command by RCC
5280018207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 LEDR01 signal before KC_LEDR_SA001
5280018307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SA001
5280018007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV LEDR01 signal before LC_LEDR_SA002
5280018607011F43 LEDR01_TMP2 LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SA002
5280018B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU LEDR01 signal before KC_LEDR_SC001
5280018607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 LEDR01 signal after KC_LEDR_SC001
5280018607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 LEDR01 signal before MCTLEDR_SC001
5280018E07011F47 LEDR01_SLD_TM0 LEDR01 signal after MCTLEDR_SC001
5280018707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 LEDR01 signal before MCTLEDR_SC002
5280018F07011F49 LEDR01_EX_CMP_TM0 LEDR01 signal after MCTLEDR_SC002

LRST(Function ID: 528001)
820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LEDR01 control right from PLC
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 347 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Mode control function (MDCTRL)

For the user, mode control (MDCTRL) function can provide test function (TEST-FB) interface,
which is a command to change the mode in the function. MDCTRL function consists of two
parts: (1) On-mode or Test-mode sensing in IED and (2) interface between IED and SAS.
4.4.1 Function
(i) Mode sensor
The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED.
To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to
operation. During the operation, a select signal and an operate signal are provided for the
TEST-FB when the SAS provides a test command for the IED; hence, the MDCTRL function
comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling a select command; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling an operate command.
(ii) Interface for IEC61850

The MDCTRL function can fulfil the two operation modes (On and Test) specified in the IEC
61850 communication, as shown in Table 4.4-1; the MDCTRL function can carry a signal for
changing for the TEST-FB; the signal is generated in the select and control logics in the
MDCTRL function. The change signal is initiated by the mode change command that is
received at the communication interface. Note that control operations from a SAS is only taken
account.
Table 4.4-1 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850

Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
1 On
services work and get updated values.
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values. Data objects will be transmitted
with quality “test”. Control commands with quality test will be
3 Test
accepted only by LNs in “test” or “test-blocked” mode. “Processed as
valid” means that the application should react in the manner what is
foreseen for “test”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 348 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the
mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps,

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function. Figure 4.4-1exemplifies
LN editing; the LN “LLNO” is chosen for the MDCTRL01 for IEC61850 communication. After
the user defining an object “MOD”, the MDCTRL01 logical node can be saved with the name
“LLNO”. Make a definition of the object “MOD” in MDCTRL01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
Figure 4.4-1 Defining “MOD” object in LLNO logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.4-2 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the SBO mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“LLNO$MOD” using the GR-TIEMS;
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 349 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 4.4-2 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)

Defining DIR mode
Figure 4.4-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the
GR-TIEMS:
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 4.4-3 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)

The user should group the MDCTRL01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for the IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 4.4-2 shows the required mapping signals in MDCTRL01 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure below shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 350 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 4.4-2 Mapping signals for MOD object.

System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory ST 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT
System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT
System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 4.4-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO

The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.4-3 shows the input-
point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “System/LLN0$Mod$”; the user
should map the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC to the input-point. Note that
the user should map the input-point to all attributes having CO and CF. Figure below shows
how to map a signal.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 351 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 4.4-3 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Check Check CO 5500017013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod ctlModel ctlModel CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboTimeout INT32U CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control”
and “CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
Figure 4.4-5 Input-point mapped for LLNO
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 352 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.4.3 Setting
Setting of MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
s value
MDCTRL-EN Off/On – Switch for operation On

MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out 30
timer
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 353 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.4.4 Signal
MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D52 MDCTRL01_SC_RCC MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
8013011D53 MDCTRL01_SC_RMT MDCTRL01 select command by Remote
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal
8013011F56 MODE01_NSL_CS06 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 06
8613011F5E MODE01_NSL_CS07 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 07
8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage(under selection)
8213011F5F MODE01_NSL_CS10 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 10
8313011F41 MODE01_NSD_CSF MDCTRL01 no direction selected condition signal
8513011F60 MODE01_FSL_CS19 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 19
8A13011F61 MODE01_FSL_CS20 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 20
8113011F64 MODE01_FSL_CS21 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 21
8D13011F42 MODE01_FSD_CSF MDCTRL01 On direction selected condition signal
8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40
8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41
8513011F5B MODE01_OSL_CS42 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 42
8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal
8013011E76 MODE01_SLD_CS MDCTRL01 selected condition signal
8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal
8013011F54 MODE01_SC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 select command mode err
8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixed logic 07
8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixed logic 03
8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected
8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion
8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage(unselected)
8013011F66 MODE01_SLD_CS04 MDCTRL01 selected condition signal 04
8013011E7D MODE01_SLR_CS MDCTRL01 select release condition signal
8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signal check
8013011E81 MODE01_FEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command OK condition signal
8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal
8213011E88 MODE01_FEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command fail condition signal
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal
8013011F55 MODE01_EC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 execute command mode err
8213011F44 MODE01_EX_OUT MDCTRL01 execute output signal
8913011F6C MODE01_EX_CS01 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 01
8A13011F6D MODE01_EX_CS02 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 02
8513011E8F MODE01_EX_SFL MDCTRL01 execute success signal
8613011E91 MODE01_EX_FFL MDCTRL01 execute fail signal
8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 354 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

8B13011F6E MODE01_EX_CS03 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 03
8813011E9B MODE01_CC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 cancel command mode err
8313011E9C MODE01_CCF_FCT_CS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal
8613011E95 MODE01_CC_SS MDCTRL01 cancel command success signal
8713011E96 MODE01_CC_FS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail signal

8313002F52 MDCTRL00IN_TMP_16 MDCTRL00IN_TMP_16
821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 355 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Counter function for the general (GCNT)

When a signal is generated and it is received by the generic counter function (GCNT), the
GCNT function can count the transition of signals. For example, as shown in Figure 4.5-1, a
signal is issued repeatedly and if it is required that the number of signals is reported, the
GCNT function is able to count the number of signal transitions and report them. When an
object is in a device state, a binary input-circuit (BI) is provided to receive the signal.
Closed/Open signals
Inputs CNT_ VALs
Changes in device status
(e.g., operations of 43S) BI 540001 800428E F40 PLC_BIT_0429 GCNT01
Operations at the local or Control commands

remote-end
540001 800433E F40 PLC_BIT_0434 GCNT06
(e.g., issuing commands)
Changes in a function Status signals

status
(e.g., function operations)
540001 800435E F40 PLC_BIT_0436
GCNT08
Count objects Signals generated GCNT functions
Figure 4.5-1 Reception of signals at the GCNT functions
Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the
acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are
provided in the GCNT functions. Eight independent GCNT counters† are available. That is,
counters GCNT01 to GCNT8† can operate simultaneously. The values counted are stored in
the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased if the power supply to the IED is
interrupted.
For simplicity, only the GCNT01 function is discussed; the features in the remaining GCNT02–
GCNT08 functions are identical to the GCNT01 function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 356 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.1 Counter setting for a signal

(i) Setting for count timing
In the GCNT01 function count timing is grouped into three, as shown in Figure 4.5-2 (a, b, and
c). When the user wishes to count the On(Closed), set On for the scheme switch [GCNT01-
CNTS]; conversely, set Off for the scheme switch when the Off(Open) is to be counted.
Additionally, OnOff is provided for counting the number of pulses. If the GCNT01 function is
not required, set NA for the scheme switch.
a. On (Closed) signals
“On” is counted on the rising edge of the pulse
Counter 1 2 … n …
b. Off (Open) signals
“Off” is counted on the falling edge of the pulse
c. OnOff (Closed-Open) signals
“OnOff” is counted in response to pulses.
Figure 4.5-2 Count types
(ii) Setting the maximum value

The GCNT01 function is able to count to 2147483647 (=231−1). When the count-value reaches
the value “2147483647”, the count-value returns to an initial-value. If the user wishes to set a
different maximum number in place of “2147483647”, the user can use the setting [GCNT01-
CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum number
from 9 to 2147483647.
(iii) Setting the initial-value

The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value;
generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted
from either “0 (or 1)” following the maximum value. If the user wishes to set an alternative
initial number, setting [GCNT01-CNTRV] can be used. Note that the user can select the initial-
value from zero (0) to 999999.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 357 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Counter
Max set by [GCNT01-CNTMAX]
Initial-value set by [GCNT01-CNTRV]

0
Time
Figure 4.5-3 Maximum-value and initial-value
(iv) Setting for the report (Dead band)

The counter-value can be reported to the remote-end; the user can set the report-timing using
the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. For example, if the counter-value is to be reported for every change,
the user should set 0 for the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. When five(5) is set for the [GCNT01-SDB],
reporting is performed when the counter has incremented by six(6) following the previously
reported counter-value.
Counter Counter Counter
10 10 10
5 5 5
0 Time 0 Time 0 Time
Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting Reporting
a. 0 set for [GCNT01-SDB] b. 1 set for [GCNT01-SDB] c. 5 set for [GCNT01-SDB]
Figure 4.5-4 Counter value and report timing
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 358 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.2 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes

The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting.
(i) Receiving “Select command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a next command
Select command Reset from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Signal Cancel command

Select
reception Select logic Signal output
decision Success
IEC61850
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.5-5 Outline of Select command ‘Reset’
Input point required mapping

Figure 4.5-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”
signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The logic has an input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850
communication. The function will fail to operate if mapping is not performed correctly. We will
discuss how to map the input-points for IEC61850 communication in section 4.5.5.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Complete” signal at the output point
“GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”, when the GCNT01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Reset-Control” is true. If the GCNT01 function determines that the “Remote-Reset-
Control” is not true, the GCNTS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 359 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001)

Command “Remote-Reset-Control”
For SBO operation
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
& “GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”
(540001 8A0E011E76)
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” 0 t

In SBO operate Complete
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*)
0.2s
In DIR operate
To “Wait for a command”
“GCNT01_SLF_CSCN”
Select condition‡ (540001 8B0E011E7B)
0 t
Select “Failed”
0.3s
Figure 4.5-6 Select ‘Reset’ in GCNT01††

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition logic. For more
information, see Figure 4.5-7.
*Note:The GNCT01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using
a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850.
To use this signal, the user should map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other GCNT02–GCNT32 logics, see
Table 4.5-1 for the inputs and Table 4.5-3 for the outputs.
(ii) Select condition

Figure 4.5-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. When resetting the
counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†, the user should set
On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI].
†Note: The HMI operation is discussed in Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.

To select logic
1≥ & Select condition

DCB RCV OR


&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 4.5-7 Select condition logic for Reset in GCNT01

1Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 360 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB
operating signal is denoted as “DCB RCB OR” in Table 4.5-2.
2Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detected signal is denoted
as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.5-2.
3Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
(iii) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for
each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are
used.
“N/A” indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.5-1 Mapping points for the reception of control command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data) M

Table 4.5-2 Input signals to condition logic

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking(DCB) is in progress. N/A

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 4.5-3 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “select complete/ failed” for BIO)
540001 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 Selection completed (Mapping)

5400018B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select failed
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 361 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Table 4.5-4 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “stSeld” for BIO)

540001 000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
(iv) Setting names
Table 4.5-5 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT08

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
GCNTxx-EN Activation of the GCNTxx function On Off / On

GCNTxx- Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off Off / On
HMI
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 362 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the
operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-8 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command
Cancel from the remote-end

Select command Success
Reset from the
Signal reception Cancel
remote-end Cancel logic Do nothing
in IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.5-8 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
Input point required mapping

Figure 4.5-9 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is the same as that
for the signal “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”, when the GCNT01 function has determined that the signal “Remote-
cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued if the function is able to determine
that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.
Input Cancel logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) To “Wait for a command”

Command “Remote-cancel”
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”
Cancel command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ (540001 840E011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Unmatched condition detected *1 &
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 4.5-9 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in GCNT01

1Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 363 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
(ii) Signal name and number

Table 4.5-6 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic)
540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 364 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.4 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes

After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters.
(i) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
Signal reception Operate logic Signal output
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.5-10 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
Mapping required for Input point

Figure 4.5-11 illustrates the operation logic when an “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-
Control)” signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function, in Figure 4.5-11, can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”,
when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Reset-Control” is true.
Input Operate logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) “GCNT01_EC_OK_CSC”

Command “Remote-Reset-Control” (540001 820E011E84)
Operate Cmd.
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
& 1≥
Operate condition‡
Statics-counter
Figure 4.5-11 Operate ‘On’ from the remote-end ††

††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the GCNT02–32 logics, see Table
4.5-1 for the mapping points, Table 4.5-7 for the outputs.
(ii) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the local-end

Figure 4.5-12 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the local-end.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 365 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.5-12 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
New counter value

Figure 4.5-13 shows that the user can set a new value for the counter using the statics sub-
menu†. The new value is applied into “Statics counter” point in Figure 4.5-11.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
Figure 4.5-13 Counter menu in the statics sub-menu

†Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”, when the new
value applied from the sub-menu is appropriate.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 366 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Select condition

Similar to the select condition (see sec.4.5.2(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an operate-condition
logic. Figure 4.5-14 shows the operate-condition logic.
To operate logic
1≥ & Operate condition

DCB RCV OR


&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 4.5-14 Operate condition logic for GCNT01

1–3Note: The signals and settings in Figure 4.5-14 are same as the signals shown in
Figure 4.5-7.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 367 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iv) Signal names and number

Table 4.5-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for BIO)
540001 820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 368 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below:

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the GCNT01 function. Figure 4.5-15
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status controller (ISCSO)” is chosen for the
GCNT01 function. After the user has defined an object “ISCSO”, the GCNT01 logical node can
be saved with the name “GIGO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “ISCSO”
in the GGIO logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing
for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.5-15 Defining “ISCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 369 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.5-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
Figure 4.5-16 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.5-17 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as save as “GIGO3302”; in the DIR
mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 4.5-17 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 370 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 4.5-18 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to
map the IEC 61850 communications.
Table 4.5-8 Mapping signals required for GIGO3302 object in GCNT01 function
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 540001300e011D23 GCNT01_CNT_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5400016A0e011FA7 GCNT01_CNT_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Drag and drop
Figure 4.5-18 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO object of GIGO3302

The GCNT01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”. Table 4.5-9 shows the input-point
“GCNT01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GIGO3302$ISCSO1”; the user should map
the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 4.5-19 shows
how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” in the
functional constraint (FC).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 371 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 4.5-9 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 4.5-19 Input-point mapped for GIGO3302
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 372 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.6 Setting
Setting list for the GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Default setting
Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
G_CNT CNT1 GCNT01-EN Off / On Counter1 Enable Off
GCNT01-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter1 Sending Dead

GCNT01-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
Return value at counter roll
GCNT01-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT01-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT01-HMI Off/On Counter1 for HMI Off
CNT2 GCNT02-EN Off / On Counter2 Enable Off
Counter2 Sending Dead

Band
GCNT02-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT02-HMI Off/On Counter2 for HMI Off
…… ………………….. ………………….. ………………….. …………………..
CNT08 GCNT08-EN Off / On Counter 08 Enable Off
Counter xx Sending Dead

Band
GCNT08-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT08-HMI Off/On Counter xx for HMI Off
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT03 to GGNT07 because the setting items are the same except the
device number.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 373 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
4.5.7 Signal
 Connection points in PLC logics
GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
800E01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01 PLC signal
 Signal monitoring points for the common terms

000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize
800E001D5B GCNT00_CH_SC_OWS GCNT00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RCC GCNT00 count change select command by RCC
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RMT GCNT00 count change select command by Remote
800E001D54 GCNT00_CH_SC_LCD GCNT00 count change select command by LCD
800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC
800E001D60 GCNT00_CH_EC_RMT GCNT00 count change execute command by Remote
800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD
310E001707 Counter DataID for GCNT Function(Setting)
 Signal monitoring points for respective counters (GCNT01 to GCNT08)

320E011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL GCNT01 count value
310E011D21 GCNT01_CNT_QLT GCNT01 count quality
000E011F42 GCNT01_CORR_INS GCNT01 correction instruction
000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
890E011EA2 GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN GCNT01 control logic stage(under selection)
8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal
8B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal
820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
830E011E8B GCNT01_EC_F_CSCN GCNT01 execute command fail condition signal
840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 374 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 375 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 376 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5 Technical Description
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 377 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
A hardware module is made of a case and modules, together with a human machine interface
(HMI) being attached at front. An example of module structure in the 3/4×19” rack turns out
in Figure 5-1. The following modules are employed into a chassis:
* Transformer module (VCT)
* Signal processing and communication module (CPU)
* Binary input module (BI)
* Binary output module (BO)
* Human machine interface module (HMI)
* Binary input and output module 1–3 (BIO1, BIO2, and BIO3)
* Power supply module (PWS)
VCT CPU BI#1 BI#2 BO#1 BIO#1 BIO#2 BIO#3 PWS
Figure 5-1 Modules in 3/4 19” rack’s chassis (Front view, removed the front panel)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 378 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The hardware block diagrams using these modules are shown in Figure 5-2.
VCT CPU
Filter MPU LAN I/F Tele-

I A/D communication
CT×n system
LAN I/F
AC
input
MPU PCM Remote PC
V
VT×m
BO
Auxiliary
relay Binary output
×18
HMI
BI
LCD/MIMIC
Photo coupler Binary input
×18
LEDs
Operation keys BIO

Auxiliary
relay Binary output
Monitoring jacks ×18
Function Key
Local Photo coupler Binary input

USB ×18
PC I/F
Power
PWS
Figure 5-2 Hardware Block Diagram
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 379 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IED case and module slot

5.1.1 1/1 Case
Figure 5.1-1 shows diagrams of the IED case structure for 1/1 size: (a) IED internal structure
seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic
diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-1.a)

Thirteen slots are provided for mounting modules. The transformer module (VCT), the signal
processing and communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) are
mounted at predefined locations in the case. The binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are
placed in slots (IO#1 to IO#8), these slot locations are determined before factory shipment. For
detailed information on slot locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs, see
external connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external connection).
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 5.1-1.b)

The group of terminal blocks for the 1/1 case viewed from the rear is shown. With respect to
BI, BO, and BIO, the terminal blocks are designed with both upper and lower terminals and
are labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T1”, “T2” and so on. Note that both the upper and
lower terminals are provided in the form of a single terminal block for respective BIs, BOs, or
BIOs. The terminal screw numbers for each terminal block relate to the individual circuits and
the user should check the configuration for each circuit. (For details, see section 5.4 or later).
Each slot is identified by its alpha-numeric reference (or slot reference) on the IED case. For
example, the user can identify that slot “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user can
also find alpha-numeric reference “T9” for PWS. The PWS circuits and relevant terminals are
discussed later. (For details, see section 5.5 or later)
The communication modules, which are between the VCT slot and BIO slot, are labeled
“C11” to “C15”. These communication modules are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication,
and external devices.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 5.1-1.c)

The slots and terminal blocks in the IED are shown. Using this figure, the user can find the
location of VCT, BIO, and PWS. This figure is useful when the user sets binary IO modules
using the setting tables. (For setting of binary IO modules, see section 5.4)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 380 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
a. View from front side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
C13
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1 FG2
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGE FGD FGC FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 5.1-1 Slots and terminal blocks in 1/1 case for Compression-type terminal
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 381 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.1.2 3/4 case

diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user can
also find alpha-numeric reference “T7” for PWS.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 382 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.1.3 1/2 case

diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user
can also find alpha-numeric reference “T4” for PWS.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 383 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.1.4 1/3 case

Figure 5.1-4 shows the case structure for 1/3 ×19” rack: (a) IED internal structure seen from
the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-4.a)

Four slots are provided: the transformer module (VCT), the signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) and binary IO modules
(BI, BO, and BIO) are placed into slots. The binary IO module is located in slot “IO#1”.
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 5.1-4.b)

With respect to the binary IO modules, the terminal block is designed with both upper and
lower terminals; they are labeled with the alpha-numeric reference “T1”. Users should note
that the upper terminal and the lower terminal are provided as a single terminal block. The
terminal screw numbers relate to the binary IO module circuits; thus the user should check
the configuration of each circuit.
Note that the PWS is labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T2”.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 5.1-4.c)

The user can find the location of VCT, BIO, and PWS modules form the schematic diagram. It
is useful when the user wishes to set binary IO modules using their setting tables The user
can see the modules at the slot locations respectively from external connection figures (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 384 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGD FGC FGB FGA
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 385 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10
11
10
11
10
11
C12
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19 C13
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25 C14
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
E
39 39 39
40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 386 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

T2 T1
1
2
1
2
C11
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9 VC1
10
11
10
11
C12
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
C13
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25
26
25
26
C14
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
32 32
33 33
34 34
C15 FG1
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
E
39 39
40 40
FG FGA
T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 387 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Transformer module (VCT module)

The transformer module (VCT module) electrically isolates input AC signal and the protection
relay IED. Following are example of AC input signal:
 three-phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) for each winding
 neutral current (IN) for each winding
 phase voltage, etc.
Please refer each VCT module table for detail.
5.2.1 VCT for GRT200 model 1

The VCT35B is used for GRT200 model 1 (for 2 windings transformer model, input
representative voltage). Table 5.2-1 shows terminal # and correspond AC signal.
Table 5.2-1
Terminal ADC VCT35B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 1 VT V
3 4 2 – –
5 6 3 – –
7 8 4 – –
9 10 5 Ia-1CT
11 12 6 1CT Ib-1CT
13 14 7 Ic-1CT
15 16 8 Ia-2CT
17 18 9 –
19 20 10 –
21 22 11 2CT –
23 24 12 –
25 26 13 Ib-2CT
27 28 14 Ic-2CT
29 30 – – – –
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 388 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

The VCT44B is used for GRT200 model 2 (for 3 windings transformer model, input: neutral
point current, representative voltage). Table 5.2-2 shows terminal # and correspond AC signal.
Table 5.2-2
Terminal ADC VCT44B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 VT V
3 4 >> 2 – –
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 1NCT In-1NCT
25 26 >> 13 2NCT In-2NCT
27 28 >> 14 3NCT In-3NCT
29 30 – – – –
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 389 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

VCT44B and VCT47B are used for GRT200 model 3 (for 3 windings transformer model, input:
neutral point current, 3 phase voltage). Table 5.2-3 shows terminal # and correspond AC signal.
Table 5.2-3
Terminal ADC VCT44B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 VT (Not used)
3 4 >> 2 – –
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 1NCT In-1NCT
25 26 >> 13 2NCT In-2NCT
27 28 >> 14 3NCT In-3NCT
29 30 – – – –
Table 5.2-4
Terminal ADC VCT47B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 Va-1VT
3 4 >> 2 1VT Vb-1VT
5 6 >> 3 Vc-1VT
29 30 – – – –
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 390 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

VCT44B is used for GRT200 model 4 (for 3 windings transformer model, input: neutral point
current, 3 phase voltage). Table 5.2-5 shows terminal # and correspond AC signal.
Table 5.2-5
Terminal ADC VCT44B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 VT V
3 4 >> 2 – –
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 Ia-4CT
25 26 >> 13 4CT Ib-4CT
27 28 >> 14 Ic-4CT
29 30 – – – –
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 391 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

VCT44B and VCT48B are used for GRT200 model 5 (for 3 windings transformer model, input:
neutral point current, three-phase voltage x 2). Table 5.2-6 shows terminal # and correspond
AC signal.
Table 5.2-6
Terminal ADC VCT44B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 0VT (Not used)
3 4 >> 2 - -
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 1NCT In-1NCT
25 26 >> 13 2NCT In-2NCT
27 28 >> 14 3NCT In-3NCT
29 30 – – – –
Table 5.2-7
Terminal ADC VCT48B

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 Va-1VT
3 4 >> 2 1VT Vb-1VT
5 6 >> 3 Vc-1VT
7 8 >> 4 - -
9 10 >> 5 Va-2VT
11 12 >> 6 2VT Vb-2VT
13 14 >> 7 Vc-2VT
15 16 >> 8 - -
17 18 >> 9 Ia-4CT
19 20 >> 10 4CT Ib-4CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-4CT
23 24 >> 12 Ia-5CT
25 26 >> 13 5CT Ib-5CT
27 28 >> 14 Ic-5CT
29 30 – – – –
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 392 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.2.6 Constitution of VCT

Figure 5.2-1 shows a VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram1; the same
terminal screw numbers are shown on the terminal block and schematic diagram. The user
should note that the last terminal screw2 and FG terminal are connected with a short-wire by
default.
1Note: When the size of the IED case is 1/1, two alpha-numeric references (VC1 and VC2)
and two slot references (VCT#1 and VCT#2) are available.
2Note: In standard VCTs, the last terminal screw is designated as “No. 30”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 393 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
VC1
VC1
VCT Alpha-
numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Short-wire1
21
22
FG1 23
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-wire
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 5.2-1 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: The connection between terminal screw 30 and FG is made with a short-wire by the
manufacturer.
2Note: This figure is used for general instruction with regard to the VCT. Thus, the
alpha-numeric reference for the VCT will depend on the IED model.
3Note: “VC2” is available for VCT#2 slot.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 394 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.2.7 Setting VCT ratio

As input sources are transformed with various VTs and CTs in the power system, the user shall
set each VT or CT ratio at each VCT terminal.
(i) Setting a ratio for the VT

When the VT quantity applied at the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary voltage to the
secondary voltage should be set. A voltage is applied at the first terminal (Ch1) at VC1 alpha-
numeric reference, the user should set the ratio for the setting [AI1_Ch1_Ratio]. For example,
the user is required to set a value ‘3636’ for the [AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 400kV
and the secondary is 110V (i.e., 400kV/110V=3636). The channel position on the VCT is
discussed in the preceding section VCT.
(ii) Setting a ratio for the CT

When the CT quantity flows into the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary current to the
secondary current should be set. For example, the user is required to set a value ‘4000’ for the
[AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 4000A and the secondary is 1A (i.e., 4000/1=4000).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 395 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Setting list

Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)
s value
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 1.000
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 1.000
reference AI1_Ch3_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#1 1.000
AI1_Ch4_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 1.000
VC2 AI2_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 1.000
alpha-numeric AI2_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#2 1.000
reference AI2_Ch3_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#2 1.000
†Note: For more information on the IED operation, see Chapter User interface: AC
analog input.
‡Note:The number of AC analog input channels depends on the configuration of the VCT
type and the VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the value of the VCT ratio
corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT/CT.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 396 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.2.8 Selection of rated current

The rated current of the auxiliary CT in the VCT module is pre-configured when the IED is
shipped from the manufacturer; the value of the rated current is set uniquely either 1 ampere
or 5 ampere for all auxiliary CTs. However, the user can independently change the value of the
rated current from the pre-configured rated current. The sections that follow explain how the
value of rated current can be individually changed; it is important that the user shall carry out
and confirm that both jumper and screen operations have been made correctly.
(i) Jumper switching

Each of the auxiliary CTs has a Jumper, and the user can select between a rated current of 1
ampere (1A) and a rated current of 5 ampere (5A) using the Jumpers. The user can select the
rated current by following the steps below with reference to Figure 5.2-2:
Step1: Open the IED front panel.
Step2: Remove the receptacle from the header when the rating requirement is for 1A.
When a rating of 5A is required, insert the receptacle into the header.
The locations of the Jumpers are designated with the marks “W1” to “W14”, which are
printed on the circuit board of the VCT. These “W*” marks correspond to the AC analog input
channel numbers discussed previously.
Front Rear
Tr.1 Tr.2
W1
W2
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Location of Jumpers
W4
Connector
Jumpers
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Layout of VCT components VCT Photograph
Setting for 5 A rating Setting for 1 A rating

receptacle
header header
Figure 5.2-2 Jumpers and their locations
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 397 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) IED screen operation

The user should keep in mind that the rated current will be changed† following jumper
switching. The table below shows the setting items for each AC analog input channel. For
example, when the user wishes to change the rated current on AC analog input channel#3 at
VC1 slot, for example if the user wishes to change the rated current to 1 ampere from 5 ampere,
the user should apply the setting [AI1_Ch2_Rating] 1A. Term “DEP” in the table represents a
pre-configured rated current set by the manufacturer; the pre-configured rated current is
identical to the AC rating determined in accordance with the order from the customer. Thereby,
the user should be careful not to change other setting items, which the user does not wish to
alter from the original requirements specified in the customer order.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)
U Default setting
Range
n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
t
rating rating rating rating
s
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 DEP
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 DEP
references AI1_Ch3_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#1 DEP
AI1_Ch4_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 DEP
VC2 AI2_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 DEP
alpha-numeric AI2_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#2 DEP
references AI2_Ch3_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#2 DEP
†Note: Number of auxiliary CTs depends on the configuration of the VCT type and the
VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the rating corresponding to a specific
auxiliary CT. For more information, see Chapter User interface: AC analog input.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 398 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Signal processing and communication modules (CPU)

A signal-processing including communication module (CPU) consists of a main circuit board
for processing (CPU1) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to
COM#5). The piggyback circuit boards are provided so that the IED can have the
communication with the network, time synchronization servers and others. The piggyback
circuit boards are mounted on the CPU1.
Other signal-processing modules (CPM1 and CPX1) are provided to augment the CPU
performance. The CPUs configuration depends on respective models; the arrangement of the
CPU1, CPM1, and CPX1 varies in the respective models. Figure 5.3-1 exemplifies the full
implementation for the CPU.
CPU1
CPM1 CPX1
COM#1
MPU#2
COM#2
DDR2#2
COM#3
MPU#1
COM#4
DDR2#1 MPU#3
NOR-Flash MRAM COM#5 DDR2#3
AM
Figure 5.3-1 CPU and communication modules for the processing

Note: The implementation of the above may vary according to circumstances.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 399 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.3.1 Communication modules

For communication, piggyback-circuit-modules are provided and these are mounted on CPU1,
as shown in Table 5.3-1. These specifications are tabulated and their symbols are also shown
in Table 5.3-1. The arrangement of these modules depends on the IED models. Thus, it is
required to refer external connection figures in order to examine which modules are used and
where they are located. The external connection figures are shown separately. (See Appendix:
Typical External connection)
Table 5.3-1 Communication modules

I/F 100BASE-FX 100BASE-TX Fiber optic IRIG-B000
interface
Connector SC type RJ45 type ST type PCB connector
Medium Fiber optic Twist pair Fiber optic(GI) Twist pair
Usage Substation Substation Data transfer Time synchronization
automation automation (2km class))
system and system and
others others
Symbol 100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX Remote
Comm.
IRIG-B000
A1
B1 SIG
A2(Disuse)
TX RX
B2(Disuse)
A3
RX B3
TX GND
1. 100BASE-TX module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The 100BASE-TX module is used for
the GR-TIEMS operation or the communication for remote end. Use a shielded twisted pair
cable so that electric magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
2. 100Base-FX module (SC plug)

A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100Base-FX module is used for the LAN
communication.
3. Fiber optic module

A fiber optic module is used for the serial communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
4. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock; the
signal is in conformity to serial IRIG-B000 format. Note that the IRIG-B000 module is able to
receive digital signal (TTL) only (i.e., the reception of AM signal is not applicable). This module
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 400 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
is isolated using a photo coupler; the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used. The
peak value of IRIG-B000 signal should be greater than 3.5 volts; the IRIG-B000 module has
the input register (about 3k ohm). Thus, the terminal register can be required when the IRIG-
B000 signal is delivered for several devices; the value of the terminal register depends on the
number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of time
synchronization, see Chapter Technical Description: Clock function.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
5.3.2 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
For example, Figure 5.3-2 shows LAN module (100BASE-TX) and IRIG-B000 module
placed at locations C11 and C15. Blank panels are placed at the other locations. The user can
find the corresponding communication modules located in the IED on the right side.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 401 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Com. slot VCT#1

100BASE-TX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE-TX
C11 Blank panel
C12
Blank panel
C12 (BLANK)
Blank panel C13

C13 (BLANK)
C14
C14 (BLANK)
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 5.3-2 Communication module structure (an example)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

402
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 5.4-1.
Table 5.4-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
9 BIO4A Variable 6 0 0 6 1 1
1Note: One of two voltages is applied for the binary IO modules: 48Vdc (24 to 60)
and 220Vdc (110 to 250). The DC voltage supplied to the IED determines the
voltage type selection; hence, a combination of different voltage types is not
possible.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 5.4.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 5.4-6.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either
a high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the ones of
the variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard to input
voltage using settings.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 403 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.1 Binary input feature

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 5.4-2.
Table 5.4-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
-Sharing common BI1 BI1

Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
Terminal screw
number
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A
Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
7 BIO4A Same as BI2A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 5.4.5.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 404 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable logic
for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 5.4-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table 5.4-4
shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 5.4-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 5.4-4. Also, see section 5.4.6 (i).
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For
example, the user can configure 18 CPLs in BI1A.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 405 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A and BIO4A)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
BI1-3_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI1, BI2, and BI3 77

BI4-6_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI4, BI5, and BI6 77
Common BI7-9_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI7 to BI94 77
BI10-12_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI10 to BIn4 77
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI2_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 2 Off
BI3_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 3 Off
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI n Off

BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For
example, the user can set for 12 CPLs in BI2A and for 6 CPLs in BIO4A.
As an example, Figure 5.4-1 shows the binary input circuit of BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has three
settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 406 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
BI1-NC Filter BI1
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
BI2-NC BI2
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
[THRES_Lvl]
High
R1
R1
Figure 5.4-1 Common programmable logic for BI1A
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to
see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 407 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the
function ID “200B001” and Element ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when
the signal “BI2-CPL” on BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should
designate that signal using the function ID “200B002” and Element ID
“8001001172”. For more information with regard to the function ID and the Data
ID at IO#1, see sections 5.4.6(i), 5.4.7(i), and others.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 408 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(i) Setting threshold level

For Standard type (BI1A and others)
The selection switch is used to adjust the threshold of an input signal; it is designated as
[THRES_Lvl]. If an external device signal is lower than DC 110V1, the user should set Low for
scheme switch [THRES_Lvl]. Conversely if an external device signal is higher than DC 220V1,
the user should set High for the scheme switch. Note that scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is used
to control all binary input circuits. The user must ensure that the input voltage is higher than
DC 77V1 when the setting ‘Low’ is applied; the input voltage should be higher than DC 136V1
when the setting ‘High’ is applied.
For Variable type (exclusive for BI2A and BIO4A)

BI2A and BIO4A have a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the guaranteed-minimum-pick-up voltages (thresholds) as required. This
unique feature is performed with settings [BI1-3_PICKUP], [BI4-6_PICKUP], [BI7-9_PICKUP],
and [BI10-12_PICKUP]; every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Provided that the user uses BI2A, then binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting
[BI1-3_PICKUP] and the user should set the value between 18 to 222V DC2 for this setting. For
the setting [BI4-6_PICKUP], the above mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary input
circuits; similarly the setting [BI7-9_PICKUP] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits; and
finally the setting [BI10-12_PICKUP] is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
On the other hand, when BIO4A is used, the binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the
setting [BI1-3_PICKUP]; and the binary input circuits #4 to #6 follow the setting [BI4-
6_PICKUP]. Since BIO4A has six binary input circuits, the other settings [BI7-9_PICKUP] and
[BI10-12_PICKUP] are not required here.
1Note: The threshold value is fixed for all binary IO module types with the exception of
BI2A and BIO4A. The user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type”
influences these values (see the 1st note in Table 5.4-1). These particular values
are found when 220V dc type is used.
2Note: In the variable type, the user can set the threshold arbitrarily between 18 to 222V
in DC, and can regulate its threshold voltage in a voltage step. Table 5.4-5 shows
the corresponding values with regard to guaranteed and typical thresholds in
response to the setting values. Note that the operation in the variable type is
segmented into ‘Operate’, ‘Intermediate’, ‘and ‘Non-operate’ areas, which are
decided by the guaranteed-pick-up, typical-pick-up, and guaranteed-drop-off
levels, as illustrated in Figure 5.4-2.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 409 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.4-5 Guaranteed and typical thresholds in the variable type

Guaranteed levels Typical levels
Setting values [V]
Pick-up voltage [V] Drop-off voltage [V] Pick-up voltage [V]
18 17.9 10.5 14.2
19 18.5 11.1 14.8
20 19.9 12.3 16.1
21 20.5 12.9 16.7
22 to 29 21.8 14.0 17.9
30 29.3 20.8 25.0
31 to 32 30.8 22.2 26.5
33 32.5 23.7 28.1
34 to 35 34.0 25.0 29.5
36 to 37 36.0 26.8 31.4
38 to 39 37.5 28.3 32.9
40 39.2 29.8 34.5
41 to 49 40.8 31.2 36.0
50 to 52 49.8 39.4 44.6
53 to 56 53.0 42.2 47.6
57 to 59 56.3 45.3 50.8
60 to 61 59.5 48.1 53.8
62 to 63 61.8 50.2 56.0
64 to 65 63.6 51.8 57.7
66 65.9 53.9 59.9
67 to 70 66.7 54.7 60.7
71 70.1 57.7 63.9
71 to 73 70.3 57.9 64.1
74 73.2 60.6 66.9
75 to 79 74.4 61.6 68.0
80 to 83 79.7 66.4 73.0
84 to 88 83.7 70.1 76.9
89 to 92 88.2 74.0 81.1
93 to 99 92.3 77.8 85.0
100 to 106 99.4 84.2 91.8
107 to 111 106.4 90.6 98.5
112 to 113 111.4 95.0 103.2
114 to 119 114.0 97.4 105.7
120 119.3 102.3 110.8
121 to 127 121.0 103.8 112.4
128 to 130 128.0 110.1 119.0
131 130.1 112.0 121.0
132 to 135 131.9 113.7 122.8
136 to 137 135.9 117.3 126.6
138 to 141 137.1 118.3 127.7
142 to 143 141.5 122.3 131.9
144 143.9 124.5 134.2
145 to 146 144.6 125.2 134.9
147 to 151 146.1 126.5 136.3
152 to 154 151.8 131.6 141.7
155 to 161 154.4 134.0 144.2
162 161.3 140.3 150.8
163 to 165 162.6 141.4 152.0
166 to 170 165.8 144.3 155.0
171 to 173 170.6 148.6 159.6
174 to 176 173.6 151.4 162.5
177 to 183 176.3 153.8 165.0
184 to 189 183.3 160.1 171.7
190 to 193 189.7 165.9 177.8
194 to 200 193.6 169.4 181.5
201 to 203 200.3 175.5 187.9
204 to 211 203.1 178.1 190.6
212 to 221 211.5 185.7 198.6
222 222.0 195.2 208.6
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 410 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Input voltage
Operating area
Guaranteed pick up level

Intermediate area
Typical pick up level
Guaranteed drop off level
Non-operating area
Figure 5.4-2 Operating area in the variable type

Note: In practice, the pick-up voltages depend on respective binary circuits physically
This means the characteristics are not affected by the ambient conditions and the
applied voltages.
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 5.4-3 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of contact
chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the calculation
of ‘t’ is,
1
[CPM_NUM]×
System Frequency×12
The setting [CMP_NUM] is provided for all binary input circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 5.4-3 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 411 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18.
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On Delay
Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch [INVERSE-
SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 5.4-4 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on BI1A at IO#1 and
BIO1A at IO#3. The user should key the settings with regard to BI1A and BIO1A using the
setting tables for IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT3. As the setting points are for BI1A and BIO1A at
IO#1 and IO#3, the user should take the setting table of the standard type (in sec. 5.4.6).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 412 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IO#n
IO#1
IO#2
IO#5
IO#3
IO#4
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18

and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7
and Common.
a. Setting targets for BI1A (IO#1) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 5.4-4 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
The setting table of section 5.4.6 is available for all binary IO modules except for BI2A
and BIO4A; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are relevant
to BI1A. That is, for BI1A the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary
input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for BIO1A the user
should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to #7) from IO_SLOT3
setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are shown in sec. 5.4.6.
The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter User interface: I/O
setting sub-menu)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 413 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.3 Binary output feature

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types
of BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 5.4-1 and Table 5.4-6. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 5.4.5.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 414 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.4-6 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 6ms (typical)
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+) BIO4A
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Consisting of an IGBT BO number
device and a contact
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O
-Break: 10A at 220/110Vdc
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc BO number BIO3A
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections BIO4A
37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 415 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL logic or a PLC signal can drive a binary output circuit. Table 5.4-7 shows the
settings summary of CPL function.
Table 5.4-7 Setting items for binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs
are listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are
summarized in each slot. (See sections 5.4.8(i) and 5.4.8(ii))
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 416 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 5.4-5 shows the binary output circuits on BO1A in order to help understand the
settings. BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has timers and switches.
The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
[LOGIC-SW] & ≥1
t 0 0 t BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On &
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO2
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO2
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
810201113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO2 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
& ≥1 BO3
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO3
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8202021113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO3 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
& ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BOn
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BOn RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 5.4-5 Binary Output Circuit for BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 5.4-5 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 417 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 5.4.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 5.4.9(ii).
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the eight
input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should set either
AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 418 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a scheme
switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of four types
and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type,
(3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
Instant type
When the user uses a binary output signal without the following characteristics, the user
should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting [Reset
signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should determine
the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal monitoring point for
each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
Note: When Latch is set, the state of BO circuit will be sustained during power turn-
on/off.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 419 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
IO#n
IO#1
IO#2
IO#5
IO#3
IO#4
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18 Setting targets: BO1–BO10

b. Setting targets for BO1A (IO#2) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 5.4-6 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 5.4-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output circuits,
the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user should key
the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should understand
and select setting points that are relevant to BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for BO1A the user
should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18) from
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 420 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output
circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section 5.4.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 5.4-5, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that Connection points on the PLC are shown with the DataIDs of BIO_SLOT. See section
5.4.9(i)-3 and 5.4.9(ii)-3. (For more information of PLC function, see Chapter PLC function)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 421 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types and the arrangement of the respective
inputs-and-outputs are particular to each binary IO module type, as shown in Figure 5.4-7 to
Figure 5.4-11. Referring to the figures on the left, the user can for example, identify the actual
terminal blocks of the binary IO module. Corresponding circuits are drawn on the right in the
form of schematic diagrams. If the wiring of BI1A is considered, the wiring objects are
designated with terminal screw numbers 1 to 40. The terminal screw numbers are shown next
to the terminal blocks. Here the user can find a slot number labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”. The asterisk sign (*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the
actual implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of
binary IO modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection)
Note that some input and output circuits have polarity, which is designated with either
a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (−) respectively.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 422 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Alpha-numeric reference for the BI. Sign “*”

is substituted for the actual slot location
number.
T* T*
Screw
BI1A BI3A
T*
(+) 1 (+) 1 (
1
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (+) BI2 (
(+) 3 (+) 3
3
4 BI2 4 BI3
4 (−) (+) BI4
5 (+) 5 (+) 5 (
6 BI3 6 BI5
6 (−) (+) BI6 (
7 (+) 7 (+) 7 (
8 BI4 8 BI7
8 (−) (+) (
9 9 BI8
9 (+) (+) BI9
10 BI5 10
10 (−) (+)
11 11 BI10
11 (+) (+) (
12 BI6 12 BI11
12 (−) (+) BI12 (
13 (+) 13 (+) 13 (
14 BI7 14 BI13
14 (−) (+) (
15 15 BI14
15 (+) (+) BI15
16 BI8 16
16 (−) (+) BI16
17 (+) 17 (+) 17 (
18 BI9 18 BI17
18 (−) (+) (
BI18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 (+) 21 (+) 21 (+
22 BI10 22 BI19
22 (−) (+) BI20 (−
23 (+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
24 (−) (+)
25 25 BI22
25 (+) (+) (+
26 BI12 26 BI23
26 (−) (+) (−
27 27 BI24
27 (+) (+) (+
28 BI13 28 BI25
28 (−) (+) (−
29 29 BI26
29 (+) (+)
30 BI14 30 BI27
30 (−) (+)
31 31 BI28
31 (+) (+) (+
32 BI15 32 BI29
32 (−) (+) (−
33 33 33 BI30
(+) (+) BI31 (+
34 (−) 34 BI16 34
(+) BI32 (−
35 (+) 35 (−) 35
36 (−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
37 (+) 37 (−) 37 (+
38 (−) 38 BI18 38
(−) (−
39
40
Terminal blocks Schematic figures
Figure 5.4-7 Input arrangements for BI1A and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-6.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 423 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Alpha-numeric reference for the BI. Sign “*”

is substituted for the actual slot location
number.
T*
The same terminal screw is denoted with
Screw the same number.
BI2A
T*
(+) 1
1 BI1
(−) 2
2
3
4
(+) 5
5 BI2
6 (−) 6
7 (+) 7
(−) 8 BI3
8
9
10
11 (+) 11
12 BI4
12 (−)
13 (+) 13
(−) 14 BI5
14
15
16
17 (+) 17
18 18 BI6
(−)
19
20 Cables to Flame ground terminal
required
21 (+) 21
BI7
22 (−) 22
23
24
25 (+) 25
26 26 BI8
(−)
27 (+) 27
28 28 BI9
(−)
29
30
31 (+) 31
32 32 BI10
(−)
33 (+) 33
34 34 BI11
(−)
35
36
37 (+) 37
BI12
38 (−) 38
39
40
FG
Figure 5.4-8 Input arrangements for BI2A

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 424 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Alpha-numeric reference for BO. Sign “*” is substituted for

the slot location number.
T* T*
BO1A BO2A
T*
1 1 1
(+)
2 BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3 3
(+)
4 BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5 5
(+)
6 BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7 7
(+)
8 BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9 9
(+)
10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11 11
(+)
12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13 13
(+)
14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15 15
(+)
16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17 17
(+)
18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
19
20 The same terminal
screw is denoted
with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
22 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
24 BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
26 BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
28 BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 31 (+)
32 BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 33 (+)
34 BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35 35
36 BO17 36
37 37
38 BO18 38
39
40
Figure 5.4-9 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 425 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Alpha-numeric reference of BIO. Sign “*” is

substituted for the actual slot location number.
T* T*
BIO1A BIO2A
T* (+) 1 (+) 1
2 BI1 2 BI1
1 (−) (−)
2 (+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI2
3 (−) (−)
4 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI3
5 (−) (−)
6 (+) 7 7
BI4 (+) BI4
7 (−) 8 (−) 8
8 (+) 9 (+) 9
9 10 BI5 10 BI5
(−) (−)
10 (+) 11 (+) 11
11 12 BI6 12 BI6
(−) (−)
12 (+) 13 (+) 13
13 14 BI7 14 BI7
(−) (−)
14 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) BI8
15 16 16
17 (−)
16 (+) 17
17 BO2(SF) 18 18 BI9
(−)
18
19
20
The same terminal

21 21 21
screw is denoted with BO3(SF) (+)
22 22 22 BI10
the same number. (−)
23 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11
24 (−)
25 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12
26 (−)
27 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28
28
29 29 29
30 BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30
31 31 31
32 BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32
33 33 33
34 BO9 34 BO4 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO10 36 BO5 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 5.4-10 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A and BIO2A

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 426 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*” is substituted

for the actual slot location number. T* T*
BIO3A BIO4A
T* 1 1
1 (+) (+)
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (−)
(+) 3 (+) 3
3 BI2 BI2
(−) 4 (−) 4
4
(+) 5 (+) 5
5 BI3 BI3
(−) 6 (−) 6
6
(+) 7 (+) 7
7 BI4 BI4
(−) 8 (−) 8
8
(+) 9 (+) 9
9 BI5 BI5
(−) 10 (−) 10
10
(+) 11 (+) 11
11 BI6 BI6
12 (−) 12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
16 BI8
16 (−) 17 (+)
17 BO1(H) 18 (−)
18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
BO1(F) 22 BO2(H) 22 (−)
22
23 23 23 (+)
BO2(F) 24 BO3(H) 24
24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
BO3(F) 26 BO4(H) 26
26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
BO4(F) 28 BO5(H) 28
28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO5(F) 30 BO6(H) 30 (−)
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
34 BO7 34 BO7 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO8 36 BO8 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 5.4-11 Input and output arrangements in BIO3A and BIO4A
Note: PHOENIX CONTACT ® is the manufacturer of the terminal block. The model of
this terminal is described as “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can
connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the
recommended cables are AWG14 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use a
cable ferrule made in PHOENIX CONTACT ® when required.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 427 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
For the standard type being furnished
s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

For the variable type being furnished

s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
…… …… …… …… ……

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 428 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID:

200B02 to 200B0n)
For the standard type being furnished
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)
For the variable type being furnished

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 429 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI5 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI7 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI9 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI11 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI13 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI15 signal without filter
8A011A1111 BI27-NC BI27 signal without filter
8B011B1111 BI28-NC BI28 signal without filter
8C011C1111 BI29-NC BI29 signal without filter
8D011D1111 BI30-NC BI30 signal without filter
8F011F1111 BI32-NC BI31 signal without filter
8E011E1111 BI31-NC BI32 signal without filter
After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 430 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)

8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter
8A011A1110 BI27 BI27 signal with filter
8B011B1110 BI28 BI28 signal with filter
8C011C1110 BI29 BI29 signal with filter
8D011D1110 BI30 BI30 signal with filter
8E011E1110 BI31 BI31 signal with filter
8F011F1110 BI32 BI32 signal with filter
The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 431 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)

8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
8201121172 BI19-CPL BI19signal with filter and programmable logic
8301131172 BI20-CPL BI20ignal with filter and programmable logic
8A011A1172 BI27-CPL BI27 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B011B1172 BI28-CPL BI28 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C011C1172 BI29-CPL BI29 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D011D1172 BI30-CPL BI30 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E011E1172 BI31-CPL BI31 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F011F1172 BI32-CPL BI32 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n

(Function ID: 200B02 to 200B0n)
Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
After the filter

The ends of binary input circuits

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 432 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01)
Default setting
Units
value
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell"
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
……. ……. ……. …….
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 433 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID

200B02 to 200B0n)
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 434 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 435 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Connection points for the PLC

310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
Before the contact-driver
After the contact-driver

Connection points for the PLC

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 436 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Power supply module (PWS)

The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. The input
range rating of the PWS is 110 to 250 V DC.
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.4
Upper block
is designated
“1 to 20” T*
PWS
*
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
4
9
10 FAIL15
11 3
12 Terminal screw
1
13 number
14 Terminal
15 screw
16 number
17 8
18
19 10
20 Lower block
is FAIL25 9
designated
“21 to 40” 7
21
22
23 Terminal screw
number
24
25 29
26 Positive(+) DC
30
27 /
28
29 Negative(−) 31 DC
30 32
31
35
32
33 36
Short wire 1 34 Short wire 1
35 E 37
36
37 38
38
Short-wire 2 39 Short wire 2
40
FG
FG
E3
Fram e earth Screw M5 screw for case earthing 3
Terminal and Earthing screws Schematic diagram
Figure 5.5-1 PWS terminal block (Rear view)
PWS consists of a pair of terminal blocks4 (which are labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”; a number replaces the asterisk “*” to designate the slot numbers.) The left of
Figure 5.5-1 shows the PWS terminal blocks, and the schematic figure for PWS is also shown
on the right.
Terminal screws No. 1 to 4 (FAIL1) and No. 7 to 10 (FAIL2) are provided to output the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 437 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
failure results of the automatic supervision function5. Terminal screws No. 29(+) and 31(−) are
linked to the power supply. Other terminal screws No. 30(+) and 31(–) are also provided for the
power terminal and are used when bus distribution is required or when the safety
improvement of the cable capacity is required because the power cable is thin. Terminal screw
No. 38 and FG, by default, are linked with a short-wire and also terminal screw No. 35 and
terminal screw No. 37. The user should connect the IED case to the earth with the earth screw.
The other terminal screws are not used.
The actual terminal slot location is also found in external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical External connection)
Table 5.5-1 PWS specifications

Input voltage Voltage fluctuation
Description
rating6 permissible
Input voltage (110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc) is available
DC: 110 to 250V DC: 88 to 300V where the voltage varies in ±20% of the rated voltage
(110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
CAUTION
1Note: The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. Read
Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully and follow the instructions
during testing.
2Note: The connection (double lines) between terminal screw 38 and screw labeled “FG”
is made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
3Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its cross-
section is AWG9 or larger.
4Note:The user can connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence,
the recommended cables are AWG14 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI
2.5 -10 BU” ferrule for AWG14 when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by
PHOENIX CONTACT®.
5Note: The PWS module monitors DC voltages. The supervision function can issue a power
failure when the DC voltage is less than 85V (default threshold; for more
information about the failure, see Chapter Automatic supervision function). The
user can change the 85V threshold to 170V by inserting a shunt connecter (1-2) at
JP4 on the PWS module (see Figure 5.5-2).
6Note: IED (PWS module) can run on AC power supply (100–220Vac), but the operation is
not guaranteed. Power failure (error) is issued when the supervision function is not
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 438 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
disabled, if the IED runs on AC power supply for testing etc.
JP4 JP4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Setting to 170V (typical) Setting to 85V (typical)

(Position ‘1-2’) (Default position ‘2-3’)
Figure 5.5-2 Alarm threshold for DC voltage dropping on the PWS module
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 439 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

5.6.1 Outlook
Figure 5.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel.
The HMI has a screen (standard LCD or large LCD ‘MIMIC’), LED indicators (#1– #26),
operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle.
The LCD can display information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data, monitoring,
fault records and others. We shall see the menus on the display in Chapter User interface later.
A USB receptacle in B-type is provided for the connection to the PC. Thus, the user can connect
the engineering tools (GR-TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®) with the IED using the
USB receptacle.
LED indicators
(#1–#26) Screen
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Figure 5.6-1 HMI on front panel
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 440 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.6.2 LED Indicators

The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26) are
provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC
function can control to indicate the statuses. The user can make a new indicator label using
the label maker of the GR-TIEMS®. (See Chapter Engineering tool)
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 5.6-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled using
a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discuss setting the LED indicator #3
only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to #26) is the
same as the #3. Table 5.6-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 5.6-2 shows the signal
monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface:
I/O setting sub-menu.
(i) Selection of input signals

The LED indicator (#3) is lit by entering signals from other functions; eight ports are provided
for the entering signals, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user should ensure
one or more DataIDs are set for the input-signal1 to input-signal8. Entering signals are
designated using DataIDs, respectively; the user should set respective DataIDs for the settings
[Input signal1] to [Input signal8].
(ii) Logic gate switch

In the LED indicator logic #3 a logic scheme is provide for the eight entering signals; the
entering signals are grouped by the selection using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the
user should set either AND, OR or XOR.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 441 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001 LED indicator #4
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer]
& ≥1
[Input signal 2]
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
[Input signal 3]
& 0 t
&
≥1 OR 0.000-300.000s
[INVERSE-SW] Normal
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #26
& ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 5.6-2 LED indicator logics (#3 to #26)
(iii) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

For the LED indicator logic #3 the user can use an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer; both
are used to adjust the timing for lighting the LED indicator #3. The user should set their
respective time values for settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(iv) Logic level inversion

On the LED indicator logic #3 the entering signal is inverted by the logic inversion function;
inverting an entering signal is carried out when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. Set Normal for the scheme switch when logic inversion is not required.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 442 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(v) Logic timer switch

The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch
[TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4)
instantaneous type:
Instant type
When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user should
set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset signal
for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID, the
user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
(vi) Selection of the LED color

For the LED indicator #3, color selection of either RED/GREEN/YELLOW is possible using the
setting [Color].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 443 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.6-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01))
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED#3 color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED#3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED#3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED#3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#4 (No Assigned)
……….
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#26 (No Assigned)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 444 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01)
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
3100011001 IN SERV In service LED
3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3
31000A1001 LED-10 Output signal of the LED indicator #10
31000B1001 LED-11 Output signal of the LED indicator #11
31000C1001 LED-12 Output signal of the LED indicator #12
31000D1001 LED-13 Output signal of the LED indicator #13
31000E1001 LED-14 Output signal of the LED indicator #14
31000F1001 LED-15 Output signal of the LED indicator #15
31001A1001 LED-26 Output signal of the LED indicator #26
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 445 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs

The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation;
the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 5.6-3). However, the user
can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally,
the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user
presses the function key.
Table 5.6-3 Function keys and jump destinations (default)
Function LED lit when
Jump destination as default
Key# pressing
F1 Metering menu Yellow

F2 Fault Record menu Yellow
F3 Event Record1 menu Yellow
F6 Diagnostics menu Yellow
F7 (Not defined) Yellow
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
(i) Screen jump pressing the function key

The user can program the F1 to F7 keys as the user-preferred jump keys. For example, when
the user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to another screen, set Screen jump for scheme switch
[Function] in the F1 key (see Table 5.6-6). We shall see the setting in Chapter User interface:
Setting sub-menu: Configuration of Function keys.
(ii) Binary signal generated pressing the function key

When the user wishes to generate a binary signal upon occurrence of pressing the F1 key, set
Assign Signal for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key. For instance, if the user wishes to
send a signal generated pressing F1 to the binary output circuit (BO1‡) at the IO#1 slot, set
the Data ID of “FUNC-KEY1(240001 310001730)” for the setting [Input signal 1] of the BO1‡
circuit. Note that the user should set On for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL] when the connection
is done using the setting [Input signal 1]. Figure 5.6-3 shows that a generate signal is outputted
at the FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL. Table 5.6-7 shows the other FUNC-KEY2 to 7 points. We shall
see the setting procedure in Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu: Signal control function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 446 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Function key logic for F1 Terminal and

(Function ID: 240001) BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 1] [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
& “BO1-RB”
F1 [Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On
Off
&
(200B01_8002001113)
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
Figure 5.6-3 F1 key connected with the BO1‡

‡Note:The BO1 circuit is used just for an explanation; it is discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Binary IO module.
†Note:When the user wishes to inject the signal at the PLC connection point of the “BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D at the IO#1 slot)”, the user should set the BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D) for the setting [Signal] of the F1 key. Then, set Off
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using scheme
switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 5.6-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL (240001
310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the Toggle mode
is preferred. In the Table 5.6-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are shown.
Table 5.6-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
(iii) Lighting LEDs on F1 to F7

Figure 5.6-4 shows the F1 to F7 LED logics. Programing to light the LEDs (F1 to F7) is the
same as the programing of the LED indicators (#3 to #26) (for the programming, see section
5.6.2). As a default, e.g., the “FUNC-KEY1 (240001 310001730)” is set for the setting [Input
signal 1] of the F1 LED logic. The LED-F2 to F7 points are listed in Table 5.6-8.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 447 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
& ≥1
t 0 0 t LED-F1
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 31001C1001 F2 LED logic
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F2
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
[INVERSE-SW]
&
≥1 OR Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 3100211001 F7 LED logic

& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F7
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 5.6-4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7
Table 5.6-5 Settings of Function keys (Function ID: 240001)

Default setting
value
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /
Function - Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F1
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 Instant
No Assign
F2
……….
No Assign
F7
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 448 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
……….
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 449 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100001730 FUNC-KEY1 Signal generated directly when pressing F1
Table 5.6-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
31001C1001 LED-F2 Signal generated during pressing the F2 key
31001D1001 LED-F3 Signal generated during pressing the F3 key
31001E1001 LED-F4 Signal generated during pressing the F4 key
31001F1001 LED-F5 Signal generated during pressing the F5 key
3100201001 LED-F6 Signal generated during pressing the F6 key
3100211001 LED-F7 Signal generated during pressing the F7 key
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 450 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.6.4 Monitoring jacks

A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on
the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state
of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the
user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated. Using with an oscilloscope, the user
can also observe the binary signal that comes from the monitoring jack; three monitoring jacks
(Term A, B, and C) are available on the front panel.
Table 5.6-9 Output terminals for signal monitoring (No default setting)
Jack Jack name LED Color Remarks
A Term A Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number

B Term B Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
C Term C Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 5.6-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the [Term
B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User interface:
Test sub-menu: Signal monitoring screen.
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
Signal designated by
setting [Term A] DRIVER Term Signal to the
440001 8000011C20
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Figure 5.6-5 Monitoring logics A, B and C

†Note:The monitoring point is just selected for the explanation; the user can select a
monitoring point from the relay applications and the control and monitoring
applications. The monitoring points is listed as PLC monitoring points in each
function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 451 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.6-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301)

Setting items Range Contents
s value
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 5.6-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
3100231001 TEST-B TEST-B
3100241001 TEST-C TEST-C
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 452 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.6.5 Operation keys

(i) L/R key
The IED has two LEDs on the L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a
remote mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 5.6-12 shows
the signal monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Table 5.6-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100251001 LOC LED Local
3100261001 REM LED Remote
(ii) Operation keys except L/R key

Like in the function keys (F1 to F7), the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the
keys; the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 5.6-13.
Table 5.6-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR
31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE
31000F1730 DOWN Key situation of DOWN
3100071730 ENTER Key situation of ENTER
3100091730 HELP Key situation of HELP
3100111730 LEFT Key situation of LEFT
31000A1730 LOC/REM Key situation of LOC/REM
31000C1730 OPEN Key situation of OPEN
3100121730 RIGHT Key situation of RIGHT
3100101730 UP Key situation of UP
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 453 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Clock function
Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in Chapter User interface: Time sub-menu.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
5.7.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 5.7.4.
5.7.1 Clock setting

The user can set the time using the time sub-menu as shown in Figure 5.7-1. The user also can
set the time using the GR-TIEMS†.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 5.7-1 Time sub-menu in Clock menu

†Note:Make the calibration the when the clock is set using the GR-TIMES. This is
because the transmission time is required from the PC to the IED.
5.7.2 Selection of date and time formats

The user can select user-preferred date/time format; setting [Data_fmt] is provided for the
selection of the format. For example, ‘March 24th 2014 10:48’ can be displayed when the format
“DDMMYYYY” is selected.
 “2014-03-24 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “YYYYMMDD”.
 “03-24-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “MMDDYYYY”.
 “24-03-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “DDMMYYYY”.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 5.7-2 Setting screen of Display format
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 454 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.7.3 Time Synchronization

The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective
IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting
[Time_Sync_Src]:
 SNTP method
 IRIG-B method
 Binary Input (BI) method
(i) Synchronization using SNTP

Example of SNTP synchronization
The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 5.7-3 exemplifies
two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN.
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
………….
IED_1 IED_2 IED_n
Figure 5.7-3 Two time servers connected on the LAN
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-4.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see 5.7.4 and 5.7.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] > Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
SNTP
Figure 5.7-4 Time setting for SNTP

Table 5.7-1 Settings for the SNTP synchronization
Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method SNTP
SNTP Off /On Operation of SNTP ()On
Server1 000.000.000.000–255.255.255.255 Setting for Time server 1 197.1.23.11
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 455 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Synchronization using IRIG-B

Example of IRIG-B synchronization
The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is provided.
The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†.
IED
IRIG-B000†
Clock
10:00 1/2
Signal [Time] +
A1 2012-11-21 10:00:05
IRIG-B signal
[Format]
generator Unit GND
A3 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-5 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
Setting procedure
1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-6.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-6 Time setting for IRIG-B
Setting year in IRIG-B

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the IEEE C37.118 / IRIG-B000 format, the user should
set On for setting [USE_BCDYEAR]. Conversely, when the IRIG-B data with absence the
C37.118† is generated, Off should be set for the setting [USE_BCDYEAR].
†Note: “Year” is informed from the IED clock itself when the C37.118 is absent.
Setting UTC/local time

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the UTC†, set Off for the setting [USE_LOCALTIME].
Conversely, when the IRIG-B data is generated in the local time‡, set On for setting
[USE_LOCALTIME]; set Off for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
†Note:We shall see the settings of the UTS in section 5.7.4.
‡Note:In the IRIG-B signal generator unit, the DST settings should be corresponded to
the DST settings of the IED. We shall see the DST settings in section 5.7.5.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 456 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 5.7-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization

Setting
example
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B
IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B On
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time Off
(iii) Synchronization using BI signal

When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can
make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input
circuit (BI).
Example of time synchronization via BI circuit

Figure 5.7-7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is provided via the BI1 circuit†.
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 5.7-7 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI
circuit, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 457 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting procedure
1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-8.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 5.7-7, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].
4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g., −0.050s)
for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should be
synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Check “BI ” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 5.7-8 Time setting for BI
Table 5.7-3 Setting items for the BI Time synchronization

Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method BI
BI-SYNC Off /On Operation of BI On
BI_ID [Preferred ID] Signal monitoring point 200B01 8001001111
Time adjust factor (in −：Leading the clock
SYNC ADJ −0.050 to +0.050 0.000
sec.) +：Delaying the clock
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 458 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.7.4 Setting time zone

When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the Local
standard time. The time zone is divided in every 15 minutes; the user can set it using 0.25
units (i.e., 15 min = 0.25 unit). For example, if the IED is used in Venezuela (UTC-04:30), the
user should set “−4.50” for the setting, as shown Figure 5.7-9.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
-4.50hour
Figure 5.7-9 Setting screen of Time zone

Table 5.7-4 Example time offsets and locations
Time offset† Example locations
UTC−10:00 United States (Hawaii)
UTC−09:00 United States (Anchorage)
UTC−08:00 United States (PST)
UTC−06:00 Canada , Costa Rica, El Salvador, Ecuador, Mexico, United States (CST)
UTC−05:00 Brazil (Acre), Colombia, Cuba, Jamaica, Panama, Peru, United States (EST)
UTC−04:30 Venezuela
UTC−04:00 Bolivia, Brazil, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, Barbados
UTC−03:00 Argentina, Brazil (Bahia, Pernambuco), Chile
UTC−02:00 Brazil (Fernando de Noronha)
UTC±00:00 United kingdom, Iceland, Ireland, Senegal, Saint Helena, Mali
UTC+01:00 Germany, Hungary, Italy, France, Montenegro
UTC+02:00 Egypt, Estonia, Finland, Slovenia, Greece
UTC+03:00 Ethiopia, Iraq, Kenya, Madagascar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Turkey
UTC+04:00 Armenia, Azerbaijan, Oman, Seychelles, United Arab Emirates
UTC+05:00 Pakistan
UTC+05:30 India, Sri Lanka
UTC+06:00 Bangladesh, Bhutan, Kazakhstan
UTC+06:30 Myanmar
UTC+07:00 Western Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos
UTC+08:00 China, Malaysia, Philippines, Australia (Western Australia), Mongolia
UTC+09:00 Japan, South Korea
UTC+10:00 Australia (Queensland)
UTC+12:00 New Zealand
†Note:Time zone is expressed in the difference between UTC and the local standard time
(wintertime).
Table 5.7-5 Setting time zone

Setting
example
IS_UTC_base On / Off Selection of either the UTC or the local time On
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 459 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting)

When the summer time (DST) is applied, the user should set the beginning and the ending
dates of the DST in the clock function. The user should set On for the setting [Summer time]
for DST.
Note: The clock function is not designed for particular DSTs such as they are depending
on the religious events and the astronomy.
(i) DST set by the day (Mon to Sun) of week

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fifth week in March and it
ends at 2:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fourth week in October, the user has the following settings.
Note that transposing the calendar is required, as shown in Figure 5.7-10; accordingly the first
of the month is located at the first row and the first column of the transposed calendar.
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 E nding of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 5 for the [Start_Week] Setting 4 for the [End_Week]
Setting Sun for the [Start_Wday] Setting Sun for the [End_Wday]
Setting 1 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 2 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 5.7-10 DST setting examples by the day of week
(ii) DST set by the day (1st or 15th) of month

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 p.m. on the first day in March and it ends at 3:00
p.m. on the middle day in October; the user has the following settings.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 460 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Beginning of the DST E nding of the DST

at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 1 for the [Start_Week] Setting 3 for the [End_Week]
Setting – for the [Start_Wday] Setting – for the [End_Wday]
Setting 13 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 15 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 5.7-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
(iii) Time shift

After setting the DST, the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start; the clock is backed by
1 hour at the DST end.
Table 5.7-6 DST settings
Setting
example
Summer time On / Off Enabling DST operation On
Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3
Start_Week 1 to 5 Set the beginning of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
Start_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the beginning of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
Start_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 1
End_Month 1 to 12 Set the end of DST in the month 10
End_Week 1 to 5 Set the end of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
End_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the end of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
End_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 2
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 461 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
5.7.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
s value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00
--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
MODBUS / IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
Start_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - Start day of week Sun.
Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
End_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - End day of week Sun.
Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Setting of SNTP_SYNC (Function ID: 200A01)

s value
SNTP Off / On - Enabling SNTP synchronization On
Server1 0 - 255 - IP address#1 0. 0. 0. 0
Setting of BI_SYNC (Function ID: 202001)

s value
BI SYNC Off / On - BI sync switch Off
BI_ID [Preferred ID] - Source BI Data ID
SYNC ADJ -0.050 to 0.050 s Time adjust factor 0.000
Setting of IRIG_SYNC (Function ID: 202101)

s value
IRIG SYNC Off / On - IRIGB sync switch Off
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On - Use BCD year code Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On - Use local time Off
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 462 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Group setting for protection functions

With regard to protection functions (i.e., OC, EF, and others), eight groups are available for
settings, as shown in Figure 5.8-1; different values for the relays can be set as per
circumstances such as operation conditions and others. Note that changing the group cannot
be not carried out instantly.
Settings
Protection (Relay)
Group1 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group2 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group8 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Figure 5.8-1 Eight groups for protection settings
(i) Changing group number by menu operation

The user can change the group number using the menu† on the IED screen. See the Chapter
User interface: Setting sub-menu.
(ii) Changing group number by user-programming

Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics (For more information about
PLC programing, see the Chapter PLC function.) Figure 5.8-2 exemplifies a PLC logic:
changing group2 from group1 is performed while BI1 circuit is energized. The group setting
function “Setting (Function ID 201400)” has a signal reception point ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’ in
UNIT type; thus changing the group is performed when either numbers (1 to 8) enters at the
signal reception point. The example logic, designed for changing to group2 from group1,
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 463 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’
provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when
the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection;
accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’ in UNIT
when signal ‘1’ is injected in BOOL(BIT), can generates and inject the group number ‘2’ at the
‘PLC_Group_ENUM’. Consequently, the Setting function (201400) starts change the group
from number ‘1’ to ‘2’. Note that changing is only performed during the BI1 is closed in the
example logic; hence, the setting number goes back to ‘1’ when the BI1 is open.
GR200 IED
Binary selection
(+) (–)
IO_SLOT1 (200B01)
BI1 8001001110 Entering → Leaving 201400 314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Operation of
BI1 changing
‘1’ in BOOL ‘2’ in UNIT
‘0’ in BOOL ‘1’ in UNIT
BI2 8101011110
BI2
PLC basic-function PLC basic-function A group number enters

Binary input circuits BI1 and BI2
(Flip-Flop) (SEL) to “Setting function (FunctionID: 201400)”
at IO#1 (IO_SLOT1)
2 3
2
SEL DOUT_UNIT
1
DIN_BOOL RS
Unit#16#201400 FID ST
DO Q1 G
FID SET Unit#16#31 DTYPE
RESET1 Unit#16#1 IN0 Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DTYPE ST
IN1 DI
DID Unit#16#2
1
DIN_BOOL
FID DO
DTYPE ST
DID
Figure 5.8-2 Example for changing a group setting4

1Note: Function block for the binary input circuit (Binary input FB) is provided in User
library of PLC editor. See the Chapter PLC editing in Basic manual
“Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor” attached the PLC software.
2Note: The SEL and RS functions are the basic functions. In the logic, when signal ‘1’
enters the SEL function, value ‘2’ is generated. For more information, see the help
menu on the PLC editor.
3Note: For your reference, changing to group3 is performed when value ‘3’ enters. In
other words, values ‘1’ to ‘8’ correspond to ‘group1’ to ‘group8’, respectively.
4Note: This example is designed to change ‘group1’ to ‘group2’ or ‘group2’ to ‘group1’.
Figure 5.8-3 exemplifies that selecting a group among eight groups is required by the
usage of three BI circuits (i.e., Group 1→Group2, Group3,… Group8).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 464 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Binary input circuits BI1 to BI3 A group number enters

at IO#3 (IO_SLOT1) PLC basic-function PLC basic-function
to “Setting function
(Ondelay) (SEL)
(Function ID: 201400)”
BI3_1
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01001111 Delay time# PT ET
DID ADD
XX ms
BI3_2
DIN_BOOL TON DOUT_UNIT_1
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT MUL
DOUT_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST Unit#16#201400 FID ST
Delay time# PT ET
UDINT#16#01011111 DID UDINT#16#2 Unit#16#31 DTYPE
XX ms
Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DI
BI3_3
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 ADD ADD
FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
MUL
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01021111 DID Delay time# PT ET
XX ms UDINT#16#4
UDINT#16#1
Figure 5.8-3 Logic for changing a group setting
(iii) Setting
Setting_PF (Function ID: 201400)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
Active Group 1 to 8 – Selection of a setting group number 1
(iv) Signal (Data ID)

314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Reception for setting group number

3200001001 ACT_GRP
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 465 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
6 Engineering tool
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 466 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overview of GR-TIEMS
When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 6.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
Figure 6.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
Table 6.1-1 Information on the GR-TIEMS

Information Displaying format
Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph, vector display
Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 467 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Connection
The user can connect the GR-TIEMS with the IED using either the LAN or the USB, as shown
in Figure 6.2-1.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Figure 6.2-1 GR-TIEMS connected with IED
Common tools
(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tools. The user can manage to read/write
the project file of the IED using the project management function. The user can also see the
contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data for Setting, Setting I/O, Setting Event List,
Disturbance record binary signal, PLC, Interlock, Large LCD (MIMIC)†, and IEC61850†.
(iii) Pocket label creator

The user can create the name label of LEDs and Function keys for the IED front panel using
a pocket label sheet, which is provided together with the IED. For more information with
regard the LEDs and Function keys, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine
interface.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 468 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Monitoring tools
The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained in the IED using the monitoring
tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the user wishes
to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation of the drag-
drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting layout file in
the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.
Record tools
(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the faults.
Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze the fault
more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save it into the
fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the exported
data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
(ii) Disturbance record

Disturbance record is a kind of module information measured so that the user can see them in
several graphs: an oscilloscope chart, a harmonic graph, a 3D harmonic graph, a vector in relay
operation analysis (ROA) chart. The user can see disturbance records when the disturbance
records file in COMTRADE are provided. The user can also save disturbance records into the
COMTRADE file.
(iii) Event list

The event list is recorded events information in the IED. The user can generate events
information file in the CSV; the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when
the file is in the CSV.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function.
Generic configuration tools

(i) Setting (general setting for the relay and controlling functions)
The user can make the IED settings on the GR-TIEMS; the IED settings are transferred into
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 469 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
the IED by the connection between the IED and the GR-TIEMS.
(ii) Setting I/O

The user can see and make the setting with regard to binary input/output circuits (BIO†), DC
analog input circuits (DCAI†), LEDs using the setting I/O function. For more information about
the BIO, DCAI†, and the LED, see chapter Technical description.
(iii) Setting event list

The user can set information with regard to the event of an IED using the event list function.
(iv) Interlock configurator

The user can program conditions for executing to control the primary equipment using the
interlock (ILK) configurator. For example, controlling a circuit breaker (open and closing) is
significant; note not induce mal-operations caused by improper conditions; otherwise a severe
fault/blackout results in. The ILK configurator can provide the user to program conditions
concerning the status of the power system. For more information of the ILK, see chapter
Control and monitoring application.
IEC 61850 configuration tool

The user can configure conversion data for the IEC61850 communication†, provided the IED
exchanges the data with the SAS. The user also configures a logical device, a logical node,
Goose publish information, and Goose subscribe information. For setting and configuration for
the IEC61850 communication see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication”.
†Note:The configuration is possible when the IED software has the IEC61850 protocol.
To confirmed the implementation of IEC61850 protocol, the user needs to check
the IED ordering code (for more information, see Appendix: Ordering).
MIMIC configuration tool

When the IED has a large LCD, the user can create user-preferred screens using the MIMIC
configurator. The large LCD will be able to display measurement values, diagrams and others
after the configuration. Note that the MIMIC is not available when the standard LCD is
equipped for the IED.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 470 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
7 PLC function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 471 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) software is used for configuring the Inputs/outputs
(I/Os), alarms, indications, recording and others. PLC logic consist of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and
logic gates “AND, OR, XOR, NOT”. The user can configure PLC-logic using the PLC editor
(MULTIPROG®), which should be installed in the user’s PC. Figure 7.1-1 shows the screen for
the PLC editor.
Figure 7.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®

Note: To handle the PLC editor on the PC, the user shall purchase a software license
(EP-261; see Appendix: Ordering) from Toshiba sales representative. For more
information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic manual:
Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)).
PLC data error

The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic.
The error information† is shown in the Monitoring sub-menu on the IED screen. See Chapter
Automatic supervision: Supervision tasks: Supervision of data in PLC function.
PLC data error 1/1
10:48
[Minor error]
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
PLC error code†
Figure 7.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on Monitoring sub-menu
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 472 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
PLC driver
Figure 7.3-1 illustrates that a function logic in the sub-CPU (CPM1 or CPX1) or a module is
required to operate in step with the PLC logic in the main-CPU (CPU1); hence, a PLC driver
is provided as one of coupling methods between CPUs and modules. The PLC driver is not
required to operate when both logics are placed at the same CPU (say, coupling means is
required among the main-CPU, the sub-CPU and modules). One hundred and twenty-eight
PLC drivers are provided in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230301)”; the PLC drivers
are denoted in type “BIT”.
CPU1 board Binary IO module

PLC_ DR V Binary output circuits
PLC logic
programmed by BIT_ xx_ x
the user HMI module
LEDs
A function
PLC connection point
CPM1 or CPX1 board
Figure 7.3-1 Communication between boards operated by the BIT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 473 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 7.3-1 PLC drivers

 Monitoring point at PLC Driver
PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230301)
Name Element ID Description
BIT_00_0 8810101BB0 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_2 8A10101BB2 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_3 8B10101BB3 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_4 8C10101BB4 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_5 8D10101BB5 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_6 8E10101BB6 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_7 8F10101BB7 Reserved for OC
BIT_01_2 8210101BBA Reserved for OC
BIT_01_3 8310101BBB Reserved for OC
BIT_01_4 8410101BBC Reserved for OC
BIT_01_5 8510101BBD Reserved for OC
BIT_01_6 8610101BBE Reserved for OC
BIT_01_7 8710101BBF Reserved for OC
BIT_02_0 8810111BB0 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_2 8A10111BB2 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_3 8B10111BB3 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_4 8C10111BB4 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_5 8D10111BB5 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_6 8E10111BB6 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_7 8F10111BB7 Reserved for EF
BIT_03_2 8210111BBA Reserved for EF
BIT_03_3 8310111BBB Reserved for EF
BIT_03_4 8410111BBC Reserved for EF
BIT_03_5 8510111BBD Reserved for EF
BIT_03_6 8610111BBE Reserved for EF
BIT_03_7 8710111BBF Reserved for EF
BIT_04_0 8810121BB0 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_1 8910121BB1 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_2 8A10121BB2 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_3 8B10121BB3 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_4 8C10121BB4 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_5 8D10121BB5 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_6 8E10121BB6 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_7 8F10121BB7 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_05_0 8010121BB8 Reserved for OCN
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 474 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

BIT_05_1 8110121BB9 Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_2 8210121BBA Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_3 8310121BBB Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_4 8410121BBC Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_5 8510121BBD Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_6 8610121BBE Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_7 8710121BBF Reserved for OCN
BIT_06_0 8810131BB0 (not used)
BIT_06_2 8A10131BB2 (not used)
BIT_06_3 8B10131BB3 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_4 8C10131BB4 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_5 8D10131BB5 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_6 8E10131BB6 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_7 8F10131BB7 Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_0 8010131BB8 Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_2 8210131BBA Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_3 8310131BBB Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_4 8410131BBC Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_5 8510131BBD Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_6 8610131BBE Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_7 8710131BBF Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_2 8A10141BB2 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_3 8B10141BB3 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_4 8C10141BB4 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_5 8D10141BB5 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_6 8E10141BB6 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_7 8F10141BB7 Reserved for CBF
BIT_09_2 8210141BBA Reserved for CBF
BIT_09_3 8310141BBB (not used)
BIT_09_4 8410141BBC (not used)
BIT_09_5 8510141BBD (not used)
BIT_09_6 8610141BBE (not used)
BIT_09_7 8710141BBF Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_0 8810151BB0 Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_2 8A10151BB2 Reserved for FRQ
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 475 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

BIT_10_3 8B10151BB3 Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_4 8C10151BB4 Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_5 8D10151BB5 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_10_6 8E10151BB6 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_10_7 8F10151BB7 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_11_0 8010151BB8 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_11_2 8210151BBA Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_11_3 8310151BBB Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_4 8410151BBC Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_5 8510151BBD Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_6 8610151BBE Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_7 8710151BBF Reserved for FRQ
BIT_12_2 8A10161BB2 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_3 8B10161BB3 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_4 8C10161BB4 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_5 8D10161BB5 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_6 8E10161BB6 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_7 8F10161BB7 Reserved for VPH
BIT_13_0 8010161BB8 Reserved for VPH
BIT_13_2 8210161BBA (not used)
BIT_13_3 8310161BBB (not used)
BIT_13_4 8410161BBC (not used)
BIT_13_5 8510161BBD (not used)
BIT_13_6 8610161BBE (not used)
BIT_13_7 8710161BBF (not used)
BIT_14_2 8A10171BB2 (not used)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 476 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8 Recording function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 477 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event
recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the
power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information
when the changes are detected. The disturbance recorder is designed to memory the various
quantities—numerical analog data and logic data (binary data)—from the monitoring function
and the BIO modules; it is possible to analyze the disturbance using the engineering tool (GR-
TIMES), which can draw several chronological waves.
Fault recorder
During the fault, the fault recorder can memorize reasons by equipment failures/operation
states, system information etc. It commences by injecting a signal coming from the TRC alarm-
signal generation logic, but is also started by a trigger provided by PLC function. The fault
recorder captures the following items for each fault:
 Date and time at the fault
 Tripped phase information
 Operating mode information
 Fault and pre-fault quantities
8.1.1 Types of recording information

The fault recorder can cyclically memory past eight faults; the oldest memory will be erased
cyclically if another fault occurs. The memorized information has 1ms accuracy. If a fault
occurs, the fault recorder is directed to operate to memory operating modes etc. about the fault.
(i) Date and time at fault

The date and time at the fault is recorded. The date and time information is provided by the
clock function (see Chapter Technical description: Clock function).
(ii) Tripped phase information

Information about tripped phases (i.e., faulted phases) are recorded using the recording
identifiers (‘OPT-PHASE-A,B,C, and -N’ signals), which the TRC function provides.
(iii) Mode information

At the occurrence of a fault, the protection functions gives the fault recorder the reasons of
tripping; the reasons are brought using operation identifiers† and logical signals‡. The fault
recorder can have up to 192 of all identifiers and signals in the IED. The operation identifiers
are chosen using the settings [OP Mode ID1] to [OP Mode ID128]. The settings [OP Mode
ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals.
†Note:A number of the operation identifiers are provided by the protection functions. For
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 478 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
example, the ‘OC1-OPT-A’ operation identifier is used to identify the pickup in the
first element of the overcurrent function (OC1) in phase-A. See respective
protection functions in Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:64 logical signals are selectable for recording. For example in this purpose, the
user may choose an operation signal on the circuits of the BIO modules (BIOs).
(iv) Fault quantities and pre-fault-quantities

Several quantity items (amplitude and phase angle of current, etc.) are memorized in the fault
recorder, as shown in Table 8.1-1. Quantities just before the fault are also memorized. The pre-
fault quantities are captured 10 seconds before tripping, but it is possible to take back longer
using the setting [Pre-Fault time].
Table 8.1-1 Recording quantities at the fault in ‘1A and 1B’ of Software selection
Abbreviations Displayed quantities
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT Currents within 1CT
I1-1CT, I2-1CT, I0-1CT Symmetrical components by Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT
In-1NCT, In-2NCT, In-3NCT Neutral currents at 1CT, 2CT, 3CT
V-P, V-S, V-T Voltages at primary, secondary, and tertiary
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Currents within Primary
I1-P, I2-P, I0-P Symmetrical components by Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Currents within Primary
I1-S, I2-S, I0-S Symmetrical components by Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S
I1-T, I2-T, I0-T Symmetrical components by Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T
Id-1, Id-2, Id-3 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 to Group3
Ir-1, Ir-2, Ir-3 Restraint currents (Ir) at Group 1 to Group3
8.1.2 Screen information

Figure 8.1-1 illustrates the information displayed on the IED screen†, which can display up to
eight fault records (#1 to #8). Figure 8.1-2 illustrates the structure of the first fault record#1.
The line○
c indicates the tripped phase. The lines○
d show how tripping occurred. The lines○
e
have the information about evolving faults, which is able to memory up to 32 developing faults.
Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below messages○ g .
f ○
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 479 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/123
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
List of fault records (#1 to #8) Details of #1 information
Figure 8.1-1 Information of the fault recorder displayed on the IED screen
†Note:For more screen information, see Chapter User interface: Record sub-menu.
Fault Record#1 ○
a Record Num ber (#1)
11:12 1/222
2012-07-25 ○
b Date and Tim e at Fault (YYYY-MM-DD)
10:48:21.223
Phase AB ○
c Tripped phase inform ation
Trip 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6
OC1 ○
d Mode inform ation
Screen scroll down 2012-07-25 ○
e Detail inform ation about evolving faults
10:48:22.421
OC1, OC2
2012-07-25 Deta
10:48:22.835
E volving fault#1
OC1, OC2, OC3
2012-07-25
10:48:23.649
OC1, OC2, OC3, OC4, EF1
Fault values ○
f Fault quantities ARC Sh
Ia-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ib-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ic-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
PreFault values ○
g Pre-fault quantities
Ia-1CT ○
h Pre-fau
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ib-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ic-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Figure 8.1-2 Screen structure about the information #1.
8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder

(i) Operation identifiers (ID1–ID128)
The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc.
For example, when the operation result with regard to the overcurrent relay element (i.e., OC1
in phase-A) shall be recorded, choose the operated signal ‘OC1-OPT-A (440001 800011B68)”
and set it for the [OP Mode ID1]. Remember to program the displaying name about the OC1-
OPT-A using the setting [OP Mode Name1] (e.g., “OC1-A relay OP-ed”). Note that the length
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 480 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
of the displaying name should be less than 18 letters. The user should find blanks in the setting
list, because several IDs have been already set.
(ii) Logical signals (ID201–ID264)

Wishing to record a logical level ‘1 (TRUE)’ or ‘0 (FALSE)’ on the circuits, the user can pick the
logical signal using settings the [OP Mode ID265] etc. For example, the user wishes to record
the output level of the binary output circuit#1 (BO1) at the IO#1 slot, set its PLC monitoring
point ‘200B01 8002001112’ for the setting [OP Mode ID265]; set the displaying name using the
[OP Mode Name265].
(iii) Additional triggers for the recording

Wishing to start the fault recorder except for the trip instruction, the user can use the PLC
connection points ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1’ to ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4’, respectively.
(iv) Time setting for Pre-fault

The instant before the trip is programmable using the setting [Pre-Fault Time] among 10s, 50s,
100s, 200s, 300s.
(v) Unit setting for the quantities

To change the units of power quantities, go to the metering function discussed in Chapter
Metering function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 481 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.1-2 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in ‘1A’ ordering of Software selection
Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] 413001 8100201B63 [OP Mode Name1] DIF-S1 S1-OPT [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID3] 414001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name3] REF-P REF-P-OPT [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 414001 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name4] REF-S REF-S-OPT [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] 414001 8200301B60 [OP Mode Name5] REF-T REF-T-OPT [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID6] 45A001 8000101B65 [OP Mode Name6] OC1 OC1-OPT [OP Mode ID102] Not assigned [OP Mode Name102] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID14] 45A401 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name14] EF1 EF1-OPT [OP Mode ID110] Not assigned [OP Mode Name110] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID22] 45A801 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name22] EFIn1 EFIn1-OPT [OP Mode ID118] Not assigned [OP Mode Name118] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID26] 487001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name26] MECH1 MECH1-OPT [OP Mode ID122] Not assigned [OP Mode Name122] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID35] 487001 8900A01B60 [OP Mode Name35] MECH10 MECH10-OPT [OP Mode ID203] Not assigned [OP Mode Name203] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID36] 487001 8A00B01B60 [OP Mode Name36] MECH11 MECH11-OPT [OP Mode ID204] Not assigned [OP Mode Name204] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID37] 487001 8B00C01B60 [OP Mode Name37] MECH12 MECH12-OPT [OP Mode ID205] Not assigned [OP Mode Name205] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID38] 487001 8C00D01B60 [OP Mode Name38] MECH13 MECH13-OPT [OP Mode ID206] Not assigned [OP Mode Name206] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID39] 487001 8D00E01B60 [OP Mode Name39] MECH14 MECH14-OPT [OP Mode ID207] Not assigned [OP Mode Name207] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID40] 487001 8E00F01B60 [OP Mode Name40] MECH15 MECH15-OPT [OP Mode ID208] Not assigned [OP Mode Name208] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID41] 487001 8F01001B60 [OP Mode Name41] MECH16 MECH16-OPT [OP Mode ID209] Not assigned [OP Mode Name209] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID42] Not assigned [OP Mode Name42] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID210] Not assigned [OP Mode Name210] - Not assigned
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 482 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.1-3 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in ‘1B’ ordering of Software selection
Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID3] 414001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name3] REF-P REF-P-OPT [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 414001 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name4] REF-S REF-S-OPT [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] 414001 8200301B60 [OP Mode Name5] REF-T REF-T-OPT [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID35] 487001 8900A01B60 [OP Mode Name35] MECH10 MECH10-OPT [OP Mode ID203] Not assigned [OP Mode Name203] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID36] 487001 8A00B01B60 [OP Mode Name36] MECH11 MECH11-OPT [OP Mode ID204] Not assigned [OP Mode Name204] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID37] 487001 8B00C01B60 [OP Mode Name37] MECH12 MECH12-OPT [OP Mode ID205] Not assigned [OP Mode Name205] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID38] 487001 8C00D01B60 [OP Mode Name38] MECH13 MECH13-OPT [OP Mode ID206] Not assigned [OP Mode Name206] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID39] 487001 8D00E01B60 [OP Mode Name39] MECH14 MECH14-OPT [OP Mode ID207] Not assigned [OP Mode Name207] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID40] 487001 8E00F01B60 [OP Mode Name40] MECH15 MECH15-OPT [OP Mode ID208] Not assigned [OP Mode Name208] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID41] 487001 8F01001B60 [OP Mode Name41] MECH16 MECH16-OPT [OP Mode ID209] Not assigned [OP Mode Name209] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID42] 451401 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name42] THM-A THM-OPT-ALARM [OP Mode ID210] Not assigned [OP Mode Name210] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID43] 451401 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name43] THM-T THM-OPT-TRIP [OP Mode ID211] Not assigned [OP Mode Name211] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID44] 476A01 8200101B60 [OP Mode Name44] VPH-A VPH-A-OPT- [OP Mode ID212] Not assigned [OP Mode Name212] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID45] 476A01 8300201B62 [OP Mode Name45] VPH-T VPH-OPT [OP Mode ID213] Not assigned [OP Mode Name213] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID46] 45AC01 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name46] OCN1 OCN1-OPT [OP Mode ID214] Not assigned [OP Mode Name214] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID53] 45B401 8000101B63 [OP Mode Name53] CBF1-RE CBF1 retrip operated [OP Mode ID221] Not assigned [OP Mode Name221] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID54] 45B401 8000101B73 [OP Mode Name54] CBF1-TP CBF1-TRIP [OP Mode ID222] Not assigned [OP Mode Name222] - Not assigned
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 483 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8.1.4 Setting
Setting of FLT_REC_CU(Function ID: 204201)
s value
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
Op Mode Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID1 –
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier –
Op Mode ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier2 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
8.1.5 Signal (Data ID)

FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal generated
FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001 TRIG3 signal generated
FLTRCDING 8020101001 Data writing in the fault recorder
FR_CLR 3000001001 Data erasing in the fault recorder

FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001 Input1 for the external trigger
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 484 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Event recorder
Signals are generated in the logics of BIO modules etc. in the IED. The event recorder can
memory the generated signals as events. To operate the event recorder, the user should pick a
preferred signal as a trigger of the event recorder; the event recorder can have 768 triggers,
some of which have been set as a default. The user can group the triggers into three categories;
consequently, it is possible that a number of the events are divided depending on the degree of
the errors, the meaning of the operations, and the signals of relay elements, etc. The user can
also program how an event is to be detected. An event is recorded with millisecond accuracy.
The information are memorized until the number of the events reaching 1024; the oldest event
will be deleted when a new event appears.
8.2.1 Trigger signals

The event is memorized when the event recorder detects changing the trigger signal that is
connected with the logic signal; they are defined using settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID768].
Settings [End of E.Record-1] and [End of E.Record-2] are provided for grouping†; the user can
adjust the size of the ‘Event Record1’ group using the [End of E.Record-1]. The next ‘Event
Record2’ group is set with the [End of E.Record-2]. The remains are set for the ‘Event Record3’
group. Remember that the [Trigger ID1] etc. are required to set together with the [Event
Name1] etc.; user’s preferred names should be less than 18 letters.
July 25, 2012 July 26, 2012
10:31:12 Deleting the fault record 12:34:51 Deleting the fault record
Setting [End of E.Record-1] = 256
Setting [End of E.Record-2] = 512 10:56:12 Changing system setting
Pulse train
3000001001
FR_CLR List of ‘Event record1’
FAULT RECORD (200602)
Event #3
On 2012-07-25 10:31:12
Event #3 F.Record clear ‘On’
Setting [Trigger ID14] = 200602 3000001001

Setting [Trigger Mode14] = On
Setting [Event Name14] = F.Record clear
Event #2
3010001001
Active group Active group
2012-07-25 10:56:12
SYS_CHG Set group change
‘3’ Changed to ‘4’
Setting_PF (201400)
Event #2
Setting [Trigger ID7] = 201400 3010001001 Event #1

Setting [Trigger Mode7] = Change On 2012-07-26 12:34:51
Setting [Event Name7] = Set group change
Event #1 F.Record clear ‘On’
Figure 8.2-1 Relation between function signals and triggers for Event record1
Figure 8.2-1 illustrates signals connected with triggers in the event recorder. For example,
‘SYS_CHG’ is connected with trigger#7 using the [Trigger ID7] and ‘FR_CLR’ is connected with
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 485 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers (#7 and #14) are smaller than
the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed in the ‘Event recored1’ list.
Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7] and [Event Name14]. All
ones are tabulated in Table 8.2-1 to Table 8.2-4.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 486 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.2-1 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in ‘1A’ ordering of Software selection
Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID182] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID6] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID96] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID186] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 20040130A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID20] 413001 8100201B63 On-Off DIF-S1 [Trigger ID110] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID200] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID22] 414001 8000101B60 On-Off REF-P [Trigger ID112] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID202] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID23] 414001 8100201B60 On-Off REF-S [Trigger ID113] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID203] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID24] 414001 8200301B60 On-Off REF-T [Trigger ID114] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID204] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID25] 45A001 8000101B65 On-Off OC1 [Trigger ID115] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID205] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID33] 45A401 8000101B60 On-Off EF1 [Trigger ID123] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID213] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID41] 45A801 8000101B60 On-Off EFIn1 [Trigger ID131] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID221] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID45] 487001 8000101B60 On-Off MECH1 [Trigger ID135] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID225] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID54] 487001 8900A01B60 On-Off MECH10 [Trigger ID144] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID234] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID55] 487001 8A00B01B60 On-Off MECH11 [Trigger ID145] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID235] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID56] 487001 8B00C01B60 On-Off MECH12 [Trigger ID146] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID236] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID57] 487001 8C00D01B60 On-Off MECH13 [Trigger ID147] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID237] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID58] 487001 8D00E01B60 On-Off MECH14 [Trigger ID148] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID238] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID59] 487001 8E00F01B60 On-Off MECH15 [Trigger ID149] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID239] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID60] 487001 8F01001B60 On-Off MECH16 [Trigger ID150] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID240] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID67] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID157] 4A3001 8000001B6D On-Off GEN.TRIP [Trigger ID247] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID68] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID158] 4A3001 8B00001B66 On-Off GEN.ALARM [Trigger ID248] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID159] 4A3001 8000001B71 On-Off OPT.PHASE-A [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID70] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID160] 4A3001 8100001B72 On-Off OPT.PHASE-B [Trigger ID250] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID161] 4A3001 8200001B73 On-Off OPT.PHASE-C [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID162] 4A3001 8300001B74 On-Off OPT.PHASE-N [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID167] (Not Assigned) Off -
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 487 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.2-2 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in ‘1B’ ordering of Software selection
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 20040130A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID22] 414001 8000101B60 On-Off REF-P [Trigger ID112] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID202] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID23] 414001 8100201B60 On-Off REF-S [Trigger ID113] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID203] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID24] 414001 8200301B60 On-Off REF-T [Trigger ID114] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID204] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID54] 487001 8900A01B60 On-Off MECH10 [Trigger ID144] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID234] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID55] 487001 8A00B01B60 On-Off MECH11 [Trigger ID145] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID235] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID56] 487001 8B00C01B60 On-Off MECH12 [Trigger ID146] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID236] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID57] 487001 8C00D01B60 On-Off MECH13 [Trigger ID147] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID237] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID58] 487001 8D00E01B60 On-Off MECH14 [Trigger ID148] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID238] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID59] 487001 8E00F01B60 On-Off MECH15 [Trigger ID149] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID239] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID60] 487001 8F01001B60 On-Off MECH16 [Trigger ID150] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID240] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID61] 451401 8000101B60 On-Off THM-A [Trigger ID151] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID241] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID62] 451401 8100201B60 On-Off THM-T [Trigger ID152] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID242] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID63] 476A01 8200101B60 On-Off VPH-A [Trigger ID153] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID243] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID64] 476A01 8300201B62 On-Off VPH-T [Trigger ID154] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID244] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID65] 45AC01 8000101B60 On-Off OCN1 [Trigger ID155] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID245] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID66] 45AC01 8100201B60 On-Off OCN2 [Trigger ID156] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID246] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID67] 45AC01 8200301B60 On-Off OCN3 [Trigger ID157] 4A3001 8000001B6D On-Off GEN.TRIP [Trigger ID247] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID68] 45AC01 8300401B60 On-Off OCN4 [Trigger ID158] 4A3001 8B00001B66 On-Off GEN.ALARM [Trigger ID248] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] No Assign Off - [Trigger ID159] 4A3001 8000001B71 On-Off OPT.PHASE-A [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID70] No Assign Off - [Trigger ID160] 4A3001 8100001B72 On-Off OPT.PHASE-B [Trigger ID250] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] No Assign Off - [Trigger ID161] 4A3001 8200001B73 On-Off OPT.PHASE-C [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] 45B401 8000101B63 On-Off CBF1-RE [Trigger ID162] 4A3001 8300001B74 On-Off OPT.PHASE-N [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID73] 45B401 8000101B73 On-Off CBF1-TP [Trigger ID163] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID253] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID74] 45B401 8100201B63 On-Off CBF2-RE [Trigger ID164] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID75] 45B401 8100201B73 On-Off CBF2-TP [Trigger ID165] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID255] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID76] 45B401 8200301B63 On-Off CBF3-RE [Trigger ID166] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID256] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] 45B401 8200301B73 On-Off CBF3-TP [Trigger ID167] (Not Assigned) Off -
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 488 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.2-3 Event2 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record-2]=512
[Trigger ID266] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID356] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID446] 530001 3109001001 Change R/L Key
[Trigger ID283] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID373] 528001 3107011EA1 On LED RST [Trigger ID463] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID284] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID374] No Assign Off - [Trigger ID464] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID287] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID377] 540001 000E001F41 On CNTVAL CTRL [Trigger ID467] (Not Assigned) Off -
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 489 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.2-4 Event3 group set with [End of E.Record-2]=512

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 490 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8.2.2 Trigger modes

We can simplify the trigger signals into four: ‘On’, ‘Off ’, ‘On and Off ’, and ‘Change’ modes. Thus,
the user can should set a mode for respective triggers using [Trigger Mode1] and others.
(i) ‘On’ mode

In the ‘On’ mode, the event recorder can take an action when the trigger signal is switched to
‘On’, as shown in Figure 8.2-2. For the operation, set On for the [Trigger Mode*].
On
Pulse train
Off
Triggers generated Triggers generated Triggers generated
Figure 8.2-2 Trigger generated at ‘On’ mode
(ii) ‘Off’ mode

The ‘Off ’ mode is the other way of the ‘On’ mode; set Off for the operation.
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 8.2-3 Trigger generated at ‘Off’ mode
(iii) ‘On-Off’ mode

In the ‘On-Off ’ mode, the trigger signal is generated when the pulse train is changed from ‘On
to Off ’ and ‘Off to On’ both, as shown in Figure 8.2-4. Set On-Off for the operation
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 8.2-4 Trigger generated at ‘On-Off’ mode
(iv) ‘Change’ mode

The ‘Change mode’ is provided to detect the increment or the decrement of a number, where
the PLC logic generates. For example, this mode allows to detect the change of group settings
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 491 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9 using the setting
[Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Chapter Technical description: Group
setting for protection functions.)

Figure 8.2-5 illustrates the structure about the ‘Event Recored1’ group, which can be shown
the latest event#1 at the top structure (line ○
b ). The lines ○
c and ○
d describes how an event
occurred for the event#1. Preceding event#2, event#3, etc. are shown below the event#1.
Similarly, the information about the ‘Event Record2’ and ‘Event Record3’ groups are displayed
on the IED screen.
†Note:For more information about the screen operation, see Chapter User interface:
Record sub-menu.
Event Record1 ○
a Event record1 list
10:48 1/4
#1 2012-07-26 ○
b The latest event#1
12:34:51.223
F.Record clear ○
c Trigger inform ation
On ○
d Trigger m ode inform ation
#2 2012-07-25
Screen scroll down 10:56:12.021
○
e Event#2
Set group change

4
#3 2012-07-25 ○
f Event#3
10:31:12.159
F.Record clear
On
#4 2012-07-23 ○
g Event#4
23:56:12.159
Figure 8.2-5 Event information grouped in the Event record1
8.2.4 Setup for the event recorder

Consider that Trip command1, which is denoted with Data ID ‘4A3001 8000001B67’, should be
sorted into the ‘Event record1’ group. The settings [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of
E.Record-2]=512 have been made as default; hence, we may select it with the trigger#156 by
setting the [Trigger ID156]= ‘4A3001 8000001B67’. Set On-OFF for the [Trigger Mode156],
because the pulse-train of the trip command should be recorded along the pick-up and drop-off
times. Remember that the preferred name for the Trigger ID156 should be set using the [Event
Name156].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 492 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8.2.5 Setting
Setting of EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)
s value
End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 256
End of E.Record-2 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group2 521
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal1 for the operation –
Tigger Mode1 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –

EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001 Clearing the data in Event group1
POWER ON 3100001001 Detection of switch On
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 493 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance recorder is to record the phenomenon about the occurrences of the fault with 1ms
accuracy; the disturbance recorder is operated with the reception of the TRC trip command.
The disturbance recorder has exclusive overcurrent and other relays; thus, they can also start
the disturbance recorder when the exclusive relays detects abnormal phenomenon.
Additionally, the disturbance recorder can accept the instruction of the PLC function using
settings. The recording time and the sampling time are programmable; thus, the measuring
values about currents, voltage, frequency, and logic signals are collected in accordance with
the recording and the sampling times. The logic signals are also memorized during the
disturbance phenomenon; the disturbance recorder can hold up to 256 signals. The recording
number of the disturbance phenomena is limited by the recording and sampling times.
8.3.1 Recording time and amount

(i) Time settings
Period of the recording is set using the [Record Time]. The disturbance recorder can operate
before the occurrence of the fault; the time before the fault occurrence can be set using the
[Pre-fault Time]. The user can choose a time among 0.1 sec. to 10.0 sec.
Setting [Record Time]
Setting [Pre-fault time]

Fault
Pre-fault information Succeeding formation
Start of recording Trip command issued End of recording
Figure 8.3-1 Period of recording time

(ii) Sampling rate setting
Sampling time is defined with setting [Sampling rate]; it can be can choose from 7.5 electrical
degree to 15.0 electrical degree. For example, if the user set 7.5 for the [Sampling rate], the
disturbance recorder starts to collect the date in the sampling rate (2400Hz) in 50Hz system.
(iii) Trip command setting

As shown in Figure 8.3-1, the disturbance recorder starts when the trip command is issued,
provided On is set for the [Trip Trig.Sw]. If the disturbance recorder shall not start with the
trip command, set Off.
8.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder

Eight relays are provided in the disturbance recorder exclusively: OC-P-DRT, OC-S-DRT, OC-
T –DRT, EF-P-DRT, EF-S-DRT, EF-T-DRT, 2f-DRT and 5f-DRT relays.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 494 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(i) OC-P-DRT, OC-S-DRT, OC-T-DRT relays settings

Three overcurrent relays within the disturbance recorder (OC-P/S/T-DRT) are provided for the
primary, the secondary, and the tertiary windings. The user should set a pick-up value for the
relays to commence the disturbance recorder. That is, for the primary winding, use the setting
[OC-P-DRT]; then set On for the [OC-P-DRT-EN] if the primary relay operation is required to
commence the recording.
(ii) EF-P-DRT, EF-S-DRT, EF-T-DRT relays settings

Three earth fault relays (EF-P/S/T-DRT) are provided. For example, set the pick-up value for
the [EF-P-DRT]; then set On for the [EF-P-DRT-EN].
(iii) 2f relay setting

A second harmonic relay (2f-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [2f-DRT]; then set On for
the [2f-DRT-EN].
(iv) 5f-DRT relay setting

A fifth harmonic relay (5f-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [5f-DRT]; then set On for the
[5f-DRT-EN].
8.3.3 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena

Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the
recording time and the sampling rate. Table 8.3-1 illustrates the maximum number. For
example, the 243 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder, when the [Record
Time] =1 and the [Sampling Rate] =7.5° elec., if the IED operates in 50Hz system. The user
can also check the maximum number on the IED screen (See Figure 8.3-2).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 495 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.3-1 Max number depending on time settings

Recording Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
period set Setting [Sampling Rate] in 50Hz sys. Setting [Sampling Rate] in 60Hz sys.
with
[Record 7.5º 15º 7.5º 15º
Time]
1 243, ○
○ 2 207, 1 400, ○
○ 2 342, 1 204, ○
○ 2 174, 1 390, ○
○ 2 334,
1 sec 3 190, ○
○ 4 207, 3 315, ○
○ 4 342, 3 159, ○
○ 4 174, 3 307, ○
○ 4 334,
5 152
○ 5 255
○ 5 128
○ 5 248
○
1 84, ○
○ 2 71 1 142, ○
○ 2 121, 1 70, ○
○ 2 59, 1 138, ○
○ 2 117,
3 sec 3 65, ○
○ 4 71, 3 111, ○
○ 4 121, 3 54, ○
○ 4 59, 3 108, ○
○ 4 117,
5 52
○ 5 88
○ 5 43
○ 5 86
○
1 51, ○
○ 2 43, 1 86, ○
○ 2 73, 1 42, ○
○ 2 36, 1 84, ○
○ 2 71,
5 sec 3 39, ○
○ 4 43, 3 67, ○
○ 4 73, 3 33, ○
○ 4 36, 3 65, ○
○ 4 71,
5 31
○ 5 53
○ 5 26
○ 5 52
○
Note: The maximum number depends on the VCT type and the model. which is shown in
1 , ○
○ 2 , ○
3 , ○
4 , and ○
5 of Table 8.3-2.
8.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder
Ten analog quantities and 256 logical signals are record in a disturbance phenomenon.
(i) Number of analog quantities

For example, when the VCT35B is used in the IED, currents (Ia, Ib, Ic in 1CT and 2CT groups)
and the voltage (V) are recorded. For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical
description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 496 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.3-2 Recording number of logic signals depending on time settings
Models ○
1 ○
2 ○
3 ○
4 ○
5
VCT types 35B 44B 44B & 47B 44B 44B & 48B
Va-1VT Va-1VT
Vb-1VT Vb-1VT
Vc-1VT Vc-1VT
Voltages V V V
– Va-2VT
– Vb-2VT
– Vc-2VT
Ia-1CT Ia-1CT Ia-1CT Ia-1CT Ia-1CT
Ib-1CT Ib-1CT Ib-1CT Ib-1CT Ib-1CT
Ic-1CT Ic-1CT Ic-1CT Ic-1CT Ic-1CT
Ia-2CT Ia-2CT Ia-2CT Ia-2CT Ia-2CT
Ib-2CT Ib-2CT Ib-2CT Ib-2CT Ib-2CT
Ic-2CT Ic-2CT Ic-2CT Ic-2CT Ic-2CT
– Ia-3CT Ia-3CT Ia-3CT Ia-3CT
– Ib-3CT Ib-3CT Ib-3CT Ib-3CT
– Ic-3CT Ic-3CT Ic-3CT Ic-3CT
Currents
– – – – Ia-4CT
– – – – Ib-4CT
– – – – Ic-4CT
– – – – Ia-5CT
– – – – Ib-5CT
– – – – Ic-5CT
– In-1NCT In-1NCT Ia-4CT In-1NCT
– In-2NCT In-2NCT Ib-4CT In-2NCT
– In-3NCT In-3NCT Ic-4CT In-3NCT
Number of recording 7 12 15 12 24
(ii) Number of logical signals

As mentioned earlier, the disturbance recorder can hold the traces of logic signals during the
recording time. Using settings [Binary Signal*], the user can select 256 logic signal arbitrary.
The logic signals that the user has selected should be termed with user’s preferred names using
settings [Binary Sig.Name*]. Table 8.3-3 and Table 8.3-4 tabulate the settings.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 497 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.3-3 Setting list for logic signals in ‘1A’ ordering of Software selection
[Binary Sig. [Binary Sig. [Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name] Name] Name]
[Binary Signal1] 4A3001 8000001B67 TRIP-1 TRC [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal4] 4A3001 8300001B6A TRIP-4 TRC [Binary Signal94] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal194] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal5] 4A3001 8400001B6B TRIP-5 TRC [Binary Signal95] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal195] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal6] 4A3001 8500001B6C TRIP-6 TRC [Binary Signal96] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal196] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal7] 413001 8100201B63 DIF-S1 DIF [Binary Signal97] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal197] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal9] 413001 8F00301B60 DIF-2f DIF [Binary Signal99] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal199] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal11] 414001 8000101B60 REF-P REF [Binary Signal101] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal201] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal12] 414001 8100201B60 REF-S REF [Binary Signal102] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal202] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal13] 414001 8200301B60 REF-T REF [Binary Signal103] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal203] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal14] 45A001 8000101B65 OC1 OC [Binary Signal104] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal204] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal22] 45A401 8000101B60 EF1 EF [Binary Signal112] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal212] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal30] 45A801 8000101B60 EFIn1 EFIn [Binary Signal120] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal220] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal34] 480A01 3100001B60 ICD ICD [Binary Signal124] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal224] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal35] 487001 8000101B60 MECH1 MECH [Binary Signal125] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal225] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal44] 487001 8900A01B60 MECH10 MECH [Binary Signal134] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal234] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal45] 487001 8A00B01B60 MECH11 MECH [Binary Signal135] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal235] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal46] 487001 8B00C01B60 MECH12 MECH [Binary Signal136] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal236] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal47] 487001 8C00D01B60 MECH13 MECH [Binary Signal137] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal237] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal48] 487001 8D00E01B60 MECH14 MECH [Binary Signal138] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal238] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal49] 487001 8E00F01B60 MECH15 MECH [Binary Signal139] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal239] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal50] 487001 8F01001B60 MECH16 MECH [Binary Signal150] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal250] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal51] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal151] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal251] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 498 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 8.3-4 Setting list for logic signals in ‘1B’ ordering of Software selection
[Binary Sig. [Binary Sig. [Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name] Name] Name]
[Binary Signal4] 4A3001 8300001B6A TRIP-4 TRC [Binary Signal94] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal194] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal5] 4A3001 8400001B6B TRIP-5 TRC [Binary Signal95] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal195] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal6] 4A3001 8500001B6C TRIP-6 TRC [Binary Signal96] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal196] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal11] 414001 8000101B60 REF-P REF [Binary Signal101] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal201] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal12] 414001 8100201B60 REF-S REF [Binary Signal102] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal202] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal13] 414001 8200301B60 REF-T REF [Binary Signal103] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal203] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal34] 480A01 3100001B60 ICD ICD [Binary Signal124] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal224] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal44] 487001 8900A01B60 MECH10 MECH [Binary Signal134] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal234] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal45] 487001 8A00B01B60 MECH11 MECH [Binary Signal135] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal235] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal46] 487001 8B00C01B60 MECH12 MECH [Binary Signal136] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal236] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal47] 487001 8C00D01B60 MECH13 MECH [Binary Signal137] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal237] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal48] 487001 8D00E01B60 MECH14 MECH [Binary Signal138] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal238] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal49] 487001 8E00F01B60 MECH15 MECH [Binary Signal139] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal239] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal50] 487001 8F01001B60 MECH16 MECH [Binary Signal150] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal250] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal51] 451401 8000101B60 THM-A THM [Binary Signal151] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal251] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal52] 451401 8100201B60 THM-T THM [Binary Signal152] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal252] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal53] 476A01 8200101B60 VPH-A VPH [Binary Signal153] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal253] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal54] 476A01 8300201B62 VPH-T VPU [Binary Signal154] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal254] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal55] 45AC01 8000101B60 OCN1 OCN [Binary Signal155] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal255] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal56] 45AC01 8100201B60 OCN2 OCN [Binary Signal156] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal256] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] 45AC01 8200301B60 OCN3 OCN [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal58] 45AC01 8300401B60 OCN4 OCN [Binary Signal158] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal62] 45B401 8000101B63 CBF1-RETRIP CBF [Binary Signal162] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal63] 45B401 8000101B73 CBF1-TRIP CBF [Binary Signal163] (Not Assigned) - ….
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 499 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8.3.5 Trigger settings for PLC programming

If the PLC program instructs the operation of the disturbance recorder, the user should set the
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]. That is, the program-output points should be set for the settings
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]; then, set On for the [Trigger SW1] to [Trigger SW4], respectively.

Figure 8.3-2 indicates the maximum number of the recording operations as the number is
changed depending on the time settings, which are shown in Table 8.3-1. Figure 8.3-3 shows
the operation time and the date for the disturbance recorder and the figure illustrates five
disturbance phenomena have been memorized in the IED.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Number of items
5/77
Clear Records +
Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Operating counter
Figure 8.3-2 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/5
#1 2012-07-25 ○
a Disturbance record#1
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 ○
b Disturbance record#2
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/21 ○
c Disturbance record#3
Screen scroll down 13:11:29.621
#4 2012-07-02 ○
d Disturbance record#4
23:32:09.015
#5 2012-06-20 ○
e Disturbance record#5
09:37:48.915
Figure 8.3-3 Detail information in the disturbance recorder
The information in the disturbance recorder are managed in the COMTRADE format,
hence, the user can transferor the disturbance recording file to the PC using the engineering
tool ‘GR-TIEMS’. Figure 8.3-4 shows the example of the GR-TIMES screen. For more
information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 500 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 8.3-4 Screen shot from GR-TIEMS
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 501 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
8.3.7 Setting
Setting of DRT_TP(Function ID: 4B2001)
Default
Range Uni
Setting item Contents setting value Notes
ts
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
OC-P-DRT-EN Disturbance Record Trigger OC-P-DRT
Off / On – Off
enable
OC-P-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OC-P-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
OC-S-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-S-DRT enable Off
OC-S-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OC-S-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
OC-T-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-T-DRT enable Off
OC-T-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OC-T-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
EF-P-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-P-DRT enable Off
EF-P-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EF-P-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
EF-S-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-S-DRT enable Off
EF-S-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EF-S-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
EF-T-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-T-DRT enable Off
EF-T-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EF-T-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
2f-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger 2f-DRT enable Off
5f-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger 2f-DRT enable Off
Setting of DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401)

Uni Default
ts setting value
Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording 3.0

Sampling Rate 7.5 - 15.0 deg Sampling rate in electrical degree 7.5
Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time 0.3
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal1 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trigger SW1 Off / On – Enabling the signal1 of user’s program Off
Trigger ID2 - – Signal2 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with the TRC trip command On
Binary Signal1 (Preferred DataID) – Logic signal1 for the operation –
Binary Sig.Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the logic signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Binary Signal256 (Preferred DataID) – Mode setting for the detection –
Binary
(Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal768 –
Sig.Name256
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 502 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

DRT_TP (Function ID: 4B2001)
8000001C20 DRT-TP DRT-TP protection operated
8400101C23 EF-P-DRT EF-P-DRT relay element operated
8400201C23 EF-S-DRT EF-S-DRT relay element operated
8400301C23 EF-T-DRT EF-T-DRT relay element operated
8000011C20 OC-P-DRT-A OC-P-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC-P-DRT-B OC-P-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC-P-DRT-C OC-P-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
8000021C20 OC-S-DRT-A OC-S-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100021C21 OC-S-DRT-B OC-S-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200021C22 OC-S-DRT-C OC-S-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
8000031C20 OC-T-DRT-A OC-T-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100031C21 OC-T-DRT-B OC-T-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200031C22 OC-T-DRT-C OC-T-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
80A0041001 DSTRING Writing the disturbance data
30A0001001 DSTR_CLR Data erased
80A0031001 DSTR_MADE Completion for writing the disturbance data
32A0011001 DSTR_MAX Maximum possible number of the operations
32A0021001 DSTR_NUM Operation counter
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 503 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
9 Monitoring function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 504 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Outline
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained within the VCT and BI circuits†. When the measuring instruments start
measures power quantities, mathematical means is applied to the data from the VCT so that
the data are shown accurately on the IED screen. The monitoring function has several screens
together
†Note:The VCT/BIO structures and their features are discussed in Chapter Technical
description.
Metering data (Metering group)

When the VCT module operates, metering data are screened along with several abbreviations,
which represents their natures, as shown in the below Table.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 505 -
Table 9.2-1 Metering data
Corresponding inputs on VCT Software1
Signals on the screen Meanings of signals
VCT#1 VCT#2 1A 1B 1C
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT Metering currents measured at 1CT Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT (N.A)2   
I1-1CT, I2-1CT, I0-1CT Symmetrical components by Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT (N.A) (N.A)   
Ia-2CT, Ib-2CT, Ic-2CT Metering currents measured at 2CT Ia-2CT, Ib-2CT, Ic-2CT (N.A)   
Ia-3CT, Ib-3CT, Ic-3CT Metering currents measured at 3CT Ia-3CT, Ib-3CT, Ic-3CT (N.A)   
In-1NCT, In-2NCT, In-3NCT Neutral currents at 1CT, 2CT, 3CT In-1CT, -2CT, -3CT (N.A)   
V-P, V-S, V-T Voltages at primary, secondary, and tertiary (N.A) (N.A)   
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Currents at Primary Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P (N.A)   
I1-P, I2-P, I0-P Symmetrical components by Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P (N.A) (N.A)   
Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S Currents at Secondary Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S (N.A)   
I1-S, I2-S, I0-S Symmetrical components by Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S (N.A) (N.A)   
Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T Currents at Tertiary Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T (N.A)   
I1-T, I2-T, I0-T Symmetrical components by Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T (N.A) (N.A)   
Id-1, Id-2, Id-3 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 to Group3 (N.A) (N.A)   
Ir-1, Ir-2, Ir-3 Restraint currents (Ir) at Group 1 to Group3 (N.A) (N.A)   
Ipu-1, Ipu-2, Ipu-3 Currents (PU) at Group 1 to Group3 (N.A) (N.A)   
Id0-P, Id0-S, Id0-T Differential currents (Id0) at Primary to Tertiary (N.A) (N.A)   
Ir0-P, Ir0-S, Ir0-T Restraint currents (Ir) at Primary to Tertiary (N.A) (N.A)   
Ipu0-P, Ipu0-S, Ipu0-T Currents (PU) at Primary to Tertiary (N.A) (N.A)   
f Frequency derived by V0 (N.A) (N.A)   
THM-Capacity Thermal capacity (N.A) (N.A) –  
V/f The ratio of voltage to frequency by VPH (N.A) (N.A) –  
1Note: See Function table in Appendix: Ordering
2Note: ‘N.A’=Corresponding terminals do not exist on the VCT. Term ‘–‘ represents that information is not screened.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
- 506 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
9.2.1 Metering information on the screen

The user can examine the values provided by the metering function on the IED screen; thus,
zero (0) is screened if the applying data is lesser than the threshold. The user can also examine
the KCT parameters.
Metering KCT
10:48 1/59 10:48 1/12
Ia-1CT KCT1_DIF
12.345kA 123.45deg 123.456
Ib-1CT KCT2_DIF
123.456
12.345kA 123.45deg
KCT3_DIF
Ic-1CT
123.456
12.345kA 123.45deg
Figure 9.2-1 Current and KCT on the IED screen

Note: If any quantity does not enter to the VCT, the value on the screen is displayed
such as “***.**” and “–––––”.
9.2.2 Setting for measurements

(i) Selecting either primary/secondary values
In the metering function, the value at the primary side is displayed on the screen; the value
will be displayed in kV-unit when the value is larger than 1000 volts. When wishing to display
the value at the secondary side, the user should set Secondary for the setting
[Display_Value].Table 9.2-2 shows the effective digit when Secondary is set.
Metering
10:48 1/2
Display Value +
Primary
I-Display Unit +
kA
V-Display Unit +
kV
Figure 9.2-2 Metering setting in the setting screen

Note: For the operation of the menu, see Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu.
Table 9.2-2 Effective digits for metering in the secondary side
Number of significatnt figures
Metering Rated values rulued
Phase
items at the secondary Current or voltage
angle
3 digit number with 2 decimal places
Voltage 100/110/115/120 volt
(***.**V)
(±***.*°)
3 digit number with 2 decimal places
Current 1 amper / 5 amper
(***.**A)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 507 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Unit setting

The user can selct to a metering unit for each metering value. For example, the current is
preferred to be displayed in kA unit, the user should set kA for the [I-Display Unit]. Table 9.2-3
shows the unit lists in the metering funciton.
Table 9.2-3 Selection of units to display
Metering items Settings Selection of a unit to display
Voltage (V) [V-Display Unit] Volt (V) or kilo-volt (kV)
Current (I) [I-Display Unit] Ampare (A) or kilo-ampare (kA)
9.2.3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero

In the metering function, negligible metering values will be considered as zero. The user can
set the level to diminish in % using settings [I-Valid Level] and [V-Valid Level], at which values
‘4.00’ and ‘0.30’ are set, as default, respectively. Thus, zero (0) will be displayed when the
applied quantities at the VCT, which are lesser than the setting levels.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 508 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Statistics data (Power value group)

Table 9.3-1 illustrates the statistics information and its abbreviation in power value data.
Table 9.3-1 Power value data
Groups Displayed quantities Abbreviations
Power values Watt-hour (plus/minus), var-hour (plus/minus) Wh, varh
9.3.1 Power information on the screen

Figure 9.3-1 illustrates the information about the watt-hour and var-hour (Wh and varh). The
user can find the primary, secondary, and tertiary values, respectively.
Power Value
10:48 1/12
Wh+ -P +
0.0MWh
Wh- -P +
0.0MWh
varh+ -P +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 9.3-1 Example of Power Value screen
9.3.2 Regulation of power values

The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kWh, MWh and
kvarh+. For instance when the power is measured as "123,456kWh" then it is displayed as
"123MWh". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a new compensated value.
For example, if "78MWh" should be displayed on the IED screen even though the measured
value is "123,456kWh" then the user can set the new value of "78MWh". Note that the
compensated value "78MWh" is "78,000kWh", and it is not "78,456kWh" or "123,456kWh"; the
compensated value will be affected when a change in the setting of VCT ratio. That is, the user
can set a value of "78MW" during the CT ratio of "2000:1", but the CT ratio would be changed
from "2000:1" to "4000:1"; hence, the value will be displayed as "156MW" on the IED screen
later. Therefore, when the CT ratio setting is required to be changed, remember to set the value
of "78MW" again to display the compensated value.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 509 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Statistics data (Counter group)

The user can check on the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table
9.4-1 shows the user to find the count numbers in the counter group.
Table 9.4-1 Counter data
Counter number Correspondences
Group Origin of info (default)
displayed to GCNTs†
COUNT1 (Not assigned) GCNT01

Counter
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT)..
9.4.1 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature)

The data collected with the GCNT functions will be sent to the network; thus, the user should
set a regulation value using the SD feature in the GCNT function. See section Setting for the
report (Dead band) in the GCNT function.
Statistics data (Accumulated time)

Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The
user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when
the IED is switched off.
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
Figure 9.5-1 Example of Accumulated Time screen

Note: The user can also clear the Accumulated time in the screen menu. For key
operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 510 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions

Operating status of relay elements, binary IO modules, communication modules, GOOSE, and
diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function.
(i) Relay element

(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-
menu: Relay Elements. The relay functions and their characteristics are discussed in Chapter
Relay application).
(ii) Communication
menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN port is discussed in
Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware information is
discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module).
(iii) Binary IO
menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module).
(iv) Goose monitoring

menu: Goose monitoring. The information about the GOOSE is discussed in Chapter
Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
(v) Diagnostics
menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics is discussed in Chapter
Automatic supervision).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 511 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting
Metering settings in TP_MES (Function ID: 711006)
Unit Default
s setting value
Display Value Primary/Secondary – Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
I-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small entering current 4.00
V-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small applied voltage 0.30
I-Display Unit A/kA – Current shown in Ampere or Kilo-Ampere kA
V-Display Unit V/kV – Voltage shown in Volt or Kilo-Volt kV
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 512 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Data ID
TP_MES_MANAGEMENT (Function ID: 711006)
31A0001060 CT1-ERR CT1 Monitoring Result
31A0051060 V0-ERR 1VT V0 Monitoring Result
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 513 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10 Automatic supervision
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 514 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Outline of automatic supervision

In power system, the protection function is not required to operate during normal conditions.
That is, the protection function should stay silent for the unfaulty conditions, but it has to start
respond immediately upon the occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the operation of the
protection system, the detection of an unhealthy condition, such as malfunction or errors in
the hardware or in the software, is requisite within the IED. The automatic supervision
function is designed to detect the unhealthy condition within the IED; the following concepts
are taken into account:
 The operating performance of the protection system should not be distorted.
 Supervision should be carried out by itself without any failure whenever
possible.
 The protection system should identify the fault instantly upon its occurrence.
Tips: The alarms can be blocked when Off is set for the switch [A.M.F]. The switch can
be used to remove alarms during testing. See Chapter User interface: Test sub-
menu for more information.
(i) Error levels

In the applications and the hardware, the number of items are supervised for detecting the
operation failure; hence, the results of the supervision functions are grouped and they are
classified into five error-levels to identify the error degree directly: warning (level 5=the minor
error) to the serious error (level 1=the critical error). Incidentally, zero (level 0) can be
identified as no error. Table 10.1-1 shows the errors grouped by the error degree. The grouping
is provided, for setting the degree of error, the user can select an user-defined degree for each
error occurs randomly. If a number of failures occur on several levels at same time, the
automatic supervision function selects the critical error among them to represent the error
inside the IED.
Table 10.1-1 Meanings and error degree in the supervision function
Levels Degree of error Example failures and errors
0 No error No error exists
1‡ Serious Fatal failures such as the memory errors within the IED
2†‡ Serious (Comm.) Failures on tele-communication
3†‡ Minor Failure on LAN (Ethernet) communication
4 Alarm Minor errors such as invalid errors by the user using settings
5 Warning Detection of warnings classified by the user using settings
†Note:Level 2 and level 3 are shown, but the difference between the level 2 and the level
3 not given; thus, we can take the both having the same degree.
‡Note: The IEC 61850quality value is also changed depending on the error level. For
more information, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication: Quality signal.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 515 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Error LED and LCD error message

The IED has LEDs and LCD screen† so that the automatic supervision function issues a result
for the LEDs and the LCD screen. When the IED is linked with the SAS, it is possible to
transfer the result for the LED and LCD screen using the communication system. Table 10.1-2
shows that which indicators are used for result generation in the function.
Table 10.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS
Levels “In service” LED “Error” LED Error message on LCD
0: No error On Off (Not displayed)
1: Serious Off On Displayed
2: Serious (Comm.)‡ On On Displayed
3: Minor On (Off§) On Displayed
4: Alarm On Off Displayed
5: Warning On Off Displayed
†Note:For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline and Diagnostics.
‡Note:It depends on the degree of the communication failure.
§Note:If the “In service” has to be turned off while a minor error (level:3) is occurring, set
On for the setting [ErrorLED_cond].
The user can see a current error information in Monitoring sub-menu† on the LCD screen†
(see Figure 10.1-1); Table 10.1-3 shows the six detail information, which the user can examine
carefully using the hexadecimal number. When two or more errors occur at the same time, an
error code is given by the summation of the error codes. That is, when X and Y errors (e.g., X-
error-code ‘00000002’ and Y-error-code ‘00000004’) occur, the sum value ‘00000006’ is screened.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1 C u r r e n t e r r o r i n d i c a te d b y S u p e r v i s i o n
10:48 C u r r e n t l o c a l ti m e ( N o t E r r o r o c c u r r i n g ti m e )
[Serious error] E rro r d e g re e (le ve l) d is p la ye d
D e ta i l e d i n f o r m a ti o n i n H e x a d e c i m a l d u m p
[00000011] [01234567] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[01234567]
[01234567]
[01234567]
[00000000] [ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ “Middle left” ][ “Middle right” ]
[ “Bottom left” ][ “Bottom right” ]
Figure 10.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†Note:See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics. It will not be
updated automatically. If new information is required, refresh LED screen again.
Table 10.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display Meaning of the detailed information
area Left column Right column
00000001: ROM read error
Top row ROM address
00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle row RAM address ROM value
Bottom row RAM value (No information displayed)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 516 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Error outputs with contacts and binary output circuits

Automatic supervision function drives a contact of the power supply module (PWS)† when an
error occurs without warning; additionally, binary output circuits (BOs‡) will be locked out to
drive when serious error (Level 1=Critical error) is detected.
Table 10.1-4 FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending on levels
PWS† contact outputs
Error FAIL1 terminal FAIL2 terminal Error
BO‡ locked out
Levels Screw No. 1 Screw No. 3 Screw No. 7 Screw No. 9 LED
(N/C) (N/O) (N/C) (N/O)
0: No error Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
1:Serious Closed Open Closed Open Locked out On
2:Serious(Comm.) Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
3:Minor Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
4:Alarm Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
5:Warning Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
Error output by PWS contact†

If serious error (Level1) is detected by Automatic supervision function, normally-closed-contact
(N/C) on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals is closed. On the other hand, the N/O contact is open on
the serious error, as shown in Table 10.1-4.
Locking out of BO circuit operation‡

BO is locked out to operate, when serious error (Level1) occurs. Serious error stops trip signal
generations to the BO circuit. When serious error is removed, the operation will be recovered.
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Power supply module. FAIL1 (FAIL2) contact
is in Form-C; terminal-screw No. 2 & 4 (8 &10) are provided with the common.
‡Note:BO is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary output circuit.
(iv) Affection of application operation by error levels

The error levels influence the operation of relay and control and monitoring application.
Table 10.1-5 Operation states in the IED applications affected by the error levels
Levels Relay applications Control and monitoring applications Notes
0: No error – –
1: Serious Stopped Stopped
2: Serious (Comm.) Not affected† Not affected
3: Minor Not affected Stopped
4: Alarm Not affected Not affected
5: Warning Not affected Not affected
†Note: Serious (Comm.) can be related to communication of tele-protection applications.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 517 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Generic supervision tasks

Displaying errors regarding to common problems are summarized in Table 10.2-1; the error is
cleared when recovered
Table 10.2-1 Supervision items and error levels for generic

Err. LED
Sec. No. Supervision items(Screen message) LVL. In ERR
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error) 1 Off On
10.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) 1 Off On
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) 1 Off On
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) 1 Off On
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) 1 Off On
10.2.6 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) 1 Off On
10.2.7 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) 1 Off On
10.2.8 Supervision of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error) 1 Off On
10.2.9 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) 1 Off On
10.2.10 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error) 1 Off On
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) 1 Off On
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) 3 Off On
10.2.13 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) 1 Off On
10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) 3 Off On
10.2.15 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) 1 Off On
10.2.23 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) 1 Off On
10.2.24 Supervision of power supply module (Power error) 3 Off On
10.2.25 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) 3 Off On
10.2.26 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) 3 Off On
10.2.28 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) 3 Off On
10.2.27 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error) 3 Off On
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 518 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error)

The ROM and RAM on the CPU module are verified every two minutes; when the error is
found, an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision, checking error on
the RAM and the ROM is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the
error detection is carried out in each CPU module.
1Note: The kinds of the CPU modules are discussed in Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication module: Processing module.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects error, an error message can be shown at the LED and
the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-2 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM
Message and level Meaning of the information
Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the following
module instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (ROM/RAM) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Error level Serious error (Level 1)
Table 10.2-3 Detailed information in CHK_ROMRAM

Top 00000001: ROM read error
ROM address
row 00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle
RAM address ROM value
row
Bottom
RAM value (No information displayed)
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 519 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error)

The check sum in the memory on the CPU module is verified every four minutes; when the
error is found the error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision, the check-sum error
on the memory is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs in the respective CPU modules1; hence, the error
detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made promptly
when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-4 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM
Sum error in the memory detected on the following CPU module:
CP1M: CPU1 module
CP*_ (SUM) error
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 10.2-5 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUM

Top Bit 0: ROM read error
Sum value calculated
row Bit 1: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle Address information that read error occurs

Sum value pre-programmed
row in the ROM
Bottom
(No information displayed) (No information displayed)
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 520 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error)

The read-write operation on RAM circuit of the CPU module is verified at any time; when
the error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the RAM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the error
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-6 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM
Error detection in the RAM located on the following module
instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CPxx(RAM) error 1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
1S: CPM1 module (sub CPU)
2M: CPX1 module (another main CPU)
Table 10.2-7 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_RAM

Top
Read value Write value
row
Middle
Error address (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 521 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error)

The error detection on the error-correcting code memory (ECC memory) of the CPU module is
verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision
function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking error on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the error
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-8 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC
Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed
with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (ECC) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 10.2-9 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC

Top
00000080: err_cnt LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 register ADDR
row
Bottom
DATA (H) DATA (L)
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 522 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM)

The error detection on the Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) of the
CPU module is verified every 1 second; when the error is found, an error message is displayed
by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The function supervise for the MRAM on the main CPU module1. Clearing the
error message is made in 1 second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-10 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM
Error detection in the MRAM located on the following CPU
CP*_(MRAM) error module:
1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
Table 10.2-11 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_MRAM

Top 00000000: Error detected with 0xaaaaaaaa
Address at error occurs
row 00000001: Error detected with 0x555555555
Middle
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 523 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.6 Supervision of program codes (CPU error)

The program code in the ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every times; when
the error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision, detecting Program
errors on the RAM and the ROM are carried out any time. If the error is detected, the IED
restarts its operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU
modules1; hence, the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-12 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM
Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following
CPU module:
CPxx(CPU) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 10.2-13 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PROGRAM

00000001: Address
Top 00000002: Sub
(No information displayed)
row 00000004: Mul
00000008: Div
Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 524 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.7 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)

The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) on the CPU module are examined
every time; when the interruption is triggered, an interruption message is detected and
displayed.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; detecting the
interruption carried out at any time. If the interruption is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in the respective CPU modules1; hence,
the detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made promptly
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-14 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI
Interruptions occurs on the following module instructed with
“CP*_” as follows:
CPxx(NMI) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 10.2-15 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in NMI

Top
NMI code LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 resister SPP1 resister
row
Bottom
Stack pointer FRSCR register
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 525 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.8 Supervision of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error)

The state of the dual-ported RAM (DPRAM) is checked every 20 seconds when the erroneous
state is found.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the detection is
carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the DPRAM on the main CPU of CPU1 module1. Clearing
the error message is made in a second when the erroneous state is removed.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-16 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPRAM
Detection is performed o detected on the following module
CP*_ (DPRAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU1 module
Table 10.2-17 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_DPRAM

Top Value of the counter to check the renewal
Checked data
row not being occurred (=64H)
Middle Inverted data retrieved from the opposite

row circuit module
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 526 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.9 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)

The sampling error is verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is
displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; sampling errors are
checked every seconds. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation automatically.
The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the error detection is carried
out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in a second when the error is
cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-18 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SMP
Sampling error detected on the following module instructed with
“CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (SMP) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 10.2-19 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SMP

Top
1 Diff time
row
Middle
Current timing Pervious timing
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 527 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.10 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error)

The operation on the sub CPU is monitored every five minutes; the error message is displayed
when the sub CUP is stopped.
(i) Error level

carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs for respective sub CPU modules1; hence, the error
detection is carried out in each sub CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in a
second when the sub CPU runs again.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects errors, an error message can be shown at the LED and
the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-20 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUBCPU
Stopping detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ stopped error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPM1 module
Table 10.2-21 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUBCPU

Top Value of the counter to check the renewal not
00000001: Failure existing
row being occurred
Middle
Value of the counter when stopped (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 528 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error)

The values of the Settings are checked every second; the error message is displayed when the
erroneous value is found.
(i) Error level

carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the saved settings in the main CPU module1. When the
erroneous setting is removed, the error messages will be cleared in a second.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-22 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING
Setting error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (Setting) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU1 module
Table 10.2-23 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SETTING

Top 00000001: Failure exists in the common settings Offset address corresponding to
00000002: Failure exists in the group setting
row 00000004: Error data found in the initial setting the failure in the common settings
Middle Offset address corresponding to the failure in
(No information is displayed)
row the group setting
00000001: Exec_tbl.cnf
Bottom 00000002: Lcd_conf.cnf
row 00000004: g2minic.dat
00000008: guidance.dat
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 529 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error)

The state of the real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the clock stops.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program
the level using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RTC:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets five (5) minutes is set to detect the failure; it is reset within five minutes
when the clock starts to operate again.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-24 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC
Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following CPU
CP*_ (RTC) error module:
CP1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
Error level Minor error (Level 3)
Table 10.2-25 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_RTC

Top “1” shows that the error exists in the
Time in the second when the RTC stopped
row RTC
Middle Time in the minute when the RTC

row stopped
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 530 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.13 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error)

It is possible to detect the failure of the analog to digital conversion in the VCT module†.
†Note:For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input. The function can operate for respective
VCTs.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1). For example, the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_ACC1:LVl] when the VCT module at the VCT#12
slot should be supervised. Set On for the settings [CHK_ACC1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: When the error is detected, the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
2Note: The location of the VCT is discussed in Alpha-numerical references. See chapter
Technical description: IED case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-26 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC

AI#x(ACC) error Detection of the conversion deterioration at VCx slot
Table 10.2-27 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ACC

00000001: P error
00000002: N error
Top 00000004: Neg error
Plus value / Minus value
row 00000010: P(H) error
00000020: N(H) error
00000040: Neg(H) error
Middle
Plus rev value / (none) Plus value / Minus value
row
Bottom
Plus rev value (No message displayed)
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 531 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error)

The CT supervision is to examine whether the three-phase currents are balanced and the
current in zero-sequence is minimum. It secures the operation of the CT circuits†. By
monitoring the currents flowing in the AC analog input circuits, it is also applicable to detect
the failure in the CT circuit. The failure is determined as Equation (10.2-1) is satisfied.
1. Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) − 4 × Min(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) ≥ k 0 (10.2-1)
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The smallest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
k0: 20% of the rated current†
†Note:When the VCT has two or more three-phase-CT circuits, the CT supervision may
be required to operate for respective CT circuits. The rated current above the
equation is defined with VCT setting. For more information regarding the VCT,
see Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
Settings are required to respective groups of the three-phase currents.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_CT1:LVl] and the others; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_CT1:Sw] or whatever required. The time to detect can be programmed using
[CHK_CT1:Timer], etc., which can be set for 15 seconds as default. After the error is cleared,
resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-28 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CT

CTx error the extraordinary current flowing located at CTx
Table 10.2-29 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CT

Display area Meaning of the detailed information
N/A (No information is displayed)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 532 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.15 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the first binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
†Note:The function can operate for respective BIO modules mounted in the IED; the user
should have settings in them, which are located at the IO slot identified with the
number.
(i) Error level

can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#12 slot
should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
2Note: The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description: IED case
and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-30 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO1

BIO#1 error Detection of the BIO failure at IO slot#1
Table 10.2-31 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BIO1

Top 00000001: CRC error
00000002: Connection error Count number by the CRC error
row 00000004: Read back error
Middle
Count number by the connection error Count number by the read-back error
row
Bottom
(No message displayed) (No message displayed)
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 533 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the second binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 534 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the third binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 535 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the forth binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

Generally, the error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1), as default. For example, the
user can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO4:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#42
slot should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO4:Sw]. The manufacture sets
one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 536 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the fifth binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 537 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the sixth binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 538 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the seventh binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 539 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

A supervision function is provided, to detect the operation failure in the eighth binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 540 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.23 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error)

Supervising the failure in the human machine interface (HMI) is provided.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error1). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_HMI:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset within 10 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
2Note: The functions of the HMI is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-46 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI
HMI error Detection of the HMI failure
Table 10.2-47 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI

Top 00000001: Timeout of LCD communication Culminated value for the
00000002: Format error in LCD communication
row 00000004: Communication error in MIMIC LCD timeout
Middle Counter of the MIMIC
Counted value for the format error
row communication
Bottom (No information is
row displayed)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 541 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.24 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)

A power error is issued when the DC voltage generated in the power supply module (PWS†) is
less than a threshold. The user can select either 85V or 170V thresholds for issuing the power
error; it is determined by inserting a shut connector (JP4) on the PWS.
†Note:For more information about the PWS, see Chapter Technical description, Power
supply module. When the AC supply—however, the manufacture does not
guarantee the operation in the AC power—is connected with the PWS module, the
user shall set Off for the setting [CHK_POWER:Sw] (that is, the supervision
function concerning to the PWS module are stopped). Remember that the state of
the binary input circuit (BI) will be latched when the Power error occurs anytime.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_POWER:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_POWER:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with
in a second when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-48 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_POWER
Power error Detection of the failure in the PWS
Table 10.2-49 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_POWER

Top
00000001: PWS failure (No information displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 542 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.25 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)

The error of the PLC function is detected when the data coded by the PLC editor1 has an error.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw].
The manufacturer sets one-hundred-twenty (120) second to detect the failure; it is reset within
60 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-50 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT

PLC data error Detection of the failure in the PLC function
Table 10.2-51 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT

00000001: No PLC data exists in the IED.
Top 00000002: Errors caused when Data is inputted in the IED2
00000004: Errors caused when Data is outputted in the IED3 (No information)
row 00000008: Time over in the computation4
00000010: PLC stopped by the operation of the PLC editor5
Middle
(No information) (No information)
row
Bottom
(No information) (No information)
row
1See Chapter PLC editing in PLC editor (6F2S1904) separately.
2It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DIN function.
3It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DOUT function.
4The kind of tasks (Main_1, Main_2, or Main_3) may be too large.
5The PLC stops manually by the PLC editor.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 543 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.26 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error)

Communication error on the LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When two
network modules operates, the message is provided for the both.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_PING*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_PING*:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets one-hundred (100) second to detect the failure; it is reset in 20 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-52 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING

Detection of the pinging failure instructed with “LAN*” as
follows:
LAN* (ping) error
LAN1 (ping): Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2 (ping): Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
Table 10.2-53 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top
Destination address for pinging (No information is displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 544 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.27 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error)

The error† is detected when an inconsistency is found in the 61850 settings. Note that the
information for the error may vary on the communication protocol.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_CMLV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_CMLV:Sw]. The
error can be detected in two minutes after the IED is turned on.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-54 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Data(cmmslv) error Detection of the failure in the settings
Table 10.2-55 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CMLV
Displaying the Data ID relating to
Top row Error reasons code
erroneous mapping
Displaying the Data ID relating to
Middle row Additional information
erroneous mapping
Bottom
Additional information Additional information
row
†Note:In the IEC 61850 communication protocol, LN, DO and DA names are displayed in
ASCII characteristic codes, which instruct wrong mappings performed. In the
below sample, for example, the user can get the error mapping of “GGIO2$STtVal”
when ASCII codes are solved in eight-characters and four-characters.
Top row and left colum: [4747494F] Top row and right column: [32245354]
Middle row: [7456616C]
47 47 49 4F 32 24 53 54 74 56 61 6C = “GGIO2$STtVal”
Table 10.2-56 Error reasons detected by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Reasons of errors
Function error found Erroneous index being used in the data for the protocol stack
designated
Failure occurred on going through the selection process with Time out
regard to the protocol
Failure occurred on the initialization in the protocol process Going through the process
Failure for opening file Found invalid arguments
Failure of access Found the data type not being supported
No space left in the buffer Failure of the acquisition of the authority right
No space left in the buffer provided for the SSP mapping Failure occurred on the setting process
Failure of memory allocation in the memory dynamically Failure of the event registration
Check sum errors No event occurred
Not unfound about the searching object Restarting
Failure of the defining of data type Communication error
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 545 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.28 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)

Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not
received.
†Note:For more information about GOOSE, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC
61850 communication.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw]. Detecting the error is expressed in five-minutes when the IED detects
no reception of the GOOSE. When the GOOSE is started to receive, it is reset in one-minute.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-57 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV

LAN(GOOSE) error Detection of the failure in GOOSE
Table 10.2-58 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV

Top Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
row subscribe information#1† subscribe information#2†
Middle Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
Bottom Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
†Note:“c000” is shown when no reception.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 546 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
10.2.29 Setting
Setting of CHK_SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
CHK_SPSYNC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) /
CHK_ SPSYNC1:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Minor error / Alarm/ Warning
CHK_SPSYNC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
CHK_ SPSYNC2:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01)

Note
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value
s
CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC 1:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E02)


CHK_ ACC1:Lvl Error level Serious error

CHK_ ACC2:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_BIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#1 On

CHK_ BIO 1:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
… … … …
CHK_ BIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#8 On

CHK_ BIO8:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error

Note
s
CHK_BIO4:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#4 On

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 547 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

Note
s
… … … …
CHK_ BIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#8 On

Setting of CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_HMI:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ HMI:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)

CHK_RTC:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_RTC:Lvl Error level Minor error
Minor error / Alarm / Warning
Setting of CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221804)

Note
s
CHK_CT1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT1:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT1:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
CHK_CT4:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT4:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT4:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
Setting of CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_POWER:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_POWER:Lvl Error level Minor error
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 548 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting of CHK_PLC_DAT (Function PLC_DAT: 223201)

CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_PLC_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)

CHK_PING1:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off

CHK_PING1:Lvl Error level Minor error
PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192
PING_IP_ADRS2 0 - 255 168

Ping target IP address
CHK_PING2:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off

CHK_PING2:Lvl Error level Minor error
PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192

Ping target IP address
Setting of CHK_CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)

CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_GOOSERCV:Lvl Error level Minor error
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 549 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting of CHK_DCAIO (Function ID: 222E01 and 222E08)

Note
s
CHK_DCAIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ DCAIO 1:Lvl Error level Serious error
… …. …. …
CHK_ DCAIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ DCAIO8:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)

Note
s
CHK_ID:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ID:Lvl Error level Minor error
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 550 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
3210101001 CHECKSUM
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
30E0001001 CHKPOINT test point1
30E0011001 CHKPOINT2 test point2
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter
3210001001 RESULT check result
3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 551 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)

CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)

CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)

CHK_SUBCPU (Function ID: 220901 and 220902)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E2)
3210021001 RES_FAST check result(fast)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 552 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CHK_ BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)

CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_DPRAM and CHK_EXDPRAM (Function ID: 221601 and 221602)

CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221804)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 553 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221804)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223201)

CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_DCAIO (Function ID: 222E01 and 222E08)
311000131F ACC_ERR Executing counter
311000111A CONN_ERR
3110001215 CORDATERR
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 554 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CHK_DCAIO (Function ID: 222E01 and 222E08)

CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 555 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11 Communication protocol
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 556 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
LAN communication
When LAN module(s) are provided in the IED, the IED can operate with LAN communications
using the “Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. Thus, the user should
set IP addresses and other information in accordance with the requirements of TCP/IP. Two
communication features are provided within TCP/IP: Hot-standby communication and LAN
monitoring. The two features are discussed later.
11.1.1 Setup
(i) How to set the local IP address
Table 11.1-1 shows a summary of the setting items provided in the communication module for
Network. The user can set an IP address, subnet mask and gateway addresses in the IED†.
Table 11.1-1 TCP/IP setting of LAN module

Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
IPADDRESS1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 IP address 192.l68.1.11
SUBNETMASK1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
GATEWAY1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
When the wishing to change addresses, the user can use this setting menu. Figure 11.1-1
shows the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192. 168. 1. 11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255. 255. 255. 1
GATEWAY1 +
192. 168. 1. 1
Figure 11.1-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)
†Note:For more information with regard to the communication modules, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:Although the IED can support either one or two LAN modules, the user should
assign a single IP address for the IED. (Just for the record, subscript ‘1’ of
“IPADDRESS1, SUBNETMASK1, and GATEWAY1” is not relevant in this case.)
‡Note:Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu describes how to set the address on the
IED screen.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 557 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) How to set Hot-standby communication

Redundant communication (i.e. “Hot-standby”) is designed to provide additional security if a
communications failure should occur on the LAN network. The “Hot-standby (HOTST)”
function is implemented using two LAN modules in the IED.
For the Hot-standby communication, the first communication module for Network is used
as the primary port, (i.e. LAN#1) while a second communication module for Network, (i.e.
LAN#2) is used as the secondary port; the IED will communicate using the LAN#1 for normal
operation. If a communications failure occurs at the LAN#1, the IED can automatically switch
communication from the LAN#1 to the LAN#2.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, LAN#2
is then used for communications. (Note that LAN#1 can be determined to be the secondary
port on the occurrence of the failure. If LAN#2 is unable to continue to operate, then LAN#1
will be re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, LAN#2 will be
discriminated as the secondary port.)
Setting for redundant mode

The Hot-standby function runs when the user sets Hot_Standby for scheme switch
[RedundantMode]. If the user does not wish to run the Hot-standby function, set Fixed for the
scheme switch [RedundantMode]. In this case, LAN#2 will not function even though dual LAN
ports are provided by the IED.
Selection of any one of ports as the primary port

The user can select any one of the ports to be the primary port although the LAN#1 is normally
used as the primary port. For example, provided that both the LAN#1 and the LAN#2 are
physically connected to the LAN, when the user wishes to use LAN#2 as the primary port, the
user should set Port2 for scheme switch [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes not to select the
primary port, set None for scheme switch [PrimaryPort].
Setting of link-down timer

As mentioned earlier, the occurrence of a communication failure is determined when the timer
exceeds the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set a time setting for this decision.
Setting of link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the communication
on LAN#1 is changed to LAN#2. If the failure of LAN#1 is removed after changing to LAN#2,
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 558 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
the IED will try to re-start using LAN#1 as the primary port. In this case, the user can define
a time to revert to the original port and re-start communication on the original port by applying
a re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 11.1-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: LAN#2 not used.
RedundantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: No selection for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: LAN#1 selected as the priority port.
Port2: LAN#2 selected as the priority port.
A timer starts when the primary port is ready to
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
commence communication after switching port.
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of LAN#1 for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of LAN#2 is not used even if communication is carried out on
LAN#2.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a 100Base-
FX module is used in the IED, otherwise a repeat communication failure (link-
down) will be experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down is
shorter than the setting [DownTime], another LAN port cannot be switched as the
primary port. Thus, the user should determine the setting to be applied for
[DownTime] on the basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to
apply a setting of zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of the ports will be
performed immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in
order that the system would negate chattering failures if the optic fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and the secondary ports is not
performed when the user is keying a value for the setting [DownTime]. The user
should consider the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when
setting [DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until auto-
negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user can
apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 559 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user can
set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the auto-
negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required before the
completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
Switching using PLC signals

Compulsory signals may be used to switch the ports. For example, if a compulsory signal is
issued via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, communication is switched from the LAN#1
to the LAN#2. On the other hand, changing from the LAN#2 to the LAN#1 can be executed
upon the reception of a signal via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 560 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Network monitoring during Hot-standby operation

The Hot-standby (HOTST) function can send PING packets to remote devices thus enabling
the Hot-standby function to monitor the state of the network. The Hot-standby function checks
for a response signal from the remote device. If the Hot-standby function does not receive a
response signal, the Hot-standby function will switch to the other port. The operation is
performed when the user sets the scheme switches [RedundantMode] Hot_Standby and
[NetMonitor_EN] On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP addresses
for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not receive a response from
any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function determines that a communication
failure has occurred. Table 11.1-3 shows the network monitoring settings for Hot-standby
operation.
Table 11.1-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby
Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1
terminals.
to 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when
Ping_IP12
the remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response; if any one of the
responses is not received, after the setting time
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) 1
has elapsed, the function will determine that there
has been no-response.
Interval of PING send; a PING packet is sent
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packets for checking; the “no-
response “condition is determined when the IED is
unable to obtain a number of responses from the
Chk_Count 1–10 3
same IP address. The user can set the number of
responses required to determine the “no-response”
condition using the setting [Chk_Count].
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden on
the network. This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted over the
network. Thus, the user should choose the setting values carefully in accordance with the
network capacity, the burden, and the required time. Examples 1 and 2 below show the
respective results using the network monitoring function with for different settings.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 561 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Example operation 1
There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1. The Hot-standby function
sends ping packets to the remote device every five seconds; then the Hot-standby function
waits for one second until the Hot-standby function receives a response signal from the remote
device. The Hot-standby function will determine that a communication failure has occurred if
two sequential response signals are not received from the remote device. Subsequently, the
Hot-Standby function will switch from one port to the other port (See Figure 11.1-2). The
following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of IP
addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Local IED Remote device with Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 1sec Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
OK: Response received
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.

1sec
5sec NG: due to delayed response

1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
not received for setting
[ Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 11.1-2 Time chart for Example 1
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 562 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Example operation 2
In Example 2 it is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network: Ping_IP1,
Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to each of the
respective remote devices alternately every 10 seconds (i.e., the IED sends ping packets to the
same remote device every 30 seconds). Since “1” is set for [Check_Count], the Hot-standby
function will determine that a communication failure has occurred after 30 seconds if any one
of the remote devices is unable to send a response. Figure 11.1-3 shows the operation of the
Hot-standby function for Example 2; first switching of the ports is not executed as shown in
the figure. This is because a response has not been confirmed from one of the remote addresses.
In other words, switching of the ports is only applicable when all responses from all remote
devices are not confirmed.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3]. (Setting IP
addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 563 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Device with Ping_IP3

IED
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response received
5sec
10sec OK: Response received
5sec
10sec
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.
5sec NG: due to no response

10sec

5sec
10sec NG: due to no response

5sec
10sec
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
Figure 11.1-3 Time chart for Example 2
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 564 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.1.2 Auto reset function

To set the communication protocols† in the IED, the user can write the settings in the IED by
transferring the setting-file generated in GR-TIEMS. After the transfer, the IED is required to
start up again, but the user can allow the IED restart automatically with Auto reset function,
shown in Table 11.1-4. Figure 11.1-4 shows the setting ‘Common’ under ‘Main Menu-Setting-
Communication’ screens.
Table 11.1-4 Autoreset setting

Setting item Switch Feature Default setting
AUTORESET None / Cold Restart function None
†Note:GOOSE Subscribe, IEC 61850-CID File, IEC61850-Mapping Data, IEC 61870-103,
DNP3, Modbus are applied.
None: is used when the user wishes to reset the IED by the hand. For example, the
communication settings are written in the IED using the GR-TIEMS, the user should make
restart the IED by oneself.
Cold: can allow the IED restart automatically when settings have been written in the IED with
the GR-TIEMS. After that, the settings can be applied in the IED. Note that the protection
operations are disqualified during the restart.
Common
10:48 1/1
AUTORESET +
None
Figure 11.1-4 Setting screen for AUTORESET
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 565 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.1.3 Monitoring LAN communication

(i) LCD screen
The user can examine the statuses about the communion modules by the monitoring function.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
One port is connected. Two ports are connected.

Figure 11.1-5 shows the port status about the modules; terms ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ mean running
and stopping, respectively. For menus operations, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-
menu.
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
One port is connected. Two ports are connected.

Figure 11.1-5 Communication status
(ii) Status signals for Port1 and Port2

The user can also examine the LAN status using PLC signal monitoring points ‘Port1_Link
(3100061001)’ and ‘Port2_Link (3100061001)’ of the HOTST function. For example, when the
user wishes to monitor the status of the Prot1_Link, use the ‘Port1_Link’. Consequently, the
user can get the physical information about the port1: the value ‘1’ is issued when the
communication is made (Linkup), whereas value ‘0’ is issued when the communication is not
made (Linkdown).
When the Hot_Standby is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can find a
running port using the PLC signal monitoring point ‘Using_CH (3100081001)’ of the HOTST
function. Value ‘1’ is provided when the Port1 is running, whereas value ‘2’ is provided when
the Port2 is running.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 566 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.1.4 Settings
Setting of TCP/IP (Function ID: 230201)

s value
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First decimal in IP at local IED 192

IP IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in IP at local IED 168
IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in IP at local IED 1
IP1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal in IP at local IED 11
SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – First decimal in subnet mask 255
SUB SM1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in subnet mask 255
NET SM1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in subnet mask 255
SM1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal in subnet mask 1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – First decimal in gateway 192
GATE GW1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in gateway 168
WAY GW1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in gateway 1
GW1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal in gateway 1
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

s value
NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off

Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – First decimal address in IP1 0
IP1 Ping_IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal address in IP1 0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 567 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

s value

Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

s value
RedundantMode Fixed / Hot_Standby – Selection of Hot-standby Fixed
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

Default setting
Unit
Setting item Range Contents value Notes
s
Selection of any one of the actual ports

PrimaryPort None / Port1 /Port2 – None
as the primary port
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5
UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
Setting of TOOL_COM (Function ID: 201501)

s value
AUTORESET None / Cold – Auto Restart function None
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 568 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.1.5 Data ID
TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
3030021150 GATEWAY1_1 Default gateway octet1
3030001150 IP ADDR1_1 IP address octet1
3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1
0012001001 NIC_R_SIG NIC refreshed signal
0012011001 NIC_R_SIG1H NIC refreshed signal (1 hour timer)
3110111001 RX1ER_CNT receive error counter
3110101001 RX1_CNT receive packet counter
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3030011150 SUBNET1_1 Subnetmask octet1
3110211001 TX1ER_CNT send error counter
3110201001 TX1_CNT send packet counter
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT
3111201001 TX2_CNT
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 569 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link Port1 Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link Port2 Link Status
3100081001 Using_CH Using channel information

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to CH1 from CH2
310001E001 CH2_CH_CHG Change to CH2 from CH1
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 570 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IEC 61850 communication

Figure 11.2-1 shows a substation automation system (SAS) and a number of IEDs connected
via a Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other devices using
the international standard protocol (IEC 61850 standard‡); additionally, the ring network
topology is used to achieve network redundancy in the system. The user should use the GR-
TIEMS to configure the protocol in the IEC 61850 standard. That is, the functions for the
protection, the measurement, monitoring at local and remote, controlling and logging the data
are required to program in the IEC 61850 standard.
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
SNTP Ethernet LAN (TCP/IP)
Fiber Optic Ring: 100BASE-FX

CONTROL
MEASUREMENT
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
Figure 11.2-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the protocol-
implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the model-implementation-
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 571 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the user with information for
the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the user with information to
enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other devices. See
Appendix:IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS. It explains how the user can
obtain this information.
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
 Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
 Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 572 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.1 About protocol

The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID file
upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files later.
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and logical
nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function for the
protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard. All
function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes (LNs),
which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection and
control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical device.
Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical device. A
generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of the PD. A
specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain specific LN
contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 11.2-1shows the description of LNs.
Table 11.2-1 LN descripion

Actual device
LN Description
corresponding to LN
Logical node zero represents logical device specific Operation state of BCU
LLNO
information State of 43 switch
Logical node physical device represents physical
LPHD BCU,BCPU
device specific information
Domain Domain specific LN represents protection relay
XCBR,CSWI
specific LN specific function
Generic input output logical node is used if essential Based on client
GGIO
signals are not defined in the extended logical nodes. requirements
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the common LN
except LPHD. Table 11.2-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and Communication service
used in the IEC 61850 communication.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 573 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 11.2-2 Function groups in 61850

Examples of IED applications Logical
Functions grouped in to provide protection/control node Communication methods
61850 functions for the power defined in serviced in 61850
system 61850
Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report
Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report
Monitor
Trip circuit (TRC) XCBR GOOSE
Generic functions SIMG GOOSE
Control SPOS etc. CSWI Enhanced-security Control
Measurement MMXU Unbuffered Report
Measurement
Harmonics MHAI Unbuffered Report
Time Simple Network Time
NA SNTP
Synchronization Protocol
Figure 11.2-2 shows Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model. The Physical
Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with the SAS using
the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at LNs in both the
PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section 11.2.2.
Monitoring
x Control
IED SAS
×
Over current Server / Work
CB Open/Close
relay station
CB Status
Measuring
Monitoring Under voltage

relay Ethernet
Substation
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN Enhanced-security Control
LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
Buffered Report
VT PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN GOOSE
Binary
SIMG
Input
Figure 11.2-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 574 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.2 Communication service

.
All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI. The
user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication service
mapping (SCSM).
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
(i) Report for SAS

In the IED, ‘report’ is a method of sending status data, alarm data, measurement data and so
on. Using server-client communication, ‘Report’ is a ‘data set’ transferred from the IED to the
SAS. The ‘reports’ generated by the predefined ‘triggers’ are issued regularly in interval; the
‘reports’ are also generated upon a change in the event. The ‘reports’ are grouped into two
types: (1) Buffered-report-control-block and (2) Unbuffered-report-control-block. Note that the
system achieved by the unbuffered-report-service cannot start an event recover function
during the communication failure.
(ii) GOOSE for peer-to-peer communication

‘Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ’ is a faster method to transfer the data
in ‘Generic substation event (GSE)’ between IEDs. In all IEDs, multicast GOOSE message is
published from the ‘GOOSE_control_block (GCB)’. The GOOSE communication methods are
grouped into two: (1) GOOSE publish and (2) GOOSE subscribe.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 11.2-3; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 575 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 11.2-3 Data structures in the GOOSE

Logical Device
Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”)
Data Model System Relay
DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0
GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB
LLN0 LPHD1
GoCB PTRC
The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed ….
LPHD1
GGIO
Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable
Performance GOOSE data sent communication time GOOSE data sent, communication
is < 3msec time is around 10msec
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
(iv) Control mode using GOOSE

In the IED, signals generated on the binary output circuit (BO) can be controlled by the SAS,
if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block that
changes the state of the output element. Four control modes are provided:
DOes: Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
SBOns: SBO control with normal security (operate-once or operate-many)
DOes: Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
SBOes: SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once or operate-many)
(v) Time synchronization using IEC 61850 protocol / SNTP

SNTP (Simple network time protocol) is used to synchronize clocks of all IEDs in SAS. Time
synchronization is required to maintain common time across all IEDs in the network. This
makes it easier to analyze the Time stamped event data generated by the IEDs in chronological
order. In the system, IEDs are synchronized with the device having precision time source (for
example, GPS).
(vi) File transfer (COMTRADE)

To send data of the disturbance records, file transfer service is used, which is the operated in
COMTRADE format.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 576 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(vii) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS)

MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which
performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The
MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP
and Ethernet.
(viii) Generic Substation Events (GSE)

GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard; it provides a fast and reliable
method for transferring the event data over the SAS. The GSE provides facility to transfer the
same event message to multiple physical devices using multicast or broadcast service.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 577 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.3 How to manage engineering work

An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions.
Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE
Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 11.2-3
illustrates the data structure in the IED.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
*Set of LN variables REPORT

Logical Node (Event,
VCT Report Measurement)

DataSet
Voltage Control Block
Logical Node
Input / Output Signals
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
Figure 11.2-3 IED Data Structure
To configure the data structure of an IED, the user needs to edit the following items using
the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.2-4 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration using GR-
TIEMS.
 Edit Signal mapping
 Edit Logical Node
 Edit DataSet
 Edit Report Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Publish
 Edit GOOSE Subscribe
 Edit Control function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 578 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Connect IED and workstation installed with GR-TIEMS tool
Login to GR-TIEMS
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
Select an IED and Click IEC 61850 under Configuration Tools
Import ICD/CID file from the selected IED
Map the signals to Logical Nodes
Edit Data set, RCB and GCB
Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe
Write configured data to IED
Figure 11.2-4 Flow diagram
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 579 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(i) Creating and opening project

In the operation of the GR-TIEMS, the user can find an existing project or create a new project.
Figure 11.2-5 shows the ‘File Menu’, where the user can open an existing project or create a
new project.
Figure 11.2-5 File menu
Once the project is created, the user can add IEDs in the project tree structure as shown in
Figure 11.2-6.
Figure 11.2-6 Adding IED

Select the IED in the project tree structure and Click IEC 61850 under Configuration Tools as
shown in Figure 11.2-7.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 580 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 11.2-7 GR-TIEMS main screen
Click ‘IEC 61850’, then check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:
 Logical Node Screen
 Signal List Screen
 GOOSE Publish Screen
 GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Figure 11.2-8 IEC 61850 Main screen
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 581 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) IEC 61850 configuration files

Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC
61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different
manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 11.2-4.
Table 11.2-4 Types of SCL files

SCL file Description
.ICD This file describes the capabilities of an IED. It contains the
IED Capability Description communication data and function of LN in an IED.
.CID Every device configured for IEC 61850 in the GR-TIEMS tool
Configured IED Description generates a CID file. This file is then written to the IED. This
file contains configuration information of the IED to which it is
connected.
Exporting and Importing CID/ICD file

The user can export or / import a CID/ICD file as a CSV file. The user can edit
the exported CSV file using the MS-EXCEL®; the user can import the edited CSV
file back to the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.2-9 shows the options available to
import/export CID/ICD file. The user can either click the icons on the menu bar
or select the required option form the File menu drop down list.
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
Figure 11.2-9 Export / Import of CID / ICD file
Manage third party CID file

The GR-TIEMS can have third party CID file. In the project tree of the GR-TIEMS,
the user can use the device information for creating a third Party IED. To
configure dataset, RCB, GCB, GOOSE publish and GOOSE subscribe settings
and so on, the data attributes are used after the creation of the data.
Mapping application data in IEC 61850

For any IED, the IEC61850 configuration* is available by default. The user
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 582 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
should check whether the required signals are mapped in the default
configuration.
*Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe

function is required, then a new configuration has to be done.
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check
the mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals
in the signal list should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
Figure 11.2-10 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal
in earth fault protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
Mapped data
“EF1” in signal list
Figure 11.2-10 Signal mapping

As shown in the above figure, the “EF1” signal is already mapped to LN
attribute Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general.
2. To check if “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already added in Dataset. Right

click on “LLN0” and select Edit DataSet, then DataSet List screen appears as
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 583 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 11.2-11 DataSet list
As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already

mapped in the Dataset “STAT1”.
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 11.2-12.
Figure 11.2-12 Report Control List

As shown in the above figure, the DataSet “STAT1” is already assigned to
RCB “brcbST-A”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 584 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes

The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes
how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report
or GOOSE.
Edit Mapping Data

1. Search the signal to be sent from the Signal List window as shown in Figure
11.2-13.
2. Drag and Drop the selected signal to the logical node variable.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
Figure 11.2-13 Signal mapping

Note: To optimize the performance of the IED, “Period” should be 100 if the signal is not
required to be sent immediately.
“301001 3110041005 (Qual_Validity)” should be mapped to “q” with Period=100.
“200301 9010001006 (SYS_TIME)” should be mapped to “t”.
Export / Import Mapping Data

The user can export mapped data in the CSV file; the user can edit the exported
CSV file by the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.2-14
shows the export / import options.
Export Mapping Data

Import Mapping Data
Figure 11.2-14 Export / Import mapping data
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 585 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Edit Logical Node

If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the
steps below to add or modify the Logical Node:
1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and
select Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
2. In the Edit Logical Node screen, select LN Class, Prefix and LN Instance and
check the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 11.2-15 below.
To Add Logical Node
To add optional variable

To choose a proper Logical Node*
Figure 11.2-15 Add or Edit Logical Node
*Note: Refer to IEC 61850-7-4 to choose a proper Logical Node.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 586 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Edit DataSet
Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in
Figure 11.2-16. For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
Users can choose the existing

Dataset*, or enter a new
DataSet name.
Figure 11.2-16 Edit DataSet screen
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 587 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Edit Report Control Block (RCB)

Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user
wishes to assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below:
1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit
Report Control. Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 11.2-17.
2. Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the
Report Control List window as shown in Figure 11.2-17.
Figure 11.2-17 Edit Report Control screen
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 588 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Edit GOOSE Control Block

GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE
messages are used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the
electrical system. GGIO1 is used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The
DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within 3ms.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps
below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 11.2-18.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
Figure 11.2-18 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The

user can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on)
which are not meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 589 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Edit GOOSE Publish

The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default.
The GGIO1 data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If
the user assign signals to other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for
GOOSE publish operation, then the user needs to add those variables in the
GOOSE Publish screen.
Figure 11.2-19 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is
not configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are
configurable. The user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to
the GOOSE Publish screen using drag & drop* method. Figure 11.2-19 shows an
example for GOOSE Publish, where “System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the
GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Drag
Fixed
Drop
Figure 11.2-19 GOOSE Publish
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 590 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Edit GOOSE subscribe

GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published
by other IEDs. Figure 11.2-20 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user
can select the necessary signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GBU200” is the
current IED; “Bay2 GRZ200” is the other IED. “List 1” is GOOSE publisher of
GRZ200; “List 2” is GOOSE subscriber for GBU200. The user can select the
GOOSE publisher from GRZ200 and add to the GOOSE subscriber of GBU200.
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly,
the user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED,
then the same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current
IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
Figure 11.2-20 GOOSE Subscribe

Note: The user can monitor about the GOOSE message on the LCD screen. See sec.
11.2.7.
Edit Control function

The Data IDs (i.e., Signal Number) starting with “5” is used for control function
when the IED has the control function by default. The user should check whether
the required signals are mapped in the default configuration. The user can edit
and add the control signals to the LN as described in section 11.2.3(iii).
In an IED, usually an output Data ID of a protection function is assigned to LN

variable. However, for the control application, the IED is capable of receiving
command from the SAS server. To control a device (such as a circuit breaker), the
input point* (Data ID) in the control application should be configured to receive
commands from the SAS sever (that is, selecting, operating or cancel command).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 591 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands
from the sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user
should map an input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure
11.2-21). Mapping period for Control shall be 100.
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application, if available.
SBOW
Mapping Input DataID
Oper
DE V01_ CONTROL_ RE Q
Cancel
Figure 11.2-21 Control function mapping

To complete the setting for control function, after mapping data, the user needs
to set BI, BO† in the GR-TIEMS ->Setting.
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 592 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iv) Writing the configuration file to IED

After completing the IEC 61850 configuration, follow the steps below to download
the CID file for the IED.
1. Save the project.
2. Right click on the required IED and select Write to IED.
3. Configure the parameters in the Connection Method window to connect the IED
(If needed).
4. Select the writing items (IEC 61850-CID File and IEC 61850-Mapping Data) to
be written into the IED and click Write to download the IEC 61850 configuration.
If GOOSE subscribe operation is required, then select writing items Signal List
and GOOSE Subscribe before clicking Write.
Figure 11.2-22 Write to IED
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 593 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.4 Setting for IED

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE subscribe information
The user can configure the maximum duration time for the case when the IED fails to re-send
GOOSE subscribe information. Set the time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED is to be authenticated for starting the IEC 61850 communications, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the user does not want the IED to start the IEC 61850 communications, the user should set
scheme switch [850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting ‘keep-alive’ time for TCP

When applying IEC 61850 communications with TCP/IP, the user should set a time for the
‘keep-alive’ signal. The user should set the time in seconds using the setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting ‘CommTerm’

If the user wishes to receive a ‘CommTerm’ signal carrying an actual operation time from a
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA.
†Note:For example, Figure 11.2-23 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time
information. However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the
CB, but the same time information originally sent with the operation command.
The IEC 61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC
61850 standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication
provided by Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting
‘CommTerm’ is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note
that Off is set for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 594 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Station computer (SC) IED Target device (e.g. CB)
Command “CB closed” Operate+(T)
Command Open
Response
Process Closed
CommTerm+(T) Response
Figure 11.2-23 Example of CB operation flow
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test for GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using the GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the
IED so that it does not send the GOOSE message. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when
there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal.
To block the sending of the GOOSE message, the user should set On for scheme switch
[GOSNDBLK].
GOOSE receive block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE
signal, the user can apply a setting that will prevent an IED from receiving the GOOSE
message from another IED using this test. The user can perform this test using the test setting
On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects the GOOSE messages from
other IEDs. The GOOSE receive block function (GOSUBBLK) is also useful for the validation
of switchgear interlocking determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using
the GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 595 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
tests.
11.2.5 How to supervise in 61850 communications

The IED can monitor the status of the IEC 61850 communications. Discussions on IEC 61850
communications status monitoring are provided separately. (See Chapter Automatic
supervision)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 596 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.6 Quality signal in 61850 communication

The IED can send the quality signal of the IEC 61850 communications. Table 11.2-5 shows the
structure of the quality signal; a value is set for the ‘Validity’ bits in accordance with ‘Error
level’ in the IED†. ‘Test mode’ bit is set when the IED is set for the test operation‡.
Table 11.2-5 Quality signal in the IEC 61850-7-3
Definitions in the IEC 61850 7-3
Bit(s) Value Definitions in the IED
Attribute Name Attribute Value
Good 00 No error(Level0)†
Serious Error, Serious
Invalid 01
Error(Comm.) (Level1 and Level2)†
0-1 Validity
Reserved 10 Not applicable
Minor Error, Alarm, Warning
questionable 11
(Level3, Level4, Level5)†
2 Overflow – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
3 OutofRange – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
4 BadReference – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
5 Oscillatory – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
6 Failure – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
7 Olddata – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
8 Inconsistent – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
9 Inaccurate – – Not applicable (Default ‘0’ setting)
Process 0 ‘0’ setting, unconditionally
10 Source
Substituted 1 Not used
0 Operation in ‘Test mode’
11 Test –
1 Normal operation
12 OperatorBlocked – 0 ‘0’ setting, unconditionally
†Note: For more information about the meanings about the error levels, see Chapter
Automatic supervision: Outline of automatic supervision.
‡Note: The user can change the IED the test mode by the screen operation. See Chapter
User interface: Test sub-menu and Chapter Commissioning and Maintenance.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 597 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.7 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication

IEDs are able to monitor the communication using GOOSE packets, which other IEDs have
sent their information via the network. If the IED can receive the GOOSE packets, the IED
can display them on the information list. Figure 11.2-24 illustrates an example of the GOOSE
monitoring list; it shows all IEDs have reported good status (OK) message, except one IED.
GOOSE Monitoring
11:12 1/320 Signal nam es
GRZ200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#0
GRT200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#1
GRD200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#2
GRL200_Bay1 NG SUB_ QUAL#3
Screen scroll down GRT200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#5
GRL200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#7

Figure 11.2-24 Screen example of GOOSE Monitoring

Note: The IED shall be managed with own subscription information to receive the
GOOSE packets regarding the other IEDs. Thus, the user should edit the
subscription contents (see Figure 11.2-20). The LCD displays the statuses based
on that the user has edited the list of the subscription contents.
Note: Jump to Monitoring sub-menu (see Chapter User interface) to display the GOOSE
mentoring screen. The user can also find the GOOSE information on the test
screen on GR-TIEMS.
On the LCD screen, the user can find either OK or NG message regarding other IEDs. The
OK/NG message is generated with the information of the GOOSE packet received. Table 11.2-6
illustrates the messages displayed on LCD screen and GR-TIEMS screen.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 598 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 11.2-6 GOOSE statutes and signal outputs

Signal values LCD screen messages GR-TIEMS screen messages
0x0000 OK GOOD
0xC000 NG QUESTIONABLE
0xC010 NG QUESTIONABLE | TEST
0xC040 NG QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
0xC080 NG QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
When the user wishes to see GOOSE outputs†, the user can see them by user’s PLC logic, but
the user should build its logic using the PLC function. Table 11.2-7 shows the GOOSE signals,
which the user can select. For example, in order to get the GRL200_Bay1_4 information, the
user should take the GOOSE content using SUB_QUAL#3 output.
Table 11.2-7 GOOSE output signals

Data ID Signal names Descriptions
301101 3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
~~~ ~~~ ~~~
301101 31013E1001 SUB_QUAL#318 GOOSE subscription quality status
301101 31013F1001 SUB_QUAL#319 GOOSE subscription quality status
†Note: The user cannot view GOOSEs signal lists on the GR-TIMES engineering.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 599 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
11.2.8 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
s value
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2

850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP ‘KeepAlive’ time for IEC 61850 20
GOSNDBLK Off/On GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off/On GOOSE subscription block Off
TCMD Off/On Set ‘T’ in ‘CommTerm’ as actual Time Off
11.2.9 Data ID
 Monitoring point
61850 (Function ID: 301001)
0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop)
3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
3100001441 OUTGOINGPKT#0 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
3100001001 REMOTEPORTNUM#0 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0
3110041005 Qual_Validity IEC 61850 validity of quality
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality for record #0
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 600 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality for record #10
31000B1001 SUB_QUAL#11 GOOSE subscription quality for record #11
31000C1001 SUB_QUAL#12 GOOSE subscription quality for record #12
31000D1001 SUB_QUAL#13 GOOSE subscription quality for record #13
31000E1001 SUB_QUAL#14 GOOSE subscription quality for record #14
31000F1001 SUB_QUAL#15 GOOSE subscription quality for record #15
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 601 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 602 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 603 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3100AA1001 SUB_QUAL#170 GOOSE subscription quality for record #170
3100AB1001 SUB_QUAL#171 GOOSE subscription quality for record #171
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 604 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3100AC1001 SUB_QUAL#172 GOOSE subscription quality for record #172
3100AD1001 SUB_QUAL#173 GOOSE subscription quality for record #173
3100AE1001 SUB_QUAL#174 GOOSE subscription quality for record #174
3100AF1001 SUB_QUAL#175 GOOSE subscription quality for record #175
3100BA1001 SUB_QUAL#186 GOOSE subscription quality for record #186
3100BB1001 SUB_QUAL#187 GOOSE subscription quality for record #187
3100BC1001 SUB_QUAL#188 GOOSE subscription quality for record #188
3100BD1001 SUB_QUAL#189 GOOSE subscription quality for record #189
3100BE1001 SUB_QUAL#190 GOOSE subscription quality for record #190
3100BF1001 SUB_QUAL#191 GOOSE subscription quality for record #191
3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL#202 GOOSE subscription quality for record #202
3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL#203 GOOSE subscription quality for record #203
3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL#204 GOOSE subscription quality for record #204
3100CD1001 SUB_QUAL#205 GOOSE subscription quality for record #205
3100CE1001 SUB_QUAL#206 GOOSE subscription quality for record #206
3100CF1001 SUB_QUAL#207 GOOSE subscription quality for record #207
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 605 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3100DA1001 SUB_QUAL#218 GOOSE subscription quality for record #218
3100DB1001 SUB_QUAL#219 GOOSE subscription quality for record #219
3100DC1001 SUB_QUAL#220 GOOSE subscription quality for record #220
3100DD1001 SUB_QUAL#221 GOOSE subscription quality for record #221
3100DE1001 SUB_QUAL#222 GOOSE subscription quality for record #222
3100DF1001 SUB_QUAL#223 GOOSE subscription quality for record #223
3100EA1001 SUB_QUAL#234 GOOSE subscription quality for record #234
3100EB1001 SUB_QUAL#235 GOOSE subscription quality for record #235
3100EC1001 SUB_QUAL#236 GOOSE subscription quality for record #236
3100ED1001 SUB_QUAL#237 GOOSE subscription quality for record #237
3100EE1001 SUB_QUAL#238 GOOSE subscription quality for record #238
3100EF1001 SUB_QUAL#239 GOOSE subscription quality for record #239
3100FA1001 SUB_QUAL#250 GOOSE subscription quality for record #250
3100FB1001 SUB_QUAL#251 GOOSE subscription quality for record #251
3100FC1001 SUB_QUAL#252 GOOSE subscription quality for record #252
3100FD1001 SUB_QUAL#253 GOOSE subscription quality for record #253
3100FE1001 SUB_QUAL#254 GOOSE subscription quality for record #254
3100FF1001 SUB_QUAL#255 GOOSE subscription quality for record #255
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 606 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 607 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 608 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
USB communication
The IED has an USB port in B-type connector; the user PC can be connected with the IED
through that. The USB port places on the IED front panel. The communication operates in the
serial transmission; its speed is fixed at 115.2kbps.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 609 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
12 User interface
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 610 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through the USB cable. This section discusses the
configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu hierarchy of
the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

As shown in Figure 12.1-1, the front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light
emitting diodes (LEDs), 11 operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the function
keys are referred to as F1 to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB receptacle.
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 12.1-1 Front Panel

(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED such
as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu.
If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen backlight
by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen backlight
turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and the previous
menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 611 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) LEDs
As shown inTable 12.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
Table 12.1-1 LED labels and their color
LED User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit up when the IED
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
is in service.
Lit up when an error
2 ERROR Red N/A
is occurred.
31 N/A N/A ✔
41 TRIP Red ✔ Default

51 N/A N/A ✔
61 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

71 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LED #3 to LED #26 is user-configurable LEDs. User can assign a signal with or
without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 12.6(iv).
(iv) Monitoring jacks

There are three monitoring jacks on the front panel; the three monitoring jacks have LEDs, A,
B, and C respectively. For example, if the user wishes to undertake test work1, two monitoring-
jacks (A and B) are available for use. By selecting the Data ID of an object signal from the Data
ID list, and by keying this Data ID into the IED, the object signal can be displayed on the
selected LEDs (A and B). The user can also observe this object signal at the output of the
monitoring jacks (A and B) on an oscilloscope.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 612 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(v) Function keys

The IED provides seven function keys (F1 to F7) with the following two features; a LED is
attached on each function key. Table 12.1-2 shows the features for these keys.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See section
12.5(v)-1)
 Control the signal setting easily.
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the signal
in the settings menu. (See section 12.5(v)-2)
Table 12.1-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)

Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
LED† Skip to a specific screen directly.

Control for the operation of pre-assigned
F1 to F7 binary signals.
†Note: Like in the LEDs of Table 12.1-1, the user can set to light the above LEDs by
itself. Setting the above LEDs are similar to the ones of the Table 12.1-1 (For
setting, see section 12.6(iv)). Note the manufacture programs to light the
respective LEDs in default prior to shipping.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 613 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(vi) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 12.1-3.
Table 12.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key. (Close)
O Control key. (Open)
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: The MIMIC key is only available when a large LCD screen is mounted on the
front panel. The pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that this mode is
only provided when the user programmed the feature using the engineering tool.
See chapter Engineering tool: MIMIC configuration tool.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 614 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
HMI operation
By using the LCD screen, the operation keys and the function keys, the user can access
functions such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the LCD screen is more or less common in all IED models.
However, the contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit. Press any key except
the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the LCD screen is turned on1. If the IED detects a
fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same time, the “TRIP”2 LED is
lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the period of time for which the previous fault pop-
up screen, is displayed, the previous fault information will be overwritten by the
new fault on the pop-up screen. Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up
screen for “Latest Fault” to return to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

 Main-menu
If LCD screen is turned off, press any key, except the key CLEAR. “Main-Menu" will
appear on the LCD screen (see the left of Figure 12.2-1). To go to the next level of
hierarchy, press the key ►.
 Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown in the right of Figure 12.2-1. By
using the key ▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward
to view all of the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous
level of hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
 Screen structure
The screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on the
top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the left-hand
side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the current line
number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the item number.
For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which is at the
second item of a maximum of four items.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 615 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Main Menu OC
10:48 1/8 10:48 2/4
_Record > OC1EN +>
Monitoring > On
Setting > _OC2EN +>
I/O Setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 12.2-1 LCD screen for Main-Menu and Sub-menu
Figure 12.2-2 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several Sub-
menus. Table 12.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-Menu.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Record List Main Menu
Fault Record Clear Records
Event Record1 Record List
Clear Records Setting
Event Record2 Record List Counter GCNT01~
Clear Records
Event Record3 Record List
Function Key F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Clear Records
Disturbance Record Record List
Diagnostics Detail
Clear Records
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering IO Setting AC Analog Input AI (#1~)
KCT Binary Input Slot (#1~)
Binary I/O Slot#n Binary Output Slot (#1~)
Communication LAN LED LED (3~26)

IEC61850 F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Relay Element DIF FEQ
REF VPH
OC ICD
EF VTF
EFIn
OCN
THM
BCD Time Clock ActiveSyncSrc
CBF
OV Time Zone
OVG SNTP
OVS Time Sync
BI SYNC
UVS
Statistics Display Format IRIG SYNC
Power Value
Demand Summer Time
Peak Demand
Counter
GOOSE Monitoring Accumulated Time
Test Test Mode Test Option
Diagnostics Function Test
Binary Input (Slot#n)
Binary Output (Slot#n)
Setting Record Fault Record
Event Record
Metering Disturbance Record
Mode Change
Communication LAN Signal Monitoring
IEC61850
Information
Protection Common
Active Group Security Setting Change Password
Copy Group(A->B)
Group1 Security
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5 Login / Logout
Group6
Group7
Group8
Control Control Common

Reset Control
Figure 12.2-2 Menu hierarchy
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 616 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 12.2-1 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. The user can erase each record individually or can clear all records at
Record
the same time. The user can assign event records to three distributed “Event
Record” sub-menus as required.
The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all of the status values for the IED, such
Monitoring as Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics,
Interlock, GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Setting
Metering, Communication and Protection.
The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings for inputs,
I/O Setting configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, the
Time
source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock.
The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
Test forcible operation of binary outputs from the IED, time measurement of
variable timers, and observation of the binary signals in logic circuits.
The "Information" sub-menu displays information about the IED such as
Information
hardware, software, communication, etc.
The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
Security
level, providing high levels of security by assigning users different levels of
Setting
access.
When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
Login/Logout
is displayed.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 617 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Record sub-menu
The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, the user can clear records
separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 12.3-1 Display of Record

Table 12.3-1 Operation and display in Record sub-menu
Display Operation key Remark
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all records”.
Confirmation dialog screen will be displayed.
(i) Fault Record
The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 12.3-2.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1,2,3,4,5,6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 12.3-2 Display of Fault Record
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 618 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Display fault record

Figure 12.3-3 shows how to see the screen of fault record list and the details.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6 cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
#1 2012-07-25 >
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2
4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48 1/222
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
DIFZA
Figure 12.3-3 Fault Record
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 619 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Clear fault record

Figure 12.3-4 shows the steps to clear the fault record list.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault Record”
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-4 Clear Record
Clear all information in Fault Record

Figure 12.3-5 shows the steps to clear all the records.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
Clear Records
2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Record”
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-5 All clear
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 620 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in the example below.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 12.3-6 Display of Event Record
Display of Event Record

Figure 12.3-7 shows the steps to display and erase event records. To clear all records, refer to
section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Event Record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
Figure 12.3-7 Display events
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 621 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Clear of Event Records

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear
10:48 1/2 Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Event Record1
3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-8 Clear Event
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 622 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the entire
disturbance data, as shown in the following example:
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 12.3-9 Display of Disturbance Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records.
Display of disturbance Record

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2 sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 12.3-10 Disturbance
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 623 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Clear of Disturbance Records

Figure 12.3-11 shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To clear all records,
refer to section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the
10:48 1/2 Clear Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-11 Clear records
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 624 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Monitoring sub-menu
“Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is updated
every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the Monitoring
sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
The value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed. The user can change the units
as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 12.4-1 shows an example of the Metering
sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/25
Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
Figure 12.4-1 Display for Metering
(ii) Binary I/O

“Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO module
circuits. The LCD displays the binary input or output signal number, the signal name1
assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status in a line. The status for the
binary output circuit is shown by a logic level (“1” or “0”). Figure 12.4-2 provides an example
for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 12.4-2 Display of Binary I/O status

1Note: The user can set the names of binary signals with GR-TIEMS.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 625 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 12.4-3 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and outputs.
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting > _Binary I/O >
IO setting >
◄ ◄ Slot#3 >
Operation Time > Slot#4 >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 12.4-3 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 12.4-4.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 12.4-4 Menu hierarchy for Communication sub-menu

The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
LAN sub-menu: the communication port name and status are shown in a line.
When the IED has single communication module, or when the IED has
communication modules but a communication module is allowed to operate in
the IED, an operation status of the communication ports is shown, as shown
in Figure 12.4-5.
“LAN” sub-menu can display “PortStatus” and “NetMonitor status”. If

“NetMonitor” is running (active), the LCD screen will display a “>”mark.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 626 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
Figure 12.4-5 Display for LAN

If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working;
if the status of a port is “DOWN, it means that the LAN cable is not connected to
the port.
The following two sub-menus are displayed to show the communication status
when the IED has dual LAN communication modules.
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Port 1(Port A) is connected. Port 1&2 (Port A&B) are connected.

Port 2(Port B) is not connected.
Figure 12.4-6 Communication status
IEC61850 sub-menu: IP addresses of the devices connecting in IEC61850 are

shown in a straight line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available
with GR-TIEMS.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 627 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 12.4-7 Display of IEC61850

(iv) Relay Elements
The names of relay elements and statuses of the operation are shown in respective columns.
To view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 12.4-8 Displaying Relay Elements

Figure 12.4-9 shows the steps necessary to display the status of the measuring elements.
Main Menu Main Menu Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/9 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Metering > ► CBF >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > EFP >
Setting > Communication > _OC >
IO setting >
◄ _Relay Element > ◄ EF >
Time > Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 12.4-9 Steps to display the status of measuring elements

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 628 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(v) Statistics
“Statistics” sub-menu has several sub-menus.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitoring Statistics Power value
Counter
Accumulated Time
Operation Time
Operation Counter
Total Time
Figure 12.4-10 Menu hierarchy for Statistics

For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be
reset or revised.
Power Value sub-menu: With regard to statistics item, the name and its value
are shown below. The user can also change the unit of each value by the
setting1. It is allowed to reset or revise the statistics value2.
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 12.4-11 Display of Power Value

Table 12.4-1 Operation means for data reset or data revise
Step Display Operation key Remark
1 [>] ► Press ► key to go to the sub-menu
Press ENTER key to execute reset or revise. After
2 [+] ENTER
executing, a confirmation dialog screen displays.
1Note: In order to secure the reliability, the reset and revision items are controlled by the
vendor.
2Note: The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kW,
MW and kvar+. For instance, when the power is measured as "123,456kW" then it
is displayed as "123MW". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a
new compensated value. For example, if "78MW" should be displayed on the IED
screen even though the measured value is "123,456kW" then the user should key in
the new value of "78MW". Note that the compensated value "78MW" is "78,000kW",
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 629 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
and it is not "78,456kW" or "123,456kW". Note that the compensated value will be
affected when there is a change in CT ratio setting. That is, when the user key in a
value of "78MW" for the CT ratio of "2000:1" and later when the CT ratio is changed
from "2000:1" to "4000:1", then the value is displayed as "156MW" on the IED screen.
Therefore when the CT ratio setting is changed, the user should key in the value of
"78MW" again to display the compensated value.
Counter sub-menu: the name and number of statistical items are shown in
two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first
line.
Counter
10:48 1/32
0
0
0
Figure 12.4-12 Display for Counter sub-menu

To change the counter number, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.4-13.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 630 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3
Record > ► Metering > ► Power value >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > _Counter >
Setting > Communication > Accumulated Time >
◄ ◄
IO Setting > Relay Element >
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/32 10:48 1/32
Change? ENTER Count1(No Assign) + ENTER Count1(No Assign) +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
Count2 (No Assign) + Count2(No Assign) +
1 0
Count3 (No Assign) + Count3(No Assign) +
0 0
Revise the data
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/32
Count1(No Assign) +
0
The data has been revised. 1
0
Figure 12.4-13 Steps for changing the counter number
Accumulated Time sub-menu: Total time for which the IED has been running
is shown in “d (date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can clear the total
time value by clear operation (reset), which is shown in Figure 12.4-14.
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time

10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME + Reset?
CANCEL
234d 23h 39m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
ENTER
Figure 12.4-14 Display for Accumulated Time
(vi) GOOSE monitoring

The status of the GOOSE subscription information is shown for each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 11.2-24. Each IED name (for example, “GRx200-11-603”) has been defined in the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 631 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
GOOSE subscription information.
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRx200-11-603 OK
GRx200-21-603 OK
GRx200-31-603 NG
Figure 12.4-15 Display for GOOSE Monitoring
(vii) Diagnostics
Error message will be published in Automatic supervision. If there are no errors, an error
message is not displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error
>
Data(commslv) error >
Figure 12.4-16 Display of Supervision items
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 632 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting sub-menu
"Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions: Recording,
Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this section, we
show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection setting”, and
others. Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the “On/Off”
function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
(i) Setting method

In “Setting” sub-menu, four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (items selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
Element Setting Mode: The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting
numerical values. For each setting, the setting name, setting value and the
unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 12.5-1 provides an example of the
element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
Before Changing Setting After Changing

Setting
Figure 12.5-1 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been
changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the
change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For
the setting of a value, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.5-21:
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 633 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + [ENTER] OC1-b + [◄] x 5 OC1-b +
123.00000 123.00000 123.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c + OC1-c +
[CANCEL] [►] x 5
1.00000 1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg 45 deg
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER] *OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Figure 12.5-2 Steps for setting the value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 12.5-1 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
Table 12.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9
1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
2 1 : 2 3 [►] 2 1 : 2 3
Switch Setting Mode: The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the
selection of two modes. Figure 12.5-3 provides an example of the switch
setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the selected item are
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 634 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
displayed on two lines.
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Before Changing Setting After Changing
Figure 12.5-3 Display Example of Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is
canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 12.5-4
shows the operation of the switch setting mode.
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + [ENTER] OC1-VTFBlk + [▲] / [◄] *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
[CANCEL]
Trip Trip [►] / [▼] / Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD + [▲] / [◄] OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR 3POR
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼] Block
Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Figure 12.5-4 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
List Selection Mode: The “List Selection Mode” is composed of main-setting-

screens and selection-list-screens as shown in Figure 12.5-5. In the main-
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 635 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item are displayed. Press
the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for selection list will
appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside
the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed, the [*]
mark will disappear automatically.
OC1 OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk

10:48 23/56 10:48 1/3 10:48 2/3
_OC1-2fBlk + [ENTER] _Non [▼] Non
Non Block-3P _Block-3P
OC1-VTFBlk + Block-PerP Block-PerP
[CANCEL]
Non [▲]
OC1-UseFor +
Trip
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Figure 12.5-5 Operation of List Selection Mode
Signal Selection Mode: Figure 12.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Element

10:48 1/2 10:48 2/128 10:48 2/128
_Signal + [ENTER] No assign [►] No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Logic + 423101 > AF00002001
[CANCEL]
Toggle 423102 > [◄] AF00003001
423103 > AF00004001
423104 > AF00005001
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
Figure 12.5-6 Operation of signal selection
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 636 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 12.5-7
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 12.5-7 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

Suppose the setting of each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 12.5-8.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
Suppose a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Upper Menu”, as shown in Figure 12.5-9.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 637 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 2/3
Record > [►] Active group > Telecommunication >
[►]
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip >
Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose >
_Protection > [◄] Group 2 > [◄]
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
[►] / [▼] / [►] / [▼] /

[▲] / [◄] [▲] / [◄]
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
Figure 12.5-8 Setting example in case #1
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 638 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 2/5
Record > [►] Record > [►] LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850 >
_Setting > _Communication > IEC103 >
[◄] [◄]
IO Setting > Protection > Modbus >
Time > Counter > DNP >
Test > Function key >
[►] [◄]
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + [▲] / [◄] 850BLK +
[ENTER] _850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON [CANCEL] ON [CANCEL] ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850 >
GSECHK + IEC103 >
ON Modbus >
[►]
SI1-1 + DNP >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
[CANCEL]
Counter > canceled.
Function key >
Figure 12.5-9 Setting example in case #2
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 639 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
[ENTER] Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
setting is confirmed. [◄] x 3
OC2EN +
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
Figure 12.5-10 Operation of On/Off function
Table 12.5-2 Explanation of [+>] mark in On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 640 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. Jump to the “Element Setting Menu” if a relay setting
is required.
Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in
the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common [▲] x 4 Common [►] Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 [◄] 3
Copy Group (A->B) > [▼] x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 > Group 2 > Group 2 >
Refer to “Note: 1)”
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed [►]
Active Group >
setting is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection” sub-

menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 12.5-11 Operation of changing active group
Copy group setting: The user can copy an active setting from one group to
another group. As an example, in the following figure “Group3” will be copied
to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 12.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 641 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B)

10:48 1/11 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Common [►] _A (1 – 8): + [▼] A (1 – 8): +
3 3
Active Group +
B (1 - 8): +
1 [◄] [▲] _B (1 - 8): +
1 1
*Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B)

10:48 1/2
[ENTER]
10:48 1/2 [▲] 10:48 1/2
A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): +
3 3 3
*B (1 - 8): + *B (1 - 8): + [► B (1 - 8): +
2 2 ] 1
[◄]
Protection
Copy Group? [ENTER]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No The changed
setting is confirmed.
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Figure 12.5-12 Copy group setting
Change group settings: Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings
are set. Therefore, in each group, the user can change the settings of the
protection functions and other features. To change the settings in each group,
refer to the setting method discussed in section 12.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. These keys have their own LED, which can be
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)
- 642 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
programmed using settings. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6),
respectively, as the default settings shown in Table 5.6-3.
Table 12.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics
Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps
as shown in the figure below.
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function
10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + _No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 [ENTER] 10:48 1/3
[◄] x 2
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Key?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen is assigned to [F1].
Figure 12.5-13 Operation of screen jump setting
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 643 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
IO setting >
[F1] On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
Figure 12.5-14 Operation of screen jump function
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 12.5-15.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
screen is configured for the same function key.
2) If a configured screen is disabled by “On/Off Function” setting (refer to section
12.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > [►] Function + [ENTER] *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Figure 12.5-15 Cancelling screen jump function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 644 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Signal control function: To assign a test signal to a function key, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 12.5-16.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
[◄] [CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▲] [▼]
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
[ENTER]
*Function + [▼] *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + [▲] LED > [ENTER] No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
[►] _AF00001001 [▼] x 2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > [◄] AF00004001 [▲] x 2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed Change Setting? *Signal +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
setting is confirmed. 123101AF00003001
Logic +
Instant
Figure 12.5-16 Assigning a signal to the function key
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 645 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
I/O setting sub-menu

The “I/O Setting” sub-menu is used to set or change settings of the following items:
(i) AC Analog Input
(ii) Binary Input
(iii) Binary Output
(iv) LED
This section explains the details of setting method.
(i) AC analog input

For the AC analog inputs in the VCT module, the user can configure a ratio for each AC analog
channel. With regard to the ratio, the user can key the value of the ratio from the sub-menu.
Selection of ratio: For example, Figure 12.6-1 shows how the channel
selection is made for the AC analog input on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1).
Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.
AC Analog Input AI#1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12
AI#1 > [►] CH1 >
AI#2 > CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
[►]
AI#1
10:48 1/2
AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
2000
AI1_Ch1_Rating +
DEP
Figure 12.6-1 AC analog input screens

Note: This screen is a sample. The AI numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of VCT modules in each IED.
Set of rating: Figure 12.6-2 is an example of rating in channel#1. From this

screen, the user can select a rating for each channel.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 646 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CH1 AI1_Ch1_Rating
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/3
AI1_Ch1_Ratio + DEP
2000.000 1A
AI1_Ch1_Rating + 5A
DEPAI#1
[►]
10:48 1/10
[►]
CH1 >
CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
Figure 12.6-2 Selection of rating

Note: Term “DEP” means that a rating value follows the default setting at the
manufacture when it is carried out customer’s ordering. For more information of
ordering, see Appendix: Ordering.
(ii) Binary input

All binary input circuits provided in the IED are user-configurable; the user can set common
programmable logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see
Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module: Binary input circuit)
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting function.
To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps ((ii)-1 and
(ii)-2)
Selection of binary input circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-3 illustrates the
selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next hierarchy.
Binary Input Slot#6

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/9
Slot#4 > [►] _Common >
_Slot#6 > BI1 >
BI2 >
BI3 >
BI4 >
BI5 >
BI6 >
Figure 12.6-3 Selection of slot and binary input circuit
Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed depend upon the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 647 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED.
CPL setting: Figure 12.6-4 is an example of a “Common” setting. From this

screen, the user can set a threshold level and the number of comparisons
feature for contact chatter for all binary input circuits.
Common
10:48 1/2
THRES_Lvl +
Low
CMP_NUM +
4
Figure 12.6-4 Common screen
For example, Figure 12.6-5 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1).
The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On or Off is set for setting
[BI1_CPL]. Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter.
BI1
10:48 1/1
BI1_CPL +
Off
Figure 12.6-5 CPL setting

Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets
[BI*_CPL] On.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 648 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Binary output

All binary output circuits provided in the IED are also user-configurable; the user can configure
timers and switches using CPL settings. (For more information of CPL, see Chapter: Binary
IO module: Binary output circuit)
Selection of binary output circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-6 illustrates the
selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy.
Binary Output Slot#6
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/8
Slot#5 > [►] _BO1 >
_Slot#6 > BO2 >
BO3 >
BO4 >
BO5 >
BO6 >
BO7 >
Figure 12.6-6 Selection of slot and binary output circuit

Note: Those screens are samples. The slot numbers screend are depend on the
configuration of binary IO module in each IED case.
CPL Setting: For example, Figure 12.6-7 illustrates the setting of a binary
output circuit (BO1). Using setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is
available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers and switches can be set in this
menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is keyed into
setting [BI*_CPL].
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 649 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
BO1
10:48 1/17
BO1_CPL +
Off
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
FF-SW +
Off
Reset Signal +
No Assign
Figure 12.6-7 Binary output setting
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 650 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 12.6-8 shows how to assign a signal:
BO1 Select Function Select Function

10:48 2/17 10:48 1/127 10:48 2/127
BO1_CPL + [ENTER] _No Assign [▼] No Assign
On ARC 4A6001> _ARC 4A6001>
_Signal1 + BCD 452001> BCD 452001>
[CANCEL]
No Assign BIO_Slot1 200B01> BIO_Slot1 200B01>
Signal2 + BIO_Slot2 200B02> BIO_Slot2 200B02>
No Assign BIO_Slot3 200B03> BIO_Slot3 200B03>
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_CO-OC-A 8000001B60
CO-OC-B 8100001B61
CO-OC-C 8200001B62
CO-EF 8300001B63
EXT.ARC_S 8300001B64
Figure 12.6-8 Assigning a signal

Note: “No Assign” is always displayed on the first line, even when the page is changed.
(iv) Selection and setting of LED

As shown in Figure 12.1-1, the IED provides 26 LEDs and 7 function-keys. The user can
configure LEDs (“LED#3” to “LED#26”) and the function key LEDs (F1 to F7; each has a LED).
Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR gate or
XOR gate operation. Furthermore, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable
for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. One or up to eight signals can be assigned
to a single LED with selectable LED color.
Selection of LED: Figure 12.6-9 shows the LED selection screen; the user can
select a setting item by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next
level in the hierarchy
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 651 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
:
Figure 12.6-9 LED selecting screen
LED Setting: As shown in Figure 12.6-10, the user can set the logical gate,
timer, color of LED and assign signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Color +
Figure 12.6-10 LED setting screen
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 652 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Time sub-menu
In Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of Clock function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time displaying and so on. Figure below shows the Time sub-
menu. (For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Clock function)
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 12.7-1 Time function screen

(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 12.7-2 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 12.7-2 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is SNTP,
the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
Figure 12.7-3 shows how to handle this screen.
Time menu
(1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
Clock
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.

Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 12.7-3 Clock format
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 653 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
ActiveSyncSrc menu
ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.
Clock
10:00 1/2 *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the > is
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05 not shown in the screen.
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of active

ActiveSyncSrc
10:48 SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 100
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
Figure 12.7-4 ActiveSync
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set. Figure 12.7-5 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 12.7-5 Time zone setting screen
(1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1 Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time zone
_Time zone +
0.00hour in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
Figure 12.7-6 TimeZone
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 654 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 12.7-7 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Figure 12.7-7 Time synchronization setting

The following shows how to operate in this screen.
TimeSyncSrc menu
Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
(2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of “---”, SNTP, BI, MODBUS

TimeSyncSrc
10:48 1/5 and IRIG-B.
---
_SNTP Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization
BI
MODBUS
is not operated.
IRIG-B
Figure 12.7-8 TimeSyncSrc
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the servers
can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of higher-accuracy)
and select the server with the smallest value.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 655 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
SNTP menu
IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
(1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function has been set
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 for On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP (2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
SNTP (3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.
10:48 1/4 When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
Server1 +
0. 0. 0.176 ENTER.
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Figure 12.7-9 SNTP
BI SYNC menu
When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in Time Sync menu, the user can choose a binary input circuit
(BI) as a synchronization standard. Adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC (1) Enter the Data ID of the BI output

10:48 1/2 (2) Set adjustment time for [SYNC ADJ]
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s
Figure 12.7-10 BISYNC
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 656 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
IRIG SYNC menu

When the “IRIG SYNC” is set to On in Time Sync menu, the user can choose IRIG signal for
the synchronization.
IRIG SYNC (1) Set On if IRIG-B data is generated in IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000

10:48 1/2 format. On the other hand, set On if the IRIG-B is generated with
USE_BCDYEAR +
Off absence the C37.118.
USE_LOCALTIME +
Off
Figure 12.7-11 IRIGSYNC
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 12.7-12 shows display format menu:
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 12.7-12 Display format menu

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter setting
Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting.
Date format menu

(1) Move cursor to “Date_fmt”; and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
(2) Select desired format by moving cursor.

Date_fmt
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
Figure 12.7-13 Date Format
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 657 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Date delimiter menu

r
Display Format
10:48 1/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter
10:48 1/3 (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the desired
_-
/ format type.
.
Figure 12.7-14 Date delimite

Time delimiter menu
r
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
:
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
Figure 12.7-15 Time delimite
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 658 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Second delimiter menu

Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
(2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
Figure 12.7-16 Second
(v) DST (Summer time)

When DST is On, the user is needed to set details:
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Figure 12.7-17 DST (Summer time) menu

Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or
ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week must be filled “5”. The IED
controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or
End_Week automatically.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 659 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/13 Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
_Summer time +
Off After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer time
in detail.
Summer Time (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
10:48 1/9
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
Figure 12.7-18 DST setting
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time. The following procedure is a
case of starting weekday setting.
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Start_SM(Wday)
(2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
10:48
1/8
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time (3) Starting weekday is set.

10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Figure 12.7-19 DST setting
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 660 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Test sub-menu
Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen
The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 12.8-1 Test screen

(ii) Test mode screen
The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 12.8-2. The Test Mode screen has four functions, Test
Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 12.8-2 Test Mode screen

Test option screen: The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 12.8-3, is used
to select the following functions and perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 12.8-3 Test Option screen

 Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)
This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication
packet. The Test flag is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in
combination with another device in the Test mode. When this option is
selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset temporarily to
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 661 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending
information in Test mode. This function is used when there is a conflict in
communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
 GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription
information from another IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing
in case of bad reception (For example, Validation of Interlock determination).
The user can simulate a bad reception condition passively by using two
GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED
under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
Function test screen: Function test screen is provided for testing; the use can
program test operations, which can be implemented in protection and control
functions. Figure 12.8-4 exemplifies the Test screen. Automatic supervision
will stop when the user sets Off for A.M.F (for more information about the
automatic supervision, see Chapter Automatic supervision).
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Figure 12.8-4 Function test menu (an example)
Binary input test screen: The user can have a virtual signal to a binary input
circuit using the binary input test screen. Figure 12.8-5 shows an example;
the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content displayed will differ
depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter Technical
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 662 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
description: Binary IO Module)
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 12.8-5 Binary input menu

Figure 12.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 12.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module

For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI1) on the
BIO1A module at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown
in Figure 12.8-6).
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 12.8-7 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the
items required for simulation.
 ON: BI1 output is set forcibly to ON(Logic level=high(1)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 OFF: BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF(Logic level=low(0)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 12.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 663 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
simulation test. This does not start the simulation.
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 12.8-7,
if the user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the
screen shown in Figure 12.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner
similar to that described for BI01.
After selecting OP in Figure 12.8-6, use the following screen to start the simulation
test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 12.8-8 Execution menu of BI test

If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 12.8-8, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 12.8-9
shows that the IED is in simulation test mode.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 12.8-9 Running test menu

Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
Binary output test screen: The user is able to test a binary output circuit.
Figure 12.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary output from the Test
Mode screen.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 664 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 12.8-10 Binary output menu

Figure 12.8-11 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 12.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 12.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2).
The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit.
(Refer to Figure 12.8-7 to Figure 12.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 12.8-12 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary
output circuit.
 ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
 OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should select
TestFlag-EN in Figure 12.8-1 and select On or Off.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 665 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 12.8-1, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 12.8-13). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 12.8-13 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 12.8-14 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring jacks
(A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 12.8-14 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 12.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 12.8-15 Selection menu
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 666 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Information sub-menu
In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory, and not changed by the user. Figure 12.9-1 shows the
Information sub-menu. Table 12.9-1 shows detail of information that is displayed in this screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
Gxx*00 __-00-111-22-33-
44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 12.9-1 Information screen
Table 12.9-1 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
Gxx*00 Product name
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Hardware section information of ordering number
-****-***-** Software section information of ordering number
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
No name Plant name which is input from GR-TIEMS by the user
[Description]
No name Information of the IED which is input from GR TIEMS by the user
[CP1M Software]
************ Name and version number of Main CPU Software
[CP1S Software]
************ Name and version number of Sub CPU Software
[CP2M Software]
************ Name and version number of extra CPU Software(This item is
displayed in case of extra CPU implemented model only)
[IEC61850 eng]
********* Name and version number of IEC61850 engine (This item is
displayed in case of IEC61850 implemented model only)
[IEC61850 Date Model]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model (This item is
[IEC61850 Mapping]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping (This item is
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 667 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Display item Remark

[GOOSE Subscribe]
No Data GOOSE Subscript (This item is displayed in case of IEC61850
implemented model only)
Interlock Data
******************** Setting data of interlock (This item is displayed in case of
interlock function implemented model only)
[PLC Date]
************ PLC Data name and version number
[Command Block Data]
******************** Double command block data
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 668 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords, active
or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID.
Table 12.10-1 Access control function settings
Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Control N.A N.A N.A ✔ ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔

Functions Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(function Monitoring
N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
keys) (Reset/Revise)
F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
allowed
to operate F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in
the Security setting.
Table 12.10-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
Control An operator can also change the mode between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.

An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 669 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
13 Installation
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 670 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Caution for storage

You have to pack an IED in the original box after the IED is inspected, if the IED is not required
to be installed now; and you have to store it in dry and clean condition.
Recommended storage condition:
- Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius
- No condensation
Handling precautions
Modules of the IED should be handled in the electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user shall use an anti-electrostatic-wrist-band; and it is grounded.
CAUTION
 Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
 Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
You have to check carefully the electronic circuitry for your handling area, which is defined in
the IEC 60747 standard.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 671 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software

The user should unpack and check the IED before use. Be in touch with Toshiba at email
(www.toshiba-relays.com) for any issues.
(i) Opening and inspecting relay (IED) package

Open a relay package and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items are
included in the package. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above items
are missing, contact your agent.
- Relay (IED) unit
- Test record: One report sheet
- Installation guide: One guide sheet
- Instruction manuals: Provided within a CD-ROM
- Flange covers: Left and right covers
- Function keys label: One label sheet
- LEDs Label: One label sheet
(ii) Manufacture settings (In, Vn, fn, Vdc)

Find the hardware nameplate. The user can know the IED has been produced correctly in
terms of rated current (In), voltage (Vn), frequency (fn), and DC rating (Vdc). The user can
also find them with Factory settings (Figure 13.3-2).
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 2 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 2 6 A
VCT44B
Transformer protection IED

GRT200 -21-34H-00-66-10-26A
1A / 5A 50 / 60 Month, Year
100-120 110-250
****** ** ***
DC rating (Vdc)
Rated frequency (fn)
Rated voltage (Vn)
Rated current (In)
Figure 13.3-1 Hardware nameplate example on the rear
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 672 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Ordering positions
- 2 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 2 6 A
VCT type (VCT44B)
System frequency (fn) = 60Hz
AC rating values (In):
Ia,b,c-1CT = 1A
Ia,b,c-2CT = 1A
Ia,b,c-3CT = 5A
In-1CT = 1A, In-2CT = 5A, In-3CT = 1A
Figure 13.3-2 Factory setting example

Note: The user can change a rated value (In); see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input to change it.
(iii) Combination of VCT and BIOs

The transformer module (VCT) is located at the far right slot (e.g., at ‘VC1’ in Figure 13.3-3).
Identify the code at Position ‘7’ to know the VCT type (e.g., VCT44B is implemented by the
instruction code of Position ‘7’ in Figure 13.3-2).
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find BI3A and BO1A modules in IED
depending the ordering cords “4H” at Positions A&B. The user can also know the configuration
with IO configuration label.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 673 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Ordering positions
- 2 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 26 A
Figure 13.3-3 IO configuration label example (viewing from the back in 3/4 case)
Note: See Section IED case and module slot in Chapter Technical description to find the
structure of IED cases and terminals. For more information about the BI, BO, and
BIO circuits, see Section Binary IO module in the same chapter.
(iv) Communication modules (LAN and others)

Figure 13.3-3 shows communication modules are implemented at C11 to C15. The layouts of
the communication modules are matched with Ordering codes at Positions ‘E and F’.
Ordering positions
- 2 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 1 0 - 26 A
Selected LAN and IRIG
Figure 13.3-4 Example for module selected

(v) Relay and control software
Verifying relay software is possible to check the codes at Positons ‘S, G, and T’ on Software
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 674 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
nameplate. For example of Figure 13.3-5, the IED has ‘01A’ software†. This IED can operate
in the IEC61850 protocol‡.
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 2 0 1 A - 6 6 2 - 3 E
GRT200- --
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software
Figure 13.3-5 Software nameplate example on the rear

†Note:For more information about relay functions, see Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:For more information about the communication, see Chapter Communication
protocol.
(vi) Flange covers and labels

Two flange covers (blue ones in Figure 13.3-6) are included in the package. The user can attach
them on the IED when mounting into the rack (see succeeding section Rack mounting).
LEDs label
Pockets for labels
Function keys label
Flange covers
Figure 13.3-6 Flange covers and labels attached on IED
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 675 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
PWS alarm threshold setting

The IED has power supply module (PWS) at the far left slot. The user can confirm DC rated
voltage on the hardware nameplate by checking the cord at Positions ‘8’, but the user should
select either alarm thresholds for dropping DC voltage by inserting a jumper on the PWS
(Figure 13.4-1). See Section Power supply module in Chapter Technical description.
Ordering positions
- x 1 - x x x - x x - x x - x x - x x x
DC rated voltage, e.g., 1=’110 to 250Vdc’, selected by the ordering
Figure 13.4-1 Alarm threshold can be set on the PWS module
CAUTION
Note: The connection between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw No. 37 is made
with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. The user shall remove
this short-wire when undertaking the dielectric voltage test for the IED.
Remember that the user shall reconnect the terminals with this short-wire after
the test (See Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test).
Figure 13.4-2 PWS terminal label
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 676 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Removing and installation of an inside module
WARNING
Switch off the DC power supply. Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after
switching off the DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and place the modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components may get damaged. After replacing the module, check all of the settings including
the data related to the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 677 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(i) Removal of the front panel and rear terminal

Step 1: Check the power has not been supplied to the equipment. Unscrew four screws on the
front panel. Do not pull it forcibly, because inside modules are internally connected using an
flat-cable (approximately 100 millimeters length).
Screws
Flat cable (100mm)
Removing direction
Step 2: To remove the flat cable, release the locks at the connector.
Releasing the lock
Connector released
Step 3: Detach the terminals where the user wants to replace a broken module with the new
one.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 678 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Usage of hook tool for detaching rear terminal blocks

The user can remove the compression terminals using an optional hook tool (Optional code:
EP-235). The user should follow the steps, as shown in the below figures.
Figure 13.5-1 Hook tool for detaching compression terminals (EP-235)
Step 1: Check whether the power not been supplied for the device. Unscrew four screws on the
terminal.
Remove the screws on
the terminals
Step 2: For detaching, insert the hook in the gap between the terminal and the rear panel by
the means of the illustration below. Check the hook thrusts into the gap between. Then pull
the terminal toward you..
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 679 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iii) Replacement of modules

Step 1: Remove a flat cable off, which has been connected between CPU and BIO modules.
Before the removal of After the removal of

the flat cable the flat cable
Step 2: Take out a module from the case, also insert the new one in the case.
Replace a module
Step 3: Put the flat cable on the edges of the CPU and BIO modules. Check the connection
between the modules is made securely by checking locks are enabled at the connector.
Make the connection between

the CPU and the BIOs
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 680 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(iv) Installation of terminals

Step 1: Attach the terminal that was detached on the rear. Note that the upper terminal† has
20 screw-numbers denoted ‘1’ to ‘20’, whereas the lower terminal has 20 screw-numbers
denoted ‘21’ to ‘40’. Never attach the upper and lower terminals in the other way. Do not confuse
adjacent terminals when the adjacent ones are detached together. Check the terminals are
plugged in tightly without any clearances.
Example of plugging loosely Example of plugging tightly
Looseness
Step 2: Fasten the upper terminal and lower terminals by using the four screws.
Fasten the screws
†The description is intended for the instruction of the “Compressed type terminal”.
Hence, the works for other types are not matched, but the user shall check all the
terminals including the above terminals are also attached securely.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 681 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(v) Attachment of the front panel

Step 1: Plug the flat cable. Check the locks are tighten firmly.
Plug the cable in as

far as a locking
sound is heard.
Step 2: Cover the front panel by tightening the four screws; then the device is ready.
Screws
CAUTION
Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the
flat cables are plugged in. If the flat cables are plugged in enough, then the module may get
damaged.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 682 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Rack mounting
(i) Mounting 1/1 case
Figure 13.6-1 shows the dimensions for 1/1 case. The mounting procedure is illustrated in
Figure 13.6-2. Remember that flange covers for the front panel is provided in the package.
Figure 13.6-1 Dimension (19” × 1/1 size in millimeters)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 683 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 13.6-2 Mounting procedures
(ii) Mounting 1/2 case and others

For example, the user can mount 1/2 case using a mounting kit (optional accessary) for the
rack. Figure 13.6-3 shows the dimension about 1/2 case; Figure 13.6-4 illustrates the IED case
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 684 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
is ready for mounting in the rack when the optional kit is attached on the IED. The procedure
to mount the IED for the rack is similar to the instruction of Figure 13.6-2. To find the other
cases and kits, see Appendixes Rack mounting and Case outline.
Figure 13.6-3 ‘1/2 case’ dimension (19” × 1/2 size in millimeters)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 685 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CP-121
Pan-head screws (M4×8)
Countersunk screws (M4×6)
Figure 13.6-4 Optional kit to mount a ‘1/2 case’

Note: This procedure is not required for flash mounting, but remember that required to
attach flange covers.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 686 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Wiring work
VT VC1 VCT44B
1
2
BO1A T6
5
6 1
Output command1
7 BO1 2
8
9 3
1CT Output command2
10 BO2 4
23
5
CB1 24 Output command3
BO3 6
11
7
12 Output command4
13 BO4 8
14 9
15 Output command5
16 BO5 10
1NCT 11 Output command6
3NCT BO6 12
2NCT 25 13 Output command7
26 BO7 14
17
CB3 18
19
20 35 Output command17
21 BO17
22 36
CB2
37 Output command18
3CT BO18 38
27
28
LAN A LAN B
2CT
CPU C11
30
(FG) 100Base-FX
Input in 110-250Vdc rated C12
(+) (–)
T3 BI3A 100Base-FX
Input command1 Contact1 1
BI1
Input command2 Contact2
2
BI2
BI3
Input command4
Contact4 4
BI4
Input command5
Contact5 5
BI5
Input command6
Contact6 6
BI6
Input command7
Contact7 7 IRIG A1
C15 Input signal
BI7 SIG External clock
B1
DISUSE A2
B2
A3
GND B3
BI31
BI32
USB
35
36
37
Engineering tools
38
Failure detected in
Automatic supervision
T7 PWS T7
Power supply in 110/250Vdc nominal 2
DD FAIL. 1
(+) (–) FAIL1 4
Switch Output signals
29
30 +5Vdc 3 Error, Alarm, or warning (N/O)
DC-DC
31
32 0V 1
Error, Alarm, or warning (N/C)
8
35
36 FAIL2 10
37
9 Error, Alarm, or warning (N/O)
38
FG 7
Error, Alarm, or warning (N/C)
E
Figure 13.7-1 Cable wiring; example for VCT44B and the other modules
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 687 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 13.7-1 illustrates example wirings. Power, Current, Voltage, communication signals,
contact signals, and signals for engineering tools are connected with the IED.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 688 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table 13.7-1 Wire termination
Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness
1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2 or

BI / BO / PWS Stripping length = 10 mm (typical)
AWG14
VCT M3.5 ring tongue with insulation 2.5 mm2 through 5.5 mm2
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue with insulation 5.5 mm2 or larger
Figure 13.7-2 Ring tongue terminations for VCT; ferrule for BI, BO
Note: Use appropriate ferrules depending on the wire thickness.
(i) Power supply module PWS

Power supply module (PWS) can supply power for the relay and control applications when
appropriate voltage is provided at Terminals 29 and 31.
Plus
DC supply
Minus
Figure 13.7-3 Terminals for PWS

Note: The error/alarm/warning signals can be also issued on the PWS (See Chapter
Automatic supervision and Chapter Technical description: Power supply module).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 689 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Transformer module VCT

Transformer module (VCT) is provided for AC analog input. The user should connect to VT and
CT referring the layout picture of VCT screw terminals.
Terminals for
voltages
Terminals for
currents
Figure 13.7-4 Terminals for VCT

Note: See Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input of
each IED instruction manual.
(iii) Binary input module BI, Binary output module BO

Terminals in compression type are provided for binary input and output signals. To know the
module type and its circuit structure, refer the IO configuration label on the IED side.
Opening holes for

wires and Terminal
screw numbers
Figure 13.7-5 Terminals for BI and BO
Note: For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module. The
user can program input and output logics using settings.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 690 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Guide for optic cable work

If optic LAN or communication modules are provided, follow the instructions of Figure 13.8-2.
For more information about the modules, see Chapter Technical description: Signal processing
and communication module of each IED instruction manual.
Notice for Optic cable handling
LASER
1
Figure 13.8-1 Class 1 Laser Warning Message

 Do not bend the cable.
 Do not twist the cable.
 Do not kink in the cable.
 Do not put and drop on the cable.
Figure 13.8-2 Fiber Optic Cable Precautions
(i) Communication to a local PC using USB

Figure 13.8-3 illustrates that the user can connect the local PC with the IED (type B receptacle)
using a USB cable. Alternatively, the user can connect the local PC with the IED by connecting
a RJ45 cable to the LAN port (if available in the IED). In Figure 13.8-4, when using the LAN
port, the user has to select the communications option, which can be found from the Main menu
in GR-TIEMS (go to “Tool” ->“Option…”; “Option” dialog will be displayed; change
communications option with the second tab – ‘Communication’).
Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool and Chapter Communication
protocol.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 691 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Figure 13.8-3 USB Communications
Figure 13.8-4 GR-TIEMs Communications Options
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 692 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
14 Commissioning and maintenance
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 693 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The IED is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the IED or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general function of IED testing practices and safety
precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring
which circuits functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Autoreclose
Metering and recording
Fault locator
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test
Tripping and reclosing circuit test
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 694 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
 Class 1 laser.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
 While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
 Before the power is on, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Transformer module is damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 Clear test settings after the test; then, set original settings again.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meters
2 AC ammeters
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 695 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1 Time counter, precision timer

1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
To examine the IED with a PC locally, connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable. The
GR-TIEMS software is required to install in the PC.
During commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe relay output
signals. The user can see the signals whether the relay operations are appropriate or not.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 696 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Test operations
The user can change IED to for Test mode by the operations on the IED front panel with
Main/Sub menus, as shown in Figure 14.3-1.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record
Monitoring
Setting
IO Setting
Control
Time
Test Test Mode Test Option S-TestFlagCancel

GOSNDBLK
GOSBUBLK
Function Test A.M.F.

THM-Test
THM-IP
UV-Test
UVS-Test
VPH-Test
TestFlag-EN
Binary Input (Slot#n) BI*F OP

SLOT*-BI01-SET
SLOT*-BI02-SET
SLOT*-BI03-SET
…..
Binary Output (Slot#n) BO*F OP

SLOT*-BO01-SET
SLOT*-BO02-SET
Simultaneous Fault SLOT*-BO03-SET
…..
Mode Change MDCTRL-EN

MDCTRL-SELRST
MDCTRL-EXERST
Signal Monitoring Term A

Term B
Term C
Information
Security Setting
Login/Logout
Figure 14.3-1 Structure of test menu
Note: The structure and the contents about sub-menus depend on the software.
14.3.1 Test for relay application

(i) Auto monitoring function (A.M.F)
Issuing alarms will be blocked when Off is set for [A.M.F]. For the content about the monitoring
function, see Chapter Automatic supervision function.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 697 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(ii) Thermal overload function test (THM-Test, THM-IP)

Setting [THM-Test]=On allows to have a test value for the pre-load current (Ip). The Ip value
is discussed in Chapter Relay application: Thermal overload function.
(iii) Over-excitation test (VPH-Test)

Setting [VPH-Test]=On allows users to have the integral state being initialized. See Chapter
Relay application: Over-excitation protection for more detail.
14.3.2 Test for BI and BO circuits

(i) Binary input circuit test (SLOT*BIxx-SET)
Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual input at a binary input circuit.
(ii) Binary output circuit test (SLOT*BOxx-SET)

Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual output at a binary input circuit.
Note: For the BI and BO test operation, see Chapter User interface: Test sub-menu,
separately.
14.3.3 Test for mode change (MDCTRL)

The function is provided to detect a test mode. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Mode control function, separately.
14.3.4 Signal monitor

The function is provided in order that the user can observe IED internal signals. For more
information, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine interface: Monitoring jacks,
separately.
14.3.5 LED light test

The user can perform LED lighting test by pressing the keys ◄ and ►. Press the both keys on
the front panel for a few seconds. If there is no problem, all LEDs will be lit.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 698 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 699 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220 Constant value 0 expressed with binary in BIT type
C1_BIT 8000011220 Constant value 1 expressed with binary in BIT type
C0_N8 2000001128 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C0_N32 220000112A Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C1_N32 220001112A Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C0_N64 230000112B Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C1_N64 230001112B Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C0_S8 2000001120 Constant value 0 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C10_S8 20000A1120 Constant value 10 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C11_S8 20000B1120 Constant value 11 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C12_S8 20000C1120 Constant value 12 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C13_S8 20000D1120 Constant value 13 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C14_S8 20000E1120 Constant value 14 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C15_S8 20000F1120 Constant value 15 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 700 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 701 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)


GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 702 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

C0_U8 3000001124 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C10_U8 30000A1124 Constant value 10 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C11_U8 30000B1124 Constant value 11 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C12_U8 30000C1124 Constant value 12 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C13_U8 30000D1124 Constant value 13 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C14_U8 30000E1124 Constant value 14 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C15_U8 30000F1124 Constant value 15 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 703 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 704 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)


BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI1F OP 3110001198 BI1 forced operate start
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 705 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
BI15F OP 311E001198 BI15 forced operate start
BI16F OP 311F001198 BI16 forced operate start
BO1F OP 3110201198 BO1 forced operate start
BO11F OP 311A201198 BO11 forced operate start
BO12F OP 311B201198 BO12 forced operate start
BO13F OP 311C201198 BO13 forced operate start
BO14F OP 311D201198 BO14 forced operate start
BO15F OP 311E201198 BO15 forced operate start
BO16F OP 311F201198 BO16 forced operate start
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 706 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 2 Case outline
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 707 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1/1 case size

1. Trihedral figure (1/1×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 708 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
2. Panel cut out figure (1/1×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
3. Panel cut out figure (1/1×19 inches) when “Ring lug type terminal” applied
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 709 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
3/4 case size

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 710 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters.

2Note: When you wish to know about the panel-cut-out-figures corresponding to rack-
attachment kits, refer to Appendix: Rack mounting.
3Note: For the size relating to “Ring type terminal” case, see other figures.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 711 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1/2 case size

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 712 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 713 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
1/3 case size

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 714 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 715 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection

1.1. Typical arrangement of each module (1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
1.2. Typical arrangement of each module (1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
1.3 Typical arrangement of each module (1/3 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 716 -
1.1. 1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
BIO3 A BO1 A C11 VCT44B VCT47B
PWS1 A
(+) 1 1 100BASE-TX 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) (Not used) V Ia-1VT

(-) 2 2 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) 4
V Ib-1VT
(-) 4 4
1
5
(+) 5 5 5
BO3(SF) V Ic-1VT
BI3 Ia-1CT 6
(-) 6 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 7
BO4(SF)
C12
BI4 8 8
Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) 12
Ia-2CT
(-) 12 12
(+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7 14
Ib-2CT
(-) 14 14
(+) 15 15
C13 15
BI8 BO8 16
Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16
17 17
BO9 18
Ia-3CT
18
21 21 19
BO1(F) BO10 20
Ib-3CT
22 22
23 23 21
BO2(F) BO11 22
Ic-3CT
24 24 C14
25 25 23
BO3(F) BO12 24
In-1NCT
26 26
27 27 25
BO4(F) BO13 26
In-2NCT
28 28
(+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 28
In-3NCT
30 30
(-) 31 31 31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 30 30
32 32
35 IRIG-B000
33 33
36 •A1
BO7 BO16
34 34 •B1• SIG
37 A2 DISUSE
38 35 35
•B2
37 BO17
• DISUSE
36
BO8
36 •A3
37
38
•B3• GND
BO18
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0) GRT#3 (1.0)
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FG1 ●FGA ●FG2 ●E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
- 717 -
1.2. 1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B VCT48B
PWS1 A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 100BASE-TX 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) BI1 (Not used) Va-1VT

(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2 Vb-1VT
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF) BI3 Ia-1CT Vc-1VT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 7
BO4(SF) BI4
C12
BI4 8 (-) 8 8
Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) BI5 Ic-1CT Va-2VT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) BI6 Ia-2CT Vb-2VT
(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7 BI7 Ib-2CT Vc-2VT

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14 14
(+) 15 15 (+) 15
C13 15
BI8 BO8 BI8 Ic-2CT

(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17 17
BO9 BI9 Ia-3CT Ia-4CT
18 (-) 18 18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19 19
BO1(F) BO10 BI10 Ib-3CT Ib-4CT

22 22 (-) 22 20 20
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21 21
BO2(F) BO11 BI11 Ic-3CT Ic-4CT

24 24 (-) 24 C14 22 22
25 25 (+) 25 23 23
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 In-1NCT Ia-5CT

26 26 (-) 26 24 24
27 27 (+) 27 25 25
BO4(F) BO13 BI13 In-2NCT Ib-5CT

28 28 (-) 28 26 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 BI14 In-3NCT Ic-5CT
30 30 (-) 30 28 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 32 (-) 32 30 30
35 IRIG-B000
33 33 (+) 33
36 BI16 •A1
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34 •B1• SIG
37 A2 DISUSE
(+) 35
38 35 35
•B2
37 BO17 BI17 • DISUSE
(-) 36
36
BO8
36 (+) 37
•A3
37
38 BI18
•B3• GND
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0) GRT#5 (1.0)
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FG1 ●FGA ●FG2 ●E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
- 718 -
1.3. 1/3 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal
[IO#1] [VCT#1]
T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A C11 VCT35B
(+) 1 100BASE-FX 1
2 BI1 2
V
(-) 2
4
(+) 3 TX
3
FAIL1 BI2
(-) 4
1
(+) 5 RX
BI3
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 100BASE-FX
9 (-) 8 Ia-1CT
FAIL2 8
7 (+) 9
9
BI5 TX
(-) 10 Ib-1CT
10
(+) 11
11
BI6 RX
(-) 12 Ic-1CT
12
(+) 13
13
BI7
(-) 14 Ia-2CT
14
(+) 15
C13
15
BI8
(-) 16 16
Ib-2CT
17
Ic-2CT
18
21
BO1(F)
22
23
BO2(F)
24 C14
25
BO3(F)
26
27
BO4(F)
28
(+) 29
29
30
DC/DC BO5(F)
30
(-) 31 31 C15
32 BO6(F) 20
32
35
33
36
BO7
34
37 ●FG1
38 35
37
36
BO8
38
GRT#1 (2.1)
●FG ●FGA ●E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
- 719 -
[IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B
PWS1 A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 100BASE-TX 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) BI1 V

(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2
(-) 4 4 (-) 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF) BI3 Ia-1CT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF) BI4 Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) BI5 Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11

(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7 BI7 Ib-2CT

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14
(+) 15 15 (+) 15
C13 15
Remote
BI8 BO8 BI8 communication Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
RX
BO9 BI9 Ia-3CT
18 (-) 18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19
TX
BO1(F) BO10 BI10 Ib-3CT
22 22 (-) 22 20
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F) BO11 BI11 Ic-3CT

24 24 (-) 24 C14 22
25 25 (+) 25 23
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 In-1NCT

26 26 (-) 26 24
27 27 (+) 27 25

28 28 (-) 28 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 BI14 In-3NCT
30 30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 32 (-) 32 30
35 (+) 33
33 33
36 BI16
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
37
(+) 35
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRT#2 (1.0)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
- 720 -
[IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B
100BASE-FX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) BI1 V

(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 (+) 3 TX
3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2
(-) 4 4 (-) 4
1
(+) 5 (+) 5 RX 5
5
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF) BI4 Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 100BASE-FX 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) BI5 Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10 TX 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11

(-) 12 12 (-) 12 RX 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7 BI7 Ib-2CT

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14
(+) 15 15 (+) 15
C13 15
Remote
BI8 BO8 BI8 communication Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BI9 RX
BO9 (-) 18 18
Ia-3CT
18
21 21 (+) 21 19
BI10 TX
BO1(F) BO10 (-) 22 20
Ib-3CT
22 22
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F) BO11 BI11 Ic-3CT

24 24 (-) 24 C14 22
Remote
25 25 (+) 25 23
communication
26 26 (-) 26 24
(+) 27 RX 25
27 27
28 28 (-) 28 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 TX 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 BI14 In-3NCT
30 30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 (-) 32 30
32
35 (+) 33
33 33
36 BI16
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
37
(+) 35
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRT#2 (1.0)
●FG ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
- 721 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Typical external connection diagram for Compression-type terminal

VCT35B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A for Model 1
TB1-7
8
9
10
11
CT 12
CB 1
VT BI1
2
3
1 BI2 4
BO1 2 Semi-fast BO
5
3 BI3 6
BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
7
CB 5 BI4 8
BO3 6 Semi-fast BO
CT 13 9
14 7
BI5 10
15 BO4 Semi-fast BO
8
16 11
17 9
BI6 12
18 BO5 Semi-fast BO
10
13
11
BI7 14
BO6 12 Semi-fast BO
1 13 15
2 BO7 BI8 16
14
20 15
(FG) 21
BO8 16 BO1 Fast BO
BIO3A 22
1 17
23
2 BI1 BO9 18 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24
3 21
25
4 BI2 BO10 22 BO3 Fast BO
26
5 23
BO11 27
6 BI3 24 BO4 Fast BO
28
7 25
29
BO12 26
8 BI4 BO5 Fast BO
30
9 27
31
BO13 28
10 BI5 BO6 Fast BO
32
11 29
33
BO14 30
12 BI6 BO7 34
31
13
BO15 32 35
14 BI7 36
33
15 BO16 37
34 BO8
16 BI8
35
17 38
BO17 36
Programmable BI 18 BI9
37
21 BI1A BO18 38
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
COM-B A2
28 BI13 B2 RS485 I/F
29 A3
COM-0V B3 (option)
30 BI14 RJ45
31 Ethernet LAN I/F (option)
BI15 COM
32 Optic I/F (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2
36 BI17 A3 IRIG-B (option)
GND B3
37
38 BI18
PWS
1A
RELAY 2
1
FAIL.DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
31 FAIL RELAY FAILURE 1
SUPPLY (-) DC-DC 1
32 0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
FG 7
E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 722 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Typical external connection diagram for Compression-type terminal

VCT44B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A for Model 2
TB1-5
6
7
8
9
CT 10
23
24
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
26
1
17 BI1
2
18
19 3
20 1 BI2 4
21 BO1 Semi-fast BO
2 5
22
3 BI3 6
BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
27 7
5 BI4
28 8
BO3 6 Semi-fast BO
9
1 7
BI5 10
2 BO4 Semi-fast BO
8
11
9
CT BI6 12
BO5 Semi-fast BO
10
13
11
BI7 14
20 BO6 12 Semi-fast BO
(FG) 15
13
BO7 BI8 16
1 14
2 BI1 15
21
3 BO8 16
BIO3A BO1 Fast BO
22
4 BI2 17
23
BO9 18
5 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24
6 BI3 21
BO10 25
7 22 BO3 Fast BO
26
BI4 23
8 27
BO11 24
9 BO4 Fast BO
28
25
10 BI5 29
BO12 26
11 BO5 Fast BO
30
27
12 BI6 31
BO13 28 BO6 Fast BO
13 32
29
14 BI7 33
BO14 30
15 BO7 34
31
16 BI8 BO15 35
32
17 36
33
Programmable BI 18 BI9 BO16 37
34 BO8
21 BI1A
35
22 BI10 BO17 38
36
23
37
24 BI11 BO18 38
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
COM-B A2
28 BI13 B2 RS485 I/F
29 COM-0V A3 (option)
B3
30 BI14 RJ45
31 Ethernet LAN I/F (option)
BI15 COM
32 Optic I/F (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2
36 BI17 A3 IRIG-B (option)
GND B3
37
38 BI18
PWS
1A
RELAY 2
1
FAIL.DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY (-) DC-DC 1
32 0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
FG 7
E
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 723 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS

# Document names Pages Provisions
MICS Model implementation conformance statement 725 Edition 1
PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement 750 Edition 1
PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing 757 Edition 1
TICS Tissues conformance statement 774 Edition 1
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 724 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Edition 1)
IEC61850 Edition 1 Model Implementation

Conformance Statement (MICS)
GRT200 (Transformer protection IED)
(Original document#: 6F2S1895 Ver. 0.0)
- 725 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
The GRT200 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes GRT200 Nodes GRT200
L: System Logical Nodes GSAL ---
LPHD Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
Common Logical Node Yes IARC ---
LLN0 Yes IHMI ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions ITCI ---
PDIF Yes ITMI ---
PDIR --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDIS --- ANCR ---
PDOP --- ARCO ---
PDUP --- ATCC ---
PFRC Yes AVCO ---
PHAR Yes M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PHIZ --- MDIF ---
PIOC --- MHAI ---
PMRI --- MHAN ---
PMSS --- MMTR ---
POPE --- MMXN ---
PPAM --- MMXU Yes
PSCH --- MSQI Yes
PSDE --- MSTA ---
PTEF --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOC Yes SARC ---
PTOF Yes SIMG ---
PTOV Yes SIML ---
PTRC Yes SPDC ---
PTTR Yes X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUC --- XCBR Yes
PTUV Yes XSWI ---
PUPF --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PTUF Yes TCTR ---
PVOC --- TVTR ---
PVPH Yes Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
PZSU --- YEFN ---
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YLTC ---
RDRE Yes YPSH ---
RADR --- YPTR ---
RBDR --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
RDRS --- ZAXN ---
RBRF --- ZBAT ---
RDIR --- ZCAB ---
RFLO --- ZCAP ---
RPSB --- ZCON ---
RREC --- ZGEN ---
RSYN --- ZGIL ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZLIN ---
CALH Yes ZMOT ---
CCGR --- ZREA ---
CILO Yes ZRRC ---
CPOW --- ZSAR ---
CSWI --- ZTCF ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZTCR ---
GAPC Yes
GGIO Yes
(MICS Ed.1)
- 726 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRT200
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACD Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV ---
SAV ---
WYE Yes
DEL ---
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC ---
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING ---
Analogue settings
ASG ---
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL ---
LPL ---
CSD ---
- 727 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRT200
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and 728pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
- 728 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
PDIF class
Data
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start O Y
Str2 ACD Start O Y
Op1 ACT Operate T M Y
TmAst CSD Active curve charactristic O N
Measured Values
DifAClc WYE Differential Current O Y
RstA WYE Restraint Current O Y
Settings
LinCapac ASG Line capacitance (for load currents) O N
LoSet ING Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
HiSet ING High operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
RstMod ING Restraint Mode O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
PFRC class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O N
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value df/dt O N
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time Time O N
- 729 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
PHAR class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Settings
HarRst ING Number of harmonic restrained O N
PhStr ASG Start Value O N
PhStop ASG Stop Value O N
PTOC class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Str7 ACD Start M Y
Str8 ACD Start M Y
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O N
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
- 730 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTOF class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOV class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Op1 ACT Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
- 731 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTRC class
Data
Status Information
Tr1 ACT Trip C Y
Tr2 ACT Trip C Y
Tr3 ACT Trip C Y
Tr4 ACT Trip C Y
Tr5 ACT Trip C Y
Tr6 ACT Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
PTTR class
Data
Measured Values
Amp MV Current for thermal load model O N
Tmp MV Temperature for thermal load O N
TmpRl MV Relation between temperature and max. temperature O N
LodRsvAlm MV Load reserve to alarm O N
LodRsvTr MV Load reserve to trip O N
AgeRat MV Ageing rate O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start O Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
AlmThm ACT Thermal Alarm O Y
TmTmpSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmTmpCrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement O N
TmACrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model O N
TmpMax ASG Maximum allowed temperature O N
ConsTms ING Time constant of the thermal model O N
AlmVal ASG Alarm Value O N
- 732 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTUV class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Settings
PTUF class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Settings
- 733 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
PVPH class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
VHzSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
VHzCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Volts per herts Start Value O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
- 734 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
CILO class
Data
Status Information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y
EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y
CSWI class
Data
Loc SPS Local operation O Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch, general M Y
PosA DPC Switch L1 O N
PosB DPC Switch L2 O N
PosC DPC Switch L3 O N
OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N
OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N
- 735 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
GAPC class
Data
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic operation O N
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Str7 ACD Start M Y
Str8 ACD Start M Y
Setting
- 736 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
GGIO class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
- 737 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O N
PhV1 WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
A1 WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
- 738 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA1 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
SeqV1 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
SeqV2 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
- 739 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
XCBR class
Data
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N
- 740 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRT200
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
- 741 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
- 742 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
- 743 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
MV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
- 744 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
- 745 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B|C|… O N
Services
- 746 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
- 747 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(MICS Ed.1)
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
- 748 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
(This page is intentionally blank)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 749 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Editon1)
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement

for GR200 series IED
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 750 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Ed.1)
Introduction
The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the
IEC 61850 interface in <device>” version 1.6 published by UCA International Users Group in
Nov 19, 2015.
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the
IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version
equal to or upper than F (G2M850-01-F). Each tables of this document is specified in IEC
61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance statement”.
— ASCI basic conformance statement,
— ACSI models conformance statement,
— ACSI service conformance statement
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
Note: The IED does not support IEC 61850 Edition 2 (Ed2) .
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 751 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Ed.1)
ASCI basic conformance statement
The basic conformance statement is defined in Table A.1.
Table A.1 – Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
Client-Server roles
Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B11  Y
ASSOCIATION)
Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B12 N 
ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
Client/Subscrib
er side is only
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y
GOOSE and
SNTP.
Deprecated
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used
Ed2
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)

B31 Publisher side  Y
B32 Subscriber side Y 
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side  N
B42 Subscriber side N 
- = not applicable
Y = supported
N or empty = not supported
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 752 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Ed.1)
ACSI models conformance statement
The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table A.2.
Table A.2 – ACSI models conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported
M1 Logical device N Y
M2 Logical node N Y
M3 Data N Y
M4 Data set N Y
M5 Substitution N N
M6 Setting group control N Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control N Y
M7-1 sequence-number N Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M7-4 data-set-name N Y
M7-5 data-reference N Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow N Y
M7-7 entryID N Y
M7-8 BufTm N Y
M7-9 IntgPd N Y
M7-10 GI N Y
M7-11 conf-revision N Y
M8 Unbuffered report control N Y
M8-1 sequence-number N Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M8-4 data-set-name N Y
M8-5 data-reference N Y
M8-6 BufTm N Y
M8-7 IntgPd N Y
M8-8 GI N Y
M8-8 conf-revision N Y
Logging N N
M9 Log control N N
M9-1 IntgPd N N
M10 Log N N
M11 Control N Y
M17 File Transfer N Y
M18 Application Association N Y
M19 GOOSE Control Block N Y
M20 Sampled Value Control Block N N
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE Y Y
M13 GSSE N N Deprecated Ed2
If SVC (41/42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC N N
M15 Unicast SVC N N
For all IEDs
SNTP client functions
M16 Time Y N
are supported.
Y = service is supported
N or empty = service is not supported
Note: The IED does not support Ed2 (Edition 2) here.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 753 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Ed.1)
ACSI service conformance statement
The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table A.3 (depending on the statements
in Table A.1).
Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(1/3)
Ed Services AA: Client Server Comments
TP/MC (C) (S)
Server
S1 1 GetServerDirectory (LOGICAL-DEVICE) TP N Y
Application association
S2 1 Associate TP N Y
S3 1 Abort TP N Y
S4 1 Release TP N Y
Logical device
S5 1 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP N Y
Logical node
S6 1 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP N Y
S7 1 GetAllDataValues TP N Y
Data
S8 1 GetDataValues TP N Y
S9 1 SetDataValues TP N Y
S10 1 GetDataDirectory TP N Y
S11 1 GetDataDefinition TP N Y
Data set
S12 1 GetDataSetValues TP N Y
S13 1 SetDataSetValues TP N N
S14 1 CreateDataSet TP N N
S15 1 DeleteDataSet TP N N
S16 1 GetDataSetDirectory TP N Y
Substitution
S17 1 SetDataValues TP N N
Setting group control

S18 1 SelectActiveSG TP N Y
S19 1 SelectEditSG TP N N
S20 1 SetSGValues TP N N
S21 1 ConfirmEditSGValues TP N N
S22 1 GetSGValues TP N N
S23 1 GetSGCBValues TP N Y
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 754 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Ed.1)

Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 1 Report TP N Y
S24-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S24-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S24- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S25 1 GetBRCBValues TP N Y
S26 1 SetBRCBValues TP N Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 1 Report TP N Y
S27-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S27-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S27- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S28 1 GetURCBValues TP N Y
S29 1 SetURCBValues TP N Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 1 GetLCBValues TP N N
S31 1 SetLCBValues TP N N
Log
S32 1 QueryLogByTime TP N N
S33 1 QueryLogAfter TP N N
S34 1 GetLogStatusValues TP N N
Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE
S35 1 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y Y
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S36 1 GetGoReference TP N N
S37 1 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP N N
S38 1 GetGoCBValues TP N Y
S39 1 SetGoCBValues TP N Y
GSSE
S40 1 SendGSSEMessage MC N N Deprecated in Ed2
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S41 1 GetReference TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S42 1 GetGSSEElementNumber TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S43 1 GetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S44 1 SetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 755 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PICS Ed.1)

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SV
S45 1 SendMSVMessage MC N N
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1 GetMSVCBValues TP N N
S47 1 SetMSVCBValues TP N N
Unicast SV
S48 1 SendUSVMessage TP N N
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1 GetUSVCBValues TP N N
S50 1 SetUSVCBValues TP N N
Control
S51 1 Select N Y
S52 1 SelectWithValue TP N Y
S53 1 Cancel TP N Y
S54 1 Operate TP N Y
S55 1 CommandTermination TP N Y
S56 1 TimeActivatedOperate TP N N
File transfer
S57 1 GetFile TP N Y
S58 1 SetFile TP N N
S59 1 DeleteFile TP N N
S60 1 GetFileAttributeValues TP N Y
S61 1 GetServerDirectory (FILE-SYSTEM) TP N Y
Time
T1 1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds
T2 1 Time accuracy of internal clock T1 T0 (10ms)
T1 (1ms)
T2 (100µs)
T3 (25µs)
T4 (4µs)
T5 (1µs)
T3 1 Supported TimeStamp resolution 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 756 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Edition 1)
Protocol implementation extra information

for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850
communication interface in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “PIXIT template extracted from server test
procedures version 1.0 and updated according to TPCL version 1.2.6” published by
UCA International Using Group.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 757 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
1. Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of
the IEC 61850 interface in G2 Series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A(G2M850-02-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10. The PIXIT entries contain information which is not available in
the PICS, MICS, TICS documents or SCL file.
Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850-
10.
Note: The IED does not support IEC 61850 Edition 2 (Ed2) .
2. CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
3. PIXIT FOR DOCUMENTATION

ID Ed Description Value / Clarification
How to expose required firmware versions not
Do1 2 NA
present in the data model
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 758 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
4. PIXIT FOR ASSOCIATION MODEL
Maximum number of clients that can set-up an
As1 1 6
association simultaneously
TCP_KEEPALIVE value. Configurable from 1 to 20 seconds

As2 1,2
The recommended range is 1..20s (default is 20 seconds)
From 10 to 30 seconds
As3 1,2 Lost connection detection time
(TCP_KEEPALIVE + 10sec.)
As4 - Authentication is not supported yet N
Transport selector N
Session selector N
What association parameters are necessary for
As5 1,2 Presentation selector N
successful association
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
If association parameters are necessary for

As6 1,2 N.A.
association, describe the correct values e.g.
Max MMS PDU size 16384

What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU Min MMS PDU size Not
As7 1,2
size limited. It depends
on a request.
Typically about 130 seconds
Please check LCD

Monitoring -> Communication
What is the maximum start up time after a
As8 1,2 -> 61850STAT as “Active”
power supply interrupt
(Note) The startup time depends
on the type of IED and
Its configuration/setting.
Does this device function only as test equipment?

(test equipment need not have a non-volatile
As9 1,2 N
configuration; but it cannot be part of the
substation automation system)
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 759 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
5. PIXIT FOR SERVER MODEL
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N Overflow
Y* OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are Y* Failure
Sr1 1,2
supported (can be set by server) N OldData
N Inconsistent
Y* Inaccurate(OnlyHz)
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
* Supports only for GBU Model
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
Y Oscillatory
Which status value (ST) quality bits are Y Failure
Sr2 1,2 supported Y OldData
(can be set by server) Y Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
What is the maximum number of data object
Sr3 - Deprecated
references in one GetDataValues request
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr4 - Deprecated
references in one SetDataValues request
On Y
Blocked N
Sr5 1 Which Mode values are supported Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
<additional items>
Front-to-back order. This might
The order of interpretation of write requests influence on write request
involving a list of variables. involving RptEna and other
variables in the same RCB.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 760 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
6. PIXIT for Data set model
Not limited by an internal
configuration parameter.
This IED does not have

What is the maximum number of data elements
Ds1 1 CreateDataSet service. But any
in one data set (compare ICD setting)
DataSet can be defined by using
engineering tool. The maximum
number depends on the memory
size of IED.
How many persistent data sets can be created by
Ds2 1 one or more clients N.A.
(this number includes predefined datasets)
How many non-persistent data sets can be
Ds3 1 N.A.
created by one or more clients
7. PIXIT FOR SUBSTITUTION MODEL

Not applicable
8. PIXIT FOR SETTING GROUP CONTROL MODEL

What is the number of supported setting groups 8
Sg1 1
for each logical device
Just SelectActiveSG service will be
supported according to PICS.
When an IED receives correct

SelectActiveSG request, the IED
returns Response+ within 10
seconds. And the ActSG and
LActTm variable are updated
What is the effect of when and how the non-
within 10 seconds after the
Sg2 1,2 volatile storage is updated
Response+. (These times are
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4)
typical values, and they depend on
IED types and its
configurations/settings.)
After changing setting group

number with LED panel, you can
see new setting group with
GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 1 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group N.A.
What happens if the association is lost while
Sg4 1 N.A.
editing a setting group
Sg5 1 Is EditSG value 0 allowed N.A.
When ResvTms is not present how long is an edit

Sg6 2 N.A.
setting group locked
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 761 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model
The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
Rp1 1
quality change Y
data update Y
The supported optional fields are sequence-numberY
general interrogation Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y data-
set-name Y data-
Rp2 1 reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y conf-
rev Y
segmentation Y
Can the server send segmented reports
(when not supported it is allowed to refuse an
Rp3 1,2 association with a smaller than minimum PDU Y
size)
Mechanism on second internal data change

notification of the same analogue data value Send report immediately
Rp4 1,2 within buffer period (Compare IEC 61850-7-2
$14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach

Rp5 1 (compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003 $14.2.1) Each URCB is visible to all clients
Rp6 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 762 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model (continued)
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how For example, LLN0$ST$Health
many reports can be buffered can be stored 408 events.
Rp7 1,2
Pre-configured RCB attributes that are

Rp8 - dynamic, compare SCL report settings Deprecated
May the reported data set contain:

- structured data objects Y
Rp9 1 - data attributes Y
What is the scan cycle for binary events More than 1.6 milliseconds
Rp10 1,2
Is this fixed, configurable Configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a
Rp11 1 specific client in the SCL N
After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev Restored from original
restored from the original configuration or configuration
Rp12 2 retained prior to restart
Does the server accepts any client to

configure/enable a BRCB with ResvTms=‐1? N
Rp13 1,2 What fields are used to do the identification? AP‐Title N
AE‐Qualifier N
<other field> N
When BRCB.ResvTms is exposed, what is
default value for BRCB.ResvTms if client does N/A
not write (must be > 0)
Rp14 2 Or
When BRCB.ResvTms is not exposed, what is

the internal reservation time (must be >= 0) 60 seconds
<additional items>
Is it supported to change LLN0.Mod online? N
10. PIXIT FOR LOGGING MODEL
Not applicable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 763 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
11. PIXIT FOR GOOSE PUBLISH MODEL
Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the
Gp1 1,2 N
published GOOSE be set
What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish If the configuration is incorrect,
Gp2 1
configuration is incorrect the GOOSE isn’t published.
Published FCD supported common data classes All CDC/data types can be
Gp3 1,2
are published.
What is the slow retransmission time 60 seconds with TAL = 120sec.

Gp4 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
What is the fastest retransmission time 10 milli-sec. with TAL=30 milli-sec.

Gp5 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by Deprecated

Gp6 -
using SetGoCBValues(GoEna) See PICS - SetGoCBValues
The device starts sending

Gp7 1,2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart GOOSE from stNum=1 and
sqNum=1.
May the GOOSE data set contain:

Gp8 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y
Y
Does Server or ICT refuse GOOSE payload
Gp9 1,2 Server Refuses the
dataset length greater than SCSM supports?
Configuration.
<additional items>
1,2 Is the DUT a test equipment N
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 764 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL
What elements of a subscribed GOOSE Y destination MAC address
message are checked to decide the message is = as configured
valid and the allData values are accepted? If Y APPID
yes, describe the conditions. Y gocbRef
N timeAllowedtoLive
Notes: N datSet
the VLAN tag may be removed by a Y goID
ethernet switch and shall not be =as configured
checked N t
Gs1 1,2
the simulation flag shall always be N stNum
checked (Ed2) Y sqNum
Y simulation / test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
N out-of-order dataset
members
When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost [message does not arrive prior to
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last TAL]
received GOOSE message) GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE (=1100 0000
Gs2 1,2 0000 0).
GOOSE status change is accepted.

The behavior can be changed by
modifying PLC logic.
What is the behaviour when one or more [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
subscribed GOOSE messages isn’t received or No fail will be detected.
syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE)
[sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
1000 0). After receiving message
with correct sqNum order, the
Gs3 1,2 quality information is set to
GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
You can assign the information to

any data attribute using our
configuration tool.
GOOSE status change is ignored

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 765 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
What is the behaviour when a subscribed Refer to Gs3
Gs4 1,2 GOOSE message is out-of-order
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE subscribe quality

GOOSE message is duplicated information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
Gs5 1,2 1000 0).
GOOSE status change is accepted.

Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages Y, with the VLAN tag
Gs6 1 with/without the VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
May the GOOSE data set contain:
Gs7 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes N
Subscribed FCD supported common data [Supported CDC]
classes are All, excepts measurand CDC (MV,
CMV, SAV, WYE, DEL, SEQ, HMV,
HWYE and HDEL)
[Supported data type]

Boolean
BitString
Integer
Unsigned Integer
Gs8 1,2
Other types
(TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will
be ignored by IED.
(NOTE)
But each data size shall be less
than 32 bits.
Dataset including measurand
CDC listed above cannot be
subscribed.
Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) / GOOSE subscribe quality

simulation=T (Ed2) accepted in test/simulation information will become
mode QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100
0000 0001 0).
Gs9 1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 766 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
Gs10 1,2 Max number of dataset members 64
<additional items>
Are subscribed GOOSE with ndsCom=T GOOSE subscribe quality
Accepted. information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0).
1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.
13. PIXIT for GOOSE performance

Performance class P1(Ed.2) for
Gf1 1,2 System/LLN0$GO$goST
P3(Ed.2) for all other GOOSE
GOOSE ping-pong processing method Scan cycle based
Gf2 1,2
Application logic scan cycle (ms) Max. …. 200ms

Gf3 1,2
Min. 1.38ms in 60Hz
Maximum number of data attributes in The dataset for
GOOSE dataset (value and quality has to be System/LLN0$GO$goST is fixed,
counted as separate attributes) and it contains 32 data attributes.
All other dataset for GOOSE can be

configurable, and there is no
Gf4 1 particular limitation about the
maximum number of data
attributes. However, the dataset
definition shares the same dynamic
memory area as other data model
definitions such as LN, RCB, etc., so
it is affected by them.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 767 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL
What control models are supported DOns: Y
(compare ICD file enums for Ed2) SBOns: Y
Ct1 - DOes: Y
SBOes: Y
Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or Fixed
Ct2 1,2 dynamic
Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare Deprecated
Ct3 - PICS or SCL)
Is “operate-many” supported (compare Deprecated
Ct4 - sboClass)
Will the DUT activate the control output when Y
the test attribute is set in the SelectWithValue
Ct5 1 and/or Operate request (when N test procedure
Ctl2 is applicable)
What are the conditions for the time (T) Deprecated

attribute in the SelectWithValue and/or
Ct6 - Operate request
Is pulse configuration supported (compare Deprecated

Ct7 - pulseConfig)
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the Y synchrocheck

check conditions are set Y interlock-check
Both bits are checked.
(NOTE) The result of Opening

operation (ctval = F) is
Ct8 1 not Influenced by
SynchroCheck bit.
Is this behaviour fixed, configurable, online This behavior is fixed.

changeable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 768 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued)
Which additional cause diagnosis are Y Unknown
supported Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
Y Blocked-by-synchrocheck
Y Command-already-in-execution
Y Blocked-by-health
Y 1-of-n-control
Y Abortion-by-cancel
Y Time-limit-over
Y Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-not-selected
Ct9 1,2
Edition 1 specific values:
Y Parameter-change-in-execution
Edition 2 specific values:

Y Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
Y Inconsistent-parameters
Y Locked-by-other-client
N Parameter-change-in-execution*
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Set orCat with unsupported value.
SelectWithValue request See below “Which origin categories
Ct10 1,2
are supported?”
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Send SELECT request to the control
Ct11 1,2 Select request object which is not mapped to
control application.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 769 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with DOns, SBOns, DOes:
Operate request [Example1]
Set orCat as unsupported value
-> Cause AddCause as “Not-
supported(1)”
[Example2]
Set ctlCat same as stVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Position-
reached(5)”
Ct12 1,2
SBOes: (Only Ed1)
Same as above. Or,
[Example3]
Set Oper parameters as different
parameter from the parameter of
SelectWithVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Parameter-
change-in-execution (6)”
Which origin categories are supported / N bay-control

accepted Y station-control
Y remote-control
N automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Ct13 1,2 Y automatic-remote
N maintenance
N process
maintenance (7): N
process (8): N
What happens if the orCat value is not DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes:
Ct14 1,2 supported or invalid “test-not-ok” IED respond
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue / DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes: N

Operate with the same control value as the
current status value
Ct15 1,2
Is this behaviour configurable Fixed

Does the IED accept a select/operate on the DOns: N
same control object from 2 different clients at SBOns: N
the same time DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct16 1,2
Note:
Commands are refused until
the new position is not reached
or a timeout does not occur.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 770 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: N
from the same client when the control object is SBOes: N
Ct17 1 already selected (Tissue #334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and
Ct18 1,2 during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate Operate
step
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off Deprecated

Ct19 - or [On-]Blocked (Compare PIXIT-Sr5)
Does the IED support local / remote operation

Ct20 1,2 Y
Does the IED send an InformationReport with SBOns: N
Ct21 1,2 LastApplError as part of the Operate response- DOns: N
for control with normal security
How to force a “parameter-change-in-
Ct22 2 execution” N.A.
How many SBOns/SBOes control objects can be SBOns: n=1

Ct23 1,2 selected at the same time? SBOes: n=1
Can a controllable object be forced to keep its Y

old state e.g. Internal Controllable Objects may Need PLC Logic customization.
Ct24 1,2 not be accessible to force this, whereas a switch
like Circuit Breaker outside the DUT can?
When CDC=DPC is supported, is it possible to

have DPC (Controllable Double Point) go to the
Ct25 1,2 Y
intermediate state? (00)
Name a DOes point (if any) with a finite The timeout time is setting.
operate timeout and specify the timeout One example,
Ct26 1,2 (in milliseconds) DPSY01-RST
Default value is 300[ms]
(10[ms]-1000[ms])
Does the IED support control objects with DOns: N
external signals? SBOns: N
Ct27 2 DOes: N
SBOes: N
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 771 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
15. PIXIT FOR TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION MODEL
What time quality bits are supported (may be Y LeapSecondsKnown
set by the IED) N ClockFailure
Tm1 1 Y ClockNotSynchronized
Describe the behaviour when the time server(s) On one time server: IED tries to
ceases to respond synchronize with another time
server.
On all time servers:

Tm2 1,2 The quality attribute
“ClockNotSynchronized” will be set
to TRUE.
What is the time server lost detection time The lost detection time depends on
the network condition.
How long does it take to take over the new time 10 seconds
Tm3 1,2 from time server
Tm4 1,2 When is the time quality bit “ClockFailure” set RTC is out-of-order
When is the time quality bit “Clock not It depends on the condition of
Tm5 1,2 Synchronized” set synchronization. Typically from 1 to
10 minutes.
Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to Deprecated
Tm6 - the configured scan cycle
Does the device support time zone and daylight Yes for both.
Tm7 1
saving
Which attributes of the SNTP response packet Y Leap indicator not equal
are validated to 3?
N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is
equal to value sent by the
SNTP client as Transmit
Tm8 1,2
Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields
are checked for
reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
Do the COMTRADE files have local time or UTC
Tm9 1,2 UTC time and is this configurable Not Configurable
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 772 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(PIXIT Ed.1)
16. PIXIT FOR FILE TRANSFER MODEL

What is structure of files and directories Support tree structure
Where are the COMTRADE files stored “/COMTRADE/” directory
(NOTE)
Ft1 1 At root directory in IED, the
directory “/COMTRADE/” is
Hidden. Therefore a client
shall directly access this
directory.
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are Not zipped
included in each zip file
Directory names are separated from the file
Ft2 1,2 name by “/”
The maximum file name size including path
Ft3 1 (recommended 64 chars) 64 chars
Ft4 1,2 Are directory/file name case sensitive N

Maximum file size for SetFile Not limited by implementation or
Ft5 1,2 configuration. It depends on
available memory.
Is the requested file path included in the MMS N
Ft6 1 fileDirectory respond file name (Ed2: always complete path)
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory

Ft7 1 request No
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same

Ft8 1,2 time Y
Ft9 1,2 Which files can be deleted N.A.
17. PIXIT FOR SERVICE TRACKING MODEL

Which ACSI services are tracked by
Tr1 2 LTRK.GenTrk N.A
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 773 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(TICS Edition 1)
IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement

(TICS) of the IEC 61850
communication interface in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “TISSUES Implementation Conformance

Statement for the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED” published by KEMA
consulting with document number “2008-v0.2”.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 774 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(TICS Ed.1)
1. Introduction
According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a
conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01
series version upper than F (G2M850-01-F).
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. This document
describes the IEC 61850 Edition 1 (Ed1).
Note that the IED does not support Edition 2 (Ed2).
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 775 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(TICS Ed.1)
2. Mandatory Intop Tissues
During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:
• green Tissues with the category “IntOp” are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1
• Tissues with the category “Ed.2” Tissues should not be implemented.
Below table gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.
Tissue Description
Part Y/n.a.
Nr Implemented
116 GetNameList with empty response? Y
8-1 165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues Y
183 GetNameList error handling Y
7-4 None
28 Definition of APC n.a.
54 Point def xVal, not cVal n.a.
55 Ineut = Ires ? n.a.
7-3 60 Services missing in tables Y
63 mag in CDC CMV Y
219 operTm in ACT n.a.
270 WYE and DEL rms values Y
30 control parameter T Y
31 Typo n.a.
32 Typo in syntax n.a.
35 Typo Syntax Control time n.a.
36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing n.a.
37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type Y
39 Add DstAddr to GoCB Y
40 GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID” Y
41 GsCB “AppID” to “GsID” n.a.
42 SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp" n.a.
43 Control "T" semantic Y
44 AddCause - Object not sel n.a.
45 Missing AddCauses (neg range) Y
46 Synchro check cancel n.a.
7-2 47 "." in LD Name? Y
49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
50 LNName start with number? Y
51 ARRAY [0..num] missing n.a.
52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum Y
53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV n.a.
151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. Y
166 DataRef attribute in Log n.a.
185 Logging - Integrity periode n.a.
189 SV Format n.a.
190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of #453) Y
234 New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit integer) n.a.
275 Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453) Y
278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) Y
1 Syntax Y
5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y
8 SIUnit enumeration for W n.a.
Part 6 10 Base type for bitstring usage Y
17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y
169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 Y
534 Dbpos Y
Note: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other
technical tissues in the table are mandatory if applicable.
Note: Editorial tissues are marked as “n.a.”.
Note: Final proposal on tissue 45 is not defined yet
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 776 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
(TICS Ed.1)
3. Optional IntOp Tissues
After the approval of the server conformance test procedures version 2.2, the following IntOp
tissues were added or changed. It is optional to implement these tissues.
Tissue Implemented
Part Description
Nr Y/N/n.a.
8-1 246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError N
8-1 545 Skip file directories with no files Y
7-2 333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB n.a.
7-2 453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues N
6 245 Attribute RptId in SCL N
6 529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown n.a.
3. Other Implemented Tissues
Tissue Implemented
Part Description
Nr Y/N/n.a.
109 GOOSE, GSE, SV Addresses Y
118 File directory Y
8-1
121 GOOSE subscriber behavior Y
344 TimeOfEntry misspelled Y
7-4 76 CBOpCap and SwOpCap N
7-3 65 Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option Y
7-2 38 Syntax "AppID" or "GoID" Y
3 Missing ENUMs Y
6 ReportControl/OptFields N
6 7 Duplication of attributes N
11 Schema for IP Addr? N
15 bufOvfl in Schema? Y
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 777 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 5 Ordering
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 778 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Ordering information
[Hardware selection]
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 1 - - 0 0 - - - 0
Analog inputs
2 x three-phase CT + 1
1 x one-phase VT (VCT35B)
Outline
Standard LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Flush mounting 1
Large LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Flush mounting 5
Standard LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting1 E
Large LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting1 H
Rated Phase Currents (Default settings)2

1A 1
5A 2
Rated Neutral Currents (Default settings)

None 0
1For 19” rack panel mounting, accessories of joint kits are available.
2Selectthe appropriate CT configuration is required when you require another rated current
configuration.
- 779 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 2 - - 0 0 - - -
Analog inputs
3 x three-phase CT + 3 x zero-phase CT + 2
1 x one-phase VT (VCT44B)
Outline
Standard LCD 1/1 x 19’’ rack Flush/rack mounting 4
Large LCD 1/1 x 19’’ rack Flush/rack mounting 8
Standard LCD 1/2 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting1 F
Standard LCD 3/4 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting1 G
Large LCD 1/2 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting1 J
Large LCD 3/4 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting1 K
Rated Phase Currents (Default settings)2

1A 1
5A 2
Rated Neutral Currents (Default settings)2

1A 1
5A 2
1For 19” rack panel mounting, accessories of joint kits are available.
2Select the appropriate CT configuration when you require another rated current configuration.
- 780 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - - - 0 0 - - -
DC rating
110 - 240 Vdc3) 1
BI/BO Module
Refer to Number of BI/BO Table
Number of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication and/or Time Sync Port(s)

1 port 1
1 port + IRIG-B 3
2 ports 4
2 ports + IRIG-B 6
3 ports 7
3 ports + IRIG-B 9
Selection of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication Port(s)

100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 ) 3
100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 ) 4
100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 ) 5
100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 ) 6
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) A
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) B
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) C
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) D
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) E
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) F
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) G
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) H
Function Block (linked with software selection)

See function table of software selection
BI/BO Terminal Type

Compression plug type terminal 0
Rated Frequency (Default setting)

50Hz 1
60Hz 2
3Operation is not guaranteed in the AC power source (100 - 220Vac).
- 781 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Rated phase currents
2 x three-phase CT (When position “7“ = 1)
1CT group 2CT group Ordering No.
(1Ia, 1Ib, 1Ic) (2Ia, 2Ib, 2Ic) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1
5A 5A 2
1A 5A A
5A 1A J
3 x three-phase CT (When position “7“ = 2)

1CT group 2CT group 3CT group Ordering No.
(1Ia, 1Ib, 1Ic) (2Ia, 2Ib, 2Ic) (3Ia, 3Ib, 3Ic) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 5A 6
1A 5A 1A A
1A 5A 5A E
5A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 5A N
5A 5A 1A S
Rated neutral currents

(When position “7“ = 2) Ordering No.
1NCT 2NCT 3NCT (Position “L”)
1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 5A 6
1A 5A 1A A
1A 5A 5A E
5A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 5A N
5A 5A 1A S
- 782 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
[Software Ordering]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 0 - -
Analog inputs
Assignment on position “7”
Function Block
Refer to Function Table
Number of Serial and/or Ethernet
Communication and/or Time Sync Port(s)
Assignment on position “E”
Selection of Serial and/or Ethernet
Communication Port(s)
Assignment on position “F”
Protocol
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Assignment on position “9”
Language
English E
- 783 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Number of BI/BO
BI/BO 1 x I/O module

Number of BI/BO Ordering
No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
“A” to Configuration
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
7 - - - - 6 4 - - 11 1xBIO1
12 - - - - 3 2 - - 12 1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 - 2 - - 13 1xBIO3
- 6 - - - - 2 6 - 14 1xBIO4
18 - - - - - - - - 15 1xBI1
- 12 - - - - - - - 16 1xBI2
- - 32 - - - - - - 17 1xBI3
Other Configuration ZZ To be specified at ordering

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 32 - - 6 12 - - 21 1xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 32 - - 6 4 - - 22 1xBI3+1xBIO1
12 - 32 - - 3 2 - - 23 1xBI3+1xBIO2
18 - - - - 6 12 - - 24 1xBI1+1xBO1
25 - - - - 6 4 - - 25 1xBI1+1xBIO1
30 - - - - 3 2 - - 26 1xBI1+1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 6 14 - - 27 1xBO1+1xBIO3
15 - - - 6 6 6 - - 28 1xBIO1+1xBIO3
7 - - - - 12 16 - - 29 1xBO1+1xBIO1
16 - - 12 - 4 - - 2A 2xBIO3
- - 32 - - - - 16 - 2B 1xBI3+1xBO2
- 12 - - - 6 12 - - 2C 1xBI2 +1xBO1
- - 32 10 - - - - - 2D 1xBI3A+1xDCAI2
- 784 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)

No.
Semi-fast BO
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
(Position
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
“A” to
DC-AO
DC-AI
“B”)
BO
BO
BI
BI
15 - - - 6 12 18 - - 31 1xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
20 - - - 6 9 16 - - 32 1xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
23 - - - 12 6 8 - - 33 1xBIO1+2xBIO3
26 - - - 6 6 14 - - 34 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 6 14 - - 35 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
24 - - - 18 - 6 - - 36 3xBIO3
25 - - - - 12 16 - - 37 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 10 - 6 12 - - 38 1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - - - 6 12 - - 39 2xBI1+1xBO1
- 24 - - - 6 12 - - 3A 2xBI2+1xBO1
18 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 3B 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
7 - 32 - - 6 4 16 - 3C 1xBI3+1xBIO1+1xBO2
7 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 3D 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 - - 6 12 16 - 3E 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBO2
18 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 3F 1XBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
16 - - - 12 6 16 - - 3G 1xBO1+2xBIO3
- 6 32 - - 6 14 6 - 3H 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO4
- - 64 - - 6 12 - - 3K 2xBI3+1xBO1
14 - 32 - - 12 8 - - 3L 1xBI3+2xBIO1
- - 96 - - - - - - 3M 3xBI3
8 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 3N 1xBI2+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 32 - - 12 24 - - 3P 1xBI3 + 2xBO1
36 - - - - - - 16 - 3Q 2xBI1A+ 1xBO2A
- - - 30 - - - - - 3R 3xDCAI2
- 785 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
BI/BO 4 x I/O modules

No.
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
(Position
Semi-fast
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
“A” to
DC-AO
DC-AI
“B”)
BO
BO
BO
BI
BI
26 - - - 6 12 26 - - 41 1xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
32 - - - 24 - 8 - - 42 4xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 12 26 - - 43 1xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 - - 12 24 - - 44 2xBI3+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 32 10 6 6 14 - - 45 +1xBIO3
54 - - - - 6 12 - - 46 3xBI1+1xBO1
1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO2
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 47 +1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 6 12 - - 4A 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
20 6 15 28 49 2xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 6 12 - - 4A 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
34 - - - 12 6 16 - - 4B 1xBI1+1xBO1+2xBIO3
- - 64 - - - - 32 - 4C 2xBI3+2xBO2
21 - 32 - - 18 12 - - 4D 1xBI3+3xBIO1
- - 128 - - - - - - 4E 4xBI3
7 96 6 4 4F 3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 24 - - 6 6 14 - - 4G 2xBI2 +1xBO1 +1xBIO3
- - 32 - - 18 36 - - 4H 1xBI3 + 3xBO1
1xBI1 + 1xBI2 + 1xBO1
26 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 4J + 1xBIO3
24 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 4K 1xBI3+1xBO1+2xBIO2
15 - - - 6 18 30 - - 4L 2xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
7 - - - - 24 40 - - 4M 3xBO1+1xBIO1
36 - - - - 12 24 - - 4N 2xBI1A+2xBO1A
8 - 64 - 6 6 14 - - 4P 2xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
36 - - - - 6 12 16 - 4Q 2xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
- 786 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
1xBI1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
33 - - - 6 6 6 32 - 51 +2xBO2
44 - - - 6 12 26 - - 52 2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
25 - 96 - - 6 4 - - 53 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 - 96 - 6 6 14 - - 54 3xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 12 24 - - 55 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
62 - - - 6 6 14 - - 56 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
54 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 57 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
54 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 58 3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - 10 - 12 24 - - 59 2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
20 - 32 10 6 9 16 - - 5A +1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 96 - - 12 24 - - 5B 3xBI3+2xBO1
- - 96 10 - 6 12 - - 5C 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 64 10 - - - 32 - 5D 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO2
- - 128 - - 6 12 - - 5E 4xBI3+1xBO1
- - 160 - - 6 12 - - 5F 5xBI3
44 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 5G 2xBI1 + 1xBI2 + 1xBO1 +
1xBIO3
15 - - - 6 24 42 - - 5H 3xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 - - 18 36 - - 5J 2xBI3+3xBO1
7 - 96 10 - 6 4 - - 5K 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBIO1
- - - - - 30 60 - - 5L 5xBO1
- - 64 30 - - - - - 5M 2xBI3+3xDCAI2
- - 96 20 - - - - - 5N 3xBI3+2xDCAI2
- 787 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO1
51 - - - 6 18 30 - - 61 +1xBIO3
8 - 96 - 6 12 26 - - 62 3xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 128 - - 12 24 - - 63 4xBI3+2xBO1
8 - 128 - 6 6 14 - - 64 4xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 96 10 6 6 14 - - 65 +1xBIO3
3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
54 6 - 10 - 6 14 6 - 66 +1xBIO4
- - 128 10 - 6 12 - - 67 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 68 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
52 - - - 12 - 4 32 - 69 2xBI1+2xBIO3+2xBO2
52 - - - 12 12 28 - - 6A 2xBI1+2xBO1+2xBIO3
36 - - - - 24 48 - - 6B 2xBI1+4xBO1
36 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 6C 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xBO1
44 - - - 6 18 38 - - 6D 2xBI1+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 160 - - 6 12 - - 6E 5xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 160 - - 6 4 - - 6F 5xBI3+1xBIO1
- 788 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
80 - - - 6 12 26 - - 71 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
72 6 - - - 12 26 6 - 72 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO4
8 - 96 - 6 18 38 - - 73 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- 6 96 - - 18 38 6 - 74 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO4
2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBIO4
36 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 75 +2xBO2
- - 96 20 - 12 24 - - 76 3xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
7 - 64 20 - 6 4 32 - 77 +2xBO2
- 60 - - - 6 12 16 - 78 5xBI2+1xBO1+1xBO2
- - 160 - - 12 24 - - 79 5xBI3+2xBO1
52 - - 10 12 12 28 - - 7A +2XBO1
54 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 7B 3xBI1 + 2xBI3 + 2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 7C 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2
+2xBO1
- - 128 - - 18 36 - - 7D 4xBI3+3xBO1
7 - 160 - - 12 16 - - 7E 5xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 192 - - 6 12 - - 7F 6xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 192 - - 6 4 - - 7G 6xBI3+1xBIO1
- - 224 - - - - - - 7H 7xBI3
26 - 64 20 6 6 14 - - 7J 1xBI1+2xBI3+2xDCAI2
+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 128 30 - - - - - 7K 4xBI3+3xDCAI2
- 789 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
“B”)
DC-AO
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 128 10 - 18 36 - - 81 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO1
54 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 82 +2xBO2
- - 160 - - 18 36 - - 83 5xBI3+3xBO1
- - 160 20 - 6 12 - - 84 5xBI3+2xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 192 10 - 6 12 - - 85 6xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 24 48 - - 86 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+4xBO1
- 60 - - - 6 12 32 - 87 5xBI2+1xBO1+2xBO2
8 - 128 - 6 18 38 - - 88 4xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
14 - 96 30 - 12 8 - - 89 3xBI3+3xDCAI2+2xBIO1
- - 128 20 - 12 24 - - 8A 4xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
- - 192 20 - - - - - 8B 6xBI3+2xDCAI2
- - 256 - - - - - - 8C 8xBI3
36 - 64 20 - 12 24 - - 8D 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xDCAI2
+2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 18 36 - - 8E 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2
+3xBO1
- - 128 10 - - - 48 0 8F 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO2
7 - 224 - - 6 4 - - 8G 7xBI3+1xBIO1
- - 192 - - 12 24 - - 8H 6xBI3+2xBO1
7 - 192 - - 12 16 - - 8J 6xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
21 - 96 10 - 24 24 - - 8K +3xBIO1
- - 128 30 - 6 12 - - 8L 4xBI3+3xDCAI2+1xBO1
7 - 96 - - 30 52 - - 8M 3xBI3A+4xBO1A+1xBIO1A
Note that the user should contact with the sales staffs when requiring “other configuration (Ordering number: ZZ)”
not indicated in the ordering code above.
- 790 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
FUNCTION TABLE
Function Ordering No. (Position 'G & T')
Description
Block 1A 1B 1C
DIF
Current differential protection – ●
(87)
REF
Low-impedance restricted earth fault protection – ●
(87N)
Non-directional definite / inverse time overcurrent protection ●

OC
8 stages
(50/51/67)
Directional definite / inverse time overcurrent protection Not applicable
EF Non-directional definite / inverse time earth fault protection

●
(50G/51G/ (using phase currents)
8 stages
67G) Directional definite / inverse time overcurrent protection
Not applicable
(using phase currents)
EFIn Non-directional definite / inverse time earth fault protection
4 stages ●
(50N/51N) (using neutral current)
Not
Non-directional negative- sequence overcurrent protection ● ●
OCN applicable
4 stages
(46)
Directional negative- sequence overcurrent protection Not applicable
BCD
Broken conductor protection – Not applicable
(46BC)
THM THM trip Not
Thermal overload protection ● ●
(49) THM alarm applicable
ICD Inrush current detector function – ●
CBF CBF re-trip Not

Circuit breaker failure protection ● ●
(50BF) CBF trip applicable
UV/ UVS Under-voltage protection for phase / phase-to-phase Not applicable
OV / OVS Over-voltage protection for phase / phase-to-phase Not applicable
OVG (59G) Residual overvoltage protection Not applicable
VTF VT failure detection Not applicable
FRQ/DFRQ Under-frequency / Over-frequency / Rate of change of

6 stages Not applicable ●
(81U/81O) frequency protection
VPH V/f trip Not
Over-excitation protection ● ●
(24) V/f alarm applicable
TRC Trip circuit ●
MECH.
Trip and/or Indication of external devices 32 stages ●
TRIP
PROT
Protection common functions ●
COMMM
3 x three-phase CT +
3 x zero-phase CT +
1 x one-phase VT
- 791 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 6 Technical data
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 792 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Technical data
Analog Inputs
Rated current In Either 1A or 5A (selectable by settings)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (fixed when the ordering is performed)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs  0.1VA at In = 1A,  0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs  0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88.0 – 300.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply  15%
Power Supply Interruption Withstand Period 110/250Vdc rating : 50ms
(IEC60255-11)
Power consumption  15W (quiescent)

 25W (maximum)
- 793 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 150Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Pick-up setting is available in BI2 and BIO4 (Setting
range: 18V to 222V)
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption  0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=5ms)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Measuring input capability

Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Sensitive current input ≥ 3A (1A rating) or 15 A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 794 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local Interface
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal Block
CT/VT input Ring type terminal
Ring terminal: M3.5
Cables cross-section: 2.5 mm2 – 5.5 mm2
Binary input, Binary output Compression plug type terminal

Cables cross-section: 1.5 mm2 – 2.5mm2 (AWG14)
Stripping length = 10mm (typical)
Ring type terminal
Ring terminal: M3.5
Compression plug type Ring type
System Interface (rear port)

100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium Twisted pair cable, RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium 50/125 or 62.5/125m fibre, SC connector
Protocol IEC 61850
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 795 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range:–25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit:–25C to +70C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC 60068-2-
14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 796 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential
IEC 61000-4-5 modes:
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes†
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
†For differential mode, ‘CMP_NUM’ setting utilized.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 797 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
European Commission Directives
European Commission Directives

2014/30/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 60255-26:2013
2014/35/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Low Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27:2014.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 798 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Functional data
Current differential protection (87T)

Stage 1: Biased current differential element
Minimum operating value (DIF-S1-I1) 0.10 to 1.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Small current region slope (DIF-S1-Slope1) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Large current region slope (DIF-S1-Slope2) 10 to 200% in 1% steps
Knee point (DIF-S1-I2) 1.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
2nd harmonic sensitivity for Inrush currents
(DIF-2f) 10 to 50% in 1% steps
5th harmonic sensitivity for Overexcitation
(DIF-5f) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Operate time Typical 25ms
Stage 2: High-set unrestrained differential

element
Overcurrent (DIF-S2-I) 2.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Operate time Typical 20ms
Restricted earth fault element (87N)
[Low-impedance scheme]
Minimum operating value (REF--I1) 0.05 to 0.50pu in 0.01pu steps
Small current region slope (REF--Slope1) 10 %
Large current region slope (REF--Slope2) 50 to 100% in 1% steps
Knee Point (REF--I2) 0.50 to 2.00pu in 0.01pu steps
: P, S, T
Non-directional and Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection (50P, 51P)
Definite time overcurrent threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.10 to 250.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Inverse time overcurrent threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Direction characteristic Non Directional / Forward / Backward
Polarizing voltage 1.0 V(fixed)
Characteristic angle 0 – 180 degs in 1 deg steps
Delay type DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI
/ IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 / Original
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 10 to 100% in 1% steps
DTL delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
Reset type Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset definite delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
- 799 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Non-directional and Directional Earth Fault Protection (50N, 51N, 50G, 51G, 67N)
Definite time earth fault threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Inverse time earth fault threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage (3V0) 0.5 to 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Negative Phase sequence overcurrent Protection (46)
Definite time NOC threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Inverse time NOC threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage 0.5 to 25.0V in 0.1V steps
Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Thermal setting (THM = k.IFLC) 0.40 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
2.00 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Time constant (τ) 0.5 – 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm OFF, 50% to 100% in 1% steps
Pre-load current setting 0.00 – 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.00 – 5.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Broken conductor protection (46BC)
Broken conductor threshold 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Inrush Current Detection
Second harmonic detection 10 to 50% in 1% steps
Inrush current threshold 0.10 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
- 800 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
CBF Protection (50BF)

Overcurrent element 0.1 to 2.0A in 0.1A steps (1A rating)
BF timer for retry-trip of failed breaker 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
BF timer for related breaker trip 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
Undervoltage Protection (27P, 27S)
Undervoltage threshold 5.0 to 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type DTL, IDMT, Original
Reset delay 0.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage block threshold 5.0 to 20.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)
Overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Phase to Phase Overvoltage Protection (59S)
Overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage (59N)
1.0 – 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Overexcitation Protection (24)
Pickup voltage 100.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Alarm level (A) 1.03 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
High level (H) 1.10 to 1.40pu in 0.01pu steps
Low level (L) 1.05 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
LT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
HT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFH (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFA (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
Start time less than 130ms
RT (Definite time) 60 to 3600s in 1s steps
- 801 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Voltage Controlled Protection (51V)

Voltage threshold 10.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Sensitivity range 20 to 100% of voltage threshold
Frequency Protection (81U/O)
Under/overfrequency threshold (Fnom  10.00Hz) – (Fnom  10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps
Fnom: nominal frequency
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Frequency UV Block 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Rate-of-change frequency threshold 0.1-15.0Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
Synchronism check (25)
Synchronism check angle 0° to 75° in 1° steps
UV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
OV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line dead check 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line live check 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Synchronism check time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Voltage check time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
AC voltage Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
Energy (Wh, varh) Accuracy  1.0% (at rating)
Power (P, Q, S) Accuracy  1.0% (at rating when power quantities being fed)
Power factor (PF) Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
Frequency Accuracy  0.03%
Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP
- 802 - GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

6F2S1890 (0.53)
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness
1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2

BI / BO / PWS Stripping length = 10 mm (typical)
or AWG14
2.5 mm2 through 5.5
VCT M3.5 ring tongue with insulation
mm2
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue with insulation 5.5 mm2 or larger
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
Safety and environment

The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the environment.
Table Safety and environment requirement
Safety requirement Definition in IEC Specification
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 More than 100 M-ohm at 500V d.c.
Protection bonding continuity test IEC 60255-27 Test current: 10 A a.c.
Resistance: less than 0.1 ohm
Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27 Resistance: less than 0.2 ohm
Creepage distance and clearance IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
Protective class IEC 60255-27 Class I
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 803 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 7 Rack mounting
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 804 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Table-1 shows mounting methods for 19” rack; the user can mount non-1/1 case (i.e., 3/4 case,
1/2 case, and 1/3 cases) using optional mounting kits (Table-2). The combined mounting is also
available for 1/3 and 1/2 cases. Follow the below steps when mounting:
Step1: Remove the flange(s) on the sides of the case.
Step2: Attach parts of the optional kit; e.g. joint plates, lock bracket, and screws.
Step3: Mount the case for the rack using screws‡
‡Screws are not included in the kit. Prepare the screws by yourself.
Table-1 Methods for rack mounting

Mounting methods Applicable sizes
Flush mount 1/3 case, 1/2 case, 3/4 case 1/1 case
Rack mount 1/1 case, 1/3 case†, 1/2 case†, 3/4 case†
†Use a mount kit.
Table-2 Required mounting kits (optional parts)

Parts
Mounting for the 19” rack Optional kit names References
codes
Simple mounting in a 1/3 case Joint kits for single 1/3 case EP−201 Figure-1
Combined mounting in double 1/3 cases Joint kits for two 1/3 cases EP−202 Figure-2
Combined mounting in triple 1/3 cases Joint kits for three 1/3 cases EP−203 Figure-3
Simple mounting in a 1/2 case Joint kits for single 1/2 case EP−204 Figure-4
Combined mounting in double 1/2 cases Joint kits for two 1/2 case EP−205 Figure-5
Simple mounting for a 3/4 case Joint kits for single 3/4 case EP−206
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 805 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CP-131
Figure-1 Mounting a 1/3 case for the 19’’ rack
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 806 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CP-132

Seal-caps for the holes
CP-CC1
Figure-2 Mounting double 1/3 cases for the rack
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 807 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CP-CC1
Figure-3 Mounting triple 1/3 cases for the rack
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 808 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
CP-121
Figure-4 Mounting a 1/2 case for the rack
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 809 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)

CP-CC1
Figure-5 Mounting double 1/2 case for the rack
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 810 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 8 CT requirement
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 811 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
For the operation of the GRT200 series, the user does not need to consider dedicated CTs nor
CTs with an identical ratio. It is allowed to share CTs with other protections for the operation;
the different ratios can be adjusted using settings.
(i) General CT requirement

The general CT requirements are set for the through-fault stability that comes up when any
CTs saturate under very large through-fault currents. To ensure the operation correctly for
such through-fault currents, Ks factor in each CT is required in order that the following
conditions are satisfied:
K s ≥1 when Tc ≤ 150ms (1–1)
or,
K s ≥5 when Tc ≤ 200ms (1–2)
where,
Ks: Ratio of CT knee point voltage to CT secondary probable voltage under the
maximum through-fault current:
Vk
Ks= (1–3)
IFmax
(R CT +R L +R B +R O )×
CT ratio
Tc: D.C. time constant of primary circuit
Vk: Knee point voltage of CT
RCT: Resistance of CT secondary winding
RL: Loop resistance of cable between CT and relay
RB: Ohmic load in the relay
(i.e. 0.1 ohm for 1A rating and 0.012ohm for 5A rating)
RO: Ohmic load of other series-connected relays (if any)
IFmax: Maximum through-fault current
(ii) Example for CT requirement

The Ks factor can be calculated when we have the following parameters:
Vk = 800 V, CTratio = 1200:1, RCT = 5.0 ohm, RL = 3.0 ohm, RB = 0.1 ohm,
RO = 0 ohm (i.e. no series-connected relays), and IFmax = 40kA (40,000A)
800 800
Ks= = = 3.0 (1–4)
40000 270
(5.0 + 3.0 + 0.1 + 0)×
1200
Equation (1-4) shows that we have the operation correctly for all the faults under the condition
that the D.C. time constant of the primary circuit is less than 200ms.
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 812 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 9 PLC driver for relay application
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 813 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
The PLC connection points described in the main chapter are applicable to use when the user
wishes to create a custom logic by itself provided both the custom logic and the functions
provided by the manufacture are accommodated in the same CPU. On the other hand, if the
custom logic and the logic provided are not accommodated in the same CPU, the user cannot
use the PLC connection point directly. This is because exchanging data between CPUs are
provided by the PLC function; PLC drivers are provided in respective software†. The user can
program the PLC logic using the dummy connection points when exchanging data is required
between CPUs.
†The user must use the dummy connection points for programing in the software ‘1A,’ ‘1B’, and
‘1C’ instructed at the ‘G & T’ ordering positions. The other PLC drivers, which are not tabulated
below tables, are provided for user-purposes.
To OC (Function ID: 45A001)

PLC driver Function + Element ID to Destination PLC connection point 1A 1B 1C
BIT_00_0 230301 8810101BB0 → OC1_BLOCK 45A001 800010EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_1 230301 8910101BB1 → OC2_BLOCK 45A001 810020EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_2 230301 8A10101BB2 → OC3_BLOCK 45A001 820030EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_3 230301 8B10101BB3 → OC4_BLOCK 45A001 830040EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_4 230301 8C10101BB4 → OC5_BLOCK 45A001 840050EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_5 230301 8D10101BB5 → OC6_BLOCK 45A001 850060EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_6 230301 8E10101BB6 → OC7_BLOCK 45A001 860070EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_7 230301 8F10101BB7 → OC8_BLOCK 45A001 870080EBB0 X X X
BIT_01_0 230301 8010101BB8 → OC1_INST_OP 45A001 800010EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_1 230301 8110101BB9 → OC2_INST_OP 45A001 810020EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_2 230301 8210101BBA → OC3_INST_OP 45A001 820030EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_3 230301 8310101BBB → OC4_INST_OP 45A001 830040EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_4 230301 8410101BBC → OC5_INST_OP 45A001 840050EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_5 230301 8510101BBD → OC6_INST_OP 45A001 850060EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_6 230301 8610101BBE → OC7_INST_OP 45A001 860070EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_7 230301 8710101BBF → OC8_INST_OP 45A001 870080EBB1 X X X
To EF (Function ID: 45A401)

BIT_02_0 230301 8810111BB0 → EF1_BLOCK 45A401 800010EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_1 230301 8910111BB1 → EF2_BLOCK 45A401 810020EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_2 230301 8A10111BB2 → EF3_BLOCK 45A401 820030EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_3 230301 8B10111BB3 → EF4_BLOCK 45A401 830040EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_4 230301 8C10111BB4 → EF5_BLOCK 45A401 840050EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_5 230301 8D10111BB5 → EF6_BLOCK 45A401 850060EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_6 230301 8E10111BB6 → EF7_BLOCK 45A401 860070EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_7 230301 8F10111BB7 → EF8_BLOCK 45A401 870080EBB0 X X X
BIT_03_0 230301 8010111BB8 → EF1_INST_OP 45A401 800010EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_1 230301 8110111BB9 → EF2_INST_OP 45A401 810020EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_2 230301 8210111BBA → EF3_INST_OP 45A401 820030EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_3 230301 8310111BBB → EF4_INST_OP 45A401 830040EBB1 X X X
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 814 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
To EF (Function ID: 45A401)

BIT_03_4 230301 8410111BBC → EF5_INST_OP 45A401 840050EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_5 230301 8510111BBD → EF6_INST_OP 45A401 850060EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_6 230301 8610111BBE → EF7_INST_OP 45A401 860070EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_7 230301 8710111BBF → EF8_INST_OP 45A401 870080EBB1 X X X
To EFIn (Function ID: 45A801)

BIT_04_0 230301 8810121BB0 → EFIn1_BLOCK 45A801 800010EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_1 230301 8910121BB1 → EFIn2_BLOCK 45A801 810020EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_2 230301 8A10121BB2 → EFIn3_BLOCK 45A801 820030EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_3 230301 8B10121BB3 → EFIn4_BLOCK 45A801 830040EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_4 230301 8C10121BB4 → EFIn1_INST_OP 45A801 800010EBB1 X X X
BIT_04_5 230301 8D10121BB5 → EFIn2_INST_OP 45A801 810020EBB1 X X X
BIT_04_6 230301 8E10121BB6 → EFIn3_INST_OP 45A801 820030EBB1 X X X
BIT_04_7 230301 8F10121BB7 → EFIn4_INST_OP 45A801 830040EBB1 X X X
To OCN (Function ID: 45AC01)

BIT_05_0 230301 8010121BB8 → OCN1_BLOCK 45AC01 800010EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_1 230301 8110121BB9 → OCN2_BLOCK 45AC01 810020EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_2 230301 8210121BBA → OCN3_BLOCK 45AC01 820030EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_3 230301 8310121BBB → OCN4_BLOCK 45AC01 830040EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_4 230301 8410121BBC → OCN1_INST_OP 45AC01 800010EBB1 NA X X
BIT_05_5 230301 8510121BBD → OCN2_INST_OP 45AC01 810020EBB1 NA X X
BIT_05_6 230301 8610121BBE → OCN3_INST_OP 45AC01 820030EBB1 NA X X
BIT_05_7 230301 8710121BBF → OCN4_INST_OP 45AC01 830040EBB1 NA X X
To CBF (Function ID: 45B401)

BIT_06_3 230301 8B10131BB3 → GEN.CBF1_START 45B401 800010EBB0 NA X X
BIT_06_4 230301 8C10131BB4 → GEN.CBF2_START 45B401 810020EBB0 NA X X
BIT_06_5 230301 8D10131BB5 → GEN.CBF3_START 45B401 820030EBB0 NA X X
BIT_06_6 230301 8E10131BB6 → EXT.CBF1_START- 45B401 800010EBB1 NA X X
A
BIT_06_7 230301 8F10131BB7 → EXT.CBF1_START- 45B401 810010EBB2 NA X X
B
BIT_07_0 230301 8010131BB8 → EXT.CBF1_START- 45B401 820010EBB3 NA X X
C
BIT_07_1 230301 8110131BB9 → EXT.CBF2_START- 45B401 840020EBB1 NA X X
A
BIT_07_2 230301 8210131BBA → EXT.CBF2_START- 45B401 850020EBB2 NA X X
B
BIT_07_3 230301 8310131BBB → EXT.CBF2_START- 45B401 860020EBB3 NA X X
C
BIT_07_4 230301 8410131BBC → EXT.CBF3_START- 45B401 880030EBB1 NA X X
A
BIT_07_5 230301 8510131BBD → EXT.CBF3_START- 45B401 890030EBB2 NA X X
B
BIT_07_6 230301 8610131BBE → EXT.CBF3_START- 45B401 8A0030EBB3 NA X X
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 815 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
To CBF (Function ID: 45B401)

C
BIT_07_7 230301 8710131BBF → EXT.CBF1_START 45B401 800010EBB4 NA X X
BIT_08_0 230301 8810141BB0 → EXT.CBF2_START 45B401 810020EBB4 NA X X
BIT_08_1 230301 8910141BB1 → EXT.CBF3_START 45B401 820030EBB4 NA X X
BIT_08_2 230301 8A10141BB2 → CBF1_BLOCK 45B401 800010EBB5 NA X X
BIT_08_3 230301 8B10141BB3 → CBF2_BLOCK 45B401 810020EBB5 NA X X
BIT_08_4 230301 8C10141BB4 → CBF3_BLOCK 45B401 820030EBB5 NA X X
BIT_08_5 230301 8D10141BB5 → CBF1-RE_INST 45B401 800010EBB6 NA X X
BIT_08_6 230301 8E10141BB6 → CBF2-RE_INST 45B401 810020EBB6 NA X X
BIT_08_7 230301 8F10141BB7 → CBF3-RE_INST 45B401 820030EBB6 NA X X
BIT_09_0 230301 8010141BB8 → CBF1-TP_INST 45B401 800010EBB7 NA X X
BIT_09_1 230301 8110141BB9 → CBF2-TP_INST 45B401 810020EBB7 NA X X
BIT_09_2 230301 8210141BBA → CBF3-TP_INST 45B401 820030EBB7 NA X X
To FRQ (Function ID: 475A01)

BIT_09_7 230301 8710141BBF → FRQ1_BLOCK 475A01 800010EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_0 230301 8810151BB0 → FRQ2_BLOCK 475A01 810020EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_1 230301 8910151BB1 → FRQ3_BLOCK 475A01 820030EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_2 230301 8A10151BB2 → FRQ4_BLOCK 475A01 830040EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_3 230301 8B10151BB3 → FRQ5_BLOCK 475A01 840050EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_4 230301 8C10151BB4 → FRQ6_BLOCK 475A01 850060EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_5 230301 8D10151BB5 → DFRQ1_BLOCK 475A01 800011EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_6 230301 8E10151BB6 → DFRQ2_BLOCK 475A01 810021EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_7 230301 8F10151BB7 → DFRQ3_BLOCK 475A01 820031EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_0 230301 8010151BB8 → DFRQ4_BLOCK 475A01 830041EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_1 230301 8110151BB9 → DFRQ5_BLOCK 475A01 840051EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_2 230301 8210151BBA → DFRQ6_BLOCK 475A01 850061EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_3 230301 8310151BBB → FRQ1-OPT 475A01 800010EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_4 230301 8410151BBC → FRQ2-OPT 475A01 810020EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_5 230301 8510151BBD → FRQ3-OPT 475A01 820030EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_6 230301 8610151BBE → FRQ4-OPT 475A01 830040EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_7 230301 8710151BBF → FRQ5-OPT 475A01 840050EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_0 230301 8810161BB0 → FRQ6-OPT 475A01 850060EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_1 230301 8910161BB1 → DFRQ1-OPT 475A01 800011EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_2 230301 8A10161BB2 → DFRQ2-OPT 475A01 810021EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_3 230301 8B10161BB3 → DFRQ3-OPT 475A01 820031EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_4 230301 8C10161BB4 → DFRQ4-OPT 475A01 830041EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_5 230301 8D10161BB5 → DFRQ5-OPT 475A01 840051EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_6 230301 8E10161BB6 → DFRQ6-OPT 475A01 850061EBB1 NA NA X
To VPH (Function ID: 476A01)

BIT_12_7 230301 8F10161BB7 → VPHT_BLOCK 476A01 810020EBB0 NA X X
BIT_13_0 230301 8010161BB8 → VPHA_BLOCK 476A01 820010EBB0 NA X X
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 816 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Appendix 10 Notes for the dielectric voltage test
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 817 -
6F2S1890 (0.53)
Dielectric voltage testing shall be carried out after reading the below notices carefully.
Cable connections
Figure-10.A illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, two short-wires attached on PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the below
instructions (1) and (2).
(1) Short-wire between terminal screw No.35 and No.37

 Remove this short-wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test. If this short-wire is not
removed, the IED will be damaged.
 After the test, reconnect this short-wire to the original positons.
(2) Short-wire between terminal screw No.38 and FG

 Never remove this short wire. If this short-wire is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS T*
BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-10.A Short-wires shall be handled with Cautions
GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

- 818 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. and Section Approved
Change place and contents Checked by Prepared by
Date (page) by
-- -- Draft issue F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Feb. 6 2013 Feb 6 Feb 6 Feb. 5
0.00 First issue F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Feb. 15 2013 Feb. 15 Feb. 15 Feb. 15
0.01 Chap 3 Terminal structure altered. F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
May 20 2013 May. 20 May. 20 May 20
0.02 Chap 3 PSW terminal altered. F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
May 23 2013 May. 23 May. 23 May 22
0.03 Chap 7 Improper expression revised F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
July 8 2013 Jul. 8 Jul. 8 Jul. 7
0.04 Chap 2 and Overall descriptions modified F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
July 25 2013 others Jul. 25 Jul. 25 Jul 24
0.05 Chap 2.1 Replica procedure added F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Mar. 28 2014 Mar. 28 Mar. 28 Mar. 28
0.06 Chap 3.3 Overcurrent protection revised F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Apr. 15 2014 Apr. 15 Apr. 15 Apr. 15
0.1 Chap 1 and Series layout added M. Takazawa T. Kaneko N. Yokoya
Jun 12 2014 other Jun. 12 Jun. 11 Jun 10
0.11 Chap 3.1 and Explanations revised M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Jul 22 2014 others Jul 22 Jul 22 Jul. 21
0.12 Appendix Function table revised. M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Sep 3 2014 Sep 3 Sep 3 Sep. 2
0.13 Chap 3 VCT names revised M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Nov 5 2014 Nov 5 Nov 5 Nov. 4
0.14 Appendix Ordering table revised M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Nov 6 2014 Nov 6 Nov 6 Nov. 5
Chap 1 Typo corrected
0.15 M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Chap 6 Error codes added
Jan 5 2015 Jan 5 Jan 5 Jan. 5
Appendix Ordering codes revised
Chap 2.2 VCT number in table revised
0.16 M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Chap 3.1 Typos revised
Jan 30 2015 Jan 30 Jan 29 Jan. 27
Chap 3.2 Typos revised
Chap 3.3, 3.4, Revised setting thresholds in OC, EF, EFIn, OCN
M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
3.5, 3.6 Revised signal monitoring points in the logic of
Jun 25 Jun 25 Jun. 25
Chap 3.9 ICD
Chap. 4 Added clock and function key features K. Kobayashi T. Ohnari T. Kaneko
Mar. 6 Mar. 5 Feb. 2
Chap 3.8 Changed the time units to “minutes” F. Kawano M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
0.20
Mar. 10 Mar. 10 Mar. 10
Jun 25,2015
Appendix Tables of BIO codes modified F. Kawano N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
Chap 6.3 Revised and added tables of PLC drivers M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Appendix Jun 18 Jun 18 Jun. 16
Chap. 5 Added a notice for recording w.r.t clock setting F. Kawano F. Kawano T. Kaneko
Jun 23 Jun 23 Jun. 20
Chap. 3.16 Added the setting notice about threshold settings M. Takazawa S. Gondou T. Kaneko
for blocking the operation of FRQ Aug 18 Aug 20 Aug. 20
Chap 3.x Added the minimum sensing voltage for polarizing M. Takazawa K. Ohashi T. Kaneko
Aug 1 Aug 1 July 30
0.21
Appendix Tables of BIO codes modified M. Takazawa N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Nov 4. 2015
Sep. 11 Sep 10 Sep. 9
Appendix Modified at contact spec. of BO circuits as to Break
T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
capability when 0.2A current flowing
Sep. 10 Sep. 10 Sep. 10
Date (page) by
Chap. 12.6 Added the instruction for replacing modules M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Appendix 7 Combined the replacing methods with Chap. 12.6 Aug 1 Aug 1 July 20
Chap. 4.7 Revised the operation meanings at the FAIL1 and M. Takazawa T. Ohnari T. Kaneko
Fail2 contacts; revised the operation conditions Oct. 8 Oct. 5 Sep. 25
Chap. 4.7 Added the notice not to guarantee the operation on T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Appendix 6 the AC power source Nov. 4 Nov. 4 Nov. 4
Chap. 9 Whole contents revised M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct. 24
Appendix 3 Added the examples of external connections M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct. 30
Chap. 10.1 Added the description to monitor the LAN M. Okai M. Okai T. Kaneko
communication Nov 19 Nov 19 Nov. 19
Chap. 10.2 Revised the performance value about GOOSE
0.22 S. Katayama S. Katayama T. Kaneko
sending to other Logical Node device in Table 10.2-
Nov 24. 2015 Nov 19 Nov 19 Nov. 19
3
Nov. 18 Nov 18 Nov. 18
Chap. 4 Added Chapter ‘General control’ newly M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Dec. 18 Dec. 18 Dec. 17
0.3 Chap. 9 Revised the contents of Metering function wholly M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Dec 18. 2015 Dec. 18 Dec. 18 Dec. 17
Dec. 7 Dec 1 Dec. 1
Chap. 8.1 Deleted erroneous information in Fault recordings M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Dec. 22 Dec. 22 Dec. 18
0.31 Chap. 9.4 Deleted Demand features in Metering function M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Dec 22. 2015 Dec. 22 Dec. 22 Dec. 18
Appendix 4 Revised and modified Ordering table M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Dec. 18 Dec. 18 Dec. 17
Chap. 3.1 Revised the figures in Table 3.1-7 M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Feb. 4 Feb. 4 Feb. 4
0.32 Chap. 5.3.1 Added the value of the input register of IRIG-B000 M. Takazawa F.Kawano T. Kaneko
Feb 8. 2016 module Feb. 8 Feb. 8 Feb. 6
Appendix 4 Added 61850 MICS and others M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Jan. 28 Jan. 28 Jan. 28
0.33 Chap. 11.2.6 Added the information about the quality signal in M. Takazawa M. Okai T. Kaneko
Feb 15. 2016 IEC 61850 communication Feb. 12 Feb. 10 Feb. 10
Chap. 5.2.7 Name corrected “AC” to “AI” in the VCT ratio M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Chap. 5.2.8 /rated setting table. Mar. 17 Mar. 17 Mar. 17
Chap. 5.4.2(i) Revised the settings about the variable type in BI2 T.Kawasaki T.Kawasaki T. Kaneko
0.34 and BIO4 Mar. 30 Mar. 30 Mar. 29
Apr 8. 2016 Chap. 6.3(v) Deleted the DCB feature and others M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Apr. 1 Apr. 1 Mar. 17
Chap.12.1(vi) Revised the description of MMIC key M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Apr. 1 Apr. 1 Mar. 17
Chap. 3.4.8 Corrected the range w.r.t the DT and IDMT M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
settings in the EFs relays Apr. 11 Apr. 11 Apr. 11
Chap. 3.10.6 Added setting ranges ‘0.02–5.00A’ and ‘0.10– M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
25.00A’ at each operating settings in CBF relay Apr. 11 Apr. 11 Apr. 11
0.35 Chap. 3.15.7 Corrected the term ‘GOVG’ for ‘OVG’ in the OVG M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
Apr 15. 2016 relay Apr. 11 Apr. 11 Apr. 11
Appendix 6 Corrected the number of relay stages in OC, EF, M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
OCN relays in Functional Data Apr. 12 Apr. 12 Apr. 12
Appendix 8 Expressions corrected for ‘Ordering codes’ in term M. Takazawa M.Takazawa T. Kaneko
‘Model’ Apr. 11 Apr. 11 Apr. 11
Date (page) by
Chap. 5.4.5 Added FG cable for BI2A module G. Suzuki N. Fujiyama T. Kaneko
May 10 May 10 May 10
Chap. 5.8 Added the contents for the group setting function G. Suzuki K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Chap.10.2.29 Revised the information about Data(commslv) G. Suzuki M. Okai T. Kaneko
0.36 error May 10 May 10 May 10
May 16. 2016 Appendix 5 Tables of BIO codes modified G. Suzuki M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Appendix 6 Added a CMP_NUM notice in Electromagnetic G. Suzuki K.Oohashi T. Kaneko
Environment for the Environmental performance May 16 May. 16 May 16
Appendix 6 Removed the stage number in 27P, G. Suzuki M. Ueda T. Kaneko
27S,59P,59S,81U/O; typos corrected in 49, ICD May 10 May 10 May 10
Chap. Typo corrected for the direction of current G. Suzuki K.Oohashi T. Kaneko
2.1.3(iii) ‘Negative’ from ‘Positive’ June 1 June. 1 June. 1
Chap. 5.4.2(i) Corrected Typo in the notice with regard to the T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
0.37 contents about the variable type in BI2 and BIO4 June 15 June 15 June 15
July 1. 2016 Appendix 5 Added new codes ‘2D’ and 4M’ in the ordering about G. Suzuki M. Ueda T. Kaneko
the BIO modules June 1 June 1 May 31
Appendix 5 Deleted ‘3J’, ‘3Q’, and ‘48’ codes in the ordering G. Suzuki M. Ueda T. Kaneko
about the BIO modules June 21 June 21 Jun 21
Chap. 1 Corrected the time characteristics in Fig. 1.1-1 K.Oohashi K.Oohashi T. Kaneko
July 30 July 30 July 30
Chap. 2 Rearranged the layout about the replica and the G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
FEP COMMON functions July 12 July 12 July 12
Chap. 3.1 Added PLC connection points for blocking and G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
instant commands in Fig. 3.1-13, -15, -16 July 12 July 12 July 12
Chap. 3.1 Corrected incorrect setting table in section 3.1.9 G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.3 Redrawn block diagram about the OC function in G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Fig. 3.3-1 July 12 July 12 July 12
Chap. 3.5 Redrawn block diagram about the EFIn function in G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.6 Redrawn block diagram about the OCN function in G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.7 Redrawn block diagram about the BCD function in G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Fig. 3.7-1; Refined the BCD contents July 12 July 12 July 12
Chap. 3.8 Refined the THM contents; corrected the title of G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
0.38
horizontal axis in Figure 3.8-2 July 13 July 13 July 13
Aug 1. 2016
Chap. 3.9 Refined the contents of ICDF function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.10 Refined the contents of CBF function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.11 Revised Fig 3.11-1 in UV function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.12 Revised Fig 3.12-1 in UVS function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.13 Revised Fig 3.13-1 in OV function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.14 Revised Fig 3.14-1 in OVS function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.15 Revised Fig 3.15-1 in OVG function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.16 Revised Fig 3.16-1 in OVS function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.17 Revised Fig 3.17-1 in VPH function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Date (page) by
Chap. 3.18 Revised Fig 3.18-1 in VTF function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 3.19 Revised Fig 3.18-1 in TRC function G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Appendix 5 Corrected rating in the Ordering w.r.t DC power G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
supply; added the notice for AC power supply July 15 July 15 July 15
Appendix 8 Added the contents about CT requirement G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chap. 4.2 Added the notice that the local mode will be G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
canceled when key operations are not carried out. Aug. 8 Aug. 8 Aug 8
Chap. 5.5 Added the contents of threshold setting for G. Suzuki M. Ueda T. Kaneko
0.39
dropping DC voltage generated in the PWS Aug. 8 Aug 8 Aug 8
Aug 8. 2016
Chap.10.2.26 Added the contents for the occurrence of Power
G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
errors; added the info. about PWS threshold
Aug. 8 Aug. 8 Aug 8
setting
Chap5.2.1etc. Unifying several type names of VCTs to one name Y. Sonobe Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
Appendix 5 (e.g., VCT type xxB→VCTxxB) Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 5.3.1 Revised the connection wirings on the GIO cable in T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Fig 5.3-4 Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 5.5 Revised the expression about the threshold levels T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
in Figure 5.5-2 Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 7.1 Added the notice to purchase a license before using F. Kawano M. Ueda T. Kaneko
the PLC editor Oct. 11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 10.1 Corrected the PSW contact outputs in Serious K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.40 error Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov 1
Nov. 1, 2016 Chap. 10.2 Revised the list orders in Table 10.2-1; K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
rearranged the order of error contents Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct 14
Chap. 13.1 Added the address for Toshiba sales agent M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Appendix 5 Added new codes ‘5K’ and ‘7J’ in the BIO ordering K.Kobayashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
table Nov. 1 Nov 1 Nov 1
Appendix 6 Revised the contents of the CE to comply with 2014 G. Suzuki T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
rules Sep.30 Sep. 30 Sep. 30
Appendix 7 Revised the range (–10° to +55°C) of the operating T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
temperature for the new one (–25° to +55°C). Sep. 1 Sep. 1 Sep. 1
Chap. 5.4 Corrected BIO circuits w.r.t inversion signals in K.Kobayashi X. Tung T. Kaneko
0.41 Fig. 5.4-1 and 5.4-5 Nov.15 Nov. 11 Nov. 11
Nov. 15, 2016 Chap. 5.6 Corrected LED circuits w.r.t inversion signals in K.Kobayashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Fig. 5.6-2 Nov.15 Nov. 14 Nov. 14
Chap. 3.2 Revised the range of REF setting (i.e., REF- K.Kobayashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Slope=10, fixed) Dec.13 Dec. 13 Dec. 12
Chap. 12.1 Added the information about screen resolution of K.Kobayashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
0.42 MIMIC Dec. 28 Dec. 28 Dec. 26
Jan. 12, 2017 Chap. 13 Revised all contents in Chapter Installation M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Jan. 6 Jan. 6 Dec. 26
Appendix 5 Added new BIO codes K.Kobayashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Dec. 28 Dec. 28 Dec. 26
Chap. 8.2 Added the notice about displaying the event K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
0.43 information on GR-TIEMS Jan.30 Jan.30 Jan. 26
Apr. 7 2017 Chap. 10 Added time information (i.e., current time) in the T. Kawasaki T. Kawasaki T. Kaneko
error screen in Fig. 10.1-1 Jan. 18 Jan. 18 Jan. 18
Cover sheet Revised the notice how to recognize the software K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.44
codes on the nameplate Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
Apr. 27 2017
Chap. 13.3 Revised the check method about the software code K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Date (page) by
using ordering codes Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
Chap. 11.1 Added Auto reset function in Communication K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
protocol June.22 June.22 June 21
Chap. 11.2 Corrected the definitions of quality bits in K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.45 IEC61850 June.6 June.6 June 6
Aug 9, 2017 Appendix 4 Corrected the “Sr1” and “Sr2” validity values “ in K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
the PIXIT table June.16 June.16 June 14
Appendix 10 Added the notes for Dielectric voltage test K.Kobayashi T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Aug. 3 Aug. 3 Aug. 2
0.46 -- Republished under the spin-off company K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Oct. 2,2017 Sep. 28 Sep. 28 Sep. 28
Chap. 5.3.2 Deleted the content about GIO module in CPU K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
section Nov. 16 Nov. 16 Nov. 16
0.47 Chap. 10.1 Corrected the notice about 61850 quality value in K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Nov. 20,2017 Table 10.1-1 Oct. 12 Oct. 12 Oct. 12
Appendix 5 Deleted the selection about GPS in Ordering K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Nov. 16 Nov. 16 Nov. 16
Chap. 3.2 Corrected the setting point of REF characteristic K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
in Fig. 3.2-6; Corrected the text in Eq, (3.2-4) Mar. 15 Mar. 15 Mar. 14
Chap. 3.21 Deleted unsupported PROT_COM contents in K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Chapter 3 Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Chap. 8.3 Deleted not applicable example and its content K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.48 from Section 8.3.4 w.r.t the PROT_COM Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Mar. 30, 2018 Chap. 10.2 Deleted CB and DS supervision tasks not to be K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
implemented in the IED Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Chap. 11.2 Corrected 61850 attributes ‘Good & Questionable’ K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
regarding ‘Alarm and Warning’ in Table 11.2-5 Feb. 20 Feb. 20 Feb. 20
Chap. 12.2 Deleted unsupported PROT_COM screen in HMI K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
menu tree Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Chap. 9.2 Corrected typos regarding the KCT in Metering K. Oohashi H. Amoh T. Kaneko
0.49 screen information , shown in Figure 9.2-1 Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
July 7, 2018 Chap. 9.2 Corrected typos regarding the data group K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
information of Metering screen, in Table 9.2-1 June. 20 June. 20 June. 19
Chap. 3.17 Added the test operation content in VPH K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.50 Aug. 6 Aug. 6 Aug. 4
Aug.24, 2018 Chap. 14.3 Added the operation contents about test settings K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Aug. 6 Aug. 6 Aug. 4
Chap. 3.11 Corrected the number of decimal places about K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
curve coefficient in Table 3.11-2 in OV function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
curve coefficient in Table 3.12-2 in OVS function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
curve coefficient in Table 3.13-2 in OVG function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
curve coefficient in Table 3.14-2 in UV function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
0.51 Chap. 3.15 Corrected the number of decimal places about K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Dec.14,2018 curve coefficient in Table 3.15-2 in UVS function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
Chap. 3.16 Removed the contents about the trip decision K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
timing in FRQ function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
Chap.5.4.4(vi) Added the notice about Latch output during power K. Oohashi H. Amoh T. Kaneko
turn on/off Sep. 3 Sep. 3 Sep. 1
Chap.5.6.3 Corrected F7 setting names of Table 5.6-6 in HMI K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
contents Oct. 25 Oct. 25 Oct. 24
Chap. 11.1.5 Added signals for GATEWAYs and SUBNETs in K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
TCPIP_DRV list Dec. 4 Dec. 4 Dec. 4
Date (page) by
Chap. 13.3 Modified the inquiry address at Toshiba Energy K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Systems & Solutions Corporation Oct. 1 Oct. 1 Oct. 1
Chap. 13.8 Corrected required wire thickens in Table 13.8-1 K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Nov. 22 Nov. 22 Nov. 22
Appendix 6 Corrected the technical information about Power K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
supply data in Technical data Dec. 7 Dec. 7 Dec. 5
Safety Corrected warning message at Fiber optic K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
precautions (Invisible laser radiation → Class 1 laser product) Feb. 19 Feb. 18 Feb. 18
Chap. 3.1 Corrected DIF scheme logics in Fig. 3.1-15and 16 K. Oohashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Jan. 28 Jan. 26 Jan. 21
0.52 Chap. 11.2 Added the contents about GOOSE monitoring K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
Feb.28,2019 status in 61850 communication Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 4
Chap. 13.7 Revised the content about optical cable handlings K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
and Fig. 13.7-6 Feb. 19 Feb. 18 Feb. 18
Appendix 4 Revised the information about 61850 Ed.1 K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 4
Chap. 3.12 Corrected incorrected phase names (UVS) in Fig Y. Sonobe K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
3.12-5 Dec. 9 Dec. 9 Dec. 9
Chap. 3.14 Corrected incorrected phase names (OVS) in Fig Y. Sonobe K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.53 3.14-5 Dec. 9 Dec. 9 Dec. 9
Mar.2,2020 Chap. 4.2 Corrected the information at signal monitoring H. Amoh T. Utsumi T. Kaneko
point of LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT in Table 4.2-4 Jan. 31 Nov. 25 Nov. 25
Chap. 10.1 Added new information about [ErrorLED_cond] to H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
turn off In-service for the occurrence of minor error Feb. 14 Feb. 13 Sep. 27
Archive: G2 manuals' word files (all) 20200302rev1_GRT200(6F2S1890) 0.0070.docx

GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.53

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.53

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6F2S1890 (Rev. 0.

Transformer Protection IED

GR200 series (GRT200)

Notice: GRT200 manual is issued for ‘01A’, ‘01B’, or

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

Equipment installation and operation

Protective conductor terminal

Caution, risk of electric shock

Liability, copyright and others

3.3.2 Operate time characteristic ................................................................................................ 83

3.7.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 174

3.13.2 Delay for the operation of OV element ............................................................................. 230

3.19.1 Scheme switch ................................................................................................................... 298

4.5.1 Counter setting for a signal .............................................................................................. 357

5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................. 446

8.3.1 Recording time and amount .............................................................................................. 494

10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) .............................................................. 532

Monitoring sub-menu ............................................................................................................... 625

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Model Analog inputs Analog inputs Configuration

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Table 1.1-2 Protection Relay Functions

Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Operate time (t)

DIF-S1 with 2f-block

0 Differential current (Id)

Figure 1.1-1 Protection coverage of DIF, HOC and REF

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Monitoring and metering functions

Fault record function:

Event record function:

Disturbance record function:

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Module circuits and others:

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

Symbols used in logical diagrams

(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID

4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Data ID and its name

Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

(ii) Timer symbol

XXX - YYY Output

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

(iii) Logic symbol

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

(iv) Flip-flop symbol

(v) Scheme switch

GRT200 (Soft: 01A,01B,01C)

BCU Bay Control Unit

BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit

BI Binary Input module or circuit

BO Binary Output module or circuit

BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit

CPU Signal processing and communication module

EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation

GPS Global Positioning System